NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A Hardware Guide (V800R012C10 to V800R023C00) (pdf)

HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
V800R012C10 to V800R023C00
Hardware Guide


Issue 04
Date 2025-04-30


HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2025. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.






Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents


Contents


1 Document Declaration........................................................................................................... 1
2 Using the Hardware Tool.......................................................................................................4
3 Hardware Description.............................................................................................................5
3.1 Chassis......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1.1 NetEngine 8000 M1A......................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1.2 NetEngine 8000 M1C....................................................................................................................................................... 35
3.1.3 NetEngine 8000 M1D.......................................................................................................................................................66
3.1.4 NetEngine 8000 M1D-B................................................................................................................................................ 104
3.1.5 NetEngine 8000 M6....................................................................................................................................................... 128
3.2 Power...................................................................................................................................................................................... 139
3.2.1 DP22PDC1K2A1 (Power Interface Board).............................................................................................................. 139
3.2.2 PAC1K5S53-AL (1500W AC Power Module)..........................................................................................................143
3.2.3 PAC300S12-CL (300 W AC power module (left-to-right airflow, air intake on the left side of the
power module panel))............................................................................................................................................................. 147
3.2.4 PDC260S12-CL (260W DC Power Module(Left to Right,air enters from the left side of the power
panel))........................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
3.2.5 ETP4860-2KW-FE (AC Power Box)............................................................................................................................ 153
3.2.6 ETP4860-4KW (AC Power Box).................................................................................................................................. 164
3.3 Fan........................................................................................................................................................................................... 174
3.3.1 CR8MM60FBXC0 (NetEngine 8000 M6 Fan Box)................................................................................................ 174
3.4 Boards..................................................................................................................................................................................... 177
3.4.1 Rules for Numbering Slots and Interfaces............................................................................................................. 177
3.4.2 Board Code........................................................................................................................................................................ 178
3.4.3 CXP....................................................................................................................................................................................... 181
3.4.3.1 CR8DCXP160C0 (03033JTY: System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-protocol Process Unit
(CXP-160))................................................................................................................................................................................... 181
3.4.3.2 CR8DCXP160C0 (03033JTY-001: System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-protocol Process Unit
(CXP-160))................................................................................................................................................................................... 194
3.4.3.3 CR8DCXP160C0 (03034USW: System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-protocol Process Unit
(CXP-160))................................................................................................................................................................................... 207
3.4.3.4 CR8DCXP160C0 (03034VTX: System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-protocol Process Unit
(CXP-160))................................................................................................................................................................................... 220
3.4.3.5 CR8DCXP160C2 (System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160-B))... 233
3.4.3.6 CR8DCXP160C6 (System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160-C))...246

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.4.4 Interface Card................................................................................................................................................................... 259
3.4.4.1 CR5D000DE1C1 (16-Port E1 Physical Interface Card(PIC,75ohm/120ohm))......................................... 259
3.4.4.2 CR5D00C4CFC1 (4-Port Channelized STM-1c POS-SFP Physical Interface Card(PIC))....................... 263
3.4.4.3 CR8D000DE1C2 (16-Port E1 Physical Interface Card(PIC,75ohm/120ohm))......................................... 266
3.4.4.4 CR8D00E1VBC0 (03033JUB: 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical Interface Card(PIC)).....................270
3.4.4.5 CR8D00E1VBC0 (03033JUB-001: 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-
corrosion)..................................................................................................................................................................................... 273
3.4.4.6 CR8D00E1VBC0 (03033JUB-002: 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical Interface Card(PIC))............277
3.4.4.7 CR8D00E1VBC0 (03033JUB-003: 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-
corrosion)..................................................................................................................................................................................... 281
3.4.4.8 CR8D00E1VBC1 (1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical Interface Card(PIC))...........................................284
3.4.4.9 CR8D00E2XFC0 (03033JUD: 2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical Interface Card(PIC)).................. 288
3.4.4.10 CR8D00E2XFC0 (03033JUD-001: 2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical Interface Card(PIC)).......293
3.4.4.11 CR8D00E2XFC1 (2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical Interface Card(PIC))...................................... 298
3.4.4.12 CR8D00E4XFC2 (03034EJM: 4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC))....... 303
3.4.4.13 CR8D00E4XFC2 (03034EJM-001: 4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 307
3.4.4.14 CR8D00E4XFC5 (4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC))............................. 312
3.4.4.15 CR8D00E8GEC2 (8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical Interface Card(PIC))........................................ 317
3.4.4.16 CR8D00E8GEC3 (03034BAT: 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical Interface Card(PIC)).................. 322
3.4.4.17 CR8D00E8GEC3 (03034BAT-001: 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical Interface Card(PIC),High
anti-corrosion)............................................................................................................................................................................ 325
3.4.4.18 CR8D00E8GED2 (03034REM: 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical Interface Card(PIC))................ 329
3.4.4.19 CR8D00E8GED2 (03034REM-001: 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical Interface Card(PIC),High
anti-corrosion)............................................................................................................................................................................ 334
3.4.4.20 CR8D00EAGFC0 (03033MPK: 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 337
3.4.4.21 CR8D00EAGFC0 (03033MPK-001: 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec Physical Interface
Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)............................................................................................................................................. 341
3.4.4.22 CR8D00EAGFC0 (03033MPK-002: 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec Physical Interface
Card(PIC)).................................................................................................................................................................................... 345
3.4.4.23 CR8D00EAGFC0 (03033MPK-003: 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec Physical Interface
Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)............................................................................................................................................. 349
3.4.4.24 CR8D00EAGFC4 (10-Port 100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface Card(PIC))....................................352
3.4.4.25 CR8D00EAGFC5 (10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC))...................356
3.4.4.26 CR8D00EEGFC0 (03033MPL: 20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-Port 100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical
Interface Card(PIC))..................................................................................................................................................................360
3.4.4.27 CR8D00EEGFC0 (03033MPL-001: 20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-Port 100/1000Base-X-SFP
Physical Interface Card(PIC)).................................................................................................................................................365
3.4.4.28 CR8D00EEGFC1 (20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-Port 100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface
Card(PIC)).................................................................................................................................................................................... 369
3.4.4.29 CR8D00L4XFC0 (03033MPJ: 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 374
3.4.4.30 CR8D00L4XFC0 (03033MPJ-001: 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec Physical Interface
Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)............................................................................................................................................. 379


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.4.4.31 CR8D00L4XFC0 (03033MPJ-002: 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec Physical Interface
Card(PIC)).................................................................................................................................................................................... 384
3.4.4.32 CR8D00L4XFC0 (03033MPJ-003: 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec Physical Interface
Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)............................................................................................................................................. 389
3.4.4.33 CR8D00L4XFC2 (4-Port 10GE-SFP+ Physical Interface Card(PIC)).......................................................... 394
3.4.4.34 CR8D00L4XFC5 (4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC))......................397
3.4.4.35 CR8D00P8CFC1 (8-Port STM-1c/8-Port STM-4c POS Card (PIC)(Default Enable 4*STM-1c))...... 402
3.4.4.36 CR8D25E2XFC0 (03033JUC: 2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G (SFP+) Physical Interface
Card(PIC)).................................................................................................................................................................................... 406
3.4.4.37 CR8D25E2XFC0 (03033JUC-001: 2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G (SFP+) Physical Interface
Card(PIC)).................................................................................................................................................................................... 411
3.4.4.38 CR8D25E2XFC1 (2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G (SFP+) Physical Interface Card(PIC))........416
3.4.4.39 NEDD001EM600 (6 Channels E&M Interface Board)...................................................................................421
3.4.4.40 NEDD001SA800 (8-Channel V.35/X.21/V.24 Board)..................................................................................... 423
3.4.4.41 NEDD00EM8F01 (8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board)................................................................. 426
3.4.4.42 NEDD00EM8T01 (8 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface Board)............................................................. 430
3.4.4.43 NEDD00EX2S00 (2 Channel 10GE Optical Interface Board(SFP+)).........................................................433
3.4.4.44 NEDD01MP8A00 (4 Channels C37.94 Optical Interface and 4 Channels CoDir64K Electric
Interface Board)......................................................................................................................................................................... 436
3.4.4.45 NEDD01MPAA00 (4-Channel FXS/FXO+2-Channel E&M+2-Channel RS232+2-Channel RS485
Board)............................................................................................................................................................................................ 440
3.4.4.46 NEDD16E11202 (16 Channels E1 Interface Board(120ohm))...................................................................443
3.4.4.47 NEDD16E17502 (16 Channels E1 Interface Board(75ohm))..................................................................... 446
3.4.4.48 NEDD32E11201 (32 Channels E1 Interface Board(120ohm))...................................................................449
3.4.4.49 NEDD32E17501 (32 Channels E1 Interface Board(75ohm))..................................................................... 452
3.5 Optical Module....................................................................................................................................................................455
3.5.1 Pluggable Optical Modules......................................................................................................................................... 455
3.5.1.1 Optical Module Structure......................................................................................................................................... 455
3.5.1.2 Optical Module Classification..................................................................................................................................455
3.5.1.3 Optical Module Appearance.................................................................................................................................... 457
3.5.1.4 How to Use an Optical Module..............................................................................................................................462
3.5.1.5 Optical Attenuator Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 473
3.5.2 2.048Mbps SFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................474
3.5.2.1 2Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial.................................................................................................... 474
3.5.3 GPON ONU SFP Optical Module...............................................................................................................................476
3.5.3.1 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry................................................................ 476
3.5.4 155Mbps SFP Electrical Module.................................................................................................................................477
3.5.4.1 155Mbps-SFP-120m-extended................................................................................................................................477
3.5.5 1Gbps SyncE and 1588V2 Electrical Module......................................................................................................... 478
3.5.5.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2.................................................................................478
3.5.6 155Mbps eSFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................. 478
3.5.6.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry....................................................................................................479
3.5.6.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry....................................................................................................480
3.5.6.3 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry....................................................................................................481

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.5.6.4 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial.............................................................................................482
3.5.6.5 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4015716).................................................................... 484
3.5.6.6 155Mbps-eSFP-MMF-1310nm-2km-commercial............................................................................................. 485
3.5.6.7 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial.............................................................................................486
3.5.7 155Mbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module........................................................................................................................ 487
3.5.7.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial (02310QNG)..................................488
3.5.7.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial (02310QNH)..................................489
3.5.7.3 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial (34060363).................................... 490
3.5.7.4 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial (34060364).................................... 492
3.5.8 622Mbps eSFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................. 493
3.5.8.1 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310QXT)................................................................... 493
3.5.8.2 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (S4015713).................................................................... 494
3.5.8.3 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial.............................................................................................496
3.5.9 1Gbps Electrical Module............................................................................................................................................... 497
3.5.9.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02310RAV).............................................................................................................. 497
3.5.9.2 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02310VPT)............................................................................................................... 498
3.5.9.3 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02314FNP)...............................................................................................................498
3.5.9.4 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial.................................................................................................................................499
3.5.9.5 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100099)............................................................................................................... 500
3.5.9.6 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100144)............................................................................................................... 500
3.5.9.7 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (S4017306)................................................................................................................501
3.5.10 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module............................................................................................................................... 502
3.5.10.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310RAW)............................................................... 502
3.5.10.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended (34060286)....................................................................... 503
3.5.10.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry (34060290).........................................................................504
3.5.10.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry (34060320).........................................................................506
3.5.10.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-industry..................................................................................................507
3.5.10.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (34060360)..................................................................508
3.5.10.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-120km-industry...............................................................................................509
3.5.10.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial.......................................................................................... 511
3.5.10.9 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (S4016954)..................................................................512
3.5.10.10 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended (S4017307).....................................................................513
3.5.11 1.25Gbps SFP BIDI Optical Module........................................................................................................................ 514
3.5.11.1 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry................................................................. 515
3.5.11.2 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry................................................................. 516
3.5.12 1.25Gbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module...................................................................................................................... 517
3.5.12.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-commercial(34060470)................................. 517
3.5.12.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial........................................................ 519
3.5.12.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial........................................................ 520
3.5.12.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial........................................................ 521
3.5.12.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial........................................................ 523
3.5.12.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial........................................................ 524

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.5.12.7 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial................................................525
3.5.12.8 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial................................................527
3.5.12.9 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial........................................................ 528
3.5.12.10 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-80km-commercial......................................................530
3.5.13 1.25Gbps CSFP BIDI Optical Module..................................................................................................................... 531
3.5.13.1 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-industry (02312WHB)....................................531
3.5.13.2 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry (02312WHC)................................... 532
3.5.13.3 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry (02312WHD)................................... 534
3.5.13.4 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry (34060525)...................................... 535
3.5.13.5 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-industry (34060894)...................................... 536
3.5.13.6 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry (34061329)...................................... 538
3.5.14 125M~1.25Gbps CSFP BIDI Optical Module........................................................................................................539
3.5.14.1 125M~1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry (02312WHA)..................... 539
3.5.14.2 125M~1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry (34060803)........................ 540
3.5.15 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................ 542
3.5.15.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 542
3.5.15.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 543
3.5.15.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 544
3.5.15.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 545
3.5.15.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 547
3.5.15.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 548
3.5.15.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 549
3.5.15.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial.......................................................................................... 551
3.5.16 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module..................................................................................................552
3.5.16.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 552
3.5.16.2 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 553
3.5.16.3 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 554
3.5.16.4 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 556
3.5.16.5 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 557
3.5.16.6 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 558
3.5.16.7 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 560
3.5.16.8 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 561
3.5.16.9 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 562
3.5.16.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial..................................................................563
3.5.16.11 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial..................................................................565
3.5.16.12 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial..................................................................566
3.5.16.13 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial..................................................................567
3.5.16.14 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................568
3.5.16.15 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial..................................................................570
3.5.16.16 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial..................................................................571
3.5.16.17 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial..................................................................572
3.5.16.18 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial..................................................................573

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.5.16.19 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................575
3.5.16.20 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial..................................................................576
3.5.16.21 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial..................................................................577
3.5.16.22 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial..................................................................578
3.5.16.23 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial..................................................................580
3.5.16.24 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial..................................................................581
3.5.16.25 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial..................................................................582
3.5.16.26 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial..................................................................583
3.5.16.27 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial..................................................................585
3.5.16.28 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial..................................................................586
3.5.16.29 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial..................................................................587
3.5.16.30 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial..................................................................588
3.5.16.31 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial..................................................................590
3.5.16.32 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial..................................................................591
3.5.16.33 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial..................................................................592
3.5.16.34 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial..................................................................593
3.5.16.35 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial..................................................................595
3.5.16.36 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial..................................................................596
3.5.16.37 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial..................................................................597
3.5.16.38 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial..................................................................598
3.5.16.39 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial..................................................................600
3.5.16.40 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial..................................................................601
3.5.17 2.5Gbps eSFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................. 602
3.5.17.1 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34060289).................................................................... 602
3.5.17.2 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial (34060484).......................................................................603
3.5.17.3 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial (34060485).................................................................... 605
3.5.17.4 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (34060488).................................................................... 606
3.5.18 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module...................................................................................................................................607
3.5.18.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310PVU)....................................................................607
3.5.18.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (02311YEB).....................................................................609
3.5.18.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry.................................................................................................... 610
3.5.18.4 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry.................................................................................................... 611
3.5.18.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry.................................................................................................... 613
3.5.18.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34061409)..................................................................... 614
3.5.18.7 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial............................................................................................. 615
3.5.18.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial (S4017483)..................................................................... 617
3.5.18.9 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial (S4017484)..................................................................... 618
3.5.19 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module..................................................................................................619
3.5.19.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial............................................................ 619
3.5.19.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................ 621
3.5.19.3 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial............................................................ 622
3.5.20 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................... 624

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.5.20.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 624
3.5.20.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 625
3.5.20.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 626
3.5.20.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 628
3.5.20.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 629
3.5.20.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 630
3.5.20.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 632
3.5.20.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial............................................................................................. 633
3.5.21 10Gbps SFP+ BIDI Optical Module......................................................................................................................... 634
3.5.21.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial (02311JNF)................................... 634
3.5.21.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial (02311JNQ).................................. 636
3.5.21.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry (02311RXL)..........................................637
3.5.21.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry (02311RXM)........................................ 638
3.5.21.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry (34060544-001).................................640
3.5.21.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry (34060544-002).................................641
3.5.21.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry (34060546-001).................................642
3.5.21.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry (34060546-002).................................644
3.5.21.9 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial (34060917)...................................645
3.5.21.10 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial (34060918)................................ 646
3.5.22 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module........................................................................................................................ 647
3.5.22.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial...........................................................................648
3.5.22.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial...........................................................................649
3.5.23 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module...................................................................................................................650
3.5.23.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial...........................................................................651
3.5.23.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial...........................................................................652
3.5.24 25Gbps SFP28 Optical Module................................................................................................................................ 653
3.5.24.1 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial (02312PDK)................................................................. 654
3.5.24.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry (02312PDL)......................................................................... 655
3.5.24.3 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial (34061254).................................................................. 656
3.5.24.4 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry (34061618)..........................................................................657
3.5.24.5 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended............................................................................................... 659
3.5.24.6 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-0.3km-industry................................................................................................. 660
3.5.24.7 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34062754)...................................................................662
3.5.25 25Gbps SFP28 BIDI Optical Module.......................................................................................................................663
3.5.25.1 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-commercial.........................................................663
3.5.25.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-commercial.........................................................665
3.5.26 40Gbps QSFP+ Optical Module............................................................................................................................... 666
3.5.26.1 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial..............................................................666
3.5.26.2 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial..........................................................................668
3.5.26.3 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial.......................................................................... 669
3.5.27 50Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module............................................................................................................................. 670
3.5.27.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial....................................................................................... 670

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.5.27.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial....................................................................................... 672
3.5.27.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial............................................................... 673
3.5.28 50Gbps QSFP28 BIDI Optical Module................................................................................................................... 675
3.5.28.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial..................................................... 675
3.5.28.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1271nm(Tx)/1331nm(Rx)-10km-commercial..................................................... 677
3.5.28.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295nm(Tx)/1309nm(Rx)-40km-commercial..................................................... 678
3.5.28.4 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1309nm(Tx)/1295nm(Rx)-40km-commercial..................................................... 680
3.5.29 100Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module.......................................................................................................................... 682
3.5.29.1 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial.....................................................................682
3.5.29.2 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-commercial...........................684
3.5.29.3 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial (02312BSS).....................685
3.5.29.4 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-commercial............................................. 687
3.5.29.5 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-commercial............................................. 689
3.5.29.6 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial (02313SWA)...................691
3.5.29.7 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry............................................................................ 692
3.5.29.8 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................................................... 694
3.5.30 AE 905S B Module........................................................................................................................................................695
3.5.31 AE 905S Module............................................................................................................................................................702
3.5.32 AE 905M Module.......................................................................................................................................................... 708
3.6 Power distribution box......................................................................................................................................................715
3.6.1 DPD63-8-8 DC PDB........................................................................................................................................................ 715
3.7 Cables..................................................................................................................................................................................... 718
3.7.1 NetEngine 8000 Power Cable..................................................................................................................................... 718
3.7.1.1 NetEngine 8000 M1A DC Power Cable................................................................................................................ 718
3.7.1.2 NetEngine 8000 M1C/M1D/M1D-B DC Power Cable..................................................................................... 720
3.7.1.3 NetEngine 8000 M6 DC Power Cable...................................................................................................................723
3.7.1.4 AC Power Cable.......................................................................................................................................................... 729
3.7.2 ETP4860 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................733
3.7.2.1 ETP4860-4KW Power Cable..................................................................................................................................... 733
3.7.2.2 ETP4860-2KW-FE Power Cable............................................................................................................................... 735
3.7.3 Chassis PGND Cable.......................................................................................................................................................742
3.7.4 ETH/OAM Management Cable.................................................................................................................................. 743
3.7.5 ETH/OAM 1-into-2 Transfer Cable............................................................................................................................ 744
3.7.6 Console Cable................................................................................................................................................................... 747
3.7.7 Alarm Input&Output Cable......................................................................................................................................... 750
3.7.8 16xE1 Cable.......................................................................................................................................................................753
3.7.9 16xE1 Adapter Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 759
3.7.10 75-ohm 155M Electrical Interface Module Cable............................................................................................. 763
3.7.11 Clock Cable (External Clock Mode, Delivery-Ready)........................................................................................765
3.7.12 Clock Cable (External Clock/External Time Mode, Prepared Onsite).........................................................767
3.7.13 Clock Bridging Cable................................................................................................................................................... 769
3.7.14 Ethernet Cable............................................................................................................................................................... 771

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.7.15 1-to-2 Clock Cable........................................................................................................................................................774
3.7.16 USB-to-Serial Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 776
3.7.17 Fiber Jumper................................................................................................................................................................... 777
3.7.18 Other Types of Cables................................................................................................................................................. 783
3.7.18.1 V.35 DCE Cable...........................................................................................................................................................783
3.7.18.2 V.35 DTE Cable........................................................................................................................................................... 785
3.7.18.3 V.24 DCE Cable...........................................................................................................................................................787
3.7.18.4 V.24 DTE Cable........................................................................................................................................................... 788
3.7.18.5 X.21 DCE Cable.......................................................................................................................................................... 790
3.7.18.6 X.21 DTE Cable...........................................................................................................................................................791
3.8 Air deflectors........................................................................................................................................................................ 792
3.8.1 CR8M000ADFC1 (Air Deflector for Front-to-Back Airflow)............................................................................. 793
3.8.2 1800 Air Guide Frame (Simple Box-shaped Air Deflector).............................................................................. 796
4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement............................................................799
4.1 NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C/M1D/M1D-B Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide..................... 799
4.1.1 Hardware Installation and Usage Precautions..................................................................................................... 799
4.1.2 Device Installation Process.......................................................................................................................................... 802
4.1.3 Preparation before installation...................................................................................................................................803
4.1.3.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Precautions........................................................................................................... 803
4.1.3.2 Checking the Installation Site..................................................................................................................................805
4.1.3.3 Standard Compliance................................................................................................................................................. 806
4.1.3.3.1 Environmental Standards...................................................................................................................................... 806
4.1.3.4 Checking the Cabinet................................................................................................................................................. 807
4.1.3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories..................................................................................................... 810
4.1.3.6 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters.............................................................. 816
4.1.3.6.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................... 816
4.1.3.6.2 Protection of Optical Fiber Connectors............................................................................................................ 817
4.1.3.6.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials........................................................................................................................ 818
4.1.3.6.4 Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors..................................................................................................................819
4.1.3.6.5 Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link........................................................................................................................822
4.1.3.6.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner.............................................................. 824
4.1.3.6.7 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue................................................................................ 825
4.1.3.6.8 Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs....................................................... 828
4.1.3.7 Inspection of power distribution environment.................................................................................................. 830
4.1.3.7.1 Introduction to the Power Distribution System.............................................................................................830
4.1.3.7.2 DC Power Distribution Guide............................................................................................................................... 831
4.1.3.7.3 AC Power Distribution Guide............................................................................................................................... 834
4.1.3.8 Unpacking a Device.................................................................................................................................................... 838
4.1.3.8.1 Unpacking a Carton................................................................................................................................................ 838
4.1.4 Installing a Chassis in Cabinet.................................................................................................................................... 840
4.1.5 Cable Routing Planning................................................................................................................................................ 847
4.1.6 Installation of cables......................................................................................................................................................849

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.1.6.1 Installing the Ground Cable..................................................................................................................................... 849
4.1.6.2 Installing Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................................................853
4.1.6.3 Installing Network Cables.........................................................................................................................................856
4.1.7 Post-Installation Check................................................................................................................................................. 858
4.1.8 Power-on Check............................................................................................................................................................... 861
4.1.9 (Optional) Checking Optical Power......................................................................................................................... 862
4.1.10 Maintenance of the device........................................................................................................................................ 864
4.1.10.1 Replacing the Chassis.............................................................................................................................................. 864
4.1.11 Appendix.......................................................................................................................................................................... 866
4.1.11.1 Environmental Requirements for Device Operation..................................................................................... 866
4.1.11.1.1 Environmental Requirements for Equipment Room..................................................................................866
4.1.11.1.2 Requirements for Power Supply....................................................................................................................... 874
4.1.11.2 On-site Cable Assembly and Installation.......................................................................................................... 877
4.1.11.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions.............................................................................................................................. 877
4.1.11.2.2 Assembling Power Cables................................................................................................................................... 878
4.1.11.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables.............................................................................................................................. 887
4.1.11.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories............................................................................................................................... 900
4.1.11.2.5 Installing Ethernet Adapters.............................................................................................................................. 907
4.1.11.2.6 Installing Fiber Connectors.................................................................................................................................910
4.1.11.2.7 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool..................................................................................................... 918
4.1.11.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications................................................................................................................. 921
4.1.11.3.1 General Grounding Specifications....................................................................................................................921
4.1.11.3.2 Grounding Specifications for Equipment Room.......................................................................................... 922
4.1.11.3.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices............................................................................................................. 922
4.1.11.3.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply............................................................... 923
4.1.11.3.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables.................................................................................................. 923
4.1.11.3.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables........................................................................................ 924
4.1.11.4 Engineering Labels for Cables...............................................................................................................................924
4.1.11.4.1 Introduction to Labels.......................................................................................................................................... 925
4.1.11.4.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................933
4.1.11.4.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables.........................................................................................................936
4.1.11.4.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables................................................................................................................. 938
4.1.11.4.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables..............................................................................................................939
4.2 NetEngine 8000 M6 Hardware installation and maintenance Guide.............................................................. 940
4.2.1 Hardware Installation and Usage Precautions..................................................................................................... 940
4.2.2 Device Installation Process.......................................................................................................................................... 943
4.2.3 Preparation before installation...................................................................................................................................944
4.2.3.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Precautions........................................................................................................... 944
4.2.3.2 Checking the Installation Site..................................................................................................................................946
4.2.3.3 Standard Compliance................................................................................................................................................. 947
4.2.3.3.1 Environmental Standards...................................................................................................................................... 947
4.2.3.4 Checking the Cabinet................................................................................................................................................. 948

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.2.3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories..................................................................................................... 951
4.2.3.6 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters.............................................................. 957
4.2.3.6.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................... 957
4.2.3.6.2 Protection of Optical Fiber Connectors............................................................................................................ 958
4.2.3.6.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials........................................................................................................................ 959
4.2.3.6.4 Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors..................................................................................................................960
4.2.3.6.5 Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link........................................................................................................................963
4.2.3.6.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner.............................................................. 965
4.2.3.6.7 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue................................................................................ 966
4.2.3.6.8 Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs....................................................... 969
4.2.3.7 Inspection of power distribution environment.................................................................................................. 971
4.2.3.7.1 Introduction to the Power Distribution System.............................................................................................971
4.2.3.7.2 DC Power Distribution Guide............................................................................................................................... 972
4.2.3.7.3 AC Power Distribution Guide............................................................................................................................... 974
4.2.3.8 Unpacking a Device.................................................................................................................................................... 976
4.2.3.8.1 Unpacking a Carton................................................................................................................................................ 976
4.2.3.8.2 Unpacking a Card.....................................................................................................................................................978
4.2.4 Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-4KW)................................................................................................................. 979
4.2.4.1 Planning Cable Routes............................................................................................................................................... 979
4.2.4.2 Installing a Subrack (ETP4860-4KW)....................................................................................................................989
4.2.4.3 Installing Components (ETP4860-4KW).............................................................................................................. 993
4.2.4.3.1 Installing an SMU11B............................................................................................................................................. 993
4.2.4.3.2 Installing a Rectifier................................................................................................................................................ 993
4.2.4.4 Installing Cables (ETP4860-4KW).......................................................................................................................... 994
4.2.4.4.1 (Optional) Installing a Dry Contact Signal Cable......................................................................................... 994
4.2.4.4.2 (Optional) Installing Signal Cables for a Battery Temperature Sensor................................................. 995
4.2.4.4.3 (Optional) Installing Signal Cables for a Door Status Sensor.................................................................. 996
4.2.4.4.4 (Optional) Installing an Alarm Signal Cable for the Cable Distribution Frame.................................997
4.2.4.4.5 Installing a Communications Cable (SMU11B)............................................................................................. 997
4.2.4.4.6 Installing DC Output Power Cables................................................................................................................... 999
4.2.4.4.7 Installing Battery Cables......................................................................................................................................1001
4.2.4.4.8 Installing Input Power Cables............................................................................................................................1004
4.2.4.5 Commissioning........................................................................................................................................................... 1006
4.2.4.5.1 Connecting the AC or DC Power Supply........................................................................................................1006
4.2.4.5.2 SMU11B.................................................................................................................................................................... 1006
4.2.4.5.3 Connecting the Battery Supply......................................................................................................................... 1012
4.2.4.6 NMS connection configuration.............................................................................................................................1013
4.2.4.6.1 Network Configuration Scenario...................................................................................................................... 1013
4.2.4.6.2 Interconnection Between the NMS and the SMU11B Communication Module..............................1014
4.2.5 Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-2KW-FE).........................................................................................................1014
4.2.5.1 Planning Cable Routes............................................................................................................................................ 1015
4.2.5.2 Installing a Subrack (ETP4860-2KW-FE)........................................................................................................... 1024

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.2.5.3 Installing Components (ETP4860-2KW-FE)..................................................................................................... 1028
4.2.5.3.1 Installing an SMU11B...........................................................................................................................................1028
4.2.5.3.2 Installing a Rectifier.............................................................................................................................................. 1028
4.2.5.4 Installing Cables (ETP4860-2KW-FE)................................................................................................................. 1029
4.2.5.4.1 (Optional) Installing a Dry Contact Signal Cable.......................................................................................1029
4.2.5.4.2 (Optional) Installing Signal Cables for a Battery Temperature Sensor...............................................1030
4.2.5.4.3 (Optional) Installing Signal Cables for a Door Status Sensor................................................................1031
4.2.5.4.4 (Optional) Installing an Alarm Signal Cable for the Cable Distribution Frame.............................. 1032
4.2.5.4.5 Installing a Communications Cable (SMU11B)...........................................................................................1032
4.2.5.4.6 Installing DC Output Power Cables................................................................................................................. 1034
4.2.5.4.7 Installing Battery Cables......................................................................................................................................1036
4.2.5.4.8 Installing Input Power Cables............................................................................................................................1039
4.2.5.5 Commissioning........................................................................................................................................................... 1041
4.2.5.5.1 Connecting the AC or DC Power Supply........................................................................................................1041
4.2.5.5.2 SMU11B.................................................................................................................................................................... 1041
4.2.5.5.3 Connecting the Battery Supply......................................................................................................................... 1047
4.2.5.6 NMS Interconnection Configuration...................................................................................................................1048
4.2.5.6.1 Network Configuration Scenario...................................................................................................................... 1048
4.2.5.6.2 Interconnection Between the NMS and SMU11B...................................................................................... 1049
4.2.6 Electrical Subrack Installation.................................................................................................................................. 1049
4.2.7 Installing Simple Box-shaped Air Deflectors....................................................................................................... 1051
4.2.8 Installing a Chassis in Cabinet................................................................................................................................. 1056
4.2.9 Installation of components....................................................................................................................................... 1062
4.2.9.1 Installing a Interface Board (PIC)........................................................................................................................ 1062
4.2.9.2 Installing Control Boards (CXP)............................................................................................................................1063
4.2.9.3 Installing an Optical Module.................................................................................................................................1065
4.2.10 Cable Routing Planning........................................................................................................................................... 1066
4.2.10.1 DC Power Cable Routing Planning................................................................................................................... 1066
4.2.10.2 AC Power Cable Routing Planning....................................................................................................................1067
4.2.11 Installation of cables................................................................................................................................................. 1068
4.2.11.1 Installing the Ground Cable................................................................................................................................ 1068
4.2.11.2 Installing E1 Cables................................................................................................................................................ 1070
4.2.11.3 Installing Optical Fibers........................................................................................................................................1072
4.2.11.4 Installing Network Cables....................................................................................................................................1075
4.2.11.5 Installing 75-ohm coaxial cables.......................................................................................................................1076
4.2.12 Post-Installation Check.............................................................................................................................................1077
4.2.13 Power-on Check.......................................................................................................................................................... 1080
4.2.14 (Optional) Checking Optical Power.....................................................................................................................1083
4.2.15 Maintenance of the device..................................................................................................................................... 1085
4.2.15.1 Basic Operation Process and Precautions.......................................................................................................1085
4.2.15.2 Replacing a Interface Board (PIC).....................................................................................................................1087
4.2.15.3 Replacing a Control Boards (CXP).................................................................................................................... 1091

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.2.15.4 Replacing a power module..................................................................................................................................1094
4.2.15.4.1 Replacing the DC Power Module................................................................................................................... 1094
4.2.15.4.2 Replacing the AC Power Module................................................................................................................... 1096
4.2.15.5 Replacing the Fan Module...................................................................................................................................1098
4.2.15.6 Replacing an Optical Module............................................................................................................................. 1099
4.2.15.7 Replacing an Optical Cable................................................................................................................................. 1104
4.2.15.8 Replacing a Power Cable......................................................................................................................................1106
4.2.15.9 Replacing a Network Cable.................................................................................................................................1107
4.2.15.10 Replacing a Trunk Cable.................................................................................................................................... 1109
4.2.15.11 Replacing the Chassis..........................................................................................................................................1110
4.2.16 Appendix....................................................................................................................................................................... 1112
4.2.16.1 Environmental Requirements for Device Operation................................................................................... 1112
4.2.16.1.1 Environmental Requirements for Equipment Room............................................................................... 1112
4.2.16.1.2 Requirements for Power Supply..................................................................................................................... 1120
4.2.16.2 On-site Cable Assembly and Installation....................................................................................................... 1123
4.2.16.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions............................................................................................................................ 1123
4.2.16.2.2 Assembling Power Cables.................................................................................................................................1124
4.2.16.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables............................................................................................................................ 1133
4.2.16.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories............................................................................................................................. 1147
4.2.16.2.5 Installing Ethernet Adapters............................................................................................................................ 1156
4.2.16.2.6 Installing Fiber Connectors.............................................................................................................................. 1159
4.2.16.2.7 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool.................................................................................................. 1167
4.2.16.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications...............................................................................................................1170
4.2.16.3.1 General Grounding Specifications................................................................................................................. 1170
4.2.16.3.2 Grounding Specifications for Equipment Room........................................................................................1170
4.2.16.3.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices........................................................................................................... 1170
4.2.16.3.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply.............................................................1171
4.2.16.3.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables................................................................................................1172
4.2.16.3.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables......................................................................................1172
4.2.16.4 Engineering Labels for Cables............................................................................................................................ 1173
4.2.16.4.1 Introduction to Labels........................................................................................................................................1173
4.2.16.4.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers.......................................................................................................... 1181
4.2.16.4.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables...................................................................................................... 1184
4.2.16.4.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables.............................................................................................................. 1186
4.2.16.4.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables........................................................................................................... 1187
4.3 IMB05 Installation Guide...............................................................................................................................................1188
4.3.1 Requirements for Site Selection.............................................................................................................................. 1188
4.3.2 Installation Preparations............................................................................................................................................ 1189
4.3.2.1 Tools and Instruments............................................................................................................................................. 1189
4.3.2.2 Requirements for Onsite Personnel.................................................................................................................... 1191
4.3.3 Installation Clearances................................................................................................................................................1191
4.3.3.1 Installation Clearances for a Wall-mounted IMB05......................................................................................1191

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.3.4 Installing an IMB05...................................................................................................................................................... 1195
4.3.4.1 Installing an IMB05 with Its Left or Right Side Against a Wall.................................................................1195
4.3.4.2 Installing an IMB05 with Its Rear Against a Wall.......................................................................................... 1201
4.3.5 Installing Components in an IMB05.......................................................................................................................1207
4.3.5.1 Installing a Main Device......................................................................................................................................... 1208
4.3.5.2 Installing the ETP4860-2KW-FE Power Box..................................................................................................... 1211
4.3.6 Installing Cables............................................................................................................................................................ 1212
4.3.6.1 Cable Connections.................................................................................................................................................... 1212
4.3.6.2 Removing the Protective Plates at the Bottom of an IMB05.....................................................................1215
4.3.7 Post-Installation Check............................................................................................................................................... 1216
4.3.8 Power-on Check............................................................................................................................................................ 1217
4.3.9 Installing the Cover Plate of an IMB05................................................................................................................. 1217
4.4 A66E Cabinet Installation Guide................................................................................................................................. 1218
4.4.1 Introduction to the A66E Cabinet........................................................................................................................... 1218
4.4.2 Cabinet Accessories......................................................................................................................................................1223
4.4.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand....................................................................................................................................... 1223
4.4.3 A66E Cabinet Installation.......................................................................................................................................... 1224
4.4.3.1 Installing the Cabinet on the Concrete Floor.................................................................................................. 1224
4.4.3.1.1 Removing the Ground Cables and Cabinet Doors......................................................................................1225
4.4.3.1.2 Determining the Installation Position of the Cabinets............................................................................. 1225
4.4.3.1.3 Installing Expansion Bolts................................................................................................................................... 1227
4.4.3.1.4 Installing the Cabinet........................................................................................................................................... 1228
4.4.3.1.5 Leveling the cabinet and testing the insulation..........................................................................................1229
4.4.3.1.6 Attaching the cabinets......................................................................................................................................... 1230
4.4.3.1.7 Installing Cabinet Doors...................................................................................................................................... 1231
4.4.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on the ESD Floor............................................................................................................1232
4.4.3.2.1 Removing the Ground Cables and Cabinet Doors......................................................................................1232
4.4.3.2.2 Determining the Installation Position of the Supports.............................................................................1233
4.4.3.2.3 Installing Expansion Bolts................................................................................................................................... 1234
4.4.3.2.4 Installing Supports.................................................................................................................................................1235
4.4.3.2.5 Installing the Cabinet........................................................................................................................................... 1237
4.4.3.2.6 Testing the Insulation and Installing the Front Pallet...............................................................................1239
4.4.3.2.7 Attaching the Cabinets and Restoring the ESD Floor............................................................................... 1241
4.4.3.2.8 Installing Cabinet Doors...................................................................................................................................... 1242
4.5 A63E Cabinet Installation Guide................................................................................................................................. 1243
4.5.1 Introduction to the A63E Cabinet........................................................................................................................... 1243
4.5.2 Cabinet Accessories......................................................................................................................................................1248
4.5.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand....................................................................................................................................... 1248
4.5.3 Cabinet Installation......................................................................................................................................................1250
4.5.3.1 Installing the Cabinet on the Cement Floor.................................................................................................... 1250
4.5.3.1.1 Installation Tools.................................................................................................................................................... 1250
4.5.3.1.2 Pre-installation Check.......................................................................................................................................... 1250

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.5.3.1.3 Determining the Installation Position of the Cabinet............................................................................... 1251
4.5.3.1.4 Installing Expansion Bolts................................................................................................................................... 1253
4.5.3.1.5 Installation Preparations..................................................................................................................................... 1254
4.5.3.1.6 Leveling the Cabinet and Testing the Insulation........................................................................................ 1256
4.5.3.1.7 Attaching the Cabinets........................................................................................................................................ 1259
4.5.3.1.8 Installing Cabinet Doors...................................................................................................................................... 1260
4.5.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on the ESD Floor............................................................................................................1262
4.5.3.2.1 Installation Tools.................................................................................................................................................... 1262
4.5.3.2.2 Pre-installation Check.......................................................................................................................................... 1263
4.5.3.2.3 Determining the Installation Position of the Supports.............................................................................1264
4.5.3.2.4 Installing Expansion Bolts................................................................................................................................... 1265
4.5.3.2.5 Installing Supports.................................................................................................................................................1265
4.5.3.2.6 Installing Preparations......................................................................................................................................... 1269
4.5.3.2.7 Leveling the Cabinet and Testing the Insulation........................................................................................ 1273
4.5.3.2.8 Attaching the Cabinets........................................................................................................................................ 1276
4.5.3.2.9 Restoring the ESD Floor...................................................................................................................................... 1276
4.5.3.2.10 Installing Cabinet Doors....................................................................................................................................1278


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration


1 Document Declaration

Purpose

This document describes hardware features of the NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C,
M1A. It helps intended readers obtain detailed information about each chassis,
board, and cable, and learn how to install and maintain devices.


NO TICE

The Hardware Guide includes hardware data of multiple versions. Before using this
document, check the first version supported by the hardware.

Related Version


NO TICE

The following table lists the product versions involved in this document. Before
reading this document, confirm whether your versions are included in this
document.

Product Name Version

HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, Applicable to:
M1D, M1C and M1A ● V800R012C10SPC300
● V800R013C00SPC100
● V800R021C00SPC100
● V800R021C10SPC600
● V800R022C00SPC600
● V800R022C10SPC500
● V800R023C00SPC500



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration

Intended Audience

This document is intended for:

● Network planning engineers
● Hardware installation engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● On-site maintenance engineers
● System maintenance engineers

Special Declaration
● The pictures of hardware in this document are for reference only.
● The supported boards are described in the document. Whether a
customization requirement can be met is subject to the information provided
at the pre-sales interface.
● All device dimensions described in this document are designed dimensions
and do not include dimension tolerances. In the process of component
manufacturing, the actual size is deviated due to factors such as processing or
measurement.

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.

Supplements the important information in the main
text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration

Change History
● Changes in Issue 04 (2025-04-30)
This is the fourth official release.
● Changes in Issue 03 (2024-12-31)
This is the third official release.
● Changes in Issue 02 (2024-08-30)
This is the second official release.
● Changes in Issue 01 (2024-06-30)
This is the first official release.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 2 Using the Hardware Tool


2 Using the Hardware Tool

Enterprise:
In the enterprise network market, Info-Finder is a tool platform, It allows you to
search for key product information by product series and model. The key product
information includes basic information such as the software specifications, life
cycles, and hardware information, and operation and maintenance information
such as the licenses, alarms, logs, commands, and MIBs. The hardware-related
tools are as follows:
● Product image gallery: provides product photos, and network element icons
for you to produce design drawings and networking diagrams.
● Hardware configuration: automatically generates hardware configuration
diagrams after you select components are required and calculates the weight,
power consumption, and heat consumption.
● Hardware center: provides the technical specifications of devices and
components, as well as the mapping between devices, components, and
versions.
● 3D model: Using this function, you can query product images, product
overview, and component insertion/removal videos, enabling you to quickly
obtain product information in one-stop mode.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


3 Hardware Description


3.1 Chassis
3.2 Power
3.3 Fan
This section describes the appearance, functions, and technical specifications of
the fan module.
3.4 Boards
This chapter describes the boards of the device.
3.5 Optical Module
3.6 Power distribution box
3.7 Cables
3.8 Air deflectors

3.1 Chassis

3.1.1 NetEngine 8000 M1A


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-1 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 M1A
Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02353DAF CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C00 Y
8000 M1A C0 SPC300
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4*10
GE +
12*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353DAF-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 C0 SPC600
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(4*10
GE
+12*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353DAG CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C00 Y
8000 M1A C1 SPC300
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4*10
GE
+12*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02353DAG-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 C1 SPC600
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(4*10
GE
+12*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353DAH CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C00 Y
8000 M1A C2 SPC300
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6*10
GE
+26*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353DAH-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 C2 SPC600
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(6*10
GE
+26*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02353EGG CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C00 Y
8000 M1A C4 SPC300
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6*10
GE
+26*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353EGG-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 C4 SPC600
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(6*10
GE
+26*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353HFW CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C00 Y
8000 M1A, AC 1 SPC300
Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02353HFW-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A, AC 1 1 SPC600
Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02353HFY CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C00 Y
8000 M1A, 3 SPC300
DC Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02353HFY-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A, 1 3 SPC600
DC Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02353JVU CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C00 Y
8000 M1A C8 SPC300
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(16*1
0GE
+16*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353JVU-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 C8 SPC600
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A
Chassis,Fixed
Interface(16*1
0GE
+16*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02353JWJ CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C00 Y
8000 M1A C6 SPC300
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(16*1
0GE
+16*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353JWJ-001 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A C6 SPC600
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(16*1
0GE
+16*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353UYM CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C10 Y
8000 M1A CA SPC300
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(10*
GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02353UYM-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 CA SPC600
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(10*
GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353UYN CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C10 Y
8000 M1A CB SPC300
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(10*
GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353UYN-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 CB SPC600
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(10*
GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02353VAG CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C10 Y
8000 M1A CC SPC300
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE
+8*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353VAG-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 CC SPC600
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE
+8*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02353VAH CR8PM1ABAS V800R012C10 Y
8000 M1A CD SPC300
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE
+8*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02353VAH-00 CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C10 Y
8000 M1A 1 CD SPC600
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE
+8*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02354KYE CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CG SPC100
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4*10
GE +
12*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02354KYF CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CH SPC100
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4*10
GE
+12*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02354KYG CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CI SPC100
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6*10
GE
+26*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02354KYJ CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CK SPC100
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6*10
GE
+26*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02354KYL CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CM SPC100
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(16*1
0GE
+16*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02354KYN CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CO SPC100
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(16*1
0GE
+16*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02354KYQ CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CQ SPC100
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(10*
GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02354KYR CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CR SPC100
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(10*
GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02354KYS CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CS SPC100
Basic
Configuration
(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE
+8*GE),2*DC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02354KYT CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A CT SPC100
Basic
Configuratio
n(Includes
M1A Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2*10
GE
+8*GE),1*AC
Power,without
Software and
Document)

NetEngine 02354KYW CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A, 7 SPC100
DC Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02354KYX CR8PM1ABAS V800R021C00 Y
8000 M1A, AC 6 SPC100
Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NetEngine 02355GGU CR8PM1ABAS V800R022C00 Y
8000 M1A, 3 SPC600
DC Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02355GGV CR8PM1ABAS V800R022C00 Y
8000 M1A, AC 1 SPC600
Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02355JNC CR8PM1ABAS V800R022C10 Y
8000 M1A, 3 SPC500
DC Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02355JNE CR8PM1ABAS V800R022C10 Y
8000 M1A, AC 1 SPC500
Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02355KNL CR8PM1ABAS V800R022C10 Y
8000 M1A, D0 SPC500
DC Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)

NetEngine 02355KNM CR8PM1ABAS V800R022C10 Y
8000 M1A, AC A0 SPC500
Power,Port
Capacity
16*10GE
+12*GE(o)
+4*GE(e)




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.

Appearance

Figure 3-1 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M1A (DC)


Figure 3-2 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M1A (AC)


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter

Panel

Figure 3-3 Panel on the NetEngine 8000 M1A


1. XGE/GE/FE(0 to 2. XGE/GE/FE(8 to 3. GE/FE(16 to 27) 4. GE/FE(28 to 31)
7) 15)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

5. ETH/OAM 6. CLK 7. ALMI/ALMO 8. TOD

Table 3-2 Indicators on the NetEngine 8000 M1A
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

PWR1 Power supply Green Steady on The power
status supply is
indicator (DC) normal.

- Off No power is
accessed.
The power
supply poles
are inversely
connected.

PWR2 Green Steady on The power
supply is
normal.

- Off No power is
accessed.
The power
supply poles
are inversely
connected.

STAT Board status Green Steady on The device is
indicator working
normally.

Red Steady on The device
hardware is
faulty.

Green Blinking Loading of
the board
software is in
process.

- Off The device is
not running
or no power
is input.

ALM Alarm Red Steady on Critical
indicator alarms are
generated.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Steady on Major or
minor alarms
are
generated.

- Off No alarms are
generated.

LINK(28-31) Connection Green Steady on The
status connection on
indicator the physical
port is
normal.

- Off The physical
port
connection
fails.

ACT(28-31) Transmitting/ Orange Blinking The data
receiving interface is
status transmitting
indicator or receiving
data.

- Off The data
interface is
not
transmitting
or receiving
data.

LINK(0-27) Connection Green Steady on The
status connection on
indicator the physical
port is
normal.

- Off The physical
port
connection
fails.

ACT(0-27) Data Green Blinking The data
transmission interface is
status transmitting
indicator or receiving
data.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The data
interface is
not
transmitting
or receiving
data.

ETH/OAM ETH/OAM Green Steady on If the
indicator indicator is
steady on, the
link is normal.

Orange Blink If the
indicator
blinks, data is
being
transmitted.

- Off If the
indicator is
off, the link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-3 Buttons on the NetEngine 8000 M1A
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button There is only one RST
button for resetting the
device.
The RST button can also
be used to delete the
password and
configuration file on the
device. The procedure is
as follows: Press and
release the RST button
to restart the NE. Then,
press and hold the RST
button for about 35–45
seconds. When the STAT
and ALM indicators both
blink (this status lasts
about 10 seconds),
release the RST button
immediately. The device
then starts to
automatically delete the
password and
configuration file.
However, if you release
the RST button after
they stop both blinking,
the device undergoes
only a reset without
clearing the password
and configuration file.
NOTE
After the RST button is
used to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
is deleted. You are advised
to back up the
configuration file
periodically.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-4 Ports on the NetEngine 8000 M1A
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH/OAM
sensing Ethernet Management
network Cables
management port
and non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK RJ45 Clock input/ Clock Cables
output interface

TOD RJ45 Time input/output Clock Cables
interface

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm input/
output interface output cables


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

XGE/GE/FE (0 to SFP+/SFP FE/GE/10GE 155Mbps eSFP
15) service signal Optical Module
input and output 155Mbps eSFP
interface BIDI Optical
NOTE Module
High power 1Gbps Electrical
consumption of Module
10GE long-
distance optical 1.25Gbps eSFP
module will affect Optical Module
high-temperature
reliable 1.25Gbps SFP
application. It is BIDI Optical
recommended to Module
put them on ports
0-7. 1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Ports 0–15 support
Module
auto-sensing, and
work in GE mode 1.25Gbps eSFP
by default. You can CWDM Optical
insert a 10G auto- Module
sensing optical
module or run the 125M~2.67Gbps
port-mode 10ge eSFP DWDM
command to Optical Module
switch a port to
the 10GE mode. 10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

GE/FE (16 to 27) SFP FE/GE service 155Mbps eSFP
signal input and Optical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module

GE/FE (28 to 31) RJ45 FE/GE service Ethernet cables
signal input and
output interface


Table 3-5 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front View Pin Usage

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface


Table 3-6 Pins of the TOD interface
Front View Pin Working Mode

External Time Input External Time Output
(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
Information) Information)

1 Unspecified Unspecified

2 Unspecified Unspecified

3 Input negative for the Output negative for the
1PPS signal 1PPS signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

4 Grounding end Grounding end

5 Grounding end Grounding end

6 Input positive for the Output positive for the
1PPS signal 1PPS signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

7 Input negative for the Output negative for the
time information time information
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

8 Input positive for the Output positive for the
time information time information
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

NOTE
The TOD interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding two
working modes.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-7 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output


Table 3-8 Pins of the CLK interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Negative receive end of
external clock

2 Positive receive end of
external clock

3 Unspecified

4 Negative transmit end of
external clock

5 Positive transmit end of
external clock

6 Unspecified

7 Unspecified

8 Unspecified


Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine 8000 M1A, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine 8000 M1A is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine 8000 M1A does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine 8000 M1A is fixed as 2.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine 8000 M1A begin
with 0. Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the
NetEngine 8000 M1A.

Labels

Figure 3-4 Label Description




Table 3-9 Label description

Figure Label Name Description

Grounding label This label suggests the position of
the grounding terminal.

Heat hazard label This label suggests that the surface
temperature is high and it may
cause body injury.


Certificate label This label suggests that the device is
qualified.


Product nameplate label This label suggests the product
name and certification.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure Label Name Description

Operation warning label Refer to the product manual before
operating the device.




Power Supply System
The power supply system consists of a built-in unpluggable DC or AC power
module. A DC power module supports two inputs, serving as a backup for each
other. An AC power module supports only one input, without redundancy backup.
The power module is located inside a chassis and supplies power to the System
Control, Cross-Connect, and Multi-Protocol Processing Board (CXP) and fan
module.
The power module provides various protection functions, including:
● Protection against output overcurrent
● Protection against output overvoltage
● Protection against input undervoltage
● Protection against overtemperature
● Protection against short circuit
● Alarm generation
Figure 3-5 shows the power supply architecture. The built-in power module
provides 12 V power supply to the CXP and the fan module.

Figure 3-5 Power supply architecture


Heat Dissipation System

Figure 3-6 Heat Dissipation System


● The NetEngine 8000 M1A uses fan modules for heat dissipation and the air
flows from left to right.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

● Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on NetEngine 8000
M1A must be kept clean and unblocked.
● A distance of at least 75 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent
on NetEngine 8000 M1A to ensure good ventilation.
● When NetEngine 8000 M1A is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the
cabinet must be within the temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet
must be consistent with that of NetEngine 8000 M1A.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-10 Technical specifications of the NetEngine 8000 M1A AC

Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB
(3U); F01M50 outdoor cabinet

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 44.5 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.75 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 255 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (10.04
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 4.5 kg (9.92 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 5.8 kg (12.79 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 74.7 W
configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 242.36 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] 35.99 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Availability 0.99999

CPU 4-core 1.4 GHz

Memory 4 GB

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 2 GB

Power supply mode AC

Rated input voltage [V] 110 V/220 V

Input voltage range [V] 100 V to 240 V

Maximum input current [A] 1.5 A

Rated output power [W] 170 W

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Maximum input cable size [mm²] Standard C13 cable

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥1.5 A

Types of fans Built-in

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic < 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Switching capacity 352 Gbit/s

Maximum number of physical ports on 32
the entire device

Maximum number of 10GE ports 16

Maximum number of GE ports 32

Maximum number of FE ports 32

Maximum number of electrical ports 4

Redundant power supply No redundancy

Redundant fans Three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the
system can run at a maximum
ambient temperature of 50°C for a
short period of time.

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 100% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

RTU supported Yes
By default, two 10GE ports and eight
GE ports are enabled on a NetEngine
8000 M1A. Activation commands can
be used to enable specific ports based
on their port numbers. To use other
port bandwidth modes, you need to
load the corresponding RTU licenses.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.


Table 3-11 Technical specifications of the NetEngine 8000 M1A DC
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB
(3U); F01M50 outdoor cabinet

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 44.5 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.75 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 255 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (10.04
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 3.9 kg (8.6 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 5.2 kg (11.47 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 74.84 W
configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 242.81 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] 35.99 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Availability 0.99999


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

CPU 4-core 1.4 GHz

Memory 4 GB

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 2 GB

Power supply mode DC

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] -38.4 V to -72 V

Maximum input current [A] 4 A

Rated output power [W] 170 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] 4 mm^2

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥ 4 A

Types of fans Built-in

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic < 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Switching capacity 352 Gbit/s

Maximum number of physical ports on 32
the entire device

Maximum number of 10GE ports 16

Maximum number of GE ports 32

Maximum number of FE ports 32

Maximum number of electrical ports 4

Redundant power supply Supports two power input redundancy
backup

Redundant fans Three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the
system can run at a maximum
ambient temperature of 50°C for a
short period of time.

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 100% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

RTU supported Yes
By default, two 10GE ports and eight
GE ports are enabled on a NetEngine
8000 M1A. Activation commands can
be used to enable specific ports based
on their port numbers. To use other
port bandwidth modes, you need to
load the corresponding RTU licenses.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

● About condensation
The ability of air to contain moisture reduces as the temperature decreases. There is a
relationship between temperature and relative humidity. As the temperature decreases,
the air becomes more saturated with moisture, meaning the relative humidity increases.
But at a low enough temperature (called the dew point), the air can no longer contain
moisture, which is then precipitated as liquid water. Such water on the surface of
relevant equipment is called condensation.
● Hazards of condensation
When condensation mixes with dust inside the equipment, it forms conductive channels
that affect the electrical insulation of the equipment. As a result, a non-conductive area
of the equipment can become conductive, causing the equipment to malfunction.
● Conditions that cause condensation
Condensation is related to temperature changes and humidity. It occurs when the
temperature continues to decrease below the dew point at a given humidity. For
example, given that the relative humidity is 50% RH and the temperature is 25°C (77°F),
condensation occurs when the temperature decreases below 13.9°C (57.02°F).
3.1.2 NetEngine 8000 M1C

Overview

Table 3-12 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 M1C
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354ARK CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASC0 00SPC100 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4
*10GE +
12*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354ARK- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C 001 ASC0 10SPC600 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4
*10GE +
12*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02354ARL CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASC1 00SPC100 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4
*10GE +
12*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354ARL- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C 001 ASC1 10SPC600 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4
*10GE +
12*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02354ARP CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASC2 00SPC100 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6
*10GE +
22*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354ARP- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C 001 ASC2 10SPC600 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6
*10GE +
22*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02354ARQ CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASC3 00SPC100 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6
*10GE +
22*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354ARQ- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C 001 ASC3 10SPC600 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6
*10GE +
22*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02354ART CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASC4 00SPC100 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(1
6*10GE +
12*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354ART- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C 001 ASC4 10SPC600 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(1
6*10GE +
12*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02354ARU CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASC5 00SPC100 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(1
6*10GE +
12*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354ARU- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C 001 ASC5 10SPC600 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(1
6*10GE +
12*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02354ARX CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, ASC6 00SPC100 device,
2*DC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
Default
2*10GE
+8*GE

NetEngine 02354ARX- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, 001 ASC6 10SPC600 device,
2*DC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
None of
the ports
are
available
by default


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354ARY CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, ASC7 00SPC100 device,
2*AC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
Default
2*10GE
+8*GE

NetEngine 02354ARY- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, 001 ASC7 10SPC600 device,
2*AC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
None of
the ports
are
available
by default

NetEngine 02354JEM CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASC8 00SPC100 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2
*10GE
+20*GE),
2*DC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354JEM- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C 001 ASC8 10SPC600 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2
*10GE
+20*GE),
2*DC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02354JEN CR8PM1CB V800R013C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASC9 00SPC100 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2
*10GE
+20*GE),
2*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354JEN- CR8PM1CB V800R021C Y Integrated
8000 M1C 001 ASC9 10SPC600 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2
*10GE
+20*GE),
2*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02355GHK CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, ASC6 00SPC600 device,
2*DC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
None of
the ports
are
available
by default

NetEngine 02355GHL CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, ASC7 00SPC600 device,
2*AC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
None of
the ports
are
available
by default


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355JPR CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, ASC6 10SPC500 device,
2*DC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
None of
the ports
are
available
by default

NetEngine 02355JPS CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, ASC7 10SPC500 device,
2*AC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
None of
the ports
are
available
by default

NetEngine 02355KKF CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASCE 10SPC500 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4
*10GE +
12*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355KKG CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASCF 10SPC500 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(4
*10GE +
12*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02355KKK CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASCJ 10SPC500 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6
*10GE +
22*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355KKL CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASCK 10SPC500 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(6
*10GE +
22*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02355KKQ CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASCL 10SPC500 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(1
6*10GE +
12*GE),2*D
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355KKR CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASCM 10SPC500 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(1
6*10GE +
12*GE),2*A
C
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02355KKU CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, ASD0 10SPC500 device,
2*DC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
None of
the ports
are
available
by default

NetEngine 02355KKV CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C, ASAQ 10SPC500 device,
2*AC excluding
Power, Port the
Capacity auxiliary
16*10GE material
+8*GE(o) package.
+4*GE(e),
None of
the ports
are
available
by default


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355KKY CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASCQ 10SPC500 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2
*10GE
+20*GE),
2*DC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02355KLA CR8PM1CB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1C ASCR 10SPC500 equipment,
Basic including
Configurati auxiliary
on material
(Includes packages.
M1C
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2
*10GE
+20*GE),
2*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)



NO TE

In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-7 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M1C (DC)


Figure 3-8 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M1C (AC)


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter

Panel

Figure 3-9 Panel on the NetEngine 8000 M1C


1. 10GE/GE/FE(0 to 15) 2. GE/FE(16 to 23) 3. GE/FE(24 to 27)

4. CLK/TOD 5. ALMI/ALMO 6. ETH/OAM


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-13 Indicators on the NetEngine 8000 M1C
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

green Blink Loading of
the board
software is in
process.

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

ALM Alarm red Steady on Critical
indicator alarms are
generated.

orange Steady on Major or
minor alarms
are
generated.

green Blink Loading of
the board
software is in
process.

- Off No alarms are
generated.

L/A Connection/ green Steady on The
data connection on
transmission the physical
status port is
indicator normal.

green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The physical
connection
fails.

LINK Port Green Steady on The physical
Connection port
Status connection is
Indicator normal.

- Off The physical
port
connection
fails.

ACT Service Port Orange Blink The data
Transmitting/ interface is
Receiving transmitting
Status or receiving
Indicator data.

- Off The data
interface is
not
transmitting
or receiving
data.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-14 Buttons on the NetEngine 8000 M1C
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button Used to reset a device.
When you press the RST
button and then release
it, the device is reset.
The RST button can be
used to clear the
passwords and
configuration file of a
device. Once you press
and then release the RST
button, the device begins
to reset. After you press
and hold down the RST
button again for about
150s and then release it
when the STAT and ALM
indicators blink
simultaneously, the
device begins to
automatically clear the
passwords and
configuration file. If you
still hold down the RST
button after the
indicators blink
simultaneously and then
release the button after
they do not blink
simultaneously (for
about 10s), the device
undergoes only a reset
without clearing the
password and
configuration file.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
● If you press the RST
button, the original
configuration file will
be deleted. You are
advised to periodically
back up the
configuration file.
● During site migration
or fault rectification,
you can run the reset
saved-configuration
command or press the
RST button to clear
configurations. If the
configurations are
cleared and the
NetEngine 8000 M1C is
powered on again
without the .defcfg file,
the NetEngine 8000
M1C enters the first-
login process. In this
case, the NetEngine
8000 M1C fails to go
online using the plug-
and-play function. To
prevent this, you need
to check whether
the .defcfg file exists
before clearing
configurations on the
NetEngine 8000 M1C. If
the .defcfg file does not
exist, you can run
manually configure the
file. For details, see the
reset saved-
configuration
command.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-15 Ports on the NetEngine 8000 M1C
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M ETH/OAM
interface that can Management
function as an Cables
NM interface or
console interface
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD RJ45 Clock/Time input/ 1-into-2 clock
output interface cable + clock
cable (external
clock mode,
delivery-ready):
applicable to the
CLK mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + clock
cable (external
clock/external
time mode,
prepared onsite):
applicable to the
CLK or TOD mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + Ethernet
cable: applicable
to the TOD mode

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm Input/
output interface Output Cables

USB USB TYPE C USB -
interface(reserved
)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

10GE/GE/FE(0 to SFP+/SFP FE/GE/10GE 155Mbps eSFP
15) service signal Optical Module
input and output 155Mbps eSFP
interface BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

GE/FE(16 to 23) SFP FE/GE service 155Mbps eSFP
signal input and Optical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module

GE/FE(24 to 27) RJ45 FE/GE service Ethernet Cables
signal input and
output interface


Table 3-16 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front View Pin Usage

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface


Table 3-17 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output


Table 3-18 Pins of the CLK/TOD interface
Front Pin Working Mode
View
External Clock External Time External Time
Input Output
(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
Information) Information)

1 Receive Unspecified Unspecified
negative of the
CLK

2 Receive positive Unspecified Unspecified
of the CLK

3 Unspecified Input negative for Output negative for
the 1PPS signal the 1PPS signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pin Working Mode
View
External Clock External Time External Time
Input Output
(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
Information) Information)

4 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end
negative of the
CLK

5 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end
positive of the
CLK

6 Unspecified Input positive for Output positive for
the 1PPS signal the 1PPS signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

7 Unspecified Input negative for Output negative for
the time the time information
information (RS422 level)
(RS422 level)

8 Unspecified Input positive for Output positive for
the time the time information
information (RS422 level)
(RS422 level)

NOTE
The interface can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding three
working modes.



Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine 8000 M1C, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine 8000 M1C is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine 8000 M1C does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine 8000 M1C is fixed as 2.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine 8000 M1C begin
with 0. Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the
NetEngine 8000 M1C.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Labels

Figure 3-10 Label Description


Table 3-19 Label description
Figure Label Name Description

Chassis bar code label The bar code will be retrieved by the
device as the equipment serial
number (ESN).

Heat hazard label This label suggests that the surface
temperature is high and it may
cause body injury.

Multi-power input This device has more than one
caution power input. Disconnect all power
inputs to power off this device.

Product nameplate label The label suggests the product
name, certification and qualification.




Power Supply System
The power supply system consists of two power modules working in 1+1 backup
mode. If one power module fails or is removed, the other one can still supply
adequate power to the system.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

The power modules are located in two slots on the left of a chassis and supply
power to the CXP and fan module.

The power module provides various protection functions, including:

● Protection against output overcurrent
● Protection against output overvoltage
● Protection against input undervoltage
● Protection against overtemperature
● Protection against short circuit
● Alarm generation

Figure 3-11 shows the power supply architecture. Each of the power modules
provides 12 V power supply. The two channels of power supply are combined on
the power backplane and then supplied to the CXP and fan module.

Figure 3-11 Power supply architecture


Heat Dissipation System

Figure 3-12 Heat Dissipation System


● The NetEngine 8000 M1C uses fan modules for heat dissipation and the air
flows from left to right.
● Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on NetEngine 8000
M1C must be kept clean and unblocked.
● A distance of at least 75 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent
on NetEngine 8000 M1C to ensure good ventilation.
● When NetEngine 8000 M1C is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the
cabinet must be within the temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet
must be consistent with that of NetEngine 8000 M1C.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-20 Technical specifications of the NetEngine 8000 M1C AC

Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB (3U)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 44.5 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.75 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 255 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (10.04
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 3.9 kg (8.6 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 6.1 kg (13.45 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 89.21 W
configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 289.43 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] 45.43 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Availability 0.99999

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 4 GB

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 8 GB

Power supply mode AC

Rated input voltage [V] 200 V–240 V/100 V–127 V dual-live
wire, supporting 240 V HVDC

Input voltage range [V] 100 V to 240 V

Maximum input current [A] 4 A

Rated output power [W] 300 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] Standard C13 cable

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥2A

Types of fans Built-in

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Switching capacity 344 Gbit/s(Bidirectional). The
maximum allowed error is 0.01%. To
be specific, 99.99% of the line rate is
guaranteed.

Maximum number of physical ports on 28
the entire device

Maximum number of 10GE ports 16

Maximum number of GE ports 28

Maximum number of FE ports 28

Maximum number of electrical ports 4

Redundant power supply 1+1

Redundant fans Three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the
system can run at a maximum
ambient temperature of 50°C for a
short period of time.

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 100% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

RTU supported Yes
By default, the ports on a NetEngine
8000 M1C are disabled, and these
ports are limited to a bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. To use other port
bandwidth modes, you need to load
the corresponding RTU licenses.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.


Table 3-21 Technical specifications of the NetEngine 8000 M1C DC
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB (3U)

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 44.5 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.75 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 255 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (10.04
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 3.8 kg (8.38 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 6.0 kg (13.23 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 88.98 W
configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 288.69 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] 46.18 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Availability 0.99999

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 4 GB

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 8 GB

Power supply mode DC


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 10 A

Rated output power [W] 260 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] 4 mm²

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥ 4 A

Types of fans Built-in

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Switching capacity 344 Gbit/s (Bidirectional)

Maximum number of physical ports on 28
the entire device

Maximum number of 10GE ports 16

Maximum number of GE ports 28

Maximum number of FE ports 28

Maximum number of electrical ports 4

Redundant power supply 1+1

Redundant fans Three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the
system can run at a maximum
ambient temperature of 50°C for a
short period of time.

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 100% RH, non-condensing


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

RTU supported Yes
By default, the ports on a NetEngine
8000 M1C are disabled, and these
ports are limited to a bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. To use other port
bandwidth modes, you need to load
the corresponding RTU licenses.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.



NO TE

● About condensation
The ability of air to contain moisture reduces as the temperature decreases. There is a
relationship between temperature and relative humidity. As the temperature decreases,
the air becomes more saturated with moisture, meaning the relative humidity increases.
But at a low enough temperature (called the dew point), the air can no longer contain
moisture, which is then precipitated as liquid water. Such water on the surface of
relevant equipment is called condensation.
● Hazards of condensation
When condensation mixes with dust inside the equipment, it forms conductive channels
that affect the electrical insulation of the equipment. As a result, a non-conductive area
of the equipment can become conductive, causing the equipment to malfunction.
● Conditions that cause condensation
Condensation is related to temperature changes and humidity. It occurs when the
temperature continues to decrease below the dew point at a given humidity. For
example, given that the relative humidity is 50% RH and the temperature is 25°C (77°F),
condensation occurs when the temperature decreases below 13.9°C (57.02°F).
3.1.3 NetEngine 8000 M1D

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-22 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 M1D
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02353QUE CR8PM1DB V800R012C Y -
8000 M1D ASC0 10SPC300
Basic
Configurati
on, DC
Power
(Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE/F
E
+8*10GE/G
E/
FE,include
auxiliary
materials)

NetEngine 02353RKS CR8PM1DB V800R012C Y -
8000 M1D ASC1 10SPC300
Basic
Configurati
on, DC
Power
(Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE/F
E
+8*10GE/G
E/
FE,exclude
auxiliary
materials)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02353VBE CR8PM1DB V800R012C Y -
8000 M1D ASC6 10SPC300
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s M1D
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2
*100GE
+4*10GE/G
E
+20*GE),2*
AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document,
For india)

NetEngine 02353VBF CR8PM1DB V800R012C Y -
8000 M1D ASC7 10SPC300
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s M1D
Chassis,
Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE
+8*10GE/
GE,2*DC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02353VBG CR8PM1DB V800R012C Y -
8000 M1D ASC8 10SPC300
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s M1D
Chassis,
Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE
+8*10GE/G
E, 2*AC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02353VBL CR8PM1DB V800R012C Y -
8000 M1D ASC9 10SPC300
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s M1D
Chassis,
Fixed
Interface(2
*100GE
+4*10GE/G
E
+20*GE),2*
DC
Power,with
out
Software
and
Document,
For india)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02353VBX CR8PM1DB V800R012C Y -
8000 M1D ASCA 10SPC300
Basic
Configurati
on, AC
Power
(Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE/F
E
+8*10GE/G
E/
FE,exclude
auxiliary
materials)

NetEngine 02355ATF CR8PM1DB V800R021C Y -
8000 M1D, ADC1 10SPC600
DC Power
(Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE/F
E
+8*10GE/G
E/
FE,exclude
auxiliary
materials)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355ATJ CR8PM1DB V800R021C Y -
8000 M1D, AACD 10SPC600
AC Power
(Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE/F
E
+8*10GE/G
E/
FE,exclude
auxiliary
materials)

NetEngine 02355JQE CR8PM1DB V800R023C Y -
8000 M1D ADM3 00SPC500
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s M1D
Chassis,
Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE
+8*10GE/G
E, 2*DC
Power,
without
Software
and
Document)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355JQF CR8PM1DB V800R023C Y -
8000 M1D AAM3 00SPC500
Basic
Configurati
on(Include
s M1D
Chassis,
Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE
+8*10GE/G
E, 2*AC
Power,
without
Software
and
Document)

NetEngine 02355JQG CR8PM1DB V800R023C Y -
8000 M1D ADM4 00SPC500
Basic
Configurati
on, DC
Power
(Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE/F
E
+8*10GE/G
E/
FE,include
auxiliary
materials)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355JQM CR8PM1DB V800R023C Y -
8000 M1D, ADM5 00SPC500
DC Power
(Port
Capacity
4*100GE/
50GE
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE/F
E
+8*10GE/G
E/
FE,exclude
auxiliary
materials)

NetEngine 02355JQN CR8PM1DB V800R023C Y Integrated
8000 M1D, AAM5 00SPC500 device,
AC Power excluding
(Port the
Capacity auxiliary
4*100GE/ material
50GE package.
+16*25GE/
10GE/GE/F
E
+8*10GE/G
E/
FE,exclude
auxiliary
materials)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355JQP CR8PM1DB V800R023C Y -
8000 M1D ASCY 00SPC500
AC basic
configurati
on
(Including
M1D
chassis,
fixed
interfaces
(4*40GE/
50GE
+4*10GE/G
E+20*GE),
2*AC
power
module,
without
software
and
document)



NO TE

In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.

Appearance

Figure 3-13 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M1D (DC)


Figure 3-14 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M1D (AC)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter

Panel

Figure 3-15 Panel on the NetEngine 8000 M1D


1. 10GE/GE/FE(0 to 7) 2. 25GE/10GE/GE(8 to 23) 3. 100GE/50GE(24 to 27)

4. CLK/TOD 5. ALMI/ALMO 6. ETH/OAM

Table 3-23 Indicators on the NetEngine 8000 M1D

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

green Blink Loading of
the board
software is in
process.

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

STAT Power green Steady on The power
module status module is
indicator working
normally.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The power
module is not
working
properly or
the power
module is not
powered on.

ALM Alarm red Steady on Critical
indicator alarms are
generated.

orange Steady on Major or
minor alarms
are
generated.

- Off No alarms are
generated.

0–27 Optical port green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transmission port is
status normal.
indicator
green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

- Off The physical
connection
fails.

BREAKOUT 0– BREAKOUT Green Blinking Each
3 indicator BREAKOUT
NOTE indicator for
This function channels 0, 1,
is supported 2, and 3 is on
since for 5s in
V800R023C10. sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel, and
this process
repeats.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Steady off No data is
being
transmitted or
received over
this channel.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-24 Buttons on the NetEngine 8000 M1D
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button There is only one RST
button for resetting the
device.
The RST button can also
be used to delete the
password and
configuration file on the
device. The procedure is
as follows: Press and
release the RST button
to restart the NE. Then,
press and hold the RST
button for about 120
seconds. When the STAT
and ALM indicators both
blink (this status lasts
about 10 seconds),
release the RST button
immediately. The device
then starts to
automatically delete the
password and
configuration file.
However, if you release
the RST button after
they stop both blinking,
the device undergoes
only a reset without
clearing the password
and configuration file.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
After the RST button is
used to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
is deleted. You are advised
to back up the
configuration file
periodically.
During site migration or
fault recovery, you can run
the reset saved-
configuration command or
press the RST button to
clear configurations. After
the configurations are
cleared, if the NetEngine
8000 M1D is powered on
and restarted without
the .defcfg file, the
NetEngine 8000 M1D
enters the first-login
process. As a result, the
NetEngine 8000 M1D fails
to go online using the
plug-and-play function. To
prevent this problem,
check whether the .defcfg
file exists on the NetEngine
8000 M1D before clearing
configurations. If
the .defcfg file does not
exist on the NetEngine
8000 M1D, you can
manually configure the
file. For details, see the
command "reset saved-
configuration".




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-25 Ports on the NetEngine 8000 M1D
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH/OAM
sensing Ethernet Management
network Cables
management port
and non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD RJ45 Clock/Time input/ ● 1-into-2 clock
output interface cable + clock
cable (external
clock mode,
delivery-ready):
applicable to
the CLK mode
● 1-into-2 clock
cable + clock
cable (external
clock/external
time mode,
prepared
onsite):
applicable to
the CLK or
TOD mode
● 1-into-2 clock
cable +
Ethernet cable:
applicable to
the TOD mode

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm input/
output interface output cables


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

10GE/GE/FE(0 to SFP+ FE/GE/10GE 155Mbps eSFP
7) service signal Optical Module
input and output 155Mbps eSFP
interface BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

25GE/10GE/GE(8 SFP28 FE/GE/10GE/25GE 25Gbps SFP28
to 23) service signal Optical Module
input and output 25Gbps SFP28
interface BIDI Optical
NOTE Module
Ports 8–15 belong
to a port group, 155Mbps eSFP
and ports 16–23 Optical Module
belong to another 155Mbps eSFP
one. These ports
BIDI Optical
work in 25GE/
10GE auto-sensing Module
mode by default. 1Gbps Electrical
You can run the Module
port-mode card-id
group-id command 1.25Gbps eSFP
in the system view Optical Module
to switch the
working mode to 1.25Gbps SFP
10GE/GE auto- BIDI Optical
sensing for ports in Module
a port group.
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

100GE/50GE(24 QSFP28 Interface for 50Gbps QSFP28
to 27) inputting and Optical Module
outputting 50Gbps QSFP28
100GE/50GE BIDI Optical
optical signals. Module
Supports FlexE. 100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
40Gbps QSFP+
Optical Module
NOTE
40Gbps optical
modules are
supported since
V800R022C00SPC6
00.



Table 3-26 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-27 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output


Table 3-28 Pins of the CLK/TOD interface
Front Pin Working Mode
View
External Clock External Time External Time
Input Output
(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
Information) Information)

1 Receive Unspecified Unspecified
negative of the
CLK

2 Receive positive Unspecified Unspecified
of the CLK

3 Unspecified Input negative for Output negative for
the 1PPS signal the 1PPS signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

4 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end
negative of the
CLK

5 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end
positive of the
CLK


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pin Working Mode
View
External Clock External Time External Time
Input Output
(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
Information) Information)

6 Unspecified Input positive for Output positive for
the 1PPS signal the 1PPS signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

7 Unspecified Input negative for Output negative for
the time the time information
information (RS422 level)
(RS422 level)

8 Unspecified Input positive for Output positive for
the time the time information
information (RS422 level)
(RS422 level)

NOTE
The interface can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding three
working modes.



Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine 8000 M1D, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine 8000 M1D is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine 8000 M1D does not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard
number of the NetEngine 8000 M1D is fixed as 2.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine 8000 M1D begin
with 0. Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the
NetEngine 8000 M1D.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Labels

Figure 3-16 Label Description


Table 3-29 Label description
Figure Label Name Description

Chassis bar code label The bar code will be retrieved by the
device as the equipment serial
number (ESN).

Heat hazard label This label suggests that the surface
temperature is high and it may
cause body injury.

Multi-power input This device has more than one
caution power input. Disconnect all power
inputs to power off this device.

Product nameplate label The label suggests the product
name, certification and qualification.




Power Supply System
The power supply system consists of two power modules working in 1+1 backup
mode. If one power module fails or is removed, the other one can still supply
adequate power to the system.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

The power modules are located in two slots on the left of a chassis and supply
power to the CXP and fan module.
The power module provides various protection functions, including:
● Protection against output overcurrent
● Protection against output overvoltage
● Protection against input undervoltage
● Protection against overtemperature
● Protection against short circuit
● Alarm generation
Figure 3-17 shows the power supply architecture. Each of the power modules
provides 12 V power supply. The two channels of power supply are combined on
the power backplane and then supplied to the CXP and fan module.

Figure 3-17 Power supply architecture


Heat Dissipation System

Figure 3-18 Heat Dissipation System


● The NetEngine 8000 M1D uses fan modules for heat dissipation and the air
flows from left to right.
● Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on NetEngine 8000
M1D must be kept clean and unblocked.
● A distance of at least 75 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent
on NetEngine 8000 M1D to ensure good ventilation.
● When NetEngine 8000 M1D is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the
cabinet must be within the temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet
must be consistent with that of NetEngine 8000 M1D.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-30 Technical specifications of the NetEngine 8000 M1D AC
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI(21-inch);IEC(19-inch);
IMB(3U);F01M50 Outdoor Cabinet

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 44.5 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.75 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 255 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (10.04
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 4.3 kg (9.48 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 5.0 kg (11.02 lb)

Typical power consumption (with ● CR8PM1DBAAC2 (02355XMA):
configuration) [W] 132.2 W
● CR8PM1DBAACD (02355ATJ): 125.1
W
● CR8PM1DBAAM3 (02355JQF):
132.2 W
● CR8PM1DBAAM5 (02355JQN):
132.2 W
● CR8PM1DBAAM6 (02355XLN):
132.2 W
● CR8PM1DBAAMF (02355XLS): 132.2
W
● CR8PM1DBASC6 (02353VBE): 125.1
W
● CR8PM1DBASC8 (02353VBG): 125.1
W
● CR8PM1DBASCA (02353VBX): 125.1
W
● CR8PM1DBASCY (02355JQP): 132.2
W


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation (with ● CR8PM1DBAAC2 (02355XMA):
configuration) [BTU/hour] 428.9 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBAACD (02355ATJ): 406
BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBAAM3 (02355JQF):
428.9 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBAAM5 (02355JQN):
428.9 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBAAM6 (02355XLN):
428.9 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBAAMF (02355XLS): 428.9
BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBASC6 (02353VBE): 406
BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBASC8 (02353VBG): 406
BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBASCA (02353VBX): 406
BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBASCY (02355JQP): 428.9
BTU/hour

MTBF [year] 40 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Availability 0.99999

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 8 GB x 1

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 8 GB

Power supply mode AC

Rated input voltage [V] 200 V–240 V/100 V–127 V dual-live
wire, supporting 240 V HVDC

Input voltage range [V] 100 V to 240 V

Maximum input current [A] 4 A

Rated output power [W] 300 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] Standard C13 cable

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥4A

Types of fans Built-in


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Switching capacity 1.76 Tbit/s(Bidirectional). The
maximum allowed error is 0.01%. To
be specific, 99.99% of the line rate is
guaranteed.

Maximum number of physical ports on 28
the entire device

Maximum number of 100GE ports 4

Maximum number of 50GE ports 4

Maximum number of 40GE ports ● CR8PM1DBAAC2 (02355XMA): 4
● CR8PM1DBAACD (02355ATJ): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)
● CR8PM1DBAAM3 (02355JQF): 4
● CR8PM1DBAAM5 (02355JQN): 4
● CR8PM1DBAAM6 (02355XLN): 4
● CR8PM1DBAAMF (02355XLS): 4
● CR8PM1DBASC6 (02353VBE): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)
● CR8PM1DBASC8 (02353VBG): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)
● CR8PM1DBASCA (02353VBX): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)
● CR8PM1DBASCY (02355JQP): 4

Maximum number of 25GE ports 16

Maximum number of 10GE ports 24

Maximum number of GE ports 24

Maximum number of FE ports 24

Maximum number of electrical ports 0

Redundant power supply 1+1


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Redundant fans Three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the
system can run at a maximum
ambient temperature of 50°C for a
short period of time.

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 100% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Breakout supported ● CR8PM1DBAAC2 (02355XMA): Yes.
Only 100GE interfaces support
breakout. To enable interface
breakout, run the port split
command.
● CR8PM1DBAACD (02355ATJ): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBAAM3 (02355JQF): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBAAM5 (02355JQN): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBAAM6 (02355XLN): Yes.
Only 100GE interfaces support
breakout. To enable interface
breakout, run the port split
command.
● CR8PM1DBAAMF (02355XLS): Yes.
Only 100GE interfaces support
breakout. To enable interface
breakout, run the port split
command.
● CR8PM1DBASC6 (02353VBE): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBASC8 (02353VBG): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBASCA (02353VBX): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBASCY (02355JQP): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes
100GE interfaces support 40GE/50GE/
100GE auto-sensing.
25GE interfaces support GE/10GE/
25GE auto-sensing.
GigabitEthernet interfaces support GE/
10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported Yes
Physical ports 24, 25, 26 and 27 can be
added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 28 to 67 and from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of 40 FlexE
clients can be created.

MACsec supported No


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

RTU supported ● CR8PM1DBAAC2 (02355XMA):
Yes
By default, ports 0 to 23 work in
1GE mode, and ports 24 to 27 are
limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s.
Ports 0 to 23 support 10GE after
the 1*10GE license is activated.
Ports 8 to 23 support 25GE after
the 1*10GE license and 1*10GE-
to-25GE license are activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 40GE/50GE
after the 1*50GE license is
activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 100GE after
the 2*50GE license is activated.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License
Query tool or see the related
license usage guide.
● CR8PM1DBAACD (02355ATJ):
Yes
By default, ports 0 to 23 work in
1GE mode, and ports 24 to 27 are
limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s.
Ports 0 to 23 support 10GE after
the 1*10GE license is activated.
Ports 8 to 23 support 25GE after
the 1*10GE license and 1*10GE-
to-25GE license are activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 40GE/50GE
after the 1*50GE license is
activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 100GE after
the 2*50GE license is activated.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License
Query tool or see the related
license usage guide.
● CR8PM1DBAAM3 (02355JQF): -
● CR8PM1DBAAM5 (02355JQN): -
● CR8PM1DBAAM6 (02355XLN):


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Yes
By default, ports 0 to 23 work in
1GE mode, and ports 24 to 27 are
limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s.
Ports 0 to 23 support 10GE after
the 1*10GE license is activated.
Ports 8 to 23 support 25GE after
the 1*10GE license and 1*10GE-
to-25GE license are activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 40GE/50GE
after the 1*50GE license is
activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 100GE after
the 2*50GE license is activated.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License
Query tool or see the related
license usage guide.
● CR8PM1DBAAMF (02355XLS):
Yes
By default, ports 0 to 23 work in
1GE mode, and ports 24 to 27 are
limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s.
Ports 0 to 23 support 10GE after
the 1*10GE license is activated.
Ports 8 to 23 support 25GE after
the 1*10GE license and 1*10GE-
to-25GE license are activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 40GE/50GE
after the 1*50GE license is
activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 100GE after
the 2*50GE license is activated.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License
Query tool or see the related
license usage guide.
● CR8PM1DBASC6 (02353VBE): -
● CR8PM1DBASC8 (02353VBG): -
● CR8PM1DBASCA (02353VBX): -
● CR8PM1DBASCY (02355JQP): -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



Table 3-31 Technical specifications of the NetEngine 8000 M1D DC
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI(21-inch);IEC(19-inch); IMB(3U);

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 44.5 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.75 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 255 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (10.04
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 4.2 kg (9.26 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 4.9 kg (10.8 lb)

Typical power consumption (with ● CR8PM1DBADC1 (02355ATF): 124.5
configuration) [W] W
● CR8PM1DBADC2 (02355XLY): 132.4
W
● CR8PM1DBADM3 (02355JQE):
132.4 W
● CR8PM1DBADM4 (02355JQG):
132.4 W
● CR8PM1DBADM5 (02355JQM):
132.4 W
● CR8PM1DBADM6 (02355XMB):
132.4 W
● CR8PM1DBADMF (02355XLR):
132.4 W
● CR8PM1DBASC0 (02353QUE):
124.5 W
● CR8PM1DBASC1 (02353RKS): 124.5
W
● CR8PM1DBASC7 (02353VBF): 124.5
W
● CR8PM1DBASC9 (02353VBL): 124.5
W


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation (with ● CR8PM1DBADC1 (02355ATF): 403.8
configuration) [BTU/hour] BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBADC2 (02355XLY): 429.6
BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBADM3 (02355JQE):
429.6 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBADM4 (02355JQG):
429.6 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBADM5 (02355JQM):
429.6 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBADM6 (02355XMB):
429.6 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBADMF (02355XLR):
429.6 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBASC0 (02353QUE):
403.8 BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBASC1 (02353RKS): 403.8
BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBASC7 (02353VBF): 403.8
BTU/hour
● CR8PM1DBASC9 (02353VBL): 403.8
BTU/hour

MTBF [year] 45.54 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Availability 0.99999

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 8 GB x 1

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 8 GB

Power supply mode DC

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 10 A

Rated output power [W] 260 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] 4 mm²

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥6 A

Types of fans Built-in

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Switching capacity 1.76 Tbit/s (Bidirectional)

Maximum number of physical ports on 28
the entire device

Maximum number of 100GE ports 4

Maximum number of 50GE ports 4

Maximum number of 40GE ports ● CR8PM1DBADC1 (02355ATF): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)
● CR8PM1DBADC2 (02355XLY): 4
● CR8PM1DBADM3 (02355JQE): 4
● CR8PM1DBADM4 (02355JQG): 4
● CR8PM1DBADM5 (02355JQM): 4
● CR8PM1DBADM6 (02355XMB): 4
● CR8PM1DBADMF (02355XLR): 4
● CR8PM1DBASC0 (02353QUE): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)
● CR8PM1DBASC1 (02353RKS): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)
● CR8PM1DBASC7 (02353VBF): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)
● CR8PM1DBASC9 (02353VBL): 4
(First supported in
V800R022C00SPC600)

Maximum number of 25GE ports 16

Maximum number of 10GE ports 24

Maximum number of GE ports 24

Maximum number of FE ports 24

Maximum number of electrical ports 0

Redundant power supply 1+1


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Redundant fans Three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the
system can run at a maximum
ambient temperature of 50°C for a
short period of time.

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 100% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Breakout supported ● CR8PM1DBADC1 (02355ATF): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBADC2 (02355XLY): Yes.
Only 100GE interfaces support
breakout. To enable interface
breakout, run the port split
command.
● CR8PM1DBADM3 (02355JQE): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBADM4 (02355JQG): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBADM5 (02355JQM): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBADM6 (02355XMB): Yes.
Only 100GE interfaces support
breakout. To enable interface
breakout, run the port split
command.
● CR8PM1DBADMF (02355XLR): Yes.
Only 100GE interfaces support
breakout. To enable interface
breakout, run the port split
command.
● CR8PM1DBASC0 (02353QUE): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBASC1 (02353RKS): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBASC7 (02353VBF): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.
● CR8PM1DBASC9 (02353VBL): Yes.
Only 100GE ports support port
breakout in V800R023C10SPC500
and later versions. To enable the
breakout function on a port, run
the port split command.

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes
100GE interfaces support 40GE/50GE/
100GE auto-sensing.
25GE interfaces support GE/10GE/
25GE auto-sensing.
GigabitEthernet interfaces support GE/
10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported Yes
Physical ports 24, 25, 26 and 27 can be
added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 28 to 67 and from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of 40 FlexE
clients can be created.

MACsec supported No


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

RTU supported ● CR8PM1DBADC1 (02355ATF):
Yes
By default, ports 0 to 23 work in
1GE mode, and ports 24 to 27 are
limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s.
Ports 0 to 23 support 10GE after
the 1*10GE license is activated.
Ports 8 to 23 support 25GE after
the 1*10GE license and 1*10GE-
to-25GE license are activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 40GE/50GE
after the 1*50GE license is
activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 100GE after
the 2*50GE license is activated.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License
Query tool or see the related
license usage guide.
● CR8PM1DBADC2 (02355XLY):
Yes
By default, ports 0 to 23 work in
1GE mode, and ports 24 to 27 are
limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s.
Ports 0 to 23 support 10GE after
the 1*10GE license is activated.
Ports 8 to 23 support 25GE after
the 1*10GE license and 1*10GE-
to-25GE license are activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 40GE/50GE
after the 1*50GE license is
activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 100GE after
the 2*50GE license is activated.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License
Query tool or see the related
license usage guide.
● CR8PM1DBADM3 (02355JQE): -
● CR8PM1DBADM4 (02355JQG): -
● CR8PM1DBADM5 (02355JQM): -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

● CR8PM1DBADM6 (02355XMB):
Yes
By default, ports 0 to 23 work in
1GE mode, and ports 24 to 27 are
limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s.
Ports 0 to 23 support 10GE after
the 1*10GE license is activated.
Ports 8 to 23 support 25GE after
the 1*10GE license and 1*10GE-
to-25GE license are activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 40GE/50GE
after the 1*50GE license is
activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 100GE after
the 2*50GE license is activated.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License
Query tool or see the related
license usage guide.
● CR8PM1DBADMF (02355XLR):
Yes
By default, ports 0 to 23 work in
1GE mode, and ports 24 to 27 are
limited to a bandwidth of 100
Mbit/s.
Ports 0 to 23 support 10GE after
the 1*10GE license is activated.
Ports 8 to 23 support 25GE after
the 1*10GE license and 1*10GE-
to-25GE license are activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 40GE/50GE
after the 1*50GE license is
activated.
Ports 24 to 27 support 100GE after
the 2*50GE license is activated.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License
Query tool or see the related
license usage guide.
● CR8PM1DBASC0 (02353QUE): -
● CR8PM1DBASC1 (02353RKS): -
● CR8PM1DBASC7 (02353VBF): -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

● CR8PM1DBASC9 (02353VBL): -



NO TE

● About condensation
The ability of air to contain moisture reduces as the temperature decreases. There is a
relationship between temperature and relative humidity. As the temperature decreases,
the air becomes more saturated with moisture, meaning the relative humidity increases.
But at a low enough temperature (called the dew point), the air can no longer contain
moisture, which is then precipitated as liquid water. Such water on the surface of
relevant equipment is called condensation.
● Hazards of condensation
When condensation mixes with dust inside the equipment, it forms conductive channels
that affect the electrical insulation of the equipment. As a result, a non-conductive area
of the equipment can become conductive, causing the equipment to malfunction.
● Conditions that cause condensation
Condensation is related to temperature changes and humidity. It occurs when the
temperature continues to decrease below the dew point at a given humidity. For
example, given that the relative humidity is 50% RH and the temperature is 25°C (77°F),
condensation occurs when the temperature decreases below 13.9°C (57.02°F).
3.1.4 NetEngine 8000 M1D-B

Overview

Table 3-32 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B
Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354WPG CR8PM1DB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1D- ASCF 00SPC600 device,
B DC(Port excluding
Capacity the
2*50GE auxiliary
+2*25GE/ material
10GE package.
+2*10GE
+14*GE,def
ault
2*25GE&all
GE,no aux
material)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02354WPH CR8PM1DB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1D- ASCJ 00SPC600 device,
B AC(Port excluding
Capacity the
2*50GE auxiliary
+2*25GE/ material
10GE package.
+2*10GE
+14*GE,def
ault
2*25GE&all
GE,no aux
material)

NetEngine 02355DBW CR8PM1DB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1D- ASCL 00SPC600 equipment,
B DC including
Power auxiliary
(Port material
Capacity packages.
2*50GE
+6*10GE/G
E+10*GE(o)
+4*GE(e))

NetEngine 02355DDY CR8PM1DB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1D- ASCN 00SPC600 equipment,
B AC including
Power auxiliary
(Port material
Capacity packages.
2*50GE
+6*10GE/G
E+10*GE(o)
+4*GE(e))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355JQS CR8PM1DB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1D- ASCT 10SPC500 equipment,
B, DC including
Power auxiliary
(Port material
Capacity packages.
2*50GE(10*
10GE
convertible
)
+2*25GE(4*
10GE/GE
convertible
)
+2*10GE/G
E+10*GE(o)
+4*GE(e),
default
2*25GE
ports and
all GE/FE
ports are
enabled)

NetEngine 02355JQU CR8PM1DB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1D- ASCV 10SPC500 equipment,
B, AC including
Power auxiliary
(Port material
Capacity packages.
2*50GE(10*
10GE
convertible
)
+2*25GE( 4
*10GE/GE
convertible
)
+2*10GE/G
E+10*GE(o)
+4*GE(e),
default
2*25GE
ports and
all GE/FE
ports are
enabled)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Descriptio Part Model First Integrated Remarks
n Number supported fixed
version device

NetEngine 02355JQW CR8PM1DB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1D- ASCP 10SPC500 device,
B DC(Port excluding
Capacity the
2*50GE auxiliary
+2*25GE/ material
10GE package.
+2*10GE
+14*GE,def
ault
2*25GE&all
GE,no aux
material)

NetEngine 02355JQY CR8PM1DB V800R022C Y Integrated
8000 M1D- ASCR 10SPC500 device,
B AC(Port excluding
Capacity the
2*50GE auxiliary
+2*25GE/ material
10GE package.
+2*10GE
+14*GE,def
ault
2*25GE&all
GE,no aux
material)



NO TE

In specific areas, as the auxiliary materials are different, the sales BOM numbers may be
different. Different sales BOM numbers may correspond to the same description in the
device attribute table. The actual sales BOM number in an area prevails.

Appearance

Figure 3-19 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B (DC)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-20 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B (AC)


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter

Panel

Figure 3-21 Panel on the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B


1. GE/FE(0 to 9) 2.10GE/GE/FE(10 to 23) 3. 25GE/10GE/GE(24 to
25)

4. 50GE(26 to 27) 5. GE/FE(28 to 31) 6. CLK/TOD

7. ALMI/ALMO 8. ETH/OAM -


Table 3-33 Indicators on the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blinking The board
software is
being
initialized.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

ALM Alarm Red Steady on Device-level
indicator critical alarms
exist.

Orange Steady on Device-level
major or
minor alarms
exist.

- Steady off Normal
status.

L/A Optical port Green Steady on The port
connection/ connection is
Data normal.
receiving/
transmitting Green Blinking Data is being
status received/sent
indicator on the port.
- Steady off The physical
connection of
the port is
abnormal.

LINK Connection Green Steady on The physical
state connection of
indicator of the service
the service port is
port normal.

- Steady off The physical
connection of
the service
port fails.

ACT Service port Orange Blinking The data
transmitting/ interface is
receiving transmitting
status or receiving
indicator data.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Steady off The data
interface is
not
transmitting
or receiving
data.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-34 Buttons on the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button Used to reset a device.
When you press the RST
button and then release
it, the device is reset.
The RST button can be
used to clear the
password and
configuration file of a
device. Once you press
and then release the RST
button, the device begins
to reset. After you press
and hold down the RST
button for about 110s to
120s and then release it
when the STAT and ALM
indicators blink
simultaneously, the
device begins to
automatically clear the
password and
configuration file. The
device undergoes only a
reset without clearing
the password and
configuration file if you
still hold down the RST
button after the
indicators blink
simultaneously (for
about 10s) and release
the button after they do
not blink simultaneously.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
● If you press the RST
button, the original
configuration file is
cleared. You are advised
to periodically back up
the configuration file.
● During site migration
or fault recovery, you
can run the reset
saved-configuration
command or press the
RST button to clear the
configuration. After the
configuration is cleared
and the NetEngine
8000 M1D-B is
powered on again
without the .defcfg file,
the device enters the
first-login process. As a
result, the device fails
to go online using the
plug-and-play function.
To prevent this
problem, check
whether the .defcfg file
exists on the NetEngine
8000 M1D-B before
clearing the
configuration. If
the .defcfg file does not
exist on the device, you
can perform manual
configuration. For
details, see the reset
saved-configuration
command.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-35 Ports on the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M auto- ETH/OAM
sensing Ethernet management
network cable
management port
and non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD RJ45 Clock/Time input/ Clock cable
output interface (external clock
mode, delivery-
ready)
Clock cable
(external clock/
external time
mode, prepared
onsite)
Ethernet cable
Clock cable
(external clock/
external time
mode, prepared
onsite)

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm input/
output interface output cables

USB USB TYPE C USB port -
(reserved)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

GE/FE (0–9) SFP Interface for 155Mbps eSFP
inputting and Optical Module
outputting FE/GE 155Mbps eSFP
optical signals BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

10GE/GE/FE (10– SFP+ Interface for 155Mbps eSFP
23) inputting and Optical Module
outputting FE/GE/ 155Mbps eSFP
10GE optical BIDI Optical
signals Module
NOTE 1Gbps Electrical
1. 10GE optical
modules with a Module
transmission 1.25Gbps eSFP
distance of 80 km Optical Module
can be installed
only on upper- 1.25Gbps SFP
layer optical ports BIDI Optical
(port numbers: 11, Module
13, 15, 17, 19, 21,
and 23). 1.25Gbps eSFP
2. Ports 22 and 23 BIDI Optical
support MACsec. Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

25GE/10GE/GE SFP28 Interface for 25Gbps SFP28
(24–25) inputting and Optical Module
outputting FE/GE/ 25Gbps SFP28
10GE/25GE BIDI Optical
optical signals Module
NOTE 155Mbps eSFP
1. A 10GE optical
module with a Optical Module
transmission 155Mbps eSFP
distance of 80 km BIDI Optical
can only be
Module
installed on an
upper-layer optical 1Gbps Electrical
port (port number: Module
25).
1.25Gbps eSFP
2. MACsec is
supported. Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module

50GE (26–27) QSFP28 Interface for 50Gbps QSFP28
inputting and Optical Module
outputting 50GE 50Gbps QSFP28
optical signals. BIDI Optical
FlexE and MACsec Module
are supported.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

GE/FE (28 to 31) RJ45 Interface for 155Mbps eSFP
inputting and Optical Module
outputting FE/GE 155Mbps eSFP
electrical signals BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module


Table 3-36 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-37 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output


Table 3-38 Pins of the CLK/TOD interface
Front Pin Working Mode
View
External Clock External Time External Time
Input Output
(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
Information) Information)

1 Receive Unspecified Unspecified
negative of the
CLK

2 Receive positive Unspecified Unspecified
of the CLK

3 Unspecified Input negative for Output negative for
the 1PPS signal the 1PPS signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

4 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end
negative of the
CLK

5 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end
positive of the
CLK


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pin Working Mode
View
External Clock External Time External Time
Input Output
(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
Information) Information)

6 Unspecified Input positive for Output positive for
the 1PPS signal the 1PPS signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)

7 Unspecified Input negative for Output negative for
the time the time information
information (RS422 level)
(RS422 level)

8 Unspecified Input positive for Output positive for
the time the time information
information (RS422 level)
(RS422 level)

NOTE
The interface can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding three
working modes.



Interface Numbering Rules
On the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B, an interface is numbered in the format of "slot
number/subcard number/port number". The following part describes the details:
● Slot number
The slot number of NetEngine 8000 M1D-B is always 0.
● Subcard number
The NetEngine 8000 M1D-B does not support subcards. Therefore, the
subcard number of the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B is fixed as 2.
● Port number
The port numbers of service interfaces on the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B begin
with 0. Port numbering depends on the number of interfaces on the
NetEngine 8000 M1D-B.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Labels

Figure 3-22 Label Description


Table 3-39 Label description
Figure Label Name Description

Chassis bar code label The bar code will be retrieved by the
device as the equipment serial
number (ESN).

Heat hazard label This label suggests that the surface
temperature is high and it may
cause body injury.

Multi-power input This device has more than one
caution power input. Disconnect all power
inputs to power off this device.

Product nameplate label The label suggests the product
name, certification and qualification.




Power Supply System
The power supply system consists of two power modules working in 1+1 backup
mode. If one power module fails or is removed, the other one can still supply
adequate power to the system.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

The power modules are located in two slots on the left of a chassis and supply
power to the CXP and fan module.

The power module provides various protection functions, including:

● Protection against output overcurrent
● Protection against output overvoltage
● Protection against input undervoltage
● Protection against overtemperature
● Protection against short circuit
● Alarm generation

Figure 3-23 shows the power supply architecture. Each of the power modules
provides 12 V power supply. The two channels of power supply are combined on
the power backplane and then supplied to the CXP and fan module.

Figure 3-23 Power supply architecture


Heat Dissipation System

Figure 3-24 Heat Dissipation System


● The NetEngine 8000 M1D-B uses fan modules for heat dissipation and the air
flows from left to right.
● Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on NetEngine 8000
M1D-B must be kept clean and unblocked.
● A distance of at least 75 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent
on NetEngine 8000 M1D-B to ensure good ventilation.
● When NetEngine 8000 M1D-B is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the
cabinet must be within the temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet
must be consistent with that of NetEngine 8000 M1D-B.

Interface Bandwidth Mode

NetEngine 8000 M1D-B support four port bandwidth allocation modes:
eth-2x50ge-2x25ge-2x10gf-14xgf-mode, eth-2x50ge-6x10gf-14xgf-mode,
eth-2x25ge-12x10gf-14xgf-mode and eth-16x10gf-14xgf-mode. By default, the
port bandwidth allocation mode is eth-2x50ge-2x25ge-2x10gf-14xgf-mode.

Figure 3-25 shows the detials of the interface bandwidth mode.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

You can run the set service-mode card-bandwidth-mode command to change
the interface bandwidth mode. For details, see "Commands Reference" in
Reference.

Figure 3-25 The interface bandwidth mode of NetEngine 8000 M1D-B


Technical Specifications

Table 3-40 Technical specifications of the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B AC/HVDC

Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB
(3U); F01M50 outdoor cabinet

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 44.5 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.75 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 255 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (10.04
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 4.4 kg (9.70 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 6.7 kg (14.77 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 108.7 W
configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 352.6 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] 45.32 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Availability 0.99999

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 4 GB x 1

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 8 GB

Power supply mode AC/HVDC

Rated input voltage [V] 200 V–240 V/100 V–127 V dual-live
wire, supporting 240 V HVDC

Input voltage range [V] 100 V to 240 V

Maximum input current [A] 4 A

Rated output power [W] 300 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] Standard C13 cable

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥4A

Types of fans Built-in

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Switching capacity 368 Gbit/s (Bidirectional)

Maximum number of physical ports on 32
the entire device

Maximum number of 100GE ports 0

Maximum number of 50GE ports 2

Maximum number of 25GE ports 2

Maximum number of 10GE ports 16

Maximum number of GE ports 30

Maximum number of FE ports 30

Maximum number of electrical ports 4

Redundant power supply 1+1


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Redundant fans Three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the
system can run at a maximum
ambient temperature of 50°C for a
short period of time.

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 100% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 26 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of 24 FlexE clients
can be created.
Physical port 27 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of 24 FlexE clients
can be created.
NOTE
A maximum of 24 FlexE clients can be
created on a device.

MACsec supported Yes
Ports 22 to 27 support MACsec.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

RTU supported Yes
Ports 0 to 9 support GE by default.
Ports 10 to 21 support GE by default.
After the 1x10GE license is activated,
10GE bandwidth can be used.
Ports 22 to 23 support 10GE by
default.
Ports 24 and 25 support 25GE by
default.
Ports 26 and 27 are limited to a
bandwidth of 100 Mbit/s by default.
After the 5x10GE license is activated,
50GE bandwidth can be used.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.


Table 3-41 Technical specifications of the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B DC
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI (21-inch); IEC (19-inch); IMB
(3U); F01M50 outdoor cabinet

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 44.5 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.75 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 255 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (10.04
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1 U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 4.3 kg (9.48 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 6.6 kg (14.55 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 107.2 W
configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 347.9 BTU/hour
configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] 45.32 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Availability 0.99999


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 4 GB x 1

Flash memory 64 MB

Storage 8 GB

Power supply mode DC

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 10 A

Rated output power [W] 260 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] 4 mm²

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥6 A

Types of fans Built-in

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Switching capacity 368 Gbit/s (Bidirectional)

Maximum number of physical ports on 32
the entire device

Maximum number of 100GE ports 0

Maximum number of 50GE ports 2

Maximum number of 25GE ports 2

Maximum number of 10GE ports 16

Maximum number of GE ports 30

Maximum number of FE ports 30

Maximum number of electrical ports 4

Redundant power supply 1+1

Redundant fans Three built-in fans. If one fan fails, the
system can run at a maximum
ambient temperature of 50°C for a
short period of time.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH (non-condensing)
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 100% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 26 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of 24 FlexE clients
can be created.
Physical port 27 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of 24 FlexE clients
can be created.
NOTE
A maximum of 24 FlexE clients can be
created on a device.

MACsec supported Yes
Ports 22 to 27 support MACsec.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

RTU supported Yes
Ports 0 to 9 support GE by default.
Ports 10 to 21 support GE by default.
After the 1x10GE license is activated,
10GE bandwidth can be used.
Ports 22 to 23 support 10GE by
default.
Ports 24 and 25 support 25GE by
default.
Ports 26 and 27 are limited to a
bandwidth of 100 Mbit/s by default.
After the 5x10GE license is activated,
50GE bandwidth can be used.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.



NO TE

● About condensation
The ability of air to contain moisture reduces as the temperature decreases. There is a
relationship between temperature and relative humidity. As the temperature decreases,
the air becomes more saturated with moisture, meaning the relative humidity increases.
But at a low enough temperature (called the dew point), the air can no longer contain
moisture, which is then precipitated as liquid water. Such water on the surface of
relevant equipment is called condensation.
● Hazards of condensation
When condensation mixes with dust inside the equipment, it forms conductive channels
that affect the electrical insulation of the equipment. As a result, a non-conductive area
of the equipment can become conductive, causing the equipment to malfunction.
● Conditions that cause condensation
Condensation is related to temperature changes and humidity. It occurs when the
temperature continues to decrease below the dew point at a given humidity. For
example, given that the relative humidity is 50% RH and the temperature is 25°C (77°F),
condensation occurs when the temperature decreases below 13.9°C (57.02°F).
3.1.5 NetEngine 8000 M6


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-42 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 M6

Description Part Number Model First supported
version

NetEngine 8000 02353HHE CR8BM6BKPDC1 V800R012C00SPC
M6 Integrated DC 300
Chassis
Components(Inclu
ding 2*DC
Power,Fan Box)

NetEngine 8000 02353HHF CR8BM6BKPAC1 V800R012C00SPC
M6 Integrated AC 300
Chassis
Components(Inclu
ding 2*AC
Power,Fan Box)



Appearance

Figure 3-26 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M6 (DC)


Figure 3-27 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 M6 (AC)


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter

Components

Figure 3-28 Components of the NetEngine 8000 M6 (DC)


1. Grounding 2. PIC 3. Air intake 4. CXP 5. Rack-
terminal (in vent mounting ear
the rear of the
chassis)

6. Chassis 7. DC Power 8. Fan module 9. Grounding 10. ESD jack
module terminal (on
the mounting
ear)


Figure 3-29 Components of the NetEngine 8000 M6 (AC)


1. Grounding 2. PIC 3. Air intake 4. CXP 5. AC Power
terminal (in vent module
the rear of the
chassis)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

6. Chassis 7. Rack- 8. Fan module 9. Grounding 10. ESD jack
mounting ear terminal (on
the mounting
ear)

Slot Layout

Figure 3-30 Slot Layout of the NetEngine 8000 M6


Table 3-43 Slots on the NetEngine 8000 M6
Slot Type Slot ID Slot Direction Remarks

PIC DC: 1-6 The top of the -
AC: 2, 4-6 board faces
upwards.

CXP 7,8 The top of the -
board faces
upwards.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Slot Type Slot ID Slot Direction Remarks

PIU DC: 9, 10 - DC and AC power
AC: 1, 3 modules cannot
be used together.
When AC power
modules are
installed, insert
filler panels into
the DC power
module slots.

FAN 11 - -



Power Supply System

The power supply system supports 1+1 backup mode. If one power module fails or
is removed, the other power module can still supply adequate power to the device.

AC power modules (PIUs) are installed in the two slots in the lower left part of a
chassis and DC PIUs are installed in the two slots on the right side of a chassis to
supply power to CXPs, interface boards, and fan modules.

The following protection functions are provided for the power modules:

● Protection against output overcurrent
● Protection against output overvoltage
● Protection against input undervoltage
● Protection against overtemperature
● Protection against short circuit
● Alarm generation

Figure 3-31 shows the DC power supply architecture. Two power modules provide
two 48 V power inputs, which are combined on the backplane and then supplied
to the fan module, CXPs, and interface boards. The CXPs provide two 3.3 V power
inputs, which are combined on the backplane and then supplied to the fan
module, power modules, and interface boards.

Figure 3-31 Diagram of the DC power supply architecture


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-32 shows the AC power supply architecture. Two power modules provide
two independent –53.5 V power inputs for the APIUC, which combines the inputs
into one –53.5 V power input for the fan module, CXPs, and PICs. The two CXPs
provide two 3.3 V power inputs, which are combined into one on the backplane
and then supplied to the fan module, power modules, APIUCs, and PICs.

Figure 3-32 Diagram of the AC power supply architecture


Heat Dissipation System
The fans exhaust air from the chassis to dissipate heat. The hot air inside the
chassis is sucked out of the subrack to form a ventilation channel from the air
intake vent on the left side to the air exhaust vent on the right side. The fan tray
assembly consists of two independent fans to dissipate heat for the device and is
hot swappable.


NO TICE

● Ensure that heat dissipation holes for the air intake and exhaust vents are clean
and not blocked.
● The empty slot should be covered with a filler panel to ensure good
electromagnetic compatibility, dustproof, and heat dissipation.
● Keep any objects or obstructions at least 75 mm away from the air intake and
exhaust vents to facilitate heat dissipation.
● When installing devices, ensure that the total heat consumption of all devices
in the cabinet is less than or equal to the heat dissipation capability of the
cabinet.
● The equipment must be stacked in the cabinet or installed at an interval of 2U
or more to prevent the return air from affecting heat dissipation.
● When the chassis is installed together with other equipment in the same
cabinet, do not install the chassis near the air exhaust vent of other equipment.
● You are required to replace the fan board as soon as possible; otherwise, the
active/standby switchover, system reset, or board burning may occur due to
high temperature. Exercise caution when performing this operation. The fan
board needs to be replaced within one minute at the normal temperature
(25ºC).

Figure 3-33 shows the air flow in the device.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-33 Air flow in the device


Technical Specifications

Table 3-44 Technical specifications of the CR8BM6BKPDC1

Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI 21-inch; IEC 19-inch

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 88.9 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (3.50 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 335 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (13.19
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)

Chassis height [U] 2U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 4.2 kg (9.26 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 6.9 kg (15.21 lb)

Weight without packaging (full [CXP-160/CXP-160-B]DC:10.65
configuration) [kg(lb)] kg(23.48 lb)
NOTE
The weight of a device can be estimated
based on the board configuration using
Info-Finder Hardware Configuration.

Weight with packaging (full [CXP-160/CXP-160-B]DC:13.39kg(29.52
configuration) [kg(lb)] lb)

Typical power consumption (with [CXP-160/CXP-160-B]DC Typical
configuration) [W] configuration 1: 2*CXP+1*FAN+2*DC
power+2*CR8D00L4XFC0 +
2*CR8D00EAGFC0 =196.1 W
[CXP-160/CXP-160-B]DC Typical
configuration 2: 2*CXP+1*FAN+2*DC
power
+2*CR8D00E1VBC0+1*CR8D00L4XFC0
+ 1*CR8D00EAGFC0 =205.8 W
NOTE
The power consumption of a device can be
estimated based on the board
configuration using Info-Finder Hardware
Configuration.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation (with [CXP-160/CXP-160-B]DC Typical
configuration) [BTU/hour] configuration 1: 2*CXP+1*FAN+2*DC
power+2*CR8D00L4XFC0 +
2*CR8D00EAGFC0 =285.9 BTU/hour
[CXP-160/CXP-160-B]DC Typical
configuration 2: 2*CXP+1*FAN+2*DC
power
+2*CR8D00E1VBC0+1*CR8D00L4XFC0
+ 1*CR8D00EAGFC0 =317.41 BTU/hour

MTBF [year] 163.45 year

MTTR [hour] 0.5 hour

Availability 0.999999651

Power supply mode DC

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 30 A

Rated output power [W] 1200 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] 10 mm² (recommended: 4 mm² (0–15
m) or 6 mm² (16–24 m))

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥ 16 A (Based on long-term evolution
requirements and site conditions, the
recommended current is greater than
or equal to 32 A.)

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic < 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Number of slots 11

Number of service board slots 6

Switching capacity 320 Gbit/s

Maximum number of physical ports on 100
the entire device

Maximum number of 100GE ports NA

Maximum number of 50GE ports 2

Maximum number of 40GE ports NA

Maximum number of 25GE ports 6

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Maximum number of 10GE ports 16

Maximum number of GE ports 100

Maximum number of FE ports 100

Maximum number of electrical ports 60

Redundant CXPs 1:1

Redundant power supply 1+1

Redundant fans 1+1. Short-term running when a single
fan becomes invalid at the ambient
temperature of 40°C (104°F) (one fan
module contains two fans)

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 85% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m


Table 3-45 Technical specifications of the CR8BM6BKPAC1
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI 21-inch; IEC 19-inch

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 88.9 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (3.50 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 335 mm x 585 mm x 390 mm (13.19
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 23.03 in. x 15.35 in.)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Chassis height [U] 2U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 6.4 kg (14.11 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 9.1 kg (20.07 lb)

Weight without packaging (full [CXP-160/CXP-160-B]AC: 11.35
configuration) [kg(lb)] kg(25.02 lb)
NOTE
The weight of a device can be estimated
based on the board configuration using
Info-Finder Hardware Configuration.

Weight with packaging (full [CXP-160/CXP-160-B]AC:
configuration) [kg(lb)] 14.09kg(31.06 lb)

Typical power consumption (with [CXP-160/CXP-160-B]AC Typical
configuration) [W] configuration 1: 2*CXP+1*FAN+2*AC
power+2*CR8D00L4XFC0 +
2*CR8D00EAGFC0 =209.68 W
[CXP-160/CXP-160-B]AC Typical
configuration 2: 2*CXP+1*FAN+2*AC
power
+2*CR8D00E1VBC0+1*CR8D00L4XFC0
+ 1*CR8D00EAGFC0 =220.07 W
NOTE
The power consumption of a device can be
estimated based on the board
configuration using Info-Finder Hardware
Configuration.

Typical heat dissipation (with [CXP-160/CXP-160-B]AC Typical
configuration) [BTU/hour] configuration 1: 2*CXP+1*FAN+2*AC
power+2*CR8D00L4XFC0 +
2*CR8D00EAGFC0 =666.28 BTU/hour
[CXP-160/CXP-160-B]AC Typical
configuration 2: 2*CXP+1*FAN+2*AC
power
+2*CR8D00E1VBC0+1*CR8D00L4XFC0
+ 1*CR8D00EAGFC0 =339.41 BTU/hour

MTBF [year] 116.61 year

MTTR [hour] 0.5 hour

Availability 0.999999511

Power supply mode AC

Rated input voltage [V] 200 V to 240 V/100 V to 127 V dual
live wires, supporting 240 V HVDC

Input voltage range [V] 90 V to 290 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Maximum input current [A] 10 A

Rated output power [W] 1500 W

Maximum input cable size [mm²] Standard C13 cable

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] ≥10 A

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction From left to right

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic < 55 dB(A)
power) [dB(A)]

Number of slots 9

Number of service board slots 4

Switching capacity 320 Gbit/s

Maximum number of physical ports on 70
the entire device

Maximum number of 100GE ports NA

Maximum number of 50GE ports 2

Maximum number of 40GE ports NA

Maximum number of 25GE ports 6

Maximum number of 10GE ports 14

Maximum number of GE ports 70

Maximum number of FE ports 70

Maximum number of electrical ports 40

Redundant CXPs 1:1

Redundant power supply 1+1

Redundant fans 1+1. Short-term running when a single
fan becomes invalid at the ambient
temperature of 40°C (104°F) (one fan
module contains two fans)

Long-term operating temperature –20°C to +55°C (–4°F to +131°F)
[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-
temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 85% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the
altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
must decrease by 1°C [1.8°F] for every
220 m [721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m



NO TE

● About condensation
The ability of air to contain moisture reduces as the temperature decreases. There is a
relationship between temperature and relative humidity. As the temperature decreases,
the air becomes more saturated with moisture, meaning the relative humidity increases.
But at a low enough temperature (called the dew point), the air can no longer contain
moisture, which is then precipitated as liquid water. Such water on the surface of
relevant equipment is called condensation.
● Hazards of condensation
When condensation mixes with dust inside the equipment, it forms conductive channels
that affect the electrical insulation of the equipment. As a result, a non-conductive area
of the equipment can become conductive, causing the equipment to malfunction.
● Conditions that cause condensation
Condensation is related to temperature changes and humidity. It occurs when the
temperature continues to decrease below the dew point at a given humidity. For
example, given that the relative humidity is 50% RH and the temperature is 25°C (77°F),
condensation occurs when the temperature decreases below 13.9°C (57.02°F).

3.2 Power

3.2.1 DP22PDC1K2A1 (Power Interface Board)
The device uses two PIUs, which work in 1+1 backup mode, for power supply.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-46 Basic information about the DP22PDC1K2A1
Item Details

Description Power Interface Board

Part Number 03025LUL

Model DP22PDC1K2A1

Remarks 1. To replace a DC power module,
disconnect the power input and then
remove it.
2. To replace a DC power cable, use
the puller on the connector to unlock
the cable, and then remove the cable.
If the power cable is directly removed,
the connector may be damaged.
3. DC power module and AC power
module cannot be used at the same
time.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-34 Appearance of the DP22PDC1K2A1


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03025LUL&productModel=DP22PDC1K2A1#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Figure 3-35 Panel of the DP22PDC1K2A1


1. Status indicator 2. Captive screw 3.NEG(-) port 4.RTN(+) port


Table 3-47 Indicators on the DP22PDC1K2A1
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

PWR Working Green Steady on Power input is
status available.
indicator
- Off Power input is
unavailable.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-48 Ports on the DP22PDC1K2A1

Port Description

NEG(-) -48 V/-60 V power input interface

RTN(+) BGND power input interface



Technical Specifications

Table 3-49 Technical specifications of the DP22PDC1K2A1

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 41.6 mm x 11 mm x 209 mm (1.64 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 0.43 in. x 8.23 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.13 kg (0.29 lb)

Number of inputs 1

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 30 A

Rated output voltage [V] -48 V/-60 V

Rated output current [A] 30 A

Rated output power [W] 1200 W

Power supply efficiency 0.99

Power dissipation Mode Air cooling

Type of power cables 4 mm² (0 to 10 meters)



3.2.2 PAC1K5S53-AL (1500W AC Power Module)

Overview

Table 3-50 Basic information about the PAC1K5S53-AL

Item Details

Description 1500W AC Power Module

Part Number 02131663

Model PAC1K5S53-AL

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Details

Remarks 1. Before replacing an AC power
module, you are advised to turn off
the power input switch.
2. DC power modules and AC power
modules cannot be used together.



Appearance

Figure 3-36 Appearance of the PAC1K5S53-AL


NO TE

Before inserting AC power modules into the chassis, install APIUCs (DP52APIUCA00).

Figure 3-37 Appearance of the APIUC


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02131663&productModel=PAC1K5S53-AL#matchRelation

Panel

Figure 3-38 Panel of the PAC1K5S53-AL


1.ON/OFF button 2.Power supply 3.AC power cable 4.Captive screw
status indicator connector

Table 3-51 Indicators on the PAC1K5S53-AL
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

PWR Working Green Steady on The power
status input is
indicator normal.

Green Blinks (on for A program is
0.1s and off being loaded
for 0.1s) online.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The power
supply is
abnormal. An
output fault,
overtemperat
ure protection
alarm, or
communicatio
n fault occurs.

- Off The power
module is
switched off
or the
hardware of
the power
module is
faulty.



Table 3-52 Buttons on the PAC1K5S53-AL

Silkscreen Name Description

ON ON button Press the ON button to
power on the power
module.

OFF OFF button Press the OFF button to
power off the power
module.



Table 3-53 Ports on the PAC1K5S53-AL

Port Description

Power cable connector C13 power cable interface.



Technical Specifications

Table 3-54 Technical specifications of the PAC1K5S53-AL

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 40 mm x 79.7 mm x 188 mm (1.57 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 3.14 in. x 7.4 in.)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 1 kg (2.2 lb)

Number of inputs 1

Rated input voltage [V] 200V to 240V/100V to 127V dual live
wires, support 240V HVDC

Input voltage range [V] AC: 90 V to 290 V
HVDC: 190 V to 290 V

Maximum input current [A] 10 A

Rated output voltage [V] 53.5 V

Rated output current [A] 28.04 A

Rated output power [W] 1500 W. In the 110 V AC scenario, the
output power can be 1500 W only
when dual live wires are used.

Power supply efficiency 0.92

Power dissipation Mode Air cooling

Type of power cables Standard C13 cable


Table 3-55 Technical specifications of the APIUC
Item Description

Dimensions (H x W x D) 40.1 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm (1.57 in. x 7.63
in. x 8.24 in.)

Weight 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)


3.2.3 PAC300S12-CL (300 W AC power module (left-to-right
airflow, air intake on the left side of the power module
panel))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-56 Basic information about the PAC300S12-CL
Item Details

Description 300 W AC power module (left-to-right
airflow, air intake on the left side of
the power module panel)

Part Number 02131692

Model PAC300S12-CL

Remarks The AC power module is hot
swappable.


Appearance

Figure 3-39 Appearance of the PAC300S12-CL


The device uses two PIUs, which work in 1+1 backup mode, for power supply.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02131692&productModel=PAC300S12-CL#matchRelation

Panel

Figure 3-40 Panel of the PAC300S12-CL


1. AC input port 2. Power handle 3. Captive screw 4. Status indicator

Table 3-57 Indicators on the PAC300S12-CL
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The power
status input is
indicator normal.

Green Blinks (on for A program is
0.1s and off being loaded
for 0.1s) online.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The power
module is
switched off
or the
hardware of
the power
module is
faulty.


Table 3-58 Ports on the PAC300S12-CL
Port Description

Power cable connector C13 power cable interface.


Technical Specifications

Table 3-59 Technical specifications of the PAC300S12-CL
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 40 mm × 202 mm × 40 mm (1.57 in. x
x D) [mm(in.)] 7.95 in. x 1.57 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Number of inputs 1

Rated input voltage [V] 100 V to 240 V AC, support 240 V
HVDC

Input voltage range [V] 90 V to 290 V AC, 190V to 290 V
HVDC

Maximum input current [A] 4 A (AC input), 2 A (240V HVDC input)

Rated output voltage [V] 12 V

Rated output power [W] 300 W

Power supply efficiency 92%

Power dissipation Mode Air cooling

Type of power cables Standard C13 cable




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.2.4 PDC260S12-CL (260W DC Power Module(Left to
Right,air enters from the left side of the power panel))

Overview

Table 3-60 Basic information about the PDC260S12-CL

Item Details

Description 260W DC Power Module(Left to
Right,air enters from the left side of
the power panel)

Part Number 02312UMC

Model PDC260S12-CL

Remarks The DC power module is hot
swappable.



Appearance

Figure 3-41 Appearance of the PDC260S12-CL


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

The device uses two PIUs, which work in 1+1 backup mode, for power supply.

Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02312UMC&productModel=PDC260S12-CL#matchRelation

Panel

Figure 3-42 Panel of the PDC260S12-CL


1. RTN(+) port 2. NEG(-) port 3. Power 4. Captive 5. Status
handle screw indicator


Table 3-61 Indicators on the PDC260S12-CL

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on the power
status input is
indicator normal.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The power
module is
switched off
or the
hardware of
the power
module is
faulty.



Table 3-62 Ports on the PDC260S12-CL

Port Description

NEG (-) -48 V/-60 V power input interface

RTN (+) BGND power input interface



Technical Specifications

Table 3-63 Technical specifications of the PDC260S12-CL

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 40 mm × 202 mm × 40 mm (1.57 in. x
x D) [mm(in.)] 7.95 in. x 1.57 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Number of inputs 1

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 10 A

Rated output voltage [V] 12 V

Rated output power [W] 260 W

Power supply efficiency 90%

Power dissipation Mode Air cooling

Type of power cables 2.5 mm^2 (0–8 m)



3.2.5 ETP4860-2KW-FE (AC Power Box)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-64 Basic information about the ETP4860-2KW-FE
Item Details

Description AC Power Box

Part Number 02313EAU

Model ETP4860-2KW-FE




NO TICE

● The external power system can connect to battery strings.
● If a battery string is used, connect the battery string to the battery circuit
breaker (do not connect it to other circuit breakers) and set related parameters
based on the actual situation of the battery string. Incorrectly setting basic
battery parameters may affect the battery charge and discharge management
and reduce the battery lifespan. For details about how to power on batteries,
see "Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-2KW-
FE)>Commissioning>Connecting the Battery Supply".
● If no battery string is connected to the power supply system, you must log in to
the power supply system to set Battery n Connected to No, and click Submit.
For details, see"Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-2KW-
FE)>Commissioning>SMU11B ".
● The BATT circuit breaker can be connected only to batteries and cannot be
connected to other devices.

Table 3-65 System configuration
Item System configuration

Subrack 1 U power system

Power Distribution Unit AC or DC input: M4 OT wiring terminal
(PDU) DC output: supports a maximum of two 63 A
circuit breakers, two 40 A circuit breakers, or one
16 A circuit breaker.
Battery route: one 50 A circuit breaker

Monitoring module SMU11B




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-43 Apperance of the ETP4860-2KW-FE


NO TE

The load circuit breaker is red if it is pressed down and green if it is not pressed down.

Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02313EAU&productModel=ETP4860-2KW-FE#matchRelation

Panel

Figure 3-44 ETP4860-2KW-FE panel


1. Ground 2. Input 3. 4. Rectifier 5. Load 6. Battery
screw terminals Monitoring module circuit circuit
module (converting breaker breaker
SMU11B AC power
(monitoring into stable
and DC power)
managing
the power
system)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-45 SMU11B monitoring module panel


1. Run indicator 2. Minor alarm indicator 3. Major alarm indicator

4. Wiring terminals 5. Communications port 6. Handle
COM

7. Position of the SN 8. Communications port -
code FE


Figure 3-46 Wiring terminals of the SMU11B monitoring module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


Table 3-66 Pin definitions for SIG1 wiring terminals
Pin Signal Description

1 DI1+ Dry contact input

6 DI1-

2 IO1+ Dry contact input/Dry contact output (When used as a
dry contact input, the alarm condition is as follows:
3 IO1- normal when open, alarm when closed. When used as
4 IO2+ a dry contact output, the alarm action is as follows:
open when normal, closed when alarm.)
5 IO2-

7 DI4+ Dry contact input

8 DI4-

9 DI5+

10 DI5-


Table 3-67 Pin definitions for SIG2 wiring terminals
Pin Signal Description

1 VD1 Battery midpoint voltage
detection port 1

6 VD2 Battery midpoint voltage
detection port 2

2 BTE Battery temperature
sensor port
3

4 ETE Ambient temperature
sensor port
5

7 GAT Door status sensor port

8

9 CAN+ CAN communications
port
10 CAN-




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-68 Communications port on the SMU11B

Communications Communications Communications Function
Port Parameter Protocol

COM Baud rate: 9600 Master/slave Connects to a
bit/s, 19200 bit/s, protocol Huawei NMS.
115200 bit/s
autonegotiation - Provides 12 V
power supply for
external devices.

FE 10M/100M SNMP Connects to a
autonegotiation third-party
management
system.

BIN protocol Connects to a
Huawei NMS.

HTTPS protocol Connects to a PC
and manages the
SMU through the
WebUI.

NOTE
All these ports are protected by a security mechanism.



Figure 3-47 Pins of the COM port on the SMU11B


Table 3-69 Pin definitions for the COM port on the SMU11B

Pin Signal Description

1 RS485+ RS485 data +

2 RS485- RS485 data -

3 12V Supply power

4 RS485+ RS485 data +

5 RS485- RS485 data -

6 SCL I2C clock

7 SDA I2C data

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Pin Signal Description

8 GND Ground


Figure 3-48 Pins of the FE port on the SMU11B


Table 3-70 Pin definitions for the FE port on the SMU11B
Pin Signal Description

1 TX+ Transmits data over FE.

2 TX-

3 RX+ Receives data over FE.

6 RX-

4, 5, 7 and 8 NA -


Figure 3-49 Rectifier module panel


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

1. Power indicator 2. Alarm indicator 3. Fault indicator

4. Locking latch 5. Handle -


The indicators on the EPTP4860-2KW-FE AC Power Box are classified into rectifier
indicators and monitoring module indicators. The following table describes the
indicators.

Table 3-71 Indicators on the ETP4860-2KW-FE
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Rectifier Green Steady on The rectifier
running has an AC
indicator power input.

Green Off ● The
rectifier
has no AC
power
input.
● The
rectifier is
faulty.

Green Blinking at The rectifier is
0.5 Hz being queried.

Green Blinking at 4 The rectifier is
Hz loading an
application
program.

- Rectifier Yellow Off No alarm is
alarm generated.
indicator


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Yellow Steady on ● The
rectifier
has
generated
an alarm
due to
ambient
overtempe
rature.
● The
rectifier
has
generated
an alarm
for
shutdown
due to
ambient
overtempe
rature or
undertemp
erature.
● The
rectifier is
protecting
itself
against AC
input
overvoltag
e or
undervolta
ge.
● The
rectifier is
hibernatin
g.

Yellow Blinking at The
0.5 Hz communicatio
n between
the rectifier
and the SMU
has been
interrupted.

- Rectifier fault Red Off The rectifier is
indicator running
properly.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on ● The
rectifier
has been
locked out
due to
output
overvoltag
e.
● The
rectifier
has no
output due
to an
internal
fault.

- SMU running Green Off The SMU is
indicator faulty or has
no power
input.

Green Blinking The SMU is
slowly (0.5 running and
Hz) communicatin
g with the
host properly.

Green Blinking fast The SMU is
(4 Hz) running
properly but
fails to
communicate
with the host
properly.

- SMU minor Yellow Off No minor
alarm alarm or
indicator warning is
generated.

Yellow Steady on A minor
alarm or
warning is
generated.

- SMU major Red Off No critical or
alarm major alarm
indicator is generated.

Red Steady on A critical or
major alarm
is generated.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



Technical Specifications

Table 3-72 Technical specifications of the ETP4860-2KW-FE
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 255 mm (1.72 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.4 in. x 10.04 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 340 mm x 615 mm x 465 mm (13.39
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 24.21 in. x 18.31 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 7.2 kg (15.87 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 15.6 kg (34.39 lb)

Cabinet installation standards ETSI 21-inch; IEC 19-inch

Hole distance for installing mounting 465 mm (18.31 in.)
brackets [mm(in.)]

Installation type Vertical or horizontal installation

Rated input voltage [V] 200 to 240V AC,support 240V/380V DC

Input voltage range [V] 85V AC to 300V AC/85V DC to 420V
DC

Rated output voltage [V] 53.5 V

Output voltage range [V] 42V DC to 58V DC

Maximum input current [A] 23 A

Maximum output current [A] 37 A

Number of inputs 1

Number of outputs 5

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] 32 A

Input terminal M4 OT terminal

Output terminal Cord end terminal

Long-term operating temperature -40°C to 65°C(-40°F to 149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] - 40°C to 70°C (- 40°F to 158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] 0 – 4000 m (When the altitude ranges
from 2000 m to 4000 m, the operating
temperature decreases by 1ºC for each
additional 200 m.)



3.2.6 ETP4860-4KW (AC Power Box)

Overview

Table 3-73 Basic information about the ETP4860-4KW

Item Details

Description AC Power Box

Part Number 02312QXK

Model ETP4860-4KW




NO TICE

● The external power system can connect to battery strings.
● If a battery string is used, connect the battery string to the battery circuit
breaker (do not connect it to other circuit breakers) and set related parameters
based on the actual situation of the battery string. Incorrectly setting basic
battery parameters may affect the battery charge and discharge management
and reduce the battery lifespan. For details about how to power on batteries,
see "Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-4KW)>Commissioning>Connecting
the Battery Supply".
● If no battery string is connected to the power supply system, you must log in to
the power supply system to set Battery n Connected to No, and click Submit.
For details, see"Installing Power Boxes
(ETP4860-4KW)>Commissioning>SMU11B ".
● The BATT circuit breaker can be connected only to batteries and cannot be
connected to other devices.


Table 3-74 System configuration

Item System configuration

Subrack 1 U power system


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item System configuration

Power Distribution Unit AC or DC input: M4 OT wiring terminal
(PDU) DC output: supports a maximum of two 63 A
circuit breakers, two 40 A circuit breakers, or one
16 A circuit breaker.
Battery route: one 50 A circuit breaker
NOTE
Only one set of batteries is supported, and the total
battery capacity should not exceed 250 AH (50 A battery
circuit breaker, 0.15 charge current limit coefficient, with
circuit breaker derating taken into account). If the
maximum load power exceeds 1700 W, battery
configuration is not supported.

Monitoring module SMU11B

Appearance

Figure 3-50 Apperance of the ETP4860-4KW


NO TE

The load circuit breaker is red if it is pressed down and green if it is not pressed down.

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02312QXK&productModel=ETP4860-4KW#matchRelation

Panel

Figure 3-51 ETP4860-4KW panel


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

1. Ground 2. Input 3. 4. Rectifier 5. Load 6. Battery
screw terminals Monitoring module circuit circuit
module (converting breaker breaker
SMU11B AC power
(monitoring into stable
and DC power)
managing
the power
system)

Figure 3-52 SMU11B monitoring module panel


1. Run indicator 2. Minor alarm indicator 3. Major alarm indicator

4. Wiring terminals 5. Communications port 6. Handle
COM

7. Position of the SN 8. Communications port -
code FE




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-53 Wiring terminals of the SMU11B monitoring module


Table 3-75 Pin definitions for SIG1 wiring terminals

Pin Signal Description

1 DI1+ Dry contact input

6 DI1-

2 IO1+ Dry contact input/Dry contact output (When used as a
dry contact input, the alarm condition is as follows:
3 IO1- normal when open, alarm when closed. When used as
4 IO2+ a dry contact output, the alarm action is as follows:
open when normal, closed when alarm.)
5 IO2-

7 DI4+ Dry contact input

8 DI4-

9 DI5+

10 DI5-



Table 3-76 Pin definitions for SIG2 wiring terminals

Pin Signal Description

1 VD1 Battery midpoint voltage
detection port 1

6 VD2 Battery midpoint voltage
detection port 2

2 BTE Battery temperature
sensor port
3

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Pin Signal Description

4 ETE Ambient temperature
sensor port
5

7 GAT Door status sensor port

8

9 CAN+ CAN communications
port
10 CAN-


Table 3-77 Communications port on the SMU11B
Communications Communications Communications Function
Port Parameter Protocol

COM Baud rate: 9600 Master/slave Connects to a
bit/s, 19200 bit/s, protocol Huawei NMS.
115200 bit/s
autonegotiation - Provides 12 V
power supply for
external devices.

FE 10M/100M SNMP Connects to a
autonegotiation third-party
management
system.

BIN protocol Connects to a
Huawei NMS.

HTTPS protocol Connects to a PC
and manages the
SMU through the
WebUI.

NOTE
All these ports are protected by a security mechanism.



Figure 3-54 Pins of the COM port on the SMU11B


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-78 Pin definitions for the COM port on the SMU11B
Pin Signal Description

1 RS485+ RS485 data +

2 RS485- RS485 data -

3 12V Supply power

4 RS485+ RS485 data +

5 RS485- RS485 data -

6 SCL I2C clock

7 SDA I2C data

8 GND Ground


Figure 3-55 Pins of the FE port on the SMU11B


Table 3-79 Pin definitions for the FE port on the SMU11B
Pin Signal Description

1 TX+ Transmits data over FE.

2 TX-

3 RX+ Receives data over FE.

6 RX-

4, 5, 7 and 8 NA -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-56 Rectifier module panel


1. Power indicator 2. Alarm indicator 3. Fault indicator

4. Locking latch 5. Handle -


The indicators on the EPTP4860-4KW AC Power Box are classified into rectifier
indicators and monitoring module indicators. The following table describes the
indicators.

Table 3-80 Indicators on the ETP4860-4KW
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Rectifier Green Steady on The rectifier
running has an AC
indicator power input.

Green Off ● The
rectifier
has no AC
power
input.
● The
rectifier is
faulty.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blinking at The rectifier is
0.5 Hz being queried.

Green Blinking at 4 The rectifier is
Hz loading an
application
program.

- Rectifier Yellow Off No alarm is
alarm generated.
indicator
Yellow Steady on ● The
rectifier
has
generated
an alarm
due to
ambient
overtempe
rature.
● The
rectifier
has
generated
an alarm
for
shutdown
due to
ambient
overtempe
rature or
undertemp
erature.
● The
rectifier is
protecting
itself
against AC
input
overvoltag
e or
undervolta
ge.
● The
rectifier is
hibernatin
g.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Yellow Blinking at The
0.5 Hz communicatio
n between
the rectifier
and the SMU
has been
interrupted.

- Rectifier fault Red Off The rectifier is
indicator running
properly.

Red Steady on ● The
rectifier
has been
locked out
due to
output
overvoltag
e.
● The
rectifier
has no
output due
to an
internal
fault.

- SMU running Green Off The SMU is
indicator faulty or has
no power
input.

Green Blinking The SMU is
slowly (0.5 running and
Hz) communicatin
g with the
host properly.

Green Blinking fast The SMU is
(4 Hz) running
properly but
fails to
communicate
with the host
properly.

- SMU minor Yellow Off No minor
alarm alarm or
indicator warning is
generated.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Yellow Steady on A minor
alarm or
warning is
generated.

- SMU major Red Off No critical or
alarm major alarm
indicator is generated.

Red Steady on A critical or
major alarm
is generated.


Technical Specifications

Table 3-81 Technical specifications of the ETP4860-4KW
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 255 mm (1.72 in.
x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.4 in. x 10.04 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 340 mm x 615 mm x 465 mm (13.39
D) [mm(in.)] in. x 24.21 in. x 18.31 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 7.2 kg (15.87 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 15.6 kg (34.39 lb)

Cabinet installation standards ETSI 21-inch; IEC 19-inch

Hole distance for installing mounting 465 mm (18.31 in.)
brackets [mm(in.)]

Installation type Vertical or horizontal installation

Rated input voltage [V] 200 to 240V AC,support 240V/380V DC

Input voltage range [V] 85V AC to 300V AC/85V DC to 420V
DC

Rated output voltage [V] 53.5 V

Output voltage range [V] 42V DC to 58V DC

Maximum input current [A] 23 A

Maximum output current [A] 74 A

Number of inputs 1

Number of outputs 5

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] 32 A

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Input terminal M4 OT terminal

Output terminal Cord end terminal

Long-term operating temperature -40°C to 65°C(-40°F to 149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] - 40°C to 70°C (- 40°F to 158°F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] 0 to 4000 m (When the altitude
ranges from 2000 m to 4000 m, the
operating temperature decreases by
1ºC for each additional 200 m.)



3.3 Fan

This section describes the appearance, functions, and technical specifications of
the fan module.

3.3.1 CR8MM60FBXC0 (NetEngine 8000 M6 Fan Box)

Overview

Table 3-82 Basic information about the CR8MM60FBXC0

Item Details

Description NetEngine 8000 M6 Fan Box

Part Number 03033LWR

Model CR8MM60FBXC0

Remarks To ensure that the system provides
better heat dissipation performance
during main control board startup, the
fan speed increases to at least 50% of
the full speed as long as one main
control board restarts. The system will
automatically decrease the fan speed
after main control board registration is
completed.



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-57 Appearance of the CR8MM60FBXC0


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033LWR&productModel=CR8MM60FBXC0#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Figure 3-58 Panel of the CR8MM60FBXC0


1.Status indicator 2.ESD jack

Table 3-83 Indicators on the CR8MM60FBXC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

FAN Working Green Steady on the fan
status module is
indicator working
normally.

Red Steady on the fan
module fails.

Orange Steady on the fan
module is not
registered.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off the fan
module is not
powered on
or the fan
hardware is
faulty.



Table 3-84 Ports on the CR8MM60FBXC0

Port Description

ESD The ESD wrist strap should be
connected to this jack for proper
grounding of the human body.



Technical Specifications

Table 3-85 Technical specifications of the CR8MM60FBXC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 85.5 mm x 34.9 mm x 209 mm (3.37
x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 1.37 in. x 8.23 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Number of fans 2

Typical power consumption [W] 5 W



3.4 Boards
This chapter describes the boards of the device.

NO TE

The board appearance in the figure is for reference only.
3.4.1 Rules for Numbering Slots and Interfaces

Numbering Rule of Service Interfaces of the NetEngine 8000 M6
A service interface on a PIC is numbered in the format of 0/PIC slot number/
interface number.
● PIC slot number

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Slot ID of a PIC where the service interface resides. For DC chassis, the value is
an integer ranging from 1 to 6. For AC chassis, the value is 2, 4 to 6.
● Interface number
ID of the service interface on a PIC. The value is an integer ranging from 0 to
the maximum number of interfaces on the PIC.
Figure 3-59 shows how a service interface on a PIC is numbered.

Figure 3-59 Numbering rule of service interfaces on the NetEngine 8000 M6


Table 3-86 NetEngine 8000 M6 slot description

Slot Quanti Remarks
ty

DC: 1-6 DC: 6 Slots for PICs, which include HICs, FICs and the
AC: 2, 4-6 AC: 4 other subcards.

7, 8 2 Slot for the CXPs

DC: slot9, slot10 2 Slots for power modules in 1+1 backup mode
AC: slot1, slot 3

11 1 Slot for a fan module



Port Numbering of CXPs

When configuring and checking an CXP's MGMT port, its number is 0/0/0.
However, in alarms and logs, it is displayed as "CXP slot number/0/0".
3.4.2 Board Code

The board code of a board is provided on its front panel and contains basic
information about the board, including the BOM code and manufacture year and
month.

A board code indicates the characteristic information of a board and varies by
board.

● For boards with the BOM code beginning with 0303, the coding rules are as
follows (the Code 128B system is used):
Rightmost six digits of BOM code (six digits) + Manufacturer (two digits) +
Year (one digit) + Month (one digit) + Serial number (six digits)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-60 Board codes


NO TE

The board codes in the figure are used for reference only and may differ from codes
on actual devices.

Table 3-87 Description of board codes
Item Description

Rightmost six digits of BOM code Indicates the rightmost six digits of
a board's eight-digit BOM code. The
rightmost six digits plus 03 on the
left constitute the BOM code.

Manufacturer Indicates the vendor of the board.
"10" indicates Huawei.

Manufacture year Indicates the last digit of the year
when the board was manufactured.
Before 2010, digits were used (for
example, "4" indicates 2004). From
2010 onwards, letters (excluding I
and O) are used (for example, "A"
indicates 2010, "B" indicates 2011,
and so on).
NOTE
The letters A to Z (excluding I and O
due to their similarity with digits 1 and
0) are used to indicate years in
ascending order.
For example, H indicates 2017 and J
indicates 2018, with the letter I being
skipped.

Manufacture month Indicates the month when the board
was manufactured. The value ranges
from 1 to 9 for January to
September, and from A to C for
October to December.

Serial number Indicates the production serial
number of a board. The value
ranges from 000001 to 999999.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Description

Environmental protection property Indicates whether a board is
environmentally friendly. The value
Y indicates yes; N indicates no.

Board Model Indicates the model of the board.

● For boards with the BOM code that does not begin with 0303, the coding
rules are as follows (the Code 128B system is used):
Category code (2 digits) + BOM code (8 digits) + Manufacturer (2 digits) +
Year (1 digit) + Month (1 digit) + Serial number (6 digits)

Figure 3-61 Board codes


NO TE

The board codes in the figure are used for reference only and may differ from codes
on actual devices.

Table 3-88 Description of board codes
Item Description

Category code The value is fixed to 21, indicating
the category code of a component
or module.

BOM code Indicates the BOM code of the
board.

Manufacturer Indicates the vendor of the board.
"10" indicates Huawei.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Description

Manufacture year Indicates the last digit of the year
when the board was manufactured.
Before 2010, digits were used (for
example, "4" indicates 2004). From
2010 onwards, letters (excluding I
and O) are used (for example, "A"
indicates 2010, "B" indicates 2011,
and so on).
NOTE
The letters A to Z (excluding I and O
due to their similarity with digits 1 and
0) are used to indicate years in
ascending order.
For example, H indicates 2017 and J
indicates 2018, with the letter I being
skipped.

Manufacture month Indicates the month when the board
was manufactured. The value ranges
from 1 to 9 for January to
September, and from A to C for
October to December.

Serial number Indicates the production serial
number of a board. The value
ranges from 000001 to 999999.

Environmental protection property Indicates whether a board is
environmentally friendly. The value
Y indicates yes; N indicates no.

Board Model Indicates the model of the board.


3.4.3 CXP

3.4.3.1 CR8DCXP160C0 (03033JTY: System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-
protocol Process Unit (CXP-160))

Overview

Table 3-89 Basic information about the CR8DCXP160C0

Item Details

Description System Control,Cross-connect and
Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160)

Part Number 03033JTY

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Details

Model CR8DCXP160C0

Card type CXP

Silkscreen CXP-160


Appearance

Figure 3-62 Appearance of the CR8DCXP160C0


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JTY&productModel=CR8DCXP160C0#matchRelation

Indicators and Buttons

Table 3-90 Indicators on the CR8DCXP160C0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The device
generates a
hardware
alarm. You
can run the
display alarm
hardware
command to
view the
hardware
alarm type.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

PROG Program Green Steady on The board
running software is
indicator being
initialized.
The board
software is
normally
initialized,
and the board
software is
running
normally.

Red Steady on The memory
self-check
fails.
The board
software or
the logic file
is lost.
Loading of
the board
software fails.

Green On for 100 Loading of
ms and off for the board
100 ms software is in
alternately process.

Green On for 300 The BIOS is
ms and off for guiding the
300 ms upper-layer
alternately software.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red On for 100 The BIOS self-
ms and off for check fails.
100 ms
alternately

- Off No power is
input.

SYNC Synchronizati Green Steady on The system
on status clock works in
indicator free-run
mode, and no
priority list is
set for the
system clocks
(only internal
clock sources
are listed by
default).
The system
clock works in
tracing mode
and is tracing
a clock source
other than
the internal
clock sources
in the priority
list.
The system
clock works in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, and
the PTP time
and system
clock are
being traced.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The system
clock priority
list is set. All
the clock
sources,
however, are
lost except for
the internal
clock sources.
The clock
works in
holdover
mode or free-
run mode.
The system
clock is
working in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, but
no
synchronizatio
n source is
available. The
system clock
and PTP time
are working
in holdover or
free-run
mode.

ACTX Active/ Green Steady on The board is
standby in the
status working
indicator for switching
the cross- state.
connect or
clock board - Off The board is
in the
protection
switching
state.

ACTC Control status Green Steady on The board is
indicator in the
working
control state.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green On for 100 The data of
ms and off for the
100 ms equipment is
alternately backed up in
batch.

- Off The board is
in the
protection
control state.

ALM Alarm Red Steady on Critical
indicator alarms are
generated.

Orange Steady on Major, minor
alarms are
generated.

- Off No alarms are
generated in
the
equipment.

ETH/OAM ETH/OAM Green Steady on If the
indicator indicator is
steady on, the
link is normal.

Orange Blink If the
indicator
blinks, data is
being
transmitted.

- Off If the
indicator is
off, the link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-91 Buttons on the CR8DCXP160C0
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button You can press the RST
button to reset the NE or
restore the factory
settings of the NE.
The procedure is as
follows:
To reset the NE, press
the RST button and
release it.
To restore factory
settings, press and hold
the RST button. This
operation will clear the
NE database and system
parameter configurations
and cannot be restored.
Exercise caution when
you perform the
following operations:
1. Press and release the
RST button to restart the
NE.
2.When the PROG
indicator blinks (the
blinking frequency is
about 1 second and the
time window is about 15
seconds), press and hold
the RST button.
3.Wait for no longer
than 2 minutes till both
the STAT and PROG
indicators blink (the time
window is 5 seconds).
Then release the RST
button immediately.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
1. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
will be cleared. You are
advised to periodically
back up the configuration
file.
2. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, to
prevent the cleared
configuration from being
synchronized again
between the active and
standby main control
boards, remove one main
control board first in a
dual-main control board
chassis to ensure that the
configuration file is cleared
in a single-main control
board scenario. Perform
the same operations on
the other main control
board.
3. When pressing the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, you only
need to pay attention to
the STAT and PROG
indicators. Other indicators
may vary depending on
the product model.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-92 Ports on the CR8DCXP160C0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M ETH/OAM
autosensing Management
Ethernet network Cables
management port
or non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD/RS485 RJ45 Clock/Time/RS485 1-into-2 clock
input/output port cable + clock
(RS485 is a cable (external
reserved port). clock mode,
delivery-ready):
applicable to the
CLK mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + clock
cable (external
clock/external
time mode,
prepared onsite):
applicable to the
CLK or TOD mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + Ethernet
cable: applicable
to the TOD mode

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm Input/
output interface Output Cables

USB Type A USB port -
(reserved)

CLK/TEST SMA Clock test Coaxial cable
interface




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-93 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface


Table 3-94 Pins of the CLK/TOD/RS-485 interface
Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

1 Receive negative of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK negative of cified cified ed
the CLK

2 Receive positive of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK positive of cified cified ed
the CLK


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

3 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
negative for the negati t negative
1PPS signal ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

4 Receive negative of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK negative of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

5 Receive positive of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK positive of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

6 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
positive for the positiv t positive
1PPS signal e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

7 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
negative for the negati t negative
time information ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

8 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
positive for the positiv t positive
time information e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

NOTE
When this interface is used as a TOD interface, it must be used with a dedicated clock
cable.For details, see "Cables" in the Hardware Description.



Table 3-95 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front View Pin Usage

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output


Functions and Features

Table 3-96 Functions and features of the CR8DCXP160C0
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Data forwarding: The CXP is the core
of service processing in the entire
system, and is connected to all
subcards through data channels.
Control and management: Through
the management channels between
main control boards and the subcards,
the main control boards can manage
subcards and transmit routing protocol
data.
The line rate capability is 320 Gbit/
s@256 bytes (bidirectional).

Reliability and availability Hot swappable; 1:1 backup mode.

Restrictions and remarks The board cannot work with the CXPs
of other models.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-97 Technical specifications of the CR8DCXP160C0
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 22.4 mm x 193.8 mm x 209 mm (0.88
x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 7.63 in. x 8.23 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 51.45 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 166.93 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 8GB

Storage 4GB NandFlash


3.4.3.2 CR8DCXP160C0 (03033JTY-001: System Control,Cross-connect and
Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160))

Overview

Table 3-98 Basic information about the CR8DCXP160C0
Item Details

Description System Control,Cross-connect and
Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160)

Part Number 03033JTY-001

Model CR8DCXP160C0

Card type CXP

Silkscreen CXP-160




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-63 Appearance of the CR8DCXP160C0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JTY-001&productModel=CR8DCXP160C0#matchRelation

Indicators and Buttons

Table 3-99 Indicators on the CR8DCXP160C0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The device
generates a
hardware
alarm. You
can run the
display alarm
hardware
command to
view the
hardware
alarm type.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

PROG Program Green Steady on The board
running software is
indicator being
initialized.
The board
software is
normally
initialized,
and the board
software is
running
normally.

Red Steady on The memory
self-check
fails.
The board
software or
the logic file
is lost.
Loading of
the board
software fails.

Green On for 100 Loading of
ms and off for the board
100 ms software is in
alternately process.

Green On for 300 The BIOS is
ms and off for guiding the
300 ms upper-layer
alternately software.

Red On for 100 The BIOS self-
ms and off for check fails.
100 ms
alternately

- Off No power is
input.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

SYNC Synchronizati Green Steady on The system
on status clock works in
indicator free-run
mode, and no
priority list is
set for the
system clocks
(only internal
clock sources
are listed by
default).
The system
clock works in
tracing mode
and is tracing
a clock source
other than
the internal
clock sources
in the priority
list.
The system
clock works in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, and
the PTP time
and system
clock are
being traced.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The system
clock priority
list is set. All
the clock
sources,
however, are
lost except for
the internal
clock sources.
The clock
works in
holdover
mode or free-
run mode.
The system
clock is
working in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, but
no
synchronizatio
n source is
available. The
system clock
and PTP time
are working
in holdover or
free-run
mode.

ACTX Active/ Green Steady on The board is
standby in the
status working
indicator for switching
the cross- state.
connect or
clock board - Off The board is
in the
protection
switching
state.

ACTC Control status Green Steady on The board is
indicator in the
working
control state.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green On for 100 The data of
ms and off for the
100 ms equipment is
alternately backed up in
batch.

- Off The board is
in the
protection
control state.

ALM Alarm Red Steady on Critical
indicator alarms are
generated.

Orange Steady on Major, minor
alarms are
generated.

- Off No alarms are
generated in
the
equipment.

ETH/OAM ETH/OAM Green Steady on If the
indicator indicator is
steady on, the
link is normal.

Orange Blink If the
indicator
blinks, data is
being
transmitted.

- Off If the
indicator is
off, the link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-100 Buttons on the CR8DCXP160C0
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button You can press the RST
button to reset the NE or
restore the factory
settings of the NE.
The procedure is as
follows:
To reset the NE, press
the RST button and
release it.
To restore factory
settings, press and hold
the RST button. This
operation will clear the
NE database and system
parameter configurations
and cannot be restored.
Exercise caution when
you perform the
following operations:
1. Press and release the
RST button to restart the
NE.
2.When the PROG
indicator blinks (the
blinking frequency is
about 1 second and the
time window is about 15
seconds), press and hold
the RST button.
3.Wait for no longer
than 2 minutes till both
the STAT and PROG
indicators blink (the time
window is 5 seconds).
Then release the RST
button immediately.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
1. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
will be cleared. You are
advised to periodically
back up the configuration
file.
2. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, to
prevent the cleared
configuration from being
synchronized again
between the active and
standby main control
boards, remove one main
control board first in a
dual-main control board
chassis to ensure that the
configuration file is cleared
in a single-main control
board scenario. Perform
the same operations on
the other main control
board.
3. When pressing the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, you only
need to pay attention to
the STAT and PROG
indicators. Other indicators
may vary depending on
the product model.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-101 Ports on the CR8DCXP160C0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M ETH/OAM
autosensing Management
Ethernet network Cables
management port
or non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD/RS485 RJ45 Clock/Time/RS485 1-into-2 clock
input/output port cable + clock
(RS485 is a cable (external
reserved port). clock mode,
delivery-ready):
applicable to the
CLK mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + clock
cable (external
clock/external
time mode,
prepared onsite):
applicable to the
CLK or TOD mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + Ethernet
cable: applicable
to the TOD mode

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm Input/
output interface Output Cables

USB Type A USB port -
(reserved)

CLK/TEST SMA Clock test Coaxial cable
interface




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-102 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface


Table 3-103 Pins of the CLK/TOD/RS-485 interface
Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

1 Receive negative of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK negative of cified cified ed
the CLK

2 Receive positive of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK positive of cified cified ed
the CLK


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

3 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
negative for the negati t negative
1PPS signal ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

4 Receive negative of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK negative of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

5 Receive positive of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK positive of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

6 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
positive for the positiv t positive
1PPS signal e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

7 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
negative for the negati t negative
time information ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

8 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
positive for the positiv t positive
time information e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

NOTE
When this interface is used as a TOD interface, it must be used with a dedicated clock
cable.For details, see "Cables" in the Hardware Description.



Table 3-104 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front View Pin Usage

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output


Functions and Features

Table 3-105 Functions and features of the CR8DCXP160C0
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Data forwarding: The CXP is the core
of service processing in the entire
system, and is connected to all
subcards through data channels.
Control and management: Through
the management channels between
main control boards and the subcards,
the main control boards can manage
subcards and transmit routing protocol
data.
The line rate capability is 320 Gbit/
s@256 bytes (bidirectional).

Reliability and availability Hot swappable; 1:1 backup mode.

Restrictions and remarks The board cannot work with the CXPs
of other models.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-106 Technical specifications of the CR8DCXP160C0
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 22.4 mm x 193.8 mm x 209 mm (0.88
x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 7.63 in. x 8.23 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 51.45 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 166.93 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 8GB

Storage 4GB NandFlash


3.4.3.3 CR8DCXP160C0 (03034USW: System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-
protocol Process Unit (CXP-160))

Overview

Table 3-107 Basic information about the CR8DCXP160C0
Item Details

Description System Control,Cross-connect and
Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160)

Part Number 03034USW

Model CR8DCXP160C0

Card type CXP

Silkscreen CXP-160




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-64 Appearance of the CR8DCXP160C0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034USW&productModel=CR8DCXP160C0#matchRelation

Indicators and Buttons

Table 3-108 Indicators on the CR8DCXP160C0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The device
generates a
hardware
alarm. You
can run the
display alarm
hardware
command to
view the
hardware
alarm type.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

PROG Program Green Steady on The board
running software is
indicator being
initialized.
The board
software is
normally
initialized,
and the board
software is
running
normally.

Red Steady on The memory
self-check
fails.
The board
software or
the logic file
is lost.
Loading of
the board
software fails.

Green On for 100 Loading of
ms and off for the board
100 ms software is in
alternately process.

Green On for 300 The BIOS is
ms and off for guiding the
300 ms upper-layer
alternately software.

Red On for 100 The BIOS self-
ms and off for check fails.
100 ms
alternately

- Off No power is
input.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

SYNC Synchronizati Green Steady on The system
on status clock works in
indicator free-run
mode, and no
priority list is
set for the
system clocks
(only internal
clock sources
are listed by
default).
The system
clock works in
tracing mode
and is tracing
a clock source
other than
the internal
clock sources
in the priority
list.
The system
clock works in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, and
the PTP time
and system
clock are
being traced.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The system
clock priority
list is set. All
the clock
sources,
however, are
lost except for
the internal
clock sources.
The clock
works in
holdover
mode or free-
run mode.
The system
clock is
working in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, but
no
synchronizatio
n source is
available. The
system clock
and PTP time
are working
in holdover or
free-run
mode.

ACTX Active/ Green Steady on The board is
standby in the
status working
indicator for switching
the cross- state.
connect or
clock board - Off The board is
in the
protection
switching
state.

ACTC Control status Green Steady on The board is
indicator in the
working
control state.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green On for 100 The data of
ms and off for the
100 ms equipment is
alternately backed up in
batch.

- Off The board is
in the
protection
control state.

ALM Alarm Red Steady on Critical
indicator alarms are
generated.

Orange Steady on Major, minor
alarms are
generated.

- Off No alarms are
generated in
the
equipment.

ETH/OAM ETH/OAM Green Steady on If the
indicator indicator is
steady on, the
link is normal.

Orange Blink If the
indicator
blinks, data is
being
transmitted.

- Off If the
indicator is
off, the link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-109 Buttons on the CR8DCXP160C0
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button You can press the RST
button to reset the NE or
restore the factory
settings of the NE.
The procedure is as
follows:
To reset the NE, press
the RST button and
release it.
To restore factory
settings, press and hold
the RST button. This
operation will clear the
NE database and system
parameter configurations
and cannot be restored.
Exercise caution when
you perform the
following operations:
1. Press and release the
RST button to restart the
NE.
2.When the PROG
indicator blinks (the
blinking frequency is
about 1 second and the
time window is about 15
seconds), press and hold
the RST button.
3.Wait for no longer
than 2 minutes till both
the STAT and PROG
indicators blink (the time
window is 5 seconds).
Then release the RST
button immediately.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
1. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
will be cleared. You are
advised to periodically
back up the configuration
file.
2. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, to
prevent the cleared
configuration from being
synchronized again
between the active and
standby main control
boards, remove one main
control board first in a
dual-main control board
chassis to ensure that the
configuration file is cleared
in a single-main control
board scenario. Perform
the same operations on
the other main control
board.
3. When pressing the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, you only
need to pay attention to
the STAT and PROG
indicators. Other indicators
may vary depending on
the product model.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-110 Ports on the CR8DCXP160C0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M ETH/OAM
autosensing Management
Ethernet network Cables
management port
or non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD/RS485 RJ45 Clock/Time/RS485 1-into-2 clock
input/output port cable + clock
(RS485 is a cable (external
reserved port). clock mode,
delivery-ready):
applicable to the
CLK mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + clock
cable (external
clock/external
time mode,
prepared onsite):
applicable to the
CLK or TOD mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + Ethernet
cable: applicable
to the TOD mode

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm Input/
output interface Output Cables

USB Type A USB port -
(reserved)

CLK/TEST SMA Clock test Coaxial cable
interface




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-111 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface


Table 3-112 Pins of the CLK/TOD/RS-485 interface
Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

1 Receive negative of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK negative of cified cified ed
the CLK

2 Receive positive of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK positive of cified cified ed
the CLK


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

3 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
negative for the negati t negative
1PPS signal ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

4 Receive negative of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK negative of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

5 Receive positive of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK positive of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

6 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
positive for the positiv t positive
1PPS signal e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

7 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
negative for the negati t negative
time information ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

8 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
positive for the positiv t positive
time information e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

NOTE
When this interface is used as a TOD interface, it must be used with a dedicated clock
cable.For details, see "Cables" in the Hardware Description.



Table 3-113 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front View Pin Usage

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output


Functions and Features

Table 3-114 Functions and features of the CR8DCXP160C0
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Data forwarding: The CXP is the core
of service processing in the entire
system, and is connected to all
subcards through data channels.
Control and management: Through
the management channels between
IPUs and the subcards, the IPUs can
manage subcards and transmit routing
protocol data.
The line rate capability is 320 Gbit/
s@256 bytes (bidirectional).

Reliability and availability Hot swappable; 1:1 backup mode.

Restrictions and remarks The board cannot work with the CXPs
of other models.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-115 Technical specifications of the CR8DCXP160C0
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 22.4 mm x 193.8 mm x 209 mm (0.88
x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 7.63 in. x 8.23 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 51.45 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 166.93 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 8GB

Storage 4GB NandFlash


3.4.3.4 CR8DCXP160C0 (03034VTX: System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-
protocol Process Unit (CXP-160))

Overview

Table 3-116 Basic information about the CR8DCXP160C0
Item Details

Description System Control,Cross-connect and
Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160)

Part Number 03034VTX

Model CR8DCXP160C0

Card type CXP

Silkscreen CXP-160




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-65 Appearance of the CR8DCXP160C0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034VTX&productModel=CR8DCXP160C0#matchRelation

Indicators and Buttons

Table 3-117 Indicators on the CR8DCXP160C0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on A hardware
alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

PROG Program Green Steady on The board
status software is
indicator being
initialized or
is successfully
initialized and
is running
properly.

Red Steady on The memory
self-check
fails.
The board
software or
logic file is
lost.
The board
software fails
to be loaded.

Green Blinks on and The board
off at 100 ms software is
intervals being loaded.

Green Blinks on and The BIOS is
off at 300 ms interacting
intervals with the
upper-layer
software.

Red Blinks on and The BIOS self-
off at 100 ms check fails.
intervals

- Off The board is
not powered
on.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

SYNC Clock Green Steady on The system
synchronizatio clock works in
n indicator free-run
mode, and no
priority list is
set for the
system clocks
(only internal
clock sources
are listed by
default).
The system
clock works in
tracing mode
and is tracing
a clock source
other than
the internal
clock sources
in the priority
list.
The system
clock works in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, and
the PTP time
and system
clock are
being traced.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The system
clock priority
list is set, but
all the clock
sources
except the
internal clock
source are
lost. The clock
works in
holdover or
free-run
mode.
The system
clock is
working in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, but
no
synchronizatio
n source is
available. The
system clock
and PTP time
are working
in holdover or
free-run
mode.

ACTX Active/ Green Steady on The board is
standby in the active
status state on the
indicator for service plane.
the cross-
connect or - Off The board is
clock board in the standby
state on the
service plane.

ACTC Control status Green Steady on The board is
indicator in the active
control state.

Green Blinks on and The data of
off at 100 ms the device is
intervals backed up in
batch.

- Off The board is
in the standby
control state.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

ALM Alarm Red Steady on Device-level
indicator critical alarms
exist.

Orange Steady on A device-level
major or
minor alarm
exists.

- Off There is no
equipment-
level alarm.

ETH/OAM ETH/OAM Green Steady on The link is up.
indicator
Orange Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-118 Buttons on the CR8DCXP160C0
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Board reset button You can press the RST
button to reset the NE or
restore the factory
settings of the NE.
The procedure is as
follows:
To reset the NE, press
the RST button and
release it.
To restore factory
settings, press and hold
down the RST button.
This operation will clear
the NE database and
system parameter
configurations and
cannot be restored.
Exercise caution when
you perform the
following operations:
1.Press the RST button to
restart the NE.
2.When the PROG
indicator blinks (the
blinking frequency is
about 1 second and the
time window is about 15
seconds), press and hold
down the RST button.
3.Wait for no longer
than 2 minutes till both
the STAT and PROG
indicators blink (the time
window is 5 seconds).
Then release the RST
button immediately.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
1. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
will be cleared. You are
advised to periodically
back up the configuration
file.
2. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, to
prevent the cleared
configuration from being
synchronized again
between the active and
standby main control
boards, remove one main
control board first in a
dual-main control board
chassis to ensure that the
configuration file is cleared
in a single-main control
board scenario. Perform
the same operations on
the other main control
board.
3. When pressing the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, you only
need to pay attention to
the STAT and PROG
indicators. Other indicators
may vary depending on
the product model.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-119 Ports on the CR8DCXP160C0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M ETH/OAM
autosensing management
Ethernet network cable
management port
or non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD/RS485 RJ45 Clock/Time/RS485 1-into-2 clock
input/output port cable + clock
(RS485 is a cable (external
reserved port). clock mode,
delivery-ready):
applicable to the
CLK mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + clock
cable (external
clock/external
time mode,
prepared onsite):
applicable to the
CLK or TOD mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + Ethernet
cable: applicable
to the TOD mode

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm input/
output interface output cable

USB Type A USB port -
(reserved)

CLK/TEST SMA Clock test port Coaxial cable




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-120 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface


Table 3-121 Pins of the CLK/TOD/RS-485 interface
Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

1 Receive negative of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK negative of cified cified ed
the CLK

2 Receive positive of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK positive of cified cified ed
the CLK


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

3 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
negative for the negati t negative
1PPS signal ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

4 Receive negative of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK negative of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

5 Receive positive of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK positive of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

6 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
positive for the positiv t positive
1PPS signal e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

7 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
negative for the negati t negative
time information ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

8 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
positive for the positiv t positive
time information e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

NOTE
When this interface is used as a TOD interface, it must be used with a dedicated clock
cable.For details, see "Cables" in the Hardware Description.



Table 3-122 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front View Pin Usage

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output



Functions and Features

Table 3-123 Functions and features of the CR8DCXP160C0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Data forwarding: The CXP is the core
of service processing in the system and
is connected to all subcards through
data channels.
Control and management: The CXP
manages subcards and transmits
routing protocol data through
management channels.
Supports 320 Gbit/s@256 bytes
(bidirectional).

Reliability and availability Hot swappable; 1:1 backup mode.

Restrictions and remarks The board cannot work with the CXPs
of other models.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No



Technical Specifications

Table 3-124 Technical specifications of the CR8DCXP160C0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 22.4 mm x 193.8 mm x 209 mm (0.88
x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 7.63 in. x 8.23 in.)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 51.45 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 166.93 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 8GB

Storage 4 GB NandFlash

3.4.3.5 CR8DCXP160C2 (System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-protocol
Process Unit (CXP-160-B))

Overview

Table 3-125 Basic information about the CR8DCXP160C2
Item Details

Description System Control,Cross-connect and
Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160-
B)

Part Number 03033MPG

Model CR8DCXP160C2

Card type CXP

Silkscreen CXP-160-B

Appearance

Figure 3-66 Appearance of the CR8DCXP160C2


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPG&productModel=CR8DCXP160C2#matchRelation

Indicators and Buttons

Table 3-126 Indicators on the CR8DCXP160C2

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The device
generates a
hardware
alarm. You
can run the
display alarm
hardware
command to
view the
hardware
alarm type.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

PROG Program Green Steady on The board
running software is
indicator being
initialized.
The board
software is
normally
initialized,
and the board
software is
running
normally.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The memory
self-check
fails.
The board
software or
the logic file
is lost.
Loading of
the board
software fails.

Green On for 100 Loading of
ms and off for the board
100 ms software is in
alternately process.

Green On for 300 The BIOS is
ms and off for guiding the
300 ms upper-layer
alternately software.

Red On for 100 The BIOS self-
ms and off for check fails.
100 ms
alternately

- Off No power is
input.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

SYNC Synchronizati Green Steady on The system
on status clock works in
indicator free-run
mode, and no
priority list is
set for the
system clocks
(only internal
clock sources
are listed by
default).
The system
clock works in
tracing mode
and is tracing
a clock source
other than
the internal
clock sources
in the priority
list.
The system
clock works in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, and
the PTP time
and system
clock are
being traced.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The system
clock priority
list is set. All
the clock
sources,
however, are
lost except for
the internal
clock sources.
The clock
works in
holdover
mode or free-
run mode.
The system
clock is
working in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, but
no
synchronizatio
n source is
available. The
system clock
and PTP time
are working
in holdover or
free-run
mode.

ACTX Active/ Green Steady on The board is
standby in the
status working
indicator for switching
the cross- state.
connect or
clock board - Off The board is
in the
protection
switching
state.

ACTC Control status Green Steady on The board is
indicator in the
working
control state.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green On for 100 The data of
ms and off for the
100 ms equipment is
alternately backed up in
batch.

- Off The board is
in the
protection
control state.

ALM Alarm Red Steady on Critical
indicator alarms are
generated.

Orange Steady on Major, minor
alarms are
generated.

- Off No alarms are
generated in
the
equipment.

ETH/OAM ETH/OAM Green Steady on If the
indicator indicator is
steady on, the
link is normal.

Orange Blink If the
indicator
blinks, data is
being
transmitted.

- Off If the
indicator is
off, the link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-127 Buttons on the CR8DCXP160C2
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button You can press the RST
button to reset the NE or
restore the factory
settings of the NE.
The procedure is as
follows:
To reset the NE, press
the RST button and
release it.
To restore factory
settings, press and hold
the RST button. This
operation will clear the
NE database and system
parameter configurations
and cannot be restored.
Exercise caution when
you perform the
following operations:
1. Press and release the
RST button to restart the
NE.
2.When the PROG
indicator blinks (the
blinking frequency is
about 1 second and the
time window is about 15
seconds), press and hold
the RST button.
3.Wait for no longer
than 2 minutes till both
the STAT and PROG
indicators blink (the time
window is 5 seconds).
Then release the RST
button immediately.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
1. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
will be cleared. You are
advised to periodically
back up the configuration
file.
2. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, to
prevent the cleared
configuration from being
synchronized again
between the active and
standby main control
boards, remove one main
control board first in a
dual-main control board
chassis to ensure that the
configuration file is cleared
in a single-main control
board scenario. Perform
the same operations on
the other main control
board.
3. When pressing the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, you only
need to pay attention to
the STAT and PROG
indicators. Other indicators
may vary depending on
the product model.



Ports

Table 3-128 Ports on the CR8DCXP160C2
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

CLK/TEST SMA Clock test port Coaxial cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M ETH/OAM
autosensing management
Ethernet network cable
management port
or non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD/RS485 RJ45 Clock/Time/RS485 1-into-2 clock
input/output port cable + clock
(RS485 is a cable (external
reserved port). clock mode,
delivery-ready):
applicable to the
CLK mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + clock
cable (external
clock/external
time mode,
prepared onsite):
applicable to the
CLK or TOD mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + Ethernet
cable: applicable
to the TOD mode

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm input/
output interface output cable

USB Type A USB port -
(reserved)




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-129 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface


Table 3-130 Pins of the CLK/TOD/RS-485 interface
Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

1 Receive negative of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK negative of cified cified ed
the CLK

2 Receive positive of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK positive of cified cified ed
the CLK


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

3 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
negative for the negati t negative
1PPS signal ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

4 Receive negative of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK negative of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

5 Receive positive of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK positive of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

6 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
positive for the positiv t positive
1PPS signal e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

7 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
negative for the negati t negative
time information ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

8 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
positive for the positiv t positive
time information e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

NOTE
When this interface is used as a TOD interface, it must be used with a dedicated clock
cable.For details, see "Cables" in the Hardware Description.



Table 3-131 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front View Pin Usage

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output


Functions and Features

Table 3-132 Functions and features of the CR8DCXP160C2
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Data forwarding: The CXP is the core
of service processing in the entire
system, and is connected to all
subcards through data channels.
Control and management: Through
the management channels between
IPUs and the subcards, the IPUs can
manage subcards and transmit routing
protocol data.
The line rate capability is 320 Gbit/
s@256 bytes (bidirectional).

Reliability and availability Hot swappable; 1:1 backup mode.

Restrictions and remarks The board cannot work with the CXPs
of other models.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-133 Technical specifications of the CR8DCXP160C2
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 22.4 mm x 193.8 mm x 209 mm (0.88
x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 7.63 in. x 8.23 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 51.45 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 166.93 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 8GB

Storage 4GB NandFlash


3.4.3.6 CR8DCXP160C6 (System Control,Cross-connect and Multi-protocol
Process Unit (CXP-160-C))

Overview

Table 3-134 Basic information about the CR8DCXP160C6
Item Details

Description System Control,Cross-connect and
Multi-protocol Process Unit (CXP-160-
C)

Part Number 03034VUB

Model CR8DCXP160C6

Card type CXP

Silkscreen CXP-160-C




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-67 Appearance of the CR8DCXP160C6


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034VUB&productModel=CR8DCXP160C6#matchRelation

Indicators and Buttons

Table 3-135 Indicators on the CR8DCXP160C6

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on A hardware
alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

PROG Program Green Steady on The board
status software is
indicator being
initialized or
is successfully
initialized and
is running
properly.

Red Steady on The memory
self-check
fails.
The board
software or
logic file is
lost.
The board
software fails
to be loaded.

Green Blinks on and The board
off at 100 ms software is
intervals being loaded.

Green Blinks on and The BIOS is
off at 300 ms interacting
intervals with the
upper-layer
software.

Red Blinks on and The BIOS self-
off at 100 ms check fails.
intervals

- Off The board is
not powered
on.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

SYNC Clock Green Steady on The system
synchronizatio clock works in
n indicator free-run
mode, and no
priority list is
set for the
system clocks
(only internal
clock sources
are listed by
default).
The system
clock works in
tracing mode
and is tracing
a clock source
other than
the internal
clock sources
in the priority
list.
The system
clock works in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, and
the PTP time
and system
clock are
being traced.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The system
clock priority
list is set, but
all the clock
sources
except the
internal clock
source are
lost. The clock
works in
holdover or
free-run
mode.
The system
clock is
working in
time
synchronizatio
n mode, but
no
synchronizatio
n source is
available. The
system clock
and PTP time
are working
in holdover or
free-run
mode.

ACTX Active/ Green Steady on The board is
standby in the active
status state on the
indicator for service plane.
the cross-
connect or - Off The board is
clock board in the standby
state on the
service plane.

ACTC Control status Green Steady on The board is
indicator in the active
control state.

Green Blinks on and The data of
off at 100 ms the device is
intervals backed up in
batch.

- Off The board is
in the standby
control state.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

ALM Alarm Red Steady on Device-level
indicator critical alarms
exist.

Orange Steady on A device-level
major or
minor alarm
exists.

- Off There is no
equipment-
level alarm.

ETH/OAM ETH/OAM Green Steady on The link is up.
indicator
Orange Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-136 Buttons on the CR8DCXP160C6
Silkscreen Name Description

RST Board reset button You can press the RST
button to reset the NE or
restore the factory
settings of the NE.
The procedure is as
follows:
To reset the NE, press
the RST button and
release it.
To restore factory
settings, press and hold
down the RST button.
This operation will clear
the NE database and
system parameter
configurations and
cannot be restored.
Exercise caution when
you perform the
following operations:
1.Press the RST button to
restart the NE.
2.When the PROG
indicator blinks (the
blinking frequency is
about 1 second and the
time window is about 15
seconds), press and hold
down the RST button.
3.Wait for no longer
than 2 minutes till both
the STAT and PROG
indicators blink (the time
window is 5 seconds).
Then release the RST
button immediately.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Description

NOTE
1. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, the
original configuration file
will be cleared. You are
advised to periodically
back up the configuration
file.
2. When you press the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, to
prevent the cleared
configuration from being
synchronized again
between the active and
standby main control
boards, remove one main
control board first in a
dual-main control board
chassis to ensure that the
configuration file is cleared
in a single-main control
board scenario. Perform
the same operations on
the other main control
board.
3. When pressing the RST
button to clear the
configuration file, you only
need to pay attention to
the STAT and PROG
indicators. Other indicators
may vary depending on
the product model.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-137 Ports on the CR8DCXP160C6
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M ETH/OAM
autosensing management
Ethernet network cable
management port
or non-standard
RS232 console
port.
NOTE
If a service port
can be connected
to the NMS, it is
recommended that
the service port be
used as the
network
management port.

CLK/TOD/RS485 RJ45 Clock/Time/RS485 1-into-2 clock
input/output port cable + clock
(RS485 is a cable (external
reserved port). clock mode,
delivery-ready):
applicable to the
CLK mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + clock
cable (external
clock/external
time mode,
prepared onsite):
applicable to the
CLK or TOD mode
1-into-2 clock
cable + Ethernet
cable: applicable
to the TOD mode

ALMI/ALMO RJ45 Alarm input/ Alarm input/
output interface output cable

USB Type A USB port -
(reserved)

CLK/TEST SMA Clock test port Coaxial cable




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-138 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmit positive of the
NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the
NM network port

3 Receive positive of the
NM network port

4 Grounding end of the
Console interface

5 Receive end of the
Console interface

6 Receive negative of the
NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the
Console interface


Table 3-139 Pins of the CLK/TOD/RS-485 interface
Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

1 Receive negative of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK negative of cified cified ed
the CLK

2 Receive positive of Receive Unspe Unspe Unspecifi
the CLK positive of cified cified ed
the CLK


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

3 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
negative for the negati t negative
1PPS signal ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

4 Receive negative of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK negative of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

5 Receive positive of Receive Groun Groun Unspecifi
the CLK positive of ding ding ed
the CLK end end

6 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Transmit
positive for the positiv t positive
1PPS signal e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
1PPS the
signal 1PPS
(RS42 signal
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front Pi Definition of the Working Mode
View n RJ45 Interface on
the Panel External Extern Extern RS-485
Clock al al
Time Time
Input Outpu
(1PPS t
+ (1PPS
Time +
Infor Time
matio Infor
n) matio
n)

7 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
negative for the negati t negative
time information ve for negati of the
the ve for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

8 Input/Output Unspecified Input Outpu Receive
positive for the positiv t positive
time information e for positiv of the
the e for RS-485
time the
inform time
ation inform
(RS42 ation
2 (RS42
level) 2
level)

NOTE
When this interface is used as a TOD interface, it must be used with a dedicated clock
cable.For details, see "Cables" in the Hardware Description.



Table 3-140 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm
input 1

3 Alarm input 2

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Front View Pin Usage

4 Alarm input 3

5 Grounding end for alarm
input 3

6 Grounding end for alarm
input 2

7 Positive for alarm signal
output

8 Negative for alarm
signal output



Functions and Features

Table 3-141 Functions and features of the CR8DCXP160C6

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Data forwarding: The CXP is the core
of service processing in the system and
is connected to all subcards through
data channels.
Control and management: The CXP
manages subcards and transmits
routing protocol data through
management channels.
Supports 320 Gbit/s@256 bytes
(bidirectional).

Reliability and availability Hot swappable; 1:1 backup mode.

Restrictions and remarks The board cannot work with the CXPs
of other models.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No



Technical Specifications

Table 3-142 Technical specifications of the CR8DCXP160C6

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 22.4 mm x 193.8 mm x 209 mm (0.88
x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 7.63 in. x 8.23 in.)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 51.45 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 166.93 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

CPU 8-core 1.5 GHz

Memory 8GB

Storage 4 GB NandFlash


3.4.4 Interface Card

3.4.4.1 CR5D000DE1C1 (16-Port E1 Physical Interface Card(PIC,75ohm/
120ohm))

Overview

Table 3-143 Basic information about the CR5D000DE1C1
Item Details

Description 16-Port E1 Physical Interface
Card(PIC,75ohm/120ohm)

Part Number 03033GGD

Model CR5D000DE1C1

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 16xE1-75/120




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-68 Appearance of the CR5D000DE1C1


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033GGD&productModel=CR5D000DE1C1#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-144 Indicators on the CR5D000DE1C1
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on If the
status indicator is
indicator steady on, the
PIC is working
properly.

Red Steady on If the
indicator is
steady on, the
hardware on
the PIC is
faulty.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Steady on If the
indicator is
steady on, the
PIC is
installed in a
slot for a HIC
and an alarm
is reported or
the PIC is not
loaded with
the logic.

- Off If the
indicator is
off, the PIC is
powered off
or is not
registered.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.



Ports

Table 3-145 Ports on the CR5D000DE1C1

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

E1(0-15) Anea 96 16 E1 interfaces 75/120 ohm
16xE1 cable



Table 3-146 Port attributes about the CR5D000DE1C1

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IMA 1.1, RFC4385, RFC5086,
RFC4553_SATOP, RFC1662

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Attributes Details

Frame format Unframed mode, CRC4, and NO-CRC4



Functions and Features

Table 3-147 Functions and features of the CR5D000DE1C1

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports a maximum of 16 E1
interfaces. Services on each interface
can be configured.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Link protocol TDM, PPP, MP, ATM, IMA



NO TE

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, PPP-based links do not support L2/L3 services.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-148 Technical specifications of the CR5D000DE1C1

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.6 kg (1.32 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 15.1 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 48.86 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



3.4.4.2 CR5D00C4CFC1 (4-Port Channelized STM-1c POS-SFP Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-149 Basic information about the CR5D00C4CFC1

Item Details

Description 4-Port Channelized STM-1c POS-SFP
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033GGF

Model CR5D00C4CFC1

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4xSTM1-cPOS



Appearance

Figure 3-69 Appearance of the CR5D00C4CFC1


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033GGF&productModel=CR5D00C4CFC1#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-150 Indicators on the CR5D00C4CFC1
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

LOS(0 to 3) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

- Off The physical
connection
fails.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-151 Ports on the CR5D00C4CFC1

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP STM-1 service 155Mbps SFP
OUT3 IN3 signal input and Electrical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module



Table 3-152 Port attributes about the CR5D00C4CFC1

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IMA 1.1, RFC4385, RFC5086,
RFC4553_SATOP, RFC1662

Frame format 155M interfaces support SDH.
Channelized E1 interfaces support the
framed mode (channelized mode),
unframed mode (clear channel mode),
CRC4, and NO-CRC4.



Functions and Features

Table 3-153 Functions and features of the CR5D00C4CFC1

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports 63 E1 links over four 155M
SDH links.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks Ports 0 to 3 support clock master
mode.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

Link protocol TDM, PPP, MP, ATM, IMA



NO TE

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, PPP-based links do not support L2/L3 services.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-154 Technical specifications of the CR5D00C4CFC1
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 16.8 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 54.5 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –20°C to +65°C (–4°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.3 CR8D000DE1C2 (16-Port E1 Physical Interface Card(PIC,75ohm/
120ohm))

Overview

Table 3-155 Basic information about the CR8D000DE1C2
Item Details

Description 16-Port E1 Physical Interface
Card(PIC,75ohm/120ohm)

Part Number 03034KEG

Model CR8D000DE1C2

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 16xE1-75/120



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-70 Appearance of the CR8D000DE1C2


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034KEG&productModel=CR8D000DE1C2#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-156 Indicators on the CR8D000DE1C2
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Steady on An alarm is
generated
when a high-
speed
interface card
is incorrectly
inserted into
a low-speed
interface card
slot, or the
board is not
loaded with
logic.

- Steady off The board is
not registered
or is not
powered on.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is faulty.


Ports

Table 3-157 Ports on the CR8D000DE1C2
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

E1(0-15) Anea 96 16 E1 interfaces 75-ohm/120-ohm
16xE1 cable


Table 3-158 Port attributes about the CR8D000DE1C2
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Attributes Details

Standards compliance IMA 1.1, RFC4385, RFC5086,
RFC4553_SATOP, RFC1662

Frame format Unframed mode, CRC4, and NO-CRC4



Functions and Features

Table 3-159 Functions and features of the CR8D000DE1C2

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports a maximum of 16 E1
interfaces. Services on each interface
can be configured.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Link protocol TDM, PPP, MP, ATM, IMA



NO TE

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, PPP-based links do not support L2/L3 services.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-160 Technical specifications of the CR8D000DE1C2

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.52 kg (1.15 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.81 kg (1.79 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 16.78 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 54.45 BTU/hour

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.4 CR8D00E1VBC0 (03033JUB: 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-161 Basic information about the CR8D00E1VBC0

Item Details

Description 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033JUB

Model CR8D00E1VBC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 1x50GE-QSFP28



Appearance

Figure 3-71 Appearance of the CR8D00E1VBC0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JUB&productModel=CR8D00E1VBC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-162 Indicators on the CR8D00E1VBC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A 0 Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The physical
connection
fails.


Ports

Table 3-163 Ports on the CR8D00E1VBC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 QSFP28 50 GE service 50Gbps QSFP28
signal input and BIDI Optical
output interface Module
50Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module


Table 3-164 Port attributes about the CR8D00E1VBC0
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP


Functions and Features

Table 3-165 Functions and features of the CR8D00E1VBC0
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports a 50GE interface for line-rate
receiving and transmitting.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 0 can only be added to a
FlexE group separately. port-id ranges
from 129 to 138 and from 1000 to
3000. Such a FlexE group supports a
maximum of 10 FlexE clients.

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-166 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E1VBC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 26.37 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 85.56 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.5 CR8D00E1VBC0 (03033JUB-001: 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)

Overview

Table 3-167 Basic information about the CR8D00E1VBC0

Item Details

Description 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion

Part Number 03033JUB-001

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Details

Model CR8D00E1VBC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 1x50GE-QSFP28



Appearance

Figure 3-72 Appearance of the CR8D00E1VBC0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JUB-001&productModel=CR8D00E1VBC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-168 Indicators on the CR8D00E1VBC0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A 0 Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status the optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Steady off The service
port fails to
be connected
to the optical
fiber or cable.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-169 Ports on the CR8D00E1VBC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 QSFP28 50GE optical 50Gbps QSFP28
input/output BIDI Optical
interface Module
50Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module


Table 3-170 Port attributes about the CR8D00E1VBC0
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP


Functions and Features

Table 3-171 Functions and features of the CR8D00E1VBC0
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports a 50GE interface for line-rate
receiving and transmitting.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 0 can only be added to a
FlexE group separately. port-id ranges
from 129 to 138 and from 1000 to
3000. Such a FlexE group supports a
maximum of 10 FlexE clients.

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-172 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E1VBC0
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 26.37 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 85.56 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]

3.4.4.6 CR8D00E1VBC0 (03033JUB-002: 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-173 Basic information about the CR8D00E1VBC0
Item Details

Description 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033JUB-002

Model CR8D00E1VBC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 1x50GE-QSFP28

Appearance

Figure 3-73 Appearance of the CR8D00E1VBC0


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JUB-002&productModel=CR8D00E1VBC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-174 Indicators on the CR8D00E1VBC0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A 0 Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

- Off The physical
connection
fails.


Ports

Table 3-175 Ports on the CR8D00E1VBC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 QSFP28 50 GE service 50Gbps QSFP28
signal input and BIDI Optical
output interface Module
50Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module


Table 3-176 Port attributes about the CR8D00E1VBC0
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-177 Functions and features of the CR8D00E1VBC0
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports a 50GE interface for line-rate
receiving and transmitting.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 0 can only be added to a
FlexE group separately. port-id ranges
from 129 to 138 and from 1000 to
3000. Such a FlexE group supports a
maximum of 10 FlexE clients.

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A


Technical Specifications

Table 3-178 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E1VBC0
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 21.386 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 69.385 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.4.7 CR8D00E1VBC0 (03033JUB-003: 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)

Overview

Table 3-179 Basic information about the CR8D00E1VBC0
Item Details

Description 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion

Part Number 03033JUB-003

Model CR8D00E1VBC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 1x50GE-QSFP28


Appearance

Figure 3-74 Appearance of the CR8D00E1VBC0


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JUB-003&productModel=CR8D00E1VBC0#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-180 Indicators on the CR8D00E1VBC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A 0 Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status the optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Steady off The service
port fails to
be connected
to the optical
fiber or cable.



Ports

Table 3-181 Ports on the CR8D00E1VBC0

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 QSFP28 50GE optical 50Gbps QSFP28
input/output BIDI Optical
interface Module
50Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module



Table 3-182 Port attributes about the CR8D00E1VBC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-183 Functions and features of the CR8D00E1VBC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports a 50GE interface for line-rate
receiving and transmitting.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 0 can only be added to a
FlexE group separately. port-id ranges
from 129 to 138 and from 1000 to
3000. Such a FlexE group supports a
maximum of 10 FlexE clients.

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-184 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E1VBC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 21.386 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 69.385 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.8 CR8D00E1VBC1 (1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical Interface
Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-185 Basic information about the CR8D00E1VBC1

Item Details

Description 1-port 50G Base (QSFP28) Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034EDQ

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Details

Model CR8D00E1VBC1

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 1x50GE-QSFP28



Appearance

Figure 3-75 Appearance of the CR8D00E1VBC1


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034EDQ&productModel=CR8D00E1VBC1#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-186 Indicators on the CR8D00E1VBC1

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A 0 Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status an optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Steady off The
connection
between the
service port
and the
optical fiber
or cable fails.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-187 Ports on the CR8D00E1VBC1
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 QSFP28 50GE optical 50Gbps QSFP28
input/output BIDI Optical
interface Module
50Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module


Table 3-188 Port attributes about the CR8D00E1VBC1
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP,
Ethernet_SNAP


Functions and Features

Table 3-189 Functions and features of the CR8D00E1VBC1
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports a 50GE interface for line-rate
receiving and transmitting.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 0 can only be added to a
FlexE group separately. port-id ranges
from 129 to 138 and from 1000 to
3000. Such a FlexE group supports a
maximum of 10 FlexE clients.

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-190 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E1VBC1
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 21.386 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 69.385 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]

3.4.4.9 CR8D00E2XFC0 (03033JUD: 2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-191 Basic information about the CR8D00E2XFC0
Item Details

Description 2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033JUD

Model CR8D00E2XFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 2x10GE-SFP+

Appearance

Figure 3-76 Appearance of the CR8D00E2XFC0


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JUD&productModel=CR8D00E2XFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-192 Indicators on the CR8D00E2XFC0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 1) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-193 Ports on the CR8D00E2XFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP+ 10GE service 1.25/9.953/10.31
OUT1 IN1 signal input and 25Gbps SFP+
output interface Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-194 Port attributes about the CR8D00E2XFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-195 Functions and features of the CR8D00E2XFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function supporting optical signal input and
output of two 10GE/GE interfaces.

Reliability and availability Supports the hot swappable function.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-196 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E2XFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 22.23 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 72.12 BTU/hour

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.10 CR8D00E2XFC0 (03033JUD-001: 2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-197 Basic information about the CR8D00E2XFC0
Item Details

Description 2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033JUD-001

Model CR8D00E2XFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 2x10GE-SFP+


Appearance

Figure 3-77 Appearance of the CR8D00E2XFC0


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JUD-001&productModel=CR8D00E2XFC0#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-198 Indicators on the CR8D00E2XFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 1) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-199 Ports on the CR8D00E2XFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP+ 10GE service 1.25/9.953/10.31
OUT1 IN1 signal input and 25Gbps SFP+
output interface Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-200 Port attributes about the CR8D00E2XFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-201 Functions and features of the CR8D00E2XFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function supporting optical signal input and
output of two 10GE/GE interfaces.

Reliability and availability Supports the hot swappable function.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-202 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E2XFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 22.23 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 72.12 BTU/hour

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.11 CR8D00E2XFC1 (2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical Interface
Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-203 Basic information about the CR8D00E2XFC1
Item Details

Description 2-port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034QXW

Model CR8D00E2XFC1

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 2x10GE-SFP+


Appearance

Figure 3-78 Appearance of the CR8D00E2XFC1


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034QXW&productModel=CR8D00E2XFC1#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-204 Indicators on the CR8D00E2XFC1
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A (0-1) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status an optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Steady off The
connection
between the
service port
and the
optical fiber
or cable fails.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-205 Ports on the CR8D00E2XFC1
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP+ Interface for 10GE 1.25/9.953/10.31
OUT1 IN1 optical signal 25Gbps SFP+
input and output Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-206 Port attributes about the CR8D00E2XFC1

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP,
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-207 Functions and features of the CR8D00E2XFC1

Functions and Features Description

Basic function supporting optical signal input and
output of two 10GE/GE interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-208 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E2XFC1

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 22.23 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 72.12 BTU/hour

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.12 CR8D00E4XFC2 (03034EJM: 4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-209 Basic information about the CR8D00E4XFC2
Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034EJM

Model CR8D00E4XFC2

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+


Appearance

Figure 3-79 Appearance of the CR8D00E4XFC2


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034EJM&productModel=CR8D00E4XFC2#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-210 Indicators on the CR8D00E4XFC2
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The hardware
on the board
is faulty.

Orange Steady on A high-speed
interface card
is
unexpectedly
inserted into
a low-speed
interface card
slot and an
alarm is
generated, or
the logic is
not loaded to
the board.

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
registered.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A (0 to 3) Interface Green Steady on The link is Up.
status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-211 Ports on the CR8D00E4XFC2
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0-OUT3 SFP+ 10GE/GE service 155Mbps eSFP
IN3 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-212 Port attributes about the CR8D00E4XFC2
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP and
Ethernet_SNAP


Functions and Features

Table 3-213 Functions and features of the CR8D00E4XFC2
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE/GE ports (SFP+/SFP
optical modules) for line-rate
transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks 1. By default, the standard Ethernet
mode is supported. You can run the
flexe enable port port-id command in
the system view to switch the port
mode to FlexE. The GE port cannot be
switched to the FlexE mode.
2. An interface in FlexE mode cannot
be connected to a standard 10GE
Ethernet interface.
3. This FlexE mode supports only GE-
granularity hard pipes and can only be
interconnected with Huawei FlexE
ports that use the same protocol as
GE-granularity.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 0 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 1 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 2 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 3 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.

MACsec supported Yes


Technical Specifications

Table 3-214 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E4XFC2
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 17.4 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 56.40 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.13 CR8D00E4XFC2 (03034EJM-001: 4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-215 Basic information about the CR8D00E4XFC2

Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034EJM-001

Model CR8D00E4XFC2

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+



Appearance

Figure 3-80 Appearance of the CR8D00E4XFC2


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034EJM-001&productModel=CR8D00E4XFC2#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-216 Indicators on the CR8D00E4XFC2

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The hardware
on the board
is faulty.

Orange Steady on A high-speed
interface card
is
unexpectedly
inserted into
a low-speed
interface card
slot and an
alarm is
generated, or
the logic is
not loaded to
the board.

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
registered.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A (0 to 3) Interface Green Steady on The link is Up.
status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-217 Ports on the CR8D00E4XFC2
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0-OUT3 SFP+ 10GE/GE service 155Mbps eSFP
IN3 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-218 Port attributes about the CR8D00E4XFC2
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP and
Ethernet_SNAP


Functions and Features

Table 3-219 Functions and features of the CR8D00E4XFC2
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE/GE ports (SFP+/SFP
optical modules) for line-rate
transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks 1. By default, the standard Ethernet
mode is supported. You can run the
flexe enable port port-id command in
the system view to switch the port
mode to FlexE. The GE port cannot be
switched to the FlexE mode.
2. An interface in FlexE mode cannot
be connected to a standard 10GE
Ethernet interface.
3. This FlexE mode supports only GE-
granularity hard pipes and can only be
interconnected with Huawei FlexE
ports that use the same protocol as
GE-granularity.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 0 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 1 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 2 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 3 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.

MACsec supported Yes


Technical Specifications

Table 3-220 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E4XFC2
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 17.4 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 56.40 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.14 CR8D00E4XFC5 (4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec Physical Interface
Card(PIC))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-221 Basic information about the CR8D00E4XFC5

Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE-SFP+ FlexE MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034SUR

Model CR8D00E4XFC5

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+



Appearance

Figure 3-81 Appearance of the CR8D00E4XFC5


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034SUR&productModel=CR8D00E4XFC5#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-222 Indicators on the CR8D00E4XFC5

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The hardware
on the board
is faulty.

Orange Steady on A high-speed
interface card
is
unexpectedly
inserted into
a low-speed
interface card
slot and an
alarm is
generated, or
the logic is
not loaded to
the board.

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
registered.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A (0 to 3) Interface Green Steady on The link is Up.
status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-223 Ports on the CR8D00E4XFC5
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0-OUT3 SFP+ 10GE/GE service 155Mbps eSFP
IN3 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25/9.953/10.31
25Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps SyncE and
1588V2 Electrical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-224 Port attributes about the CR8D00E4XFC5
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP and
Ethernet_SNAP


Functions and Features

Table 3-225 Functions and features of the CR8D00E4XFC5
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE/GE ports (SFP+/SFP
optical modules) for line-rate
transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks 1. By default, the standard Ethernet
mode is supported. You can run the
flexe enable port port-id command in
the system view to switch the port
mode to FlexE. The GE port cannot be
switched to the FlexE mode.
2. An interface in FlexE mode cannot
be connected to a standard 10GE
Ethernet interface.
3. This FlexE mode supports only GE-
granularity hard pipes and can only be
interconnected with Huawei FlexE
ports that use the same protocol as
GE-granularity.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

FlexE supported Yes
Physical port 0 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 1 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 2 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 3 can be added to one
group, and port-id ranges from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of six FlexE
clients can be created.

MACsec supported Yes


Technical Specifications

Table 3-226 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E4XFC5
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 17.4 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 56.40 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.15 CR8D00E8GEC2 (8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical Interface
Card(PIC))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-227 Basic information about the CR8D00E8GEC2
Item Details

Description 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033NRL

Model CR8D00E8GEC2

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 8xFE/GE-RJ


Appearance

Figure 3-82 Appearance of the CR8D00E8GEC2


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033NRL&productModel=CR8D00E8GEC2#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-228 Indicators on the CR8D00E8GEC2
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on If the
status indicator is
indicator steady on, the
PIC is working
properly.

Red Steady on If the
indicator is
steady on, the
hardware on
the PIC is
faulty.

Orange Steady on If the
indicator is
steady on, the
PIC is
installed in a
slot for a HIC
and an alarm
is reported or
the PIC is not
loaded with
the logic.

- Off If the
indicator is
off, the PIC is
powered off
or is not
registered.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

LINK Port Green Steady on If the LINK
connection indicator
status above each
indicator FE/GE
electrical
interface is
steady green,
the physical
connection of
the interface
is normal.

- Off Indicates that
the physical
port fails to
be connected.

ACT Port data Orange Blinking If the ACT
transmit/ indicator is
receive status blinking
indicator orange above
each FE/GE
electrical
service port,
the service
port is
receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Off The service
port is not
receiving or
transmitting
data.


Ports

Table 3-229 Ports on the CR8D00E8GEC2
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

FE/GE0 to FE/GE7 RJ45 GE/FE service Ethernet Cables
signal input and
output interface




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-230 Port attributes about the CR8D00E8GEC2

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-231 Functions and features of the CR8D00E8GEC2

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports eight GE electrical interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes



Technical Specifications

Table 3-232 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E8GEC2

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 11.7 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 37.96 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.4.16 CR8D00E8GEC3 (03034BAT: 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-233 Basic information about the CR8D00E8GEC3
Item Details

Description 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034BAT

Model CR8D00E8GEC3

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 8xFE/GE-RJ


Appearance

Figure 3-83 Appearance of the CR8D00E8GEC3


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034BAT&productModel=CR8D00E8GEC3#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-234 Indicators on the CR8D00E8GEC3
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

LINK Port Green Steady on If the LINK
connection indicator
status above each
indicator FE/GE
electrical
interface is
steady green,
the physical
connection of
the interface
is normal.

LINK Connection - Off Indicates that
status the physical
indicator port fails to
be connected.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

ACT Port data Orange Blinking If the ACT
transmit/ indicator is
receive status blinking
indicator orange above
each FE/GE
electrical
service port,
the service
port is
receiving or
transmitting
data.

ACT Transmitting/ - Off The service
receiving port is not
status receiving or
indicator transmitting
data.


Ports

Table 3-235 Ports on the CR8D00E8GEC3
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

FE/GE0 to FE/GE7 RJ45 GE/FE service Ethernet Cables
signal input and
output interface


Table 3-236 Port attributes about the CR8D00E8GEC3
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-237 Functions and features of the CR8D00E8GEC3
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides eight GE/FE ports (10M/
100M/1000M electrical modules) for
line-rate transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes


Technical Specifications

Table 3-238 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E8GEC3
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.55 kg (1.21 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.89 kg (1.96 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 12.33 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 40.00 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.17 CR8D00E8GEC3 (03034BAT-001: 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-239 Basic information about the CR8D00E8GEC3

Item Details

Description 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion

Part Number 03034BAT-001

Model CR8D00E8GEC3

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 8xFE/GE-RJ



Appearance

Figure 3-84 Appearance of the CR8D00E8GEC3


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034BAT-001&productModel=CR8D00E8GEC3#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-240 Indicators on the CR8D00E8GEC3

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

LINK Port Green Steady on If the LINK
connection indicator
status above each
indicator FE/GE
electrical
interface is
steady green,
the physical
connection of
the interface
is normal.

- Off Indicates that
the physical
port fails to
be connected.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

ACT Port data Orange Blinking If the ACT
transmit/ indicator is
receive status blinking
indicator orange above
each FE/GE
electrical
service port,
the service
port is
receiving or
transmitting
data.

ACT Port data - Off The service
receiving/ port is not
transmitting receiving or
status transmitting
indicator data.


Ports

Table 3-241 Ports on the CR8D00E8GEC3
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

FE/GE0–FE/GE7 RJ45 GE/FE electrical Ethernet cable
signal input/
output interface


Table 3-242 Port attributes about the CR8D00E8GEC3
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-243 Functions and features of the CR8D00E8GEC3
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides eight GE/FE ports (10M/
100M/1000M electrical modules) for
line-rate transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes


Technical Specifications

Table 3-244 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E8GEC3
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.55 kg (1.21 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.89 kg (1.96 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 12.33 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 40.00 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.18 CR8D00E8GED2 (03034REM: 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-245 Basic information about the CR8D00E8GED2
Item Details

Description 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034REM

Model CR8D00E8GED2

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 8xFE/GE-RJ


Appearance

Figure 3-85 Appearance of the CR8D00E8GED2


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034REM&productModel=CR8D00E8GED2#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-246 Indicators on the CR8D00E8GED2
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on If the
status indicator is
indicator steady on, the
PIC is working
properly.

Red Steady on If the
indicator is
steady on, the
hardware on
the PIC is
faulty.

Orange Steady on If the
indicator is
steady on, the
PIC is
installed in a
slot for a HIC
and an alarm
is reported or
the PIC is not
loaded with
the logic.

- Off If the
indicator is
off, the PIC is
powered off
or is not
registered.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

LINK Port Green Steady on If the LINK
connection indicator
status above each
indicator FE/GE
electrical
interface is
steady green,
the physical
connection of
the interface
is normal.

- Off Indicates that
the physical
port fails to
be connected.

ACT Port data Orange Blinking If the ACT
transmit/ indicator is
receive status blinking
indicator orange above
each FE/GE
electrical
service port,
the service
port is
receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Off The service
port is not
receiving or
transmitting
data.


Ports

Table 3-247 Ports on the CR8D00E8GED2
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

FE/GE0 to FE/GE7 RJ45 GE/FE service Ethernet Cables
signal input and
output interface




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-248 Port attributes about the CR8D00E8GED2

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-249 Functions and features of the CR8D00E8GED2

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports eight GE electrical interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes



Technical Specifications

Table 3-250 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E8GED2

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 11.7 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 37.96 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.4.19 CR8D00E8GED2 (03034REM-001: 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)

Overview

Table 3-251 Basic information about the CR8D00E8GED2
Item Details

Description 8-Port 100/1000Base-RJ45 Physical
Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion

Part Number 03034REM-001

Model CR8D00E8GED2

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 8xFE/GE-RJ


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034REM-001&productModel=CR8D00E8GED2#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-252 Indicators on the CR8D00E8GED2
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Steady on An alarm is
generated
when a high-
speed
interface card
is incorrectly
inserted into
a low-speed
interface card
slot, or the
board is not
loaded with
logic.

- Off The board is
not registered
or is not
powered on.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

LINK Port Green Steady on The physical
connection port is
status properly
indicator connected.

- Off Indicates that
the physical
port fails to
be connected.

ACT Port data Orange Blinking If the ACT
transmit/ indicator is
receive status blinking
indicator orange above
each FE/GE
electrical
service port,
the service
port is
receiving or
transmitting
data.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The service
port is not
receiving or
transmitting
data.



Ports

Table 3-253 Ports on the CR8D00E8GED2

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

FE/GE0–FE/GE7 RJ45 GE/FE electrical Ethernet cable
signal input/
output interface



Table 3-254 Port attributes about the CR8D00E8GED2

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP,
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-255 Functions and features of the CR8D00E8GED2

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supports eight GE electrical interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-256 Technical specifications of the CR8D00E8GED2
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 11.7 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 37.96 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

3.4.4.20 CR8D00EAGFC0 (03033MPK: 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-257 Basic information about the CR8D00EAGFC0
Item Details

Description 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033MPK

Model CR8D00EAGFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 10xFE/GE-SFP

Appearance

Figure 3-86 Appearance of the CR8D00EAGFC0


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPK&productModel=CR8D00EAGFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-258 Indicators on the CR8D00EAGFC0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 9) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.



Ports

Table 3-259 Ports on the CR8D00EAGFC0

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP GE/FE service 155Mbps eSFP
OUT9 IN9 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-260 Port attributes about the CR8D00EAGFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-261 Functions and features of the CR8D00EAGFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides ten FE/GE ports (SFP optical
modules) for line-rate transmitting
and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes



Technical Specifications

Table 3-262 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EAGFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 19.3 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 62.54 BTU/hour


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.21 CR8D00EAGFC0 (03033MPK-001: 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP
MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)

Overview

Table 3-263 Basic information about the CR8D00EAGFC0

Item Details

Description 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-
corrosion

Part Number 03033MPK-001

Model CR8D00EAGFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 10xFE/GE-SFP



Appearance

Figure 3-87 Appearance of the CR8D00EAGFC0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPK-001&productModel=CR8D00EAGFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-264 Indicators on the CR8D00EAGFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A (0–9) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status the optical
indicator fiber or cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Steady off The service
port fails to
be connected
to the optical
fiber or cable.


Ports

Table 3-265 Ports on the CR8D00EAGFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0–OUT9 SFP GE/FE optical 155Mbps eSFP
IN9 signal input/ Optical Module
output port 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-266 Port attributes about the CR8D00EAGFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-267 Functions and features of the CR8D00EAGFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides ten FE/GE ports (SFP optical
modules) for line-rate transmitting
and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-268 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EAGFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 19.3 W

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 62.54 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.22 CR8D00EAGFC0 (03033MPK-002: 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP
MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-269 Basic information about the CR8D00EAGFC0

Item Details

Description 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033MPK-002

Model CR8D00EAGFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 10xFE/GE-SFP



Appearance

Figure 3-88 Appearance of the CR8D00EAGFC0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPK-002&productModel=CR8D00EAGFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-270 Indicators on the CR8D00EAGFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 9) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Ports

Table 3-271 Ports on the CR8D00EAGFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP GE/FE service 155Mbps eSFP
OUT9 IN9 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module


Table 3-272 Port attributes about the CR8D00EAGFC0
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Attributes Details

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP


Functions and Features

Table 3-273 Functions and features of the CR8D00EAGFC0
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides ten FE/GE ports (SFP optical
modules) for line-rate transmitting
and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A


Technical Specifications

Table 3-274 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EAGFC0
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 19.3 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 62.54 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.4.23 CR8D00EAGFC0 (03033MPK-003: 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP
MACsec Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)

Overview

Table 3-275 Basic information about the CR8D00EAGFC0
Item Details

Description 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-
corrosion

Part Number 03033MPK-003

Model CR8D00EAGFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 10xFE/GE-SFP


Appearance

Figure 3-89 Appearance of the CR8D00EAGFC0


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPK-003&productModel=CR8D00EAGFC0#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 349
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-276 Indicators on the CR8D00EAGFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A (0–9) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status the optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 350
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Steady off The service
port fails to
be connected
to the optical
fiber or cable.


Ports

Table 3-277 Ports on the CR8D00EAGFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0–OUT9 SFP GE/FE optical 155Mbps eSFP
IN9 signal input/ Optical Module
output port 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module


Table 3-278 Port attributes about the CR8D00EAGFC0
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-279 Functions and features of the CR8D00EAGFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides ten FE/GE ports (SFP optical
modules) for line-rate transmitting
and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-280 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EAGFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 19.3 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 62.54 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.24 CR8D00EAGFC4 (10-Port 100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface
Card(PIC))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 352
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-281 Basic information about the CR8D00EAGFC4

Item Details

Description 10-Port 100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical
Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034CCV

Model CR8D00EAGFC4

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 10xFE/GE-SFP



Appearance

Figure 3-90 Appearance of the CR8D00EAGFC4


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034CCV&productModel=CR8D00EAGFC4#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-282 Indicators on the CR8D00EAGFC4

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 353
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 9) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 354
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-283 Ports on the CR8D00EAGFC4

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP GE/FE service 155Mbps eSFP
OUT9 IN9 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module



Table 3-284 Port attributes about the CR8D00EAGFC4

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-285 Functions and features of the CR8D00EAGFC4

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Supporting optical signal input and
output of ten GE/FE interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-286 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EAGFC4

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.6 kg (1.32 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.95 kg (2.09 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 13.47 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 43.70 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.25 CR8D00EAGFC5 (10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-287 Basic information about the CR8D00EAGFC5

Item Details

Description 10-port 100/1000Base-X-SFP MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034PJY

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Details

Model CR8D00EAGFC5

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 10xFE/GE-SFP



Appearance

Figure 3-91 Appearance of the CR8D00EAGFC5


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034PJY&productModel=CR8D00EAGFC5#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-288 Indicators on the CR8D00EAGFC5

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A (0–9) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status an optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Off The
connection
between the
service port
and the
optical fiber
or cable fails.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-289 Ports on the CR8D00EAGFC5

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0–OUT9 SFP GE/FE optical 155Mbps eSFP
IN9 signal input/ Optical Module
output port 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module



Table 3-290 Port attributes about the CR8D00EAGFC5

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP,
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-291 Functions and features of the CR8D00EAGFC5

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides ten FE/GE ports (SFP optical
modules) for line-rate transmitting
and receiving.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 359
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-292 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EAGFC5

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 19.3 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 62.54 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.26 CR8D00EEGFC0 (03033MPL: 20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-Port
100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-293 Basic information about the CR8D00EEGFC0

Item Details

Description 20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-Port
100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface
Card(PIC)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 360
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Details

Part Number 03033MPL

Model CR8D00EEGFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 20xGE-CSFP



Appearance

Figure 3-92 Appearance of the CR8D00EEGFC0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPL&productModel=CR8D00EEGFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-294 Indicators on the CR8D00EEGFC0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 361
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

(0-19) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 362
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-295 Ports on the CR8D00EEGFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

0 to 19 CSFP/SFP GE/FE service 1.25Gbps eSFP
signal input and Optical Module
output interface 1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps CSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~1.25Gbps
CSFP BIDI
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module


Table 3-296 Port attributes about the CR8D00EEGFC0
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 363
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-297 Functions and features of the CR8D00EEGFC0
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides 20 GE ports for line-rate
transmitting and receiving, and
supports CSFP optical modules on
ports 0 to 19.
Provides 10 GE ports for line-rate
transmitting and receiving, and
supports SFP modules on even-
numbered ports (0, 2, 4, ..., 18).
Supports CSFP and SFP modules used
separately and in combination.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A


Technical Specifications

Table 3-298 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EEGFC0
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.8 kg (1.76 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 32.2 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 104.34 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 364
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



3.4.4.27 CR8D00EEGFC0 (03033MPL-001: 20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-
Port 100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-299 Basic information about the CR8D00EEGFC0

Item Details

Description 20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-Port
100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface
Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033MPL-001

Model CR8D00EEGFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 20xGE-CSFP



Appearance

Figure 3-93 Appearance of the CR8D00EEGFC0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPL-001&productModel=CR8D00EEGFC0#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 365
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-300 Indicators on the CR8D00EEGFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

(0-19) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 366
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Ports

Table 3-301 Ports on the CR8D00EEGFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

0 to 19 CSFP/SFP GE/FE service 1.25Gbps eSFP
signal input and Optical Module
output interface 1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps CSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~1.25Gbps
CSFP BIDI
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 367
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-302 Port attributes about the CR8D00EEGFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-303 Functions and features of the CR8D00EEGFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides 20 GE ports for line-rate
transmitting and receiving, and
supports CSFP optical modules on
ports 0 to 19.
Provides 10 GE ports for line-rate
transmitting and receiving, and
supports SFP modules on even-
numbered ports (0, 2, 4, ..., 18).
Supports CSFP and SFP modules used
separately and in combination.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-304 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EEGFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 368
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.8 kg (1.76 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 32.2 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 104.34 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.28 CR8D00EEGFC1 (20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-Port
100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-305 Basic information about the CR8D00EEGFC1

Item Details

Description 20-Port 100/1000Base-X-CSFP/10-Port
100/1000Base-X-SFP Physical Interface
Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034QXX

Model CR8D00EEGFC1

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 20xGE-CSFP



Appearance

Figure 3-94 Appearance of the CR8D00EEGFC1


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 369
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034QXX&productModel=CR8D00EEGFC1#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-306 Indicators on the CR8D00EEGFC1
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 370
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

(0-19) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status an optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Steady off The
connection
between the
service port
and the
optical fiber
or cable fails.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 371
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-307 Ports on the CR8D00EEGFC1
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

0 to 19 CSFP/SFP GE/FE optical 1.25Gbps eSFP
signal input/ Optical Module
output port 1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps CSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
125M~1.25Gbps
CSFP BIDI
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module


Table 3-308 Port attributes about the CR8D00EEGFC1
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP,
Ethernet_SNAP




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 372
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-309 Functions and features of the CR8D00EEGFC1
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides 20 GE ports for line-rate
transmitting and receiving, and
supports CSFP optical modules on
ports 0 to 19.
Provides 10 GE ports for line-rate
transmitting and receiving, and
supports SFP modules on even-
numbered ports (0, 2, 4, ..., 18).
Supports CSFP and SFP modules used
separately and in combination.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A


Technical Specifications

Table 3-310 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EEGFC1
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.8 kg (1.76 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 32.2 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 104.34 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 373
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



3.4.4.29 CR8D00L4XFC0 (03033MPJ: 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-311 Basic information about the CR8D00L4XFC0

Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033MPJ

Model CR8D00L4XFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+



Appearance

Figure 3-95 Appearance of the CR8D00L4XFC0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPJ&productModel=CR8D00L4XFC0#matchRelation


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 374
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-312 Indicators on the CR8D00L4XFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 3) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 375
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 376
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-313 Ports on the CR8D00L4XFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP+ 10 GE service 1.25/9.953/10.31
OUT3 IN3 signal input and 25Gbps SFP+
output interface Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 377
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-314 Port attributes about the CR8D00L4XFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-315 Functions and features of the CR8D00L4XFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE/GE ports (SFP+/SFP
optical modules) for line-rate
transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Supports the hot swappable function.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-316 Technical specifications of the CR8D00L4XFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 23.85 W

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 378
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 77.38 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.30 CR8D00L4XFC0 (03033MPJ-001: 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)

Overview

Table 3-317 Basic information about the CR8D00L4XFC0
Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-
corrosion

Part Number 03033MPJ-001

Model CR8D00L4XFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+


Appearance

Figure 3-96 Appearance of the CR8D00L4XFC0


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 379
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPJ-001&productModel=CR8D00L4XFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-318 Indicators on the CR8D00L4XFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A (0–3) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status the optical
indicator fiber or cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 380
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Steady off The service
port fails to
be connected
to the optical
fiber or cable.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 381
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-319 Ports on the CR8D00L4XFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0–OUT3 SFP+ Interface for 10GE 1.25/9.953/10.31
IN3 optical signal 25Gbps SFP+
input and output Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 382
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-320 Port attributes about the CR8D00L4XFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-321 Functions and features of the CR8D00L4XFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE/GE ports (SFP+/SFP
optical modules) for line-rate
transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-322 Technical specifications of the CR8D00L4XFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 23.85 W

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 383
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 77.38 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.31 CR8D00L4XFC0 (03033MPJ-002: 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-323 Basic information about the CR8D00L4XFC0

Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033MPJ-002

Model CR8D00L4XFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+



Appearance

Figure 3-97 Appearance of the CR8D00L4XFC0


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 384
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPJ-002&productModel=CR8D00L4XFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-324 Indicators on the CR8D00L4XFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 3) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 385
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 386
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-325 Ports on the CR8D00L4XFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP+ 10 GE service 1.25/9.953/10.31
OUT3 IN3 signal input and 25Gbps SFP+
output interface Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 387
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-326 Port attributes about the CR8D00L4XFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-327 Functions and features of the CR8D00L4XFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE/GE ports (SFP+/SFP
optical modules) for line-rate
transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Supports the hot swappable function.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-328 Technical specifications of the CR8D00L4XFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 23.85 W

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 388
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 77.38 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.32 CR8D00L4XFC0 (03033MPJ-003: 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-corrosion)

Overview

Table 3-329 Basic information about the CR8D00L4XFC0
Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC),High anti-
corrosion

Part Number 03033MPJ-003

Model CR8D00L4XFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+


Appearance

Figure 3-98 Appearance of the CR8D00L4XFC0


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 389
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033MPJ-003&productModel=CR8D00L4XFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-330 Indicators on the CR8D00L4XFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A (0–3) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status the optical
indicator fiber or cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 390
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Steady off The service
port fails to
be connected
to the optical
fiber or cable.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 391
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-331 Ports on the CR8D00L4XFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0–OUT3 SFP+ Interface for 10GE 1.25/9.953/10.31
IN3 optical signal 25Gbps SFP+
input and output Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 392
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-332 Port attributes about the CR8D00L4XFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-333 Functions and features of the CR8D00L4XFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE/GE ports (SFP+/SFP
optical modules) for line-rate
transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-334 Technical specifications of the CR8D00L4XFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 23.85 W

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 393
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 77.38 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.33 CR8D00L4XFC2 (4-Port 10GE-SFP+ Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-335 Basic information about the CR8D00L4XFC2

Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE-SFP+ Physical Interface
Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033VMJ

Model CR8D00L4XFC2

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+



Appearance

Figure 3-99 Appearance of the CR8D00L4XFC2


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 394
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033VMJ&productModel=CR8D00L4XFC2#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-336 Indicators on the CR8D00L4XFC2
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status Green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A 0 to 3 Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status an optical
indicator fiber or cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 395
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Orange or Blinking The service
green port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Off The
connection
between the
service port
and the
optical fiber
or cable fails.


Ports

Table 3-337 Ports on the CR8D00L4XFC2
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP+ 10GE service 10Gbps SFP+
OUT3 IN3 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module


Table 3-338 Port attributes about the CR8D00L4XFC2
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance Supports Ethernet IEEE 802.3 standard
network protocol



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 396
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-339 Functions and features of the CR8D00L4XFC2
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE ports (SFP+ optical
modules) for line-rate transmitting
and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No


Technical Specifications

Table 3-340 Technical specifications of the CR8D00L4XFC2
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.6 kg (1.32 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 14.27 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 46.30 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –20°C to +65°C (–4°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.34 CR8D00L4XFC5 (4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec Physical
Interface Card(PIC))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 397
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

Table 3-341 Basic information about the CR8D00L4XFC5

Item Details

Description 4-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034PJX

Model CR8D00L4XFC5

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 4x10GE-SFP+



Appearance

Figure 3-100 Appearance of the CR8D00L4XFC5


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034PJX&productModel=CR8D00L4XFC5#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-342 Indicators on the CR8D00L4XFC5

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 398
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

L/A (0–3) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status an optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Steady off The
connection
between the
service port
and the
optical fiber
or cable fails.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 399
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-343 Ports on the CR8D00L4XFC5
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0–OUT3 SFP+ Interface for 10GE 1.25/9.953/10.31
IN3 optical signal 25Gbps SFP+
input and output Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 400
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-344 Port attributes about the CR8D00L4XFC5

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP,
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-345 Functions and features of the CR8D00L4XFC5

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one FPIC slot.
Provides four 10GE/GE ports (SFP+/SFP
optical modules) for line-rate
transmitting and receiving.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Restrictions and remarks N/A

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-346 Technical specifications of the CR8D00L4XFC5

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 23.85 W

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 401
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 77.38 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.35 CR8D00P8CFC1 (8-Port STM-1c/8-Port STM-4c POS Card (PIC)
(Default Enable 4*STM-1c))

Overview

Table 3-347 Basic information about the CR8D00P8CFC1

Item Details

Description 8-Port STM-1c/8-Port STM-4c POS
Card (PIC)(Default Enable 4*STM-1c)

Part Number 03033YLL

Model CR8D00P8CFC1

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 8xSTM1/8xSTM4-POS



Appearance

Figure 3-101 Appearance of the CR8D00P8CFC1


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 402
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033YLL&productModel=CR8D00P8CFC1#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-348 Indicators on the CR8D00P8CFC1
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is faulty.

L/A (0–7) Running Green Steady on The link is Up.
status
L/A (0-7) indicator Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted
and received.

- Steady off The link is
Down.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 403
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-349 Ports on the CR8D00P8CFC1
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP Interface for 155Mbps SFP
OUT7 IN7 inputting and Electrical Module
outputting 155Mbps eSFP
STM-1/STM-4/ Optical Module
STM-16 optical
signals 155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
622Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
2.5Gbps eSFP
Optical Module


Table 3-350 Port attributes about the CR8D00P8CFC1
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance ITU-T G707

Frame format PPP, HDLC


Functions and Features

Table 3-351 Functions and features of the CR8D00P8CFC1
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Provides eight 155 Mbit/s or 622
Mbit/s POS interfaces. From
V800R023C00, the first four ports
support the 2.5G POS mode.
The port mode can be switched
among 8 x 155M, 8 x 622M, and 4 x
2.5G using the set service mode
command.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 404
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

Restrictions and remarks 1. Ports 0–7 support the master clock
mode, and ports 0–3 support the slave
clock mode.
2. A subcard supports only one of the
three modes. To switch the mode, all
interfaces must switch the mode at
the same time.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

RTU supported Yes
Ports 0 to 3:
These ports are limited to a bandwidth
of 155 Mbit/s by default. To change
the port bandwidth mode, load the
corresponding RTU.
Ports 4-7:
These ports are limited to a bandwidth
of 5 Mbit/s by default. To change the
port bandwidth mode, load the
corresponding RTU.
To check the list of RTU licenses
supported by the device and the
loading method, use the License Query
tool or see the related license usage
guide.

Link protocol PPP,HDLC


Technical Specifications

Table 3-352 Technical specifications of the CR8D00P8CFC1
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 405
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.1 kg (2.43 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 24.79 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 80.43 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –20°C to +65°C (–4°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.36 CR8D25E2XFC0 (03033JUC: 2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G (SFP
+) Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-353 Basic information about the CR8D25E2XFC0
Item Details

Description 2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G
(SFP+) Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033JUC

Model CR8D25E2XFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 2x25GE-SFP28


Appearance

Figure 3-102 Appearance of the CR8D25E2XFC0


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 406
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JUC&productModel=CR8D25E2XFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-354 Indicators on the CR8D25E2XFC0
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 1) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 407
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 408
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-355 Ports on the CR8D25E2XFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP28 25GE/10GE 1.25/9.953/10.31
OUT1 IN1 service signal 25Gbps SFP+
input and output Optical Module
interface 1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
OTN Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 409
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module



Table 3-356 Port attributes about the CR8D25E2XFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-357 Functions and features of the CR8D25E2XFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function supporting optical signal input and
output of two 25GE/10GE interfaces.

Reliability and availability Supports the hot swappable function.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing or
supports 10GE/25GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-358 Technical specifications of the CR8D25E2XFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 410
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 22.83 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 74.07 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.37 CR8D25E2XFC0 (03033JUC-001: 2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G
(SFP+) Physical Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-359 Basic information about the CR8D25E2XFC0
Item Details

Description 2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G
(SFP+) Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03033JUC-001

Model CR8D25E2XFC0

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 2x25GE-SFP28


Appearance

Figure 3-103 Appearance of the CR8D25E2XFC0


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 411
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03033JUC-001&productModel=CR8D25E2XFC0#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-360 Indicators on the CR8D25E2XFC0

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with the logic.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

SRV Service status Green Steady on The board has
indicator no CRC alarm.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A(0 to 1) Port Green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 412
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Green Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

Orange Blink The
connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 413
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-361 Ports on the CR8D25E2XFC0
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP28 25GE/10GE 1.25/9.953/10.31
OUT1 IN1 service signal 25Gbps SFP+
input and output Optical Module
interface 1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
OTN Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 414
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module



Table 3-362 Port attributes about the CR8D25E2XFC0

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-363 Functions and features of the CR8D25E2XFC0

Functions and Features Description

Basic function supporting optical signal input and
output of two 25GE/10GE interfaces.

Reliability and availability Supports the hot swappable function.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing or
supports 10GE/25GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-364 Technical specifications of the CR8D25E2XFC0

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 415
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 22.83 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 74.07 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]


3.4.4.38 CR8D25E2XFC1 (2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G (SFP+) Physical
Interface Card(PIC))

Overview

Table 3-365 Basic information about the CR8D25E2XFC1
Item Details

Description 2-port 25G (SFP28)/2 Channels 10G
(SFP+) Physical Interface Card(PIC)

Part Number 03034QXU

Model CR8D25E2XFC1

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen 2x25GE-SFP28


Appearance

Figure 3-104 Appearance of the CR8D25E2XFC1


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 416
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03034QXU&productModel=CR8D25E2XFC1#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-366 Indicators on the CR8D25E2XFC1
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The board is
status working
indicator properly.

Red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

Orange Steady on The board is
not loaded
with logic.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.

SRV Service status Green Steady on There is no
indicator CRC error
alarm on the
board.

Orange Steady on The board has
CRC alarms.

- Steady off The board is
not powered
on or is not
running.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 417
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

L/A (0-1) Port Green Steady on The service
connection/ port is
data properly
transceiving connected to
status an optical
indicator fiber or cable.

Green Blinking The service
port is
properly
connected to
the optical
fiber or cable,
and the port
is receiving or
transmitting
data.

- Steady off The
connection
between the
service port
and the
optical fiber
or cable fails.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 418
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-367 Ports on the CR8D25E2XFC1
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP28 Interface for 1.25/9.953/10.31
OUT1 IN1 inputting and 25Gbps SFP+
outputting 25GE/ Optical Module
10GE optical 1.25Gbps eSFP
signals BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
OTN Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
125M~2.67Gbps
eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 419
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

155Mbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module



Table 3-368 Port attributes about the CR8D25E2XFC1

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP,
Ethernet_SNAP



Functions and Features

Table 3-369 Functions and features of the CR8D25E2XFC1

Functions and Features Description

Basic function supporting optical signal input and
output of two 25GE/10GE interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing or
supports 10GE/25GE auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported Yes

Link protocol N/A



Technical Specifications

Table 3-370 Technical specifications of the CR8D25E2XFC1

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 420
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.7 kg (1.54 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 22.83 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 74.07 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.39 NEDD001EM600 (6 Channels E&M Interface Board)

Overview

Table 3-371 Basic information about the NEDD001EM600

Item Details

Description 6 Channels E&M Interface Board

Part Number 03058128

Model NEDD001EM600

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D1AT6



Appearance

Figure 3-105 Appearance of the NEDD001EM600


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 421
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03058128&productModel=NEDD001EM600#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-372 Indicators on the NEDD001EM600
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.


Ports

Table 3-373 Ports on the NEDD001EM600
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

EM0 to EM5 RJ45 Used for E&M Must be made on
service site based on the
transparent interface type of
transmission the remote device.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 422
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-374 Functions and features of the NEDD001EM600

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports the line-rate receiving and
transmitting on six E&M interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No



Technical Specifications

Table 3-375 Technical specifications of the NEDD001EM600

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.6 kg (1.32 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 10.1 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 32.61 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.40 NEDD001SA800 (8-Channel V.35/X.21/V.24 Board)

Overview

Table 3-376 Basic information about the NEDD001SA800

Item Details

Description 8-Channel V.35/X.21/V.24 Board

Part Number 03056726

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 423
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Details

Model NEDD001SA800

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D1SA8



Appearance

Figure 3-106 Appearance of the NEDD001SA800


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03056726&productModel=NEDD001SA800#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-377 Indicators on the NEDD001SA800

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 424
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A 0 to 7 Port green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
orange or Blinking The
green connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

- Off The physical
connection
fails.


Ports

Table 3-378 Ports on the NEDD001SA800
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

0 to 7 DB28 Used for RS232/ X.21 DTE Cable
X.21/V.24/V.35 X.21 DCE Cable
signal input
RS232/V.24 DTE
Cable
RS232/V.24 DCE
able
V.35 DTE Cable
V.35 DCE Cable




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 425
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features

Table 3-379 Functions and features of the NEDD001SA800

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports 8-Channel V.35/X.21/V.24
interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No



Technical Specifications

Table 3-380 Technical specifications of the NEDD001SA800

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.6 kg (1.32 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 18 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 58.40 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.41 NEDD00EM8F01 (8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board)

Overview

Table 3-381 Basic information about the NEDD00EM8F01

Item Details

Description 8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface
Board

Part Number 03056455

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 426
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Details

Model NEDD00EM8F01

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D2EM8F



Appearance

Figure 3-107 Appearance of the NEDD00EM8F01


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03056455&productModel=NEDD00EM8F01#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-382 Indicators on the NEDD00EM8F01

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 427
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A 0 to 7 Port green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
orange or Blinking The
green connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.

- Off The physical
connection
fails.


Ports

Table 3-383 Ports on the NEDD00EM8F01
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP FE/GE service 1.25Gbps eSFP
OUT7 IN7 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 1.25Gbps SFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
155Mbps eSFP
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 428
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-384 Port attributes about the NEDD00EM8F01

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance Supports Ethernet IEEE 802.3 standard
network protocol



Functions and Features

Table 3-385 Functions and features of the NEDD00EM8F01

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports the line-rate receiving and
transmitting on eight FE/GE interfaces
and supports GE and FE optical
modules and electrical modules on the
interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No



Technical Specifications

Table 3-386 Technical specifications of the NEDD00EM8F01

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.8 kg (1.76 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 16.6 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 53.86 BTU/hour


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 429
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.42 NEDD00EM8T01 (8 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface Board)

Overview

Table 3-387 Basic information about the NEDD00EM8T01

Item Details

Description 8 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface
Board

Part Number 03056458

Model NEDD00EM8T01

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D2EM8T



Appearance

Figure 3-108 Appearance of the NEDD00EM8T01


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03056458&productModel=NEDD00EM8T01#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 430
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-388 Indicators on the NEDD00EM8T01
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

LINK Connection green Steady on The data
status interface is
indicator transmitting
or receiving
data.

- Off The physical
port
connection
fails.

ACT Transmitting/ orange Blinking The data
receiving interface is
status transmitting
indicator or receiving
data.

- Off The data
interface is
not
transmitting
or receiving
data.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 431
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-389 Ports on the NEDD00EM8T01
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

FE/GE0 to FE/GE7 RJ45 FE/GE service Ethernet Cables
signal input and
output interface


Table 3-390 Port attributes about the NEDD00EM8T01
Attributes Details

Working mode 10M/100M/1000M autonegotiation,
full-duplex

Standards compliance Supports Ethernet IEEE 802.3 standard
network protocol


Functions and Features

Table 3-391 Functions and features of the NEDD00EM8T01
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports the line-rate receiving and
transmitting on eight GE/FE interfaces
and supports 10M/100M/1000M
electrical interface features on the
interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 432
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-392 Technical specifications of the NEDD00EM8T01
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.8 kg (1.76 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 11.7 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 37.99 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]

3.4.4.43 NEDD00EX2S00 (2 Channel 10GE Optical Interface Board(SFP+))

Overview

Table 3-393 Basic information about the NEDD00EX2S00
Item Details

Description 2 Channel 10GE Optical Interface
Board(SFP+)

Part Number 03057141

Model NEDD00EX2S00

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D3EX2S

Appearance

Figure 3-109 Appearance of the NEDD00EX2S00


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 433
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03057141&productModel=NEDD00EX2S00#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-394 Indicators on the NEDD00EX2S00
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.

L/A 0 to 1 Port green Steady on The
connection/ connection on
data the physical
transceiving port is
status normal.
indicator
orange or Blinking The
green connection on
the physical
port is
normal, and
data is
received or
transmitted
on the port.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 434
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Off The physical
connection
fails.



Ports

Table 3-395 Ports on the NEDD00EX2S00

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP+ 10GE service 10Gbps SFP+
OUT1 IN1 signal input and Optical Module
output interface 10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module



Table 3-396 Port attributes about the NEDD00EX2S00

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance Supports Ethernet IEEE 802.3 standard
network protocol



Functions and Features

Table 3-397 Functions and features of the NEDD00EX2S00

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports the line-rate receiving and
transmitting on two 10GE interfaces
and supports SFP+ optical modules on
the interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 435
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No



Technical Specifications

Table 3-398 Technical specifications of the NEDD00EX2S00

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.6 kg (1.32 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 12.1 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 39.26 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.44 NEDD01MP8A00 (4 Channels C37.94 Optical Interface and 4
Channels CoDir64K Electric Interface Board)

Overview

Table 3-399 Basic information about the NEDD01MP8A00

Item Details

Description 4 Channels C37.94 Optical Interface
and 4 Channels CoDir64K Electric
Interface Board

Part Number 03056886

Model NEDD01MP8A00

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D1MP8A

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 436
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



Appearance

Figure 3-110 Appearance of the NEDD01MP8A00


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03056886&productModel=NEDD01MP8A00#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-400 Indicators on the NEDD01MP8A00

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

LOS (C37.94) Port green Steady on The
connection/ connection of
data the port is
transceiving normal.
status
indicator orange Steady on LOS alarms
are generated
on the port.

- Steady off The device is
not powered
on or has not
been
initialized.

LINK (Codir) Green Steady on The LINK
(Codir) is
located above
each Codir
port.
The data
interface is
transmitting
or receiving
data.

- Steady off The physical
port
connection
fails.

LOS (Codir) Orange Steady on The
LOS(Codir) is
located above
each Codir
port.
LOS alarms
are generated
on the port.

- Steady Off The device is
not powered
on or has not
been
initialized.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 438
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-401 Ports on the NEDD01MP8A00
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

OUT0 IN0 to SFP Used for C37.94 2.048Mbps SFP
OUT3 IN3 signal input Optical Module

Codir 4 to 7 RJ45 Used for 64 kbit/s 120-Ohm 16 x E1
codirectional data Cables(Anea 96F-
signal input II)


Table 3-402 Port attributes about the NEDD01MP8A00
Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance Supports IEEE C37.94.
Supports ITU-T G.703 for co-directional
64K interfaces.


Functions and Features

Table 3-403 Functions and features of the NEDD01MP8A00
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports the line-rate receiving and
transmitting on four 2M interfaces and
supports 2M SFP optical modules on
the interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 439
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-404 Technical specifications of the NEDD01MP8A00

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 6.2 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 20.12 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.45 NEDD01MPAA00 (4-Channel FXS/FXO+2-Channel E&M+2-Channel
RS232+2-Channel RS485 Board)

Overview

Table 3-405 Basic information about the NEDD01MPAA00

Item Details

Description 4-Channel FXS/FXO+2-Channel E&M
+2-Channel RS232+2-Channel RS485
Board

Part Number 03056725

Model NEDD01MPAA00

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D1MPAA



Appearance

Figure 3-111 Appearance of the NEDD01MPAA00


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 440
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03056725&productModel=NEDD01MPAA00#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-406 Indicators on the NEDD01MPAA00
Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 441
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Ports

Table 3-407 Ports on the NEDD01MPAA00
Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

RS232 0 RS485 1 RJ45 Used for RS232/ RS232: RS232
RS232 2 RS485 3 RS485/RS422 Serial Interface
signal input Cable
RS485/RS422:
Must be made on
site based on the
interface type of
the remote device.

EM4 to EM5 RJ45 Used for E&M Must be made on
service site based on the
transparent interface type of
transmission the remote device.

FXSO6 to FXSO9 RJ11 FXS interface: Standard
analog user line Telephone Line
interface,
providing access
for analog phones
and fax machines
FXO interface:
loop trunk line
interface, which
can be connected
to the PSTN
network


Functions and Features

Table 3-408 Functions and features of the NEDD01MPAA00
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports 4-Channel FXS/FXO+2-
Channel E&M+2-Channel RS232+2-
Channel RS485 interfaces.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 442
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Functions and Features Description

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Technical Specifications

Table 3-409 Technical specifications of the NEDD01MPAA00
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 12 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 38.93 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
[°C(°F)]

3.4.4.46 NEDD16E11202 (16 Channels E1 Interface Board(120ohm))

Overview

Table 3-410 Basic information about the NEDD16E11202
Item Details

Description 16 Channels E1 Interface
Board(120ohm)

Part Number 03056462

Model NEDD16E11202

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D3ML1B

Appearance

Figure 3-112 Appearance of the NEDD16E11202


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 443
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03056462&productModel=NEDD16E11202#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-411 Indicators on the NEDD16E11202

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.



Ports

Table 3-412 Ports on the NEDD16E11202

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

E1(0 to 15) Anea 96 120-ohm 120-Ohm 16 x E1
interface, which is Cables(Anea 96F-
used to transmit II)
or receive E1
signals



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 444
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-413 Port attributes about the NEDD16E11202

Attributes Details

Stated bit rate 2.048 Mbit/s

Impedance [ohm] 120 ohm

Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823

Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823



Functions and Features

Table 3-414 Functions and features of the NEDD16E11202

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports 16 E1 physical interfaces and
uses 120-ohm 16xE1 cable.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Link protocol TDM, PPP, MP, ATM, IMA



NO TE

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, PPP-based links do not support L2/L3 services.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-415 Technical specifications of the NEDD16E11202

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 445
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.8 kg (1.76 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 9.5 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 30.66 BTU/hour

Long-term operating temperature –20°C to +65°C (–4°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.47 NEDD16E17502 (16 Channels E1 Interface Board(75ohm))

Overview

Table 3-416 Basic information about the NEDD16E17502

Item Details

Description 16 Channels E1 Interface
Board(75ohm)

Part Number 03056461

Model NEDD16E17502

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D3ML1A



Appearance

Figure 3-113 Appearance of the NEDD16E17502


Version Mapping

The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.

The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 446
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.

enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03056461&productModel=NEDD16E17502#matchRelation

Indicators

Table 3-417 Indicators on the NEDD16E17502

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.



Ports

Table 3-418 Ports on the NEDD16E17502

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

E1(0 to 15) Anea 96 75-ohm interface, 75-ohm 16 x E1
which is used to cables (Anea 96F-
transmit or I, III)
receive E1 signals



Table 3-419 Port attributes about the NEDD16E17502

Attributes Details

Stated bit rate 2.048 Mbit/s

Impedance [ohm] 75 ohm

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 447
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Attributes Details

Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823

Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823



Functions and Features

Table 3-420 Functions and features of the NEDD16E17502

Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports 16 E1 physical interfaces and
uses 75-ohm 16xE1 cable.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Link protocol TDM, PPP, MP, ATM, IMA



NO TE

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, PPP-based links do not support L2/L3 services.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-421 Technical specifications of the NEDD16E17502

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.8 kg (1.76 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 9.5 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 30.66 BTU/hour

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 448
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –20°C to +65°C (–4°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.48 NEDD32E11201 (32 Channels E1 Interface Board(120ohm))

Overview

Table 3-422 Basic information about the NEDD32E11201

Item Details

Description 32 Channels E1 Interface
Board(120ohm)

Part Number 03057267

Model NEDD32E11201

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D2MD1B



Appearance

Figure 3-114 Appearance of the NEDD32E11201


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03057267&productModel=NEDD32E11201#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 449
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-423 Indicators on the NEDD32E11201

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.



Ports

Table 3-424 Ports on the NEDD32E11201

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

E1(0 to 15) Anea 96 120-ohm 120-Ohm 16 x E1
E1(16 to 31) interface, which is Cables(Anea 96F-
used to transmit II)
or receive E1
signals



Table 3-425 Port attributes about the NEDD32E11201

Attributes Details

Standards compliance RFC1661/RFC1662, RFC4553/RFC5086

Frame format Supports E1, which supports framed,
non-framed, CRC4, and NO-CRC4.

Stated bit rate 2.048 Mbit/s

Impedance [ohm] 120 ohm

Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 450
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Attributes Details

Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823


Functions and Features

Table 3-426 Functions and features of the NEDD32E11201
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports 32 E1 physical interfaces and
uses 120-ohm 16xE1 cables.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Link protocol TDM, PPP, MP, ATM, IMA



NO TE

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, PPP-based links do not support L2/L3 services.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-427 Technical specifications of the NEDD32E11201
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 12.1 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 39.26 BTU/hour


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 451
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –20°C to +65°C (–4°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.4.4.49 NEDD32E17501 (32 Channels E1 Interface Board(75ohm))

Overview

Table 3-428 Basic information about the NEDD32E17501

Item Details

Description 32 Channels E1 Interface
Board(75ohm)

Part Number 03057266

Model NEDD32E17501

Card type Interface Card

Silkscreen D2MD1A



Appearance

Figure 3-115 Appearance of the NEDD32E17501


Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find
desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=03057266&productModel=NEDD32E17501#matchRelation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 452
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Indicators

Table 3-429 Indicators on the NEDD32E17501

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Board status green Steady on The board is
indicator working
normally.

red Steady on The board
hardware is
faulty.

orange Steady on No logic is
loaded on the
interface
board.

- Off The board is
not running
or no power
is input.



Ports

Table 3-430 Ports on the NEDD32E17501

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

E1(0 to 15) Anea 96 75-ohm interface, 75-ohm 16 x E1
E1(16 to 31) which is used to cables (Anea 96F-
transmit or I, III)
receive E1 signals



Table 3-431 Port attributes about the NEDD32E17501

Attributes Details

Standards compliance RFC1661/RFC1662, RFC4553/RFC5086

Frame format Supports E1, which supports framed,
non-framed, CRC4, and NO-CRC4.

Stated bit rate 2.048 Mbit/s

Impedance [ohm] 75 ohm

Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 453
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Attributes Details

Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823


Functions and Features

Table 3-432 Functions and features of the NEDD32E17501
Functions and Features Description

Basic function Occupies one flexible card slot.
Supports 32 E1 physical interfaces and
uses 75-ohm 16xE1 cables.

Reliability and availability Hot swappable.

Breakout supported No

Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

FlexE supported No

MACsec supported No

Link protocol TDM, PPP, MP, ATM, IMA



NO TE

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, PPP-based links do not support L2/L3 services.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-433 Technical specifications of the NEDD32E17501
Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 209.3 mm
x D) [mm(in.)] (0.78 in. x 7.63 in. x 8.24 in.)

Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 70 mm x 285 mm x 300 mm (2.76 in. x
D) [mm(in.)] 11.22 in. x 11.81 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Typical power consumption [W] 12.1 W

Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 39.26 BTU/hour


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 454
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Long-term operating temperature –20°C to +65°C (–4°F to +149°F)
[°C(°F)]



3.5 Optical Module

3.5.1 Pluggable Optical Modules

3.5.1.1 Optical Module Structure

Figure1 shows the structure of an optical module.

Figure 3-116 Optical module structure


1. Handle 2. Receiver 3. Transmitter 4. Shell

5. Label 6. Dust cap 7. Spring 8. Module
connector

3.5.1.2 Optical Module Classification
Optical modules are available in various types to meet diversified requirements.
● Classified by transmission rate
Currently, the transmission rates of optical modules cover a wide range.
According to different transmission rates, optical modules can be classified
into 400 Gbit/s optical modules, 200 Gbit/s optical modules, 100 Gbit/s optical
modules, 40 Gbit/s optical modules, 25 Gbit/s optical modules, and 10 Gbit/s
optical modules, 2.5 Gbit/s optical modules, 1.25 Gbit/s optical modules, 1000

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 455
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Mbit/s optical modules, 155 Mbit/s optical modules, and 100 Mbit/s optical
modules.
● Classified by encapsulation type
The higher transmission rate an optical module provides, the more complex
structure it has. According to the encapsulation type, optical modules are
classified into SFP, eSFP, SFP+, XFP, SFP28, QSFP28, QSFP+, QSFP-DD, CXP, CFP,
and CSFP.
– SFP: small form-factor pluggable.
– eSFP: enhanced small form-factor pluggable. An eSFP optical module is
an SFP optical module that supports monitoring of voltage, temperature,
bias current, transmit optical power, and receive optical power. Currently,
SFP modules also have the preceding functions. Therefore, eSFP and SFP
optical modules are both called SFP optical modules.
– SFP+: small form-factor pluggable plus. An SPF+ optical module is an SFP
module with a higher rate. SFP+ optical modules are more sensitive to
electromagnetic interference (EMI) because they have a higher rate.
Compared with SFP modules, SFP+ optical modules use more springs and
tighter SFP+ optical module cages.
– XFP: 10G small form-factor pluggable. X is the Roman numeral 10,
meaning that all XFP optical modules provide a transmission rate of 10
Gbit/s. XFP optical modules are wider and longer than SFP+ optical
modules.
– SFP28: small form-factor pluggable 28. The size of an SFP28 optical
module is the same as that of an SFP+ optical module. An SFP28 port can
use a 25G SFP28 optical module or 10G SFP+ optical module.
– QSFP28: quad small form-factor pluggable 28. The size of a QSFP28
optical module is the same as that of a QSFP+ optical module. A QSFP28
port can use either a 100G QSFP28 optical module or a 40G QSFP+
optical module.
– QSFP+: quad small form-factor pluggable plus. QSFP+ optical modules
support MPO fiber connectors and are larger than SFP+ optical modules.
– QSFP-DD: quad small form factor pluggable-double density. A QSFP-DD
optical module is a high-speed pluggable module defined by the QSFP-
DD MSA group.
– CXP: extended-capability form-factor pluggable. A CXP optical module is
a hot-pluggable high-density parallel optical module, which provides 12
channels of traffic in each of the Tx and Rx directions. It applies only to
short-distance multimode links.
– CFP: centum form-factor pluggable, a new standard for high-speed, hot-
pluggable optical transceivers that support data communication and
telecommunication applications. The dimensions of a CFP optical module
are 13.6 mm x 144.75 mm x 82 mm (0.54 in. x 5.70 in. x 3.23 in.).
– CSFP: compact small form-factor pluggable. A CSFP optical module is a
compact SFP transceiver with two 100 Mbit/s or 1 Gbit/s single-fiber
bidirectional transceivers inside a standard SFP form factor. Its compact
and low-power design allows the system supplier to double port density
and access channel quantity for the LPU. This type of optical module is
mainly used in scenarios where one CSFP optical module connects to two
BIDI SFP optical modules. It is essential to ensure that the transmit and

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 456
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

receive wavelengths are consistent and the transmission distances are the
same.
● Classified by physical layer standard
Different physical layer standards are defined to allow data transmission in
different modes. Therefore, different types of optical modules are produced to
comply with these standards. For details, see standards compliance of the
specific optical module.
● Classified by mode
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode and multimode fibers. Therefore,
optical modules are also classified into single-mode and multimode modules
to support different optical fibers.
– Single-mode optical modules are used with single-mode fibers. Single-
mode fibers support a wide band and large transmission capacity, and are
used for long-distance transmission.
– Multimode optical modules are used with multimode fibers. Multimode
fibers have lower transmission performance than single-mode fibers
because of modal dispersion, but their costs are also lower. They are used
for small-capacity, short-distance transmission.
WDM modules differ from other types of optical modules in center wavelengths. A
common optical module has a center wavelength of 850 nm, 1310 nm, or 1550
nm, whereas a WDM module has different center wavelengths. WDM modules are
classified into two types: coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) and
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM). Within the same band, DWDM
modules are available in more types and use wavelength resources more
efficiently than CWDM modules. DWDM and CWDM modules allow lights with
different center wavelengths to be transmitted on one fiber without interfering
each other. Therefore, a passive multiplexer can be used to combine the lights into
one channel, which is then split into multiple channels by a demultiplexer on the
remote end. This reduces the optical fibers required. DWDM and CWDM modules
are used for long-distance transmission.
The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical fibers
of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is smaller than
the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-distance optical
module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the receive power on
the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical module may be burnt.

3.5.1.3 Optical Module Appearance
The following lists some common optical modules, which may not be supported
by this product. The figures are for reference only.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 457
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-434 Commonly used optical modules
Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

SFP LC Single-fiber bidirectional


RJ45 1 Gbps electrical module


eSFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional


Single-fiber bidirectional


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 458
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

SFP+ LC Two-fiber bidirectional


Single-fiber bidirectional


XFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional


Single-fiber bidirectional


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 459
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

SFP28 LC Two-fiber bidirectional


Single-fiber bidirectional


QSFP2 LC/MPO Two-fiber bidirectional
8


Single-fiber bidirectional


QSFP+ LC/MPO


CXP MPO


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 460
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

CFP LC/MPO CFP


CFP2


CFP4


CFP8


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 461
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

CSFP LC


QSFP- LC
DD




3.5.1.4 How to Use an Optical Module

This section provides instructions on how to use an optical module.

NO TE

Only optical modules matching Huawei products can be used. These optical modules are
strictly tested by Huawei. If non-matching optical modules are used, device requirements
may fail to be met, and services may fail to run properly. To replace optical modules, see
Parts Replacement > Replacing an Optical Module.

ESD Measures

Before touching any optical module, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. Take
full ESD measures when installing optical apparatus such as optical modules
indoors or outdoors.

Figure 3-117 Method for wearing ESD gloves


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 462
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-118 Method for wearing the ESD wrist strap


Placing Optical Apparatus and Fibers

Do not touch the pins or edge connectors of optical modules with bare hands.
Handle optical fibers gently. Use two fingers to hold the fiber connector instead of
grasping the fiber or fiber cover.

Avoid applying axial or lateral pressure to a fiber. Refrain from folding or twisting
a fiber or crushing its pigtail. Do not drag a fiber or apply pressure to the coupling
point of its pigtail. Figure 3-119 shows how to properly place optical apparatus
and fibers.

Figure 3-119 Methods for placing optical apparatus and fibers


NO TE

During installation, ensure that an optical fiber is coiled into a loop with a diameter of at
least 6 cm.

Uninstalling Optical Apparatus
● Release the latch and slowly take out the optical apparatus. Do not drag the
optical fiber to forcibly take out the optical module. Ensure that the optical
fiber is connected to and removed from the optical interface horizontally.
Before taking out an optical module, remove its optical fiber and release its
latch first.

Figure 3-120 Closed latch


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 463
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-121 Released latch


● The black plastic latch shown by (1) in Figure 3-122 is the unlocking device
for the 155 Mbit/s electrical transceiver. You can press the latch to unlock the
optical module. Hold the two sides of the optical module to remove it, as
shown by (2) in Figure 3-122.

Figure 3-122 Removing a 155 Mbit/s electrical transceiver


Do not remove the black plastic latch when removing the 155 Mbit/s
electrical transceiver.


If the black plastic latch falls off, use an auxiliary tool, such as a pair of
tweezers, to press the cage latch, as shown in Figure 3-123. Then, hold the
two sides of the optical module to remove it.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 464
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-123 Pressing the buckle of the optical cage


● If the CFP2 optical module is used, its unlocking device is a spring clip, as
shown by (1) in Figure 3-124. Before removing such an optical module,
release the latch first. Then, hold the latch to horizontally remove the optical
module.

Figure 3-124 Removing a CFP2 optical module


● When removing a CFP optical module, loosen the two screw rods of the
module and then remove the module slowly. Do not directly drag the optical
fiber to pull out the optical module or forcibly pull out the optical module.
Ensure that the optical fiber is connected to and removed from the optical
interface horizontally.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 465
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


CA UTION

The QSFP28 and QSFP-DD modules will get very hot during operation. To
prevent injuries, do not touch the module shells when removing the modules.

Precautions for Loose Optical Modules
● When installing an optical module, firmly push it into position until you hear
a click or feel a slight tremor, signaling that the optical module is securely
locked. If the optical module is not securely locked, its edge connector may be
loosely connected to the board connector, and the link may still be up.
However, if the optical module experiences tremors or collisions with other
objects, it may come loose or temporarily lose optical signals.
● When inserting the optical module, ensure that the latch is closed (the latch
locks the optical module). After the optical module is inserted, try pulling it
out to see if it is installed in position. If the optical module cannot be pulled
out, it is secured.
● If you cannot push the optical module into an optical module cage any
further, the optical module is in good contact with the board connector.
● When installing a CFP optical module, push the module panel horizontally
into the connector using even force with both thumbs. After the module is
inserted, push the module slightly to ensure that it has reached the stop
position.
● When inserting a CFP optical module into a board, ensure that the module is
in full contact with the connector. At the same time, fasten the captive screws

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 466
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

at both ends of the CFP optical module. If you fasten the captive screws one
by one, the CFP optical module may fail to be securely installed. You are
advised to use a screwdriver to tighten the screws on the optical module.

Precautions for Receptacle Contamination
● Prepare cleaning tissues for onsite use. Clean an optical connector before
inserting it into the receptacle to protect the receptacle against
contamination.

NO TE

Use at least three cleaning tissues. Wipe the end of an optical connector horizontally
in one direction, and then shift the connector to the unused part of the cleaning tissue
to continue. Generally, one cleaning tissue is used for cleaning one optical connector.


● Cover optical modules that are temporarily unused with dust-proof caps to
prevent dust pollution. If no dust-proof caps are available, inserting fibers can
effectively prevent dust from entering these optical modules.
Covering temporarily unused optical modules with dust-proof caps


Using a fiber instead of a dust-proof cap to prevent dust pollution


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 467
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

● Cover optical fiber jumpers that are temporarily unused with dust-proof caps
and place them on the optical distribution frame (ODF) or coil them up in a
fiber management tray. Ensure that they are not compressed or squeezed.


● If optical modules or fibers remain unused for a long time without being
covered with dust-proof caps, clean their receptacles or optical connectors
before using them again. Use cotton swabs to clean receptacles and fiber
cleaning tissues to clean fiber connectors.
NO TE

When cleaning a receptacle, gently insert a cotton swab and rotate it without applying
excessive force. Otherwise, the receptacle may be damaged.


● If optical signals are unexpectedly lost during device operation, use the
previously mentioned method to clean the receptacle or optical connector.
This can help exclude contamination as the cause of signal loss.

Precautions for Overload-caused Burnt Optical Modules
● When using an OTDR to test the connectivity or attenuation of a fiber
channel, disconnect the optical fiber from the optical module. Otherwise, the
optical module may be burnt.
● When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator if necessary. Do
not loosen the optical connector instead.
● It is required that a long-distance optical module have an input optical power
of less than –7 dBm. If the input optical power is greater than –7 dBm, you
need to add an optical attenuator. For example, if the transmit optical power
is X dBm and the optical attenuation is Y dB, the receive optical power is X –
Y, which must be smaller than –7 dBm (X – Y < –7 dBm).

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 468
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors
As the Ethernet port rate continues to rise, the quality standards for optical fibers
and cables rise accordingly. Table 3-435 describes requirements for the loss of
optical fiber connectors according to the national standard (GBT50312-2016).

Table 3-435 Maximum attenuation of optical fiber connectors
Type Maximum Attenuation of an Optical Fiber
Connector (dB)

Fiber splicing connector 0.3

Optical mechanical connector 0.3

Optical connector 0.75



NO TE

Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.
Table 3-436 describes requirements in IEEE Std 802.3-2018 for the reflection of
the optical fiber connector when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use
PAM4 encoding to double the rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for
the reflection.

Table 3-436 Maximum reflection of connectors
Number of Optical Fiber Maximum Reflection of Each Connector
Connectors (dB)

1 –22

2 –29

4 –33

6 –35

8 –37

10 –39


The loss and reflectance values of optical fiber connectors are tested and
processed as follows:
1. Disconnect the peer optical fiber and use the OTDR to test the loss and
reflection of each link and node at the local end. Check whether the loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal (splicing connector loss < 0.3 dB/
node, connector loss < 0.75 dB/node, and connector reflection < –30 dB/
node). If the loss and reflection exceed the limits, handle the abnormal
interface.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 469
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

2. Based on the distance of the abnormal point in the OTDR test result, locate
the equipment room where the interface is located and preliminarily
determine the interface location. Disconnect the interface and perform the
OTDR test on the interface that reports the alarm to check whether the
distance is consistent with the previous test. If not, continue to test other
interfaces.
3. After locating the abnormal interface, use a fiberscope to check the interface.
If the interface is contaminated, clean it.
4. After the interface is cleaned, restore the interface and tighten the connector.
Perform an OTDR test on the interface that reports alarms to check whether
the loss and reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange plate and perform an OTDR test on the
interface that reports the alarm to check whether the loss and reflection of
each link and node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
interface that reports the alarm to check whether the loss and reflection of
each link and node are normal.
7. If there are multiple abnormal points on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.

Other Precautions
● An optical connector must be horizontally inserted into a receptacle to avoid
damages to the receptacle.


● Mixed use of multimode and single-mode optical fibers is prohibited.
Otherwise, faults such as signal loss may occur.
The following table describes methods for distinguishing single-mode optical
modules from multimode optical modules.

Table 3-437 Method for distinguishing single-mode optical modules from
multimode optical modules

Item Single-Mode Multimode

Transmission distance 10 km or longer Below 0.5 km

Wavelength Non-850 nm 850 nm

Information on the SM MM
label



50G Optical Module Installation

1. Precautions for optical module installation

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 470
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

(1) If a cabinet with a door is used, a sufficient distance must be reserved between
the optical module and the cabinet door to prevent the latch or pigtail from
bumping on the door.
(2) Long-distance optical modules must be equipped with optical attenuators for
self-loops. For a 50GBase-ER (40 km) long-distance optical module, the receive
optical power damage threshold is lower than the average minimum transmit
optical power, making the module prone to damage caused by self-loops.
Therefore, the module must be equipped with an optical attenuator for self-loops.
(3) When optical path quality is tested using an OTDR, optical fibers must be
removed from the associated optical module. This is because the OTDR's transmit
optical power is far greater than the optical power damage threshold at the
receive end of an optical module.
2. Method for checking an optical path

Figure 3-125 Method for checking an optical path


3. Method for cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber
Before cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber that is in use, ensure that the
optical fiber has no optical signals. To achieve this, shut down the ports at both
ends of the fiber. Then, clean the end faces and insert the optical fiber back into
the corresponding port.
To clean the end faces of an optical fiber that is not in use, remove the dust-proof
cap from the fiber connector (or the pigtail connector of the involved optical
component), and put the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit. After the
cleaning is complete, re-install the dust-proof cap.
● Use the untouched part of a lint-free wipe to wipe the connector end face
along one direction.
● If the end face of an optical fiber cannot be cleaned due to serious
contamination, use a lint-free wipe dipped with cleanser to wipe the end face
along one direction. Then, use a dry lint-free wipe to clean the end face.
Ensure that the end face is dry before using the optical fiber.
● After the cleaning is complete, immediately install a dust-proof cap for any
optical fiber connector that is not in use.
4. Precautions for using a lint-free wipe to clean the end face of an optical
fiber
● Use the smooth surface of the lint-free wipe for cleaning.
● Ensure that the optical fiber connector is vertical to the lint-free wipe during
cleaning.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 471
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

● Wipe the end face along the direction of the lint-free wipe's grain.
● Wipe the end face along one direction only.
● Any part of a lint-free wipe can be used only once, and a small piece of lint-
free wipe can be used to clean only one connector.
5. Method for using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
Remove the dust-proof cap from the optical port of the optical module, and put
the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit.
● Select a proper lint-free swab based on the type of the optical port to be
cleaned. (For SC optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 2.5 mm;
for LC and MTRJ optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 1.25
mm.) Dip the lint-free swab into cleanser, insert it into the inside of the
optical port, and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in
one direction along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Insert a dry lint-free swab of the same type into the optical port and clean the
optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in one direction along the inner
wall of the optical port.
● Cover the optical port with a dust-proof cap after the cleaning is complete.
6. Precautions for using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
● When cleaning the optical port of an optical module, clean the end faces of
associated optical fibers to prevent the optical fibers from contaminating the
optical port.
● In general, each lint-free swab can be used for cleaning only once. If a used
lint-free swab is confirmed clean and can be reused, it can be used for a
maximum of three times. For example, a lint-free swab that is ever used to
dry an optical port can be used for a maximum of three times.
7. Safety precautions
● Electrostatic protection: Active optical and electrical components are
extremely sensitive to electrostatic. Therefore, take strict measures to protect
against electrostatic. For example, wear ESD gloves during operations and
touch only the shell of the involved component.
● Laser protection: Do not look into optical ports without eye protection when
reseating a module.
8. Discrete reflectance
During link deployment, focus on the reflection indicators of each node. The
discrete reflection indicators must meet the IEEE specifications.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 472
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-438 Maximum discrete reflectances of QSFP28 50G defined by IEEE
Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER
Discrete (Maximum Value (Maximum Value (Maximum Value
Reflectances of Each Discrete of Each Discrete of Each Discrete
Greater Than –55 Reflectance Reflectance Reflectance
dB Coefficient) Coefficient) Coefficient)

1 –25 dB –22 dB –19 dB

2 –31 dB –29 dB –27 dB

4 –35 dB –33 dB -32 dB

6 –38 dB –35 dB –35 dB

8 –40 dB –37 dB –37 dB

10 –41 dB –39 dB –39 dB


3.5.1.5 Optical Attenuator Configuration
This section describes how to configure an optical attenuator.

Calculating the Optical Attenuation
You can calculate the optical attenuation based on the actual optical power.

Table 3-439 Parameters for calculating optical attenuation
Name Description

P(in)min Worst sensitivity (maximum value of
the worst sensitivity).

P(out)max Maximum transmit optical power.

S Transmission distance.

A Attenuation coefficient. Note that the
attenuation coefficient is related to
optical fiber types and wavelengths.
Generally, the attenuation coefficient is
0.45 dBm/km or 0.4 dBm/km. The
attenuation coefficient of a 1550-nm
wavelength is 0.235 dBm/km or 0.25
dBm/km.

P(in)max Maximum receive optical power, that
is, minimum overload point.


The principle for determining whether an attenuator needs to be configured at a
transmission point is as follows:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 473
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

If P(out)max – S x A > P(in)max, an attenuator needs to be configured. The
optical attenuation is calculated in the following formula: T= P(out)max – S x A –
P(in)max.

Table 3-440 Reference for configuring an attenuator

Part Descriptio P(out) P(out) P(in) P(in)
Number n max min min max

34060276 eSFP,1310n –8 dBm –15 dBm –31 dBm –8 dbm
m,STM1,LC
,SM,15km



NO TE

● If P(in)max of an optical module equals P(out)max, you do not need to configure an
attenuator.
● You can choose the 5 dBm and 10 dBm attenuators for optical modules on the device.

Part Numbers and Descriptions of Attenuators

Table 3-441 Part numbers and descriptions of attenuators

Part Number Description

45030021 Fixed Optical
Attenuator,1260nm~1620nm-5dB-LC/
PC-45dB

45030022 Fixed Optical
Attenuator,1260nm~1620nm-10dB-LC/
PC-45dB



NO TE

This table is for reference only. The part numbers of attenuators vary according to
configuration documents.
3.5.2 2.048Mbps SFP Optical Module

3.5.2.1 2Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial

Table 3-442 2Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 474
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 2Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-2km-
commercial

Part Number 34060588

Model OSC002B01

Form factor eSFP

Application standard C37.94

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -10°C to 70°C(14°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 2.048 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 2 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -15 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1100 nm - 1600 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 475
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.3 GPON ONU SFP Optical Module

3.5.3.1 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry

Table 3-443 GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/1310nm(tx)-20km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name GPON ONU-SFP-SMF-1490nm(rx)/
1310nm(tx)-20km-industry

Part Number 03031QHU

Model H87MMA5671A2

Form factor SFP

Application standard FSAN G.984.2, OMCI support per ITU-T
G.988

Connector type SC/APC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 2.488 Gbit/s(rx)/1.244 Gbit/s(TX)

Target transmission distance [km] 20 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1290 nm - 1330 nm

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 476
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -27 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.4 155Mbps SFP Electrical Module


3.5.4.1 155Mbps-SFP-120m-extended

Table 3-444 155Mbps-SFP-120m-extended specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-SFP-120m-extended

Part Number 34100104

Model STM1E-SFP02

Form factor SFP

Application standard ITU-T G.703/G.783, STM-1e

Connector type SMB

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 477
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km



3.5.5 1Gbps SyncE and 1588V2 Electrical Module

3.5.5.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2

Table 3-445 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support SyncE and 1588V2 specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry-Support
SyncE and 1588V2

Part Number 34100255

Model OEGD01N02

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km



3.5.6 155Mbps eSFP Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 478
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.6.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry

Table 3-446 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-
industry

Part Number 34060307

Model eSFP-1310nm-I-1

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 15 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1261 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -15 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 479
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -31 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.6.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry

Table 3-447 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
industry

Part Number 34060308

Model eSFP-1310nm-L-1.1

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 480
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.6.3 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry

Table 3-448 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
industry

Part Number 34060309

Model eSFP-1550nm-L-1.2

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 481
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.6.4 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-449 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number S4015715


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 482
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Model eSFP-FE-LH40-SM1310

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -10 dBm



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 483
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.6.5 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4015716)

Table 3-450 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number S4015716

Model eSFP-FE-LH80-SM1550

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 484
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1263 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -34 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -10 dBm


3.5.6.6 155Mbps-eSFP-MMF-1310nm-2km-commercial

Table 3-451 155Mbps-eSFP-MMF-1310nm-2km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-MMF-1310nm-2km-
commercial

Part Number S4015731

Model SFP-FE-SX-MM1310

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options -

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 2 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1380 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 485
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -19 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1380 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -30 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -14 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -14 dBm


3.5.6.7 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial

Table 3-452 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-
commercial

Part Number S4015755

Model eSFP-FE-LX-SM1310

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 486
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 15 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1261 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -15 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -8 dBm


3.5.7 155Mbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 487
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.7.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
(02310QNG)

Table 3-453 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/
1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial

Part Number 02310QNG

Model OSC015B01

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-U

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 15 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 488
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.7.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
(02310QNH)

Table 3-454 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial

Part Number 02310QNH

Model OSC015B02

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 15 km


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 489
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.7.3 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
(34060363)

Table 3-455 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/
1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial

Part Number 34060363

Model SFP-FE-LX-SM1310-BIDI

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-U

Connector type LC

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 490
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 15 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 491
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.7.4 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
(34060364)

Table 3-456 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial

Part Number 34060364

Model SFP-FE-LX-SM1550-BIDI

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 15 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 492
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.8 622Mbps eSFP Optical Module


3.5.8.1 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310QXT)

Table 3-457 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02310QXT

Model OSH080N01

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 622 Mbit/s

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 493
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.8.2 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (S4015713)

Table 3-458 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number S4015713

Model eSFP-1310nm-L-4.1

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-4

Connector type LC


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 494
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 622 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1296 nm - 1330 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 10.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1296 nm - 1330 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 495
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.8.3 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial

Table 3-459 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 622Mbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-
commercial

Part Number S4015760

Model OSH015N05

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 622 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 15 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1274 nm - 1356 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -15 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 496
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -8 dBm


3.5.9 1Gbps Electrical Module

3.5.9.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02310RAV)

Table 3-460 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry

Part Number 02310RAV

Model OEGD01N01

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 497
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.9.2 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02310VPT)

Table 3-461 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry

Part Number 02310VPT

Model OEGD01N02

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km



3.5.9.3 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (02314FNP)

Table 3-462 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry

Part Number 02314FNP

Model OEGD01N03

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 498
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km


3.5.9.4 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial

Table 3-463 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-commercial

Part Number 34100080

Model SFP-GE-1000BaseT

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 499
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.9.5 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100099)

Table 3-464 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry

Part Number 34100099

Model OSFPTRJ45

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class A, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km



3.5.9.6 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (34100144)

Table 3-465 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry

Part Number 34100144

Model SFP-1000BASE-T1

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 500
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km


3.5.9.7 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry (S4017306)

Table 3-466 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry

Part Number S4017306

Model OEGD10N02

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 501
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.10 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module

3.5.10.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310RAW)

Table 3-467 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02310RAW

Model OSG080N01

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1500 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 502
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.



3.5.10.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended (34060286)

Table 3-468 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-
extended

Part Number 34060286

Model eSFP-850nm-1000Base-Sx/FC200 MM

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 503
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km(OM1)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 770 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 760 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -17 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.10.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry (34060290)

Table 3-469 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-
industry

Part Number 34060290

Model eSFP(S)-1310nm-1000Base-Lx

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-LX10


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 504
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 505
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.10.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry (34060320)

Table 3-470 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
industry

Part Number 34060320

Model eSFP-1310nm-Lx-40Km

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-EX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1275 nm - 1350 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 506
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1275 nm - 1350 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.10.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-industry

Table 3-471 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-
industry

Part Number 34060321

Model eSFP-850nm-1000Base-Sx

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 770 nm - 860 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 507
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 760 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -17 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.10.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (34060360)

Table 3-472 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060360

Model eSFP-1550nm-1000Base-Zx/FC100

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 508
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1500 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.



3.5.10.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-120km-industry

Table 3-473 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-120km-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-120km-
industry

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 509
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34061380

Model eSFP(S)-1550nm-1000Base-Lx

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1250 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -10 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -10 dBm

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 510
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



3.5.10.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-474 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number S4016067

Model OSG010N05

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-LX10

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1355 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 511
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1355 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm


3.5.10.9 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (S4016954)

Table 3-475 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number S4016954

Model OSG040002

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-EX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 512
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1275 nm - 1350 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm


3.5.10.10 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended (S4017307)

Table 3-476 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-
extended

Part Number S4017307

Model OMGD50N02

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 513
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km(OM1)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 770 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 760 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -17 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0 dBm


3.5.11 1.25Gbps SFP BIDI Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 514
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.11.1 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Table 3-477 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 34060644

Model OGEBIDI10

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-U

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 515
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.11.2 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Table 3-478 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-SFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 34060676

Model OGEBIDI11

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 516
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.12 1.25Gbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module

3.5.12.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470)

Table 3-479 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470) specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470)

Part Number 34060470

Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-BIDI

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-U

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 517
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
Used in pair with 34060475.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 518
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.12.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Table 3-480 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Part Number 34060475

Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1490-BIDI

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 519
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
Used in pair with 34060470.



3.5.12.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Table 3-481 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 34060539

Model OGEBIDI41

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-U

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 520
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -23 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
Used in pair with 34060540.



3.5.12.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Table 3-482 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 34060540

Model OGEBIDI40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-D


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 521
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -23 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
Used in pair with 34060539.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 522
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.12.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial

Table 3-483 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1570nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial

Part Number 34060595

Model OGEBIDI80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX80-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1570 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1560 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 523
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
Used in pair with 34060596.



3.5.12.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial

Table 3-484 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1570nm(Rx)-80km-commercial

Part Number 34060596

Model OGEBIDI81

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX80-U

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 524
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1560 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
Used in pair with 34060595.



3.5.12.7 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-
commercial

Table 3-485 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 34060638

Model eSFP-1310/1550-L1.1-BIDI

Form factor eSFP


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 525
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-U

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -5°C to 70°C(23°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 0.1~1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -25 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
When an optical module is used on the OptiX PTN equipment, the rate of the optical
module cannot exceed 155 Mbit/s.



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 526
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.12.8 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-
commercial

Table 3-486 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 34060639

Model eSFP-1550/1310-L1.1-BIDI

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX40-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -5°C to 70°C(23°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 0.1~1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 527
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -25 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
When an optical module is used on the OptiX PTN equipment, the rate of the optical
module cannot exceed 155 Mbit/s.



3.5.12.9 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial

Table 3-487 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-80km-commercial

Part Number 02314RDH

Model SFP-GE-BIDI-80km-SM1550

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX80-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 528
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard TUV; EN 60825-1, EN 62368-1;
NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1;
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56.

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1540 nm - 1560 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
It is used with 02314RDK in pairs.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 529
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.12.10 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-80km-commercial

Table 3-488 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-80km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1550nm(Rx)-80km-commercial

Part Number 02314RDK

Model SFP-GE-BIDI-80km-SM1490

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX80-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C (32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard TUV; EN 60825-1, EN 62368-1;
NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1;
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56.

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 530
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1540 nm - 1560 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -26 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
It is used with 02314RDH in pairs.



3.5.13 1.25Gbps CSFP BIDI Optical Module

3.5.13.1 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-industry
(02312WHB)

Table 3-489 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-40km-industry

Part Number 02312WHB

Model OSG040008

Form factor CSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000BASE-BX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 531
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm(Tx)/1310 nm(Rx)

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6.6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -25 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.13.2 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(02312WHC)

Table 3-490 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 532
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 02312WHC

Model OSG010007

Form factor CSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000BASE-BX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm(Tx)/1490 nm(Rx)

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6.6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 533
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



3.5.13.3 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(02312WHD)

Table 3-491 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 02312WHD

Model O00CSFP25

Form factor CSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000BASE-BX10-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 534
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.13.4 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(34060525)

Table 3-492 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 34060525

Model O00CSFP25

Form factor CSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000BASE-BX10-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 535
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.13.5 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-industry
(34060894)

Table 3-493 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/
1310nm(Rx)-40km-industry

Part Number 34060894

Model OSG040008

Form factor CSFP

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 536
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000BASE-BX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm(Tx)/1310 nm(Rx)

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6.6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -25 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 537
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.13.6 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(34061329)

Table 3-494 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/
1490nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 34061329

Model OSG010007

Form factor CSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000BASE-BX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm(Tx)/1490 nm(Rx)

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 538
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6.6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm



3.5.14 125M~1.25Gbps CSFP BIDI Optical Module


3.5.14.1 125M~1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(02312WHA)

Table 3-495 125M~1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~1.25Gbps-CSFP-
SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-
industry

Part Number 02312WHA

Model OSG010005

Form factor CSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000BASE-BX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 539
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 125 Mbit/s ~ 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm(Tx)/1310 nm(Rx)

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6.6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.14.2 125M~1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(34060803)

Table 3-496 125M~1.25Gbps-CSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~1.25Gbps-CSFP-
SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-
industry

Part Number 34060803


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 540
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Model OSG010005

Form factor CSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000BASE-BX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 125 Mbit/s ~ 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1490 nm(Tx)/1310 nm(Rx)

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1500 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6.6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 541
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.15 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module

3.5.15.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-497 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060476

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1571

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1571 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 542
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.15.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-498 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060477

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1591

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 543
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1591 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1584.5 nm - 1597.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.15.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-499 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060478

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1551

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 544
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1551 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1544.5 nm - 1557.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.15.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-500 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 545
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060479

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1511

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1511 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1504.5 nm - 1517.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 546
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.15.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-501 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060480

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1611

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1611 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1604.5 nm - 1617.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 547
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.15.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-502 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060481

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1491

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 548
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1491 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1484.5 nm - 1497.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.15.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-503 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060482

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1531

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 549
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1531 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1524.5 nm - 1537.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 550
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.15.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-504 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060483

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1471

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1471 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1464.5 nm - 1477.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 551
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.16 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module


3.5.16.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-505 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060366

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.10

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 552
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1560.61 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.2 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-506 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060372

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.20

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 553
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1559.79 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.3 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-507 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 554
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060373

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.30

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1558.98 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 555
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.4 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-508 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060374

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1558.17 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 556
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.5 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-509 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060375

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.50

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 557
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1557.36 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.6 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-510 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060376

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.60

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 558
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1556.55 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 559
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.7 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-511 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060377

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.70

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1555.75 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 560
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.8 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-512 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060378

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1554.94 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 561
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.9 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-513 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060379

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.90

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 562
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1554.13 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-514 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 563
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060380

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.00

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1553.33 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 564
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.11 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-515 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060381

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.10

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1552.52 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 565
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.12 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-516 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060382

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.20

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1551.72 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 566
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.13 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-517 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060383

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.30

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 567
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550.92 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.14 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-518 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 568
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060384

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550.12 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 569
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.15 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-519 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060385

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.50

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1549.32 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 570
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.16 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-520 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060386

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.60

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1548.51 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 571
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.17 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-521 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060387

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.70

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 572
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1547.72 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.18 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-522 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 573
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060388

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1546.92 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 574
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.19 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-523 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060389

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.90

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1546.12 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 575
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.20 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-524 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060390

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.00

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1545.32 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 576
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.21 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-525 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060391

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.10

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 577
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1544.53 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.22 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-526 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 578
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060392

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.20

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1543.73 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 579
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.23 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-527 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060393

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.30

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1542.94 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 580
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.24 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-528 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060394

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1542.14 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 581
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.25 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-529 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060395

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.50

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 582
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1541.35 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.26 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-530 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 583
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060396

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.60

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1540.56 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 584
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.27 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-531 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060397

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.70

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1539.77 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 585
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.28 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-532 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060398

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1538.98 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 586
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.29 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-533 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060399

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.90

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 587
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1538.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.30 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-534 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 588
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060400

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.00

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1537.4 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 589
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.31 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-535 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060401

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.10

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1536.61 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 590
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.32 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-536 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060402

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.20

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1535.82 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 591
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.33 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-537 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060403

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.30

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 592
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1535.04 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.34 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-538 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 593
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060404

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1534.25 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 594
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.35 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-539 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060405

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.50

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1533.47 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 595
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.36 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-540 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060406

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.60

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1532.68 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 596
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.37 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-541 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060407

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.70

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 597
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1531.9 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.38 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-542 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 598
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060408

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1531.12 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 599
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.16.39 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-543 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060409

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.90

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1530.33 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 600
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.16.40 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-544 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-
SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060410

Model eSFP-LH120-SM196.00

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1529.55 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 601
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.17 2.5Gbps eSFP Optical Module

3.5.17.1 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34060289)

Table 3-545 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 34060289

Model eSFP-1310nm-L-16.1

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 602
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 2.5 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1280 nm - 1335 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -27 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.17.2 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial (34060484)

Table 3-546 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-2km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 603
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-2km-
commercial

Part Number 34060484

Model eSFP-1310nm-155M-2.5G-LC-SM-2km

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 2.5 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 2 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1266 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -10 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1200 nm - 1650 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 604
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.17.3 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial (34060485)

Table 3-547 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-15km-
commercial

Part Number 34060485

Model eSFP-SM1310-155M~2.5G-15km

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 2.5 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 15 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 605
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1250 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.17.4 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (34060488)

Table 3-548 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 2.5Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060488

Model eSFP-1550nm-L-16.2

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 606
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 2.5 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1500 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1200 nm - 1650 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.18 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module

3.5.18.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310PVU)

Table 3-549 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02310PVU

Model OSX080N04

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 607
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1565 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 608
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.



3.5.18.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (02311YEB)

Table 3-550 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 02311YEB

Model OSX040N14

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 bit/s ~ 10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 609
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -20 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -7 dBm

NOTE
1310 nm- and 1550 nm-wavelength modules cannot be used together, because self-loop is
not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.



3.5.18.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry

Table 3-551 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-
industry

Part Number 34060599

Model OSX010N05

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 610
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.18.4 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry

Table 3-552 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-
industry

Part Number 34060618


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 611
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Model OMXD10N01

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.3 km(OM3)
0.082 km(OM2)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -7.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -9.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 612
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.18.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry

Table 3-553 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-
industry

Part Number 34060684

Model OSX040N05

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.7 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 613
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15.8 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -14.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.



3.5.18.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34061409)

Table 3-554 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 34061409

Model Default

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 614
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm- 1355nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm-1600nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.



3.5.18.7 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial

Table 3-555 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-
commercial

Part Number S4017482


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 615
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Model OSX040N03

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.3 km(OM3)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -7.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -9.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 616
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



3.5.18.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial (S4017483)

Table 3-556 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number S4017483

Model OSX001002

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 617
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm


3.5.18.9 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial (S4017484)

Table 3-557 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number S4017484

Model OMXD30002

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 618
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15.8 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -14.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm

NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.



3.5.19 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module

3.5.19.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial

Table 3-558 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial

Part Number 34061041

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 619
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Model OSXD50N00

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW,
1000BASE-SX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.55 km(OM3/GE)
0.3 km(OM3/10GE)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -1 dBm

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -9.5 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -7.3 dBm

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10G: 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 620
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -17 dBm
10GE: -9.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm


3.5.19.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-559 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 34061042

Model OSX010N13

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW,
1000BASE-LX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] GE: 10 km
10GE: 10 km


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 621
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0.5 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: 0.5 dBm

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -8.2 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -8.2 dBm

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10GE: 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -19 dBm
10GE: -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm


3.5.19.3 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-560 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial

Part Number 34061043

Model OSX040N12

Form factor SFP+


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 622
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW,
1000BASE-LX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] GE: 40 km
10GE: 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 4 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: 4 dBm

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -4.7 dBm
[dBm] 10GE: -4.7 dBm

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB
10GE: 3.0 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -15.8 dBm
10GE: -15.8 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 623
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm



3.5.20 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module


3.5.20.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-561 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-
commercial

Part Number 34060686

Model OSX070001

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1511 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1504.5 nm - 1517.5 nm

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 624
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.20.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-562 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-
commercial

Part Number 34060687

Model OSX070002

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 625
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1471 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1464.5 nm - 1477.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.20.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-563 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-
commercial


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 626
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060688

Model OSX070003

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1491 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1484.5 nm - 1497.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 627
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.20.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-564 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-
commercial

Part Number 34060689

Model OSX070004

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1531 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1524.5 nm - 1537.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 628
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.20.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-565 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-
commercial

Part Number 34060690

Model OSX070005

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 629
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1551 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1544.5 nm - 1557.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.20.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-566 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-
commercial

Part Number 34060691

Model OSX070006

Form factor SFP+


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 630
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1571 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 631
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.20.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-567 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-
commercial

Part Number 34060692

Model OSX070007

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1591 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1584.5 nm - 1597.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 632
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -21 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.20.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-568 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-
commercial

Part Number 34060693

Model OSX070008

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1611 nm

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 633
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1604.5 nm - 1617.4 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -21 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.21 10Gbps SFP+ BIDI Optical Module


3.5.21.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
(02311JNF)

Table 3-569 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 02311JNF

Model OSX040B10

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX-U


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 634
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C (32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. Ensure that the optical power on the receive side is less than or equal to –5 dBm. If the
optical power does not meet the requirement, add an optical attenuator. Do not use short-
distance optical fibers for direct connection.



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 635
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.21.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
(02311JNQ)

Table 3-570 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 02311JNQ

Model OSX040B11

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX40-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 636
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. Ensure that the optical power on the receive side is less than or equal to –5 dBm. If the
optical power does not meet the requirement, add an optical attenuator. Do not use short-
distance optical fibers for direct connection.



3.5.21.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(02311RXL)

Table 3-571 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 02311RXL

Model OSX010B12

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-U

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 637
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -10.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.21.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(02311RXM)

Table 3-572 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 02311RXM

Model OSX010B13

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 638
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 639
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.21.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(34060544-001)

Table 3-573 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 34060544-001

Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1270-BIDI

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-U

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 640
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -10.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.21.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(34060544-002)

Table 3-574 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 34060544-002

Model OSX010B10

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-U

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 641
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -10.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.21.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(34060546-001)

Table 3-575 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 34060546-001

Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1330-BIDI

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-D

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 642
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 643
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.21.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
(34060546-002)

Table 3-576 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry

Part Number 34060546-002

Model OSX010B11

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm
[dBm]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 644
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.21.9 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
(34060917)

Table 3-577 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 34060917

Model OSX040B02

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX40-D

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 645
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.21.10 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
(34060918)

Table 3-578 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 34060918

Model OSX040B03

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX-U

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 646
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.22 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 647
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.22.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-579 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060852

Model ODX0880T1

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT
G.709

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] -

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 648
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12)
-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.



3.5.22.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-580 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 02314MED

Model OSX040C01

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW, ITUT
G.709

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-INF-8077i

Environment standard RoHS

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 649
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] -

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1567.133 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -16 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 1E-12,
9.95Gbps~10.7Gbps)
-19 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 2E-03, 11.3Gbps,
dispersion 800ps/nm, at room
temperature and OSNR > 31dB)

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.23 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 650
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.23.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-581 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 02314MED

Model OSX040C01

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW, ITUT
G.709

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-INF-8077i

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] -

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1567.133 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 651
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -16 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 1E-12,
9.95Gbps~10.7Gbps)
-19 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 2E-03, 11.3Gbps,
dispersion 800ps/nm, at room
temperature and OSNR > 31dB)

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.23.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-582 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-
SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 34060852

Model ODX0880T1

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT
G.709

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)
<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 652
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] -

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12)
-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.



3.5.24 25Gbps SFP28 Optical Module


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 653
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.24.1 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial (02312PDK)

Table 3-583 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-
commercial

Part Number 02312PDK

Model SFP28-25G-850nm-0.1km-MM

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE802.3-2012, 25GBASE-SR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2.4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 654
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -10.3 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.24.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry (02312PDL)

Table 3-584 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-
industry

Part Number 02312PDL

Model SFP28-25G-1310nm-10km-SM

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 cc, 25GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-
LR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)
<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,10.3125
G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 655
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1295 nm - 1325 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1295 nm - 1325 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.24.3 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial (34061254)

Table 3-585 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-
commercial

Part Number 34061254

Model OMXD30011

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE802.3-2012, 25GBASE-SR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 656
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2.4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -10.3 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.24.4 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry (34061618)

Table 3-586 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 657
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-
industry

Part Number 34061618

Model SFP28-25G-1310nm-10km-SM

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-LR,
10GBASE-LR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)
<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,10.3125
G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1295 nm - 1325 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1295 nm - 1325 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 658
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.24.5 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended

Table 3-587 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-
extended

Part Number 34061631

Model SFP28-25G-850nm-0.1km-MM

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-SR,
10GBASE-SR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)
<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,10.3125
G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 75°C(-4°F to 167°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 659
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2.4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -10.3 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.24.6 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-0.3km-industry

Table 3-588 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-0.3km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-0.3km-
industry

Part Number 34061940-001

Model SFP28-25G-1310nm-300m-SM

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-SR,
10GBASE-SR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 660
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)
<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,10.3125
G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.3 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -8.5 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 2 dBm




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 661
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.24.7 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial (34062754)

Table 3-589 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 34062754

Model SFP28-25G-1310nm-40km-SM

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 cc

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(25.78125G)
<1x10E-12(10.3125G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1295 nm - 1310 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 6.0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 6.0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -3.0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 4 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 662
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1295 nm - 1325 nm

Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) -21.0 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) -4.0 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Rx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) -4.0 dBm
[dBm]

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -18.35 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -19.0 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -4.0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


3.5.25 25Gbps SFP28 BIDI Optical Module

3.5.25.1 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Table 3-590 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/
1330nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Part Number 02312TVC

Model SFP28-25G-BIDI-10km-SM-3

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-LR,
10GBASE-LR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 663
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)
<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,10.3125
G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1270 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 664
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.25.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Table 3-591 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/
1270nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Part Number 02312TXG

Model SFP28-25G-BIDI-10km-SM-4

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-LR,
10GBASE-LR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)
<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,10.3125
G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1330 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1320 nm - 1340 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 665
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1280 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.26 40Gbps QSFP+ Optical Module

3.5.26.1 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-592 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-
SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 02310WUT

Model OMXD30009

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 666
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 41.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271 nm
1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.3 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -11.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 2.3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 667
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.26.2 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Table 3-593 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-
MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Part Number 02310WUU

Model OMXD30010

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-SR4

Connector type MPO-12

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 41.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km(OM3)
0.15 km(OM4)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7.6 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -5.6 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 668
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -9.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.



3.5.26.3 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-594 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-
SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 02311NUA

Model OSM010N11

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-LR4

Connector type MPO-12

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 4x9.95328 Gbit/s
4x10.3125 Gbit/s

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 669
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 0.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -8.2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -12.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -



3.5.27 50Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module

3.5.27.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-595 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02311YNR

Model OSL010N01

Form factor QSFP28

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 670
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 50GBASE-LR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
CE Class B

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1311 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4.2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -8.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -8.9 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 4.2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 671
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
1. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach
the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.5.27.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-596 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 02312AXF

Model QSFP28-50G-1311nm-40km-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 50GBASE-ER

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
CE Class B

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1311 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 672
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -15 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.
If the module needs to reach the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
1. To keep the optical module running stably for a long time, set the receive optical power
less than -4 dBm. (According to IEEE 802.3, if the receive optical power exceeds -2.3 dBm,
the optical module may be permanently damaged.)
2. Before connecting the optical module, you are advised to use the optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dBm, the optical module can be
directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dBm, add an appropriate attenuator at the receive
end to ensure that P is less than -4 dBm. Alternatively, add an appropriate attenuator (the
recommended value is no less than 10 dB) before the optical module is connected, and
then adjust the attenuator according to the actual situation to prevent the module from
being damaged.
3. If the pigtail loopback or short-distance connection of the optical module is used, the
attenuator must be added. It is recommended that the attenuator be greater than or equal
to 10 dB.
4. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.5.27.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-597 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 673
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02312MLF

Model QSFP28-50G-1310nm-80km-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard Huawei Define

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 51.5625 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 6.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 674
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power is subject to the OMA. To achieve the nominal optical power, the FEC
function must be enabled on the board and G.652 fibers must be used.
2. The optical power of the optical module read on the device is the average optical power,
not the OMA optical power.
3. This module can be connected only to optical modules with the same BOM number.



3.5.28 50Gbps QSFP28 BIDI Optical Module


3.5.28.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Table 3-598 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/
1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Part Number 02312EVV

Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-10km-SM-1

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR10

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2x10E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 675
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1331 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4.2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -8.9 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 4.2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach
the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 676
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.28.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1271nm(Tx)/1331nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Table 3-599 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1271nm(Tx)/1331nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1271nm(Tx)/
1331nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

Part Number 02312EVW

Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-10km-SM-2

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR10

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2x10E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4.2 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.5 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 677
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -8.9 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 4.2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach
the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.5.28.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295nm(Tx)/1309nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Table 3-600 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295nm(Tx)/1309nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295nm(Tx)/
1309nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 02312EVX

Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-40km-SM-2

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR40

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2x10E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 678
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -13.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 679
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach the
nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
1. To keep the optical module running stably for a long time, set the receive optical power
less than -4 dBm. (According to IEEE 802.3, if the receive optical power exceeds -2.3 dBm,
the optical module may be permanently damaged.)
2. Before connecting the optical module, you are advised to use the optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dBm, the optical module can be
directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dBm, add an appropriate attenuator at the receive
end to ensure that P is less than -4 dBm. Alternatively, add an appropriate attenuator (the
recommended value is no less than 10 dB) before the optical module is connected, and
then adjust the attenuator according to the actual situation to prevent the module from
being damaged.
3. If the pigtail loopback or short-distance connection of the optical module is used, the
attenuator must be added. It is recommended that the attenuator be greater than or equal
to 10 dB.
4. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.5.28.4 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1309nm(Tx)/1295nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Table 3-601 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1309nm(Tx)/1295nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1309nm(Tx)/
1295nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

Part Number 02312EVY

Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-40km-SM-1

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR40

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)
<2x10E-4(before FEC)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 680
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 53.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1309 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 1.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -13.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 681
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach the
nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
1. To keep the optical module running stably for a long time, set the receive optical power
less than -4 dBm. (According to IEEE 802.3, if the receive optical power exceeds -2.3 dBm,
the optical module may be permanently damaged.)
2. Before connecting the optical module, you are advised to use the optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dBm, the optical module can be
directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dBm, add an appropriate attenuator at the receive
end to ensure that P is less than -4 dBm. Alternatively, add an appropriate attenuator (the
recommended value is no less than 10 dB) before the optical module is connected, and
then adjust the attenuator according to the actual situation to prevent the module from
being damaged.
3. If the pigtail loopback or short-distance connection of the optical module is used, the
attenuator must be added. It is recommended that the attenuator be greater than or equal
to 10 dB.
4. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.



3.5.29 100Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module


3.5.29.1 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Table 3-602 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Part Number 02311NTY

Model OMND10N13

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm, 100GBASE-SR4

Connector type MPO-12

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 682
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.07 km(OM3)
0.1 km(OM4)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.4 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -8.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -6.4 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -10.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 2.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data that is not enabled by FEC, so that 1x10E - 12 can be
reached after FEC .
3. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 683
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.29.2 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-
commercial

Table 3-603 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-
commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1310nm-30km(NO
FEC)-40km(FEC)-commercial

Part Number 02312AUE

Model OSN030N05

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-ER4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km(FEC)
30 km(NO FEC)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 684
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.9 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -2.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 0.1 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -21.4 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach 40 km, the board FEC function must be enabled. Otherwise,
it can reach only 30 km.
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data obtained with FEC not enabled. After FEC is enabled, 1x10E
- 12 can be reached.
3. In 30 km application, the BER can reach 1x10E - 12.
4. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average value, not the OMA optical power.



3.5.29.3 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial (02312BSS)

Table 3-604 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 685
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 02312BSS

Model OSN010N24

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -4.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -1.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 4 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 686
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -8.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.



3.5.29.4 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-
commercial

Table 3-605 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-
commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02312NCX

Model QSFP28-100G-1310-80km-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard Huawei Define

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 687
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 6.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 6 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 688
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

NOTE
1. To achieve the nominal value, the FEC function must be enabled on the board and G.652
fibers must be used.
2. The BER 5x10E-5 is the data when FEC is disabled. After FEC is enabled, the BER can
reach 1x10E-12.
3. When the optical module is used for 80 km transmission, it must be interconnected with
Huawei optical modules of the same model.



3.5.29.5 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-
commercial

Table 3-606 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-
commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-
commercial

Part Number 02312NVQ

Model QSFP28-100G-1310-40km-SM

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 100GBASE-ER4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 689
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.9 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -2.9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 0.1 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -20.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -21.4 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
When an optical module is installed on an interface, the FEC function on the interface is
disabled by default. Pay attention to the FEC status of the peer interface during
interconnection.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 690
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.29.6 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial (02313SWA)

Table 3-607 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02313SWA

Model OSN010N24

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 691
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -4.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -1.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 4 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -8.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.



3.5.29.7 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry

Table 3-608 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-
SMF-1310nm-10km-industry

Part Number 02313VFM

Model QSFP28-100G-10km-SM-I

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 692
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –20°C to +85°C (–4°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard CISPR32 FCC Part15, IEC 61000-4-3,IEC
61000-4-2,EN/IEC60825-1:2014

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm
1300.055 nm
1304.585 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53-1296.59 nm
1299.02-1301.09 nm
1303.54-1305.63 nm
1308.09-1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -4.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -1.3 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 4 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53-1296.59 nm
1299.02-1301.09 nm
1303.54-1305.63 nm
1308.09-1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -8.6 dBm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 693
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The FEC function of the board must be enabled to ensure that the optical module
reaches the nominal value.
2. The BER of 5x10E–5 is the data when FEC is disabled. After FEC is enabled, the BER can
reach 1x10E–12.
3. See OMA for the actual optical power. The optical power read from the device is the
average optical power, not the OMA optical power.



3.5.29.8 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-609 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02314GYE

Model OSN010N22

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 100GBASE-LR1

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-4

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
CE Class B

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 106.25 Gbit/s(PAM4)

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 694
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4.8 dBm
[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.8 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1.9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -1.9 dBm
[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -6.1 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -6.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 4.8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power is subject to the OMA optical power. To reach the nominal value, the
FEC function of the optical module must be enabled.
2. The optical power of an optical module displayed on the device is the average optical
power, not the OMA optical power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
WDM client-side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.



3.5.30 AE 905S B Module

Description
Existing core network devices, which do not support 1588, cannot obtain clock
signals from BITS servers. Upgrading core network devices to support 1588 is both
complex and costly. To address this issue, the AE 905S B module is developed.
After having an AE 905S B module equipped, the device will be able to support
1588v2. Figure 3-126 and Figure 3-127 illustrate the appearance of an AE 905S B
module.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 695
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-126 AE 905S B module (front view)


Figure 3-127 AE 905S B module (rear view)


NO TE

An AE 905S B module must be inserted into a GE optical interface of SFP type.

The AE 905S B module has a STAT indicator under the HUAWEI logo. Table 3-610
describes STAT indicator states.

Table 3-610 Description of STAT indicator states

State Description

On (green) The AE 905S B module is operating properly.

On (red) The AE 905S B module has experienced a
hardware fault or is overheated.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 696
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

State Description

Blinking green once every No connection has been established on the
second GE interface.

Blinking red once every second The GPS frequency or time is out of lock.

Off The AE 905S B module is powered off or not
operating.


The AE 905S B module meets industrial-grade requirements. Table 3-611 lists its
interface specifications.

Table 3-611 AE 905S B (03032SWQ) module interface specifications
Item Specification

BOM Number 03032SWQ

Board Name for Order ANPM000GPS02

Interface type SMA

Encapsulation type SFP

Input signal An AE 905S B module uses the SMA interface
to receive GPS/Beidou/GLONASS satellite
signals.

Output signal An AE 905S B module uses the GE interface
to provide synchronous Ethernet and 1588v2


Installation


NO TICE

To meet heat dissipation requirements, leave interfaces around the AE 905S B
module empty. A maximum of two AE 905S B modules can be installed on a
device.

Figure 3-128 illustrates connections between the AE 905S B module, surge
protector, and antenna.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 697
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-128 Connections between the AE 905S B module, surge protector, and
antenna




NO TE

For the convenience of description, the GPS antenna in the description generally refers to
the GPS/GLONASS/BEIDOU antenna.
The AE 905S B module must be used with the GPS antenna and GPS surge protector and is
connected to the GPS antenna and GPS surge protector through the GPS feeder.
The GPS antenna receives satellite signals from the GPS. A GPS surge protector can protect
a device against the lightning strikes inducted by the antenna feeder. Without the
protection of a surge protector, a device may be damaged by surge currents or voltage in a
lightning weather. The GPS feeder transmits GPS signals.
The image shown here is indicative only. If there is any inconsistency between the image
and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
Before inserting an AE 905S B module into an interface, lock the latch. Before removing an
AE 905S B module from an optical interface, unlock the latch. For details, see Figure 3-129.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 698
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-129 Latch




Installation Procedure
NO TE

For details about how to install the GPS satellite antenna system, see the related GPS quick
installation guide.
1. Connect a two-sided female connector to the Protect interface of the surge
protector.


2. Connect one end of the coaxial cable to the Protect interface of the surge
protector and fasten the joint with a wrench.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 699
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


3. Implement 1+3+3 waterproof protection where the coaxial cable and the
Protect interface of the surge protector are connected, and fasten cable ties at
both ends.


4. Install the GPS support on the left or right side of the cabinet and tighten the
four screws.


5. Secure the surge protector on the GPS support.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 700
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


6. Install the ground cable of the surge protector. Connect one end of the
ground cable to the GND interface of the surge protector and the other end
to the ground point inside the cabinet.


NO TE

The surge protector must use OT M8 terminals.
7. Route the jumper through the cable inlet on the right side of the floor of the
cabinet, and connect the GPS feeder to the AE 905S.
8. Insert the AE 905S B module into an optical interface of the device with the
latch of the AE 905S B module locked.
9. Connect one end of the GPS feeder to the Surge interface of the surge
protector and the other end of the GPS feeder to the GPS antenna. Fasten
each connector with a wrench.
10. Implement 1+3+3 waterproof protection, and fasten cable ties at both ends.
– Implement waterproof protection where the feeder connector and the
Surge interface of the surge protector are connected.
– Implement waterproof protection where the feeder connector and the N
joint of the GPS antenna are connected.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 701
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

For details about how to make a GPS feeder connector, see the related GPS quick
installation guide.
3.5.31 AE 905S Module

Description
Existing core network devices, which do not support 1588, cannot obtain clock
signals from BITS servers. Upgrading core network devices to support 1588 is both
complex and costly. To address this issue, the AE 905S module is developed. After
having an AE 905S module equipped, the device will be able to support 1588v2.
Figure 3-130 and Figure 3-131 illustrate the appearance of an AE 905S module.

Figure 3-130 AE 905S module (front view)




Figure 3-131 AE 905S module (rear view)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 702
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

An AE 905S module must be inserted into a GE optical interface of SFP type.
The AE 905S module has a STAT indicator under the HUAWEI logo. Table 3-612
describes STAT indicator states.

Table 3-612 Description of STAT indicator states
State Description

On (green) The AE 905S module is operating properly.

On (red) The AE 905S module has experienced a
hardware fault or is overheated.

Blinking green once every No connection has been established on the
second GE interface.

Blinking red once every second The GPS frequency or time is out of lock.

Off The AE 905S module is powered off or not
operating.


The AE 905S module meets industrial-grade requirements. Table 3-613 lists its
interface specifications.

Table 3-613 AE 905S (03031TUX) module interface specifications
Item Specification

BOM Number 03031TUX

Board Name for Order ANPM000GPS01

Interface type SMA

Encapsulation type SFP

Input signal An AE 905S module uses the SMA interface
to receive GPS satellite signals.

Output signal An AE 905S module uses the GE interface to
provide synchronous Ethernet and 1588v2 for
device.


Installation


NO TICE

To meet heat dissipation requirements, leave interfaces around the AE 905S
module empty. A maximum of two AE 905S modules can be installed on a device.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 703
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-132 illustrates connections between the AE 905S module, surge
protector, and antenna.

Figure 3-132 Connections between the AE 905S module, surge protector, and
antenna




NO TE

For the convenience of description, the GPS antenna in the description generally refers to
the GPS/GLONASS/BEIDOU antenna.
The AE 905S module must be used with the GPS antenna and GPS surge protector and is
connected to the GPS antenna and GPS surge protector through the GPS feeder.
The GPS antenna receives satellite signals from the GPS. A GPS surge protector can protect
a device against the lightning strikes inducted by the antenna feeder. Without the
protection of a surge protector, a device may be damaged by surge currents or voltage in a
lightning weather. The GPS feeder transmits GPS signals.
The image shown here is indicative only. If there is any inconsistency between the image
and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
Before inserting an AE 905S module into an interface, lock the latch. Before removing an AE
905S module from an optical interface, unlock the latch. For details, see Figure 3-133.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 704
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-133 Latch




Installation Procedure
NO TE

For details about how to install the GPS satellite antenna system, see the related GPS quick
installation guide.
1. Connect a two-sided female connector to the Protect interface of the surge
protector.


2. Connect one end of the coaxial cable to the Protect interface of the surge
protector and fasten the joint with a wrench.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 705
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


3. Implement 1+3+3 waterproof protection where the coaxial cable and the
Protect interface of the surge protector are connected, and fasten cable ties at
both ends.


4. Install the GPS support on the left or right side of the cabinet and tighten the
four screws.


5. Secure the surge protector on the GPS support.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 706
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


6. Install the ground cable of the surge protector. Connect one end of the
ground cable to the GND interface of the surge protector and the other end
to the ground point inside the cabinet.


NO TE

The surge protector must use OT M8 terminals.
7. Route the jumper through the cable inlet on the right side of the floor of the
cabinet, and connect the GPS feeder to the AE 905S.
8. Insert the AE 905S module into an optical interface of the device with the
latch of the AE 905S module locked.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 707
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

9. Connect one end of the GPS feeder to the Surge interface of the surge
protector and the other end of the GPS feeder to the GPS antenna. Fasten
each connector with a wrench.
10. Implement 1+3+3 waterproof protection, and fasten cable ties at both ends.
– Implement waterproof protection where the feeder connector and the
Surge interface of the surge protector are connected.
– Implement waterproof protection where the feeder connector and the N
joint of the GPS antenna are connected.

NO TE

For details about how to make a GPS feeder connector, see the related GPS quick
installation guide.
3.5.32 AE 905M Module

Description
Existing core network devices, which do not support 1588, cannot obtain clock
signals from BITS servers. Upgrading core network devices to support 1588 is both
complex and costly. To address this issue, the AE 905M module is developed. After
having an AE 905M module equipped, the device will be able to support 1588v2.
Figure 3-134 and Figure 3-135 illustrate the appearance of an AE 905M module.

Figure 3-134 AE 905M module (front view)





Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 708
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-135 AE 905M module (rear view)


NO TE

● The AE 905M module applies only to SFP/SFP+/SFP28 ports.

The AE 905M module has a STAT indicator under the HUAWEI logo. Table 3-614
describes STAT indicator states.

Table 3-614 Description of STAT indicator states

Status Description

Blinking green every 2s The AE 905M module is waiting to be loaded.

Blinking red every 0.5s The AE 905M module is being upgraded or
loaded.

Blinking red every 1s Satellite synchronization is unavailable for
the AE 905M module.

Blinking green every 1s Satellite synchronization is available for the
AE 905M module.

Off The AE 905M module is powered off or not
operating.



The AE 905M module meets industrial-grade requirements. Table 3-615 lists its
interface specifications.

Table 3-615 AE 905M (03034CGQ) module interface specifications

Item Specification

BOM Number 03034CGQ

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 709
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Board Name for Order ANPM000GPS03

Interface type SMA

Encapsulation type SFP/SFP+/SFP28

Input signal An AE 905M module uses the SMA interface
to receive GPS satellite signals.

Output signal Time information is provided for devices
through SFP/SFP+/SFP28 ports.


Version Requirements

Table 3-616 Mapping products and versions
Product Board Minimum Version
Supported

NetEngine 8000 M6 03033MPK, V800R021C00SPC100
03033MPK-001,
03034CCV

NetEngine 8000 M6 03033MPK-002, V800R021C10SPC600
03034PJY,
03033MPK-003


Installation


NO TICE

To meet heat dissipation requirements, leave interfaces around the AE 905M
module empty. A maximum of two AE 905M modules can be installed on a device.

Figure 3-136 illustrates connections between the AE 905M module, surge
protector, and antenna.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 710
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-136 Connections between the AE 905M module, surge protector, and
antenna


NO TE

For the convenience of description, the GPS antenna in the description generally refers to
the GPS/GLONASS/GALILEO/BEIDOU antenna.
The AE 905M module must be used with the GPS antenna and GPS surge protector and is
connected to the GPS antenna and GPS surge protector through the GPS feeder.
The GPS antenna receives satellite signals from the GPS. A GPS surge protector can protect
a device against the lightning strikes inducted by the antenna feeder. Without the
protection of a surge protector, a device may be damaged by surge currents or voltage in a
lightning weather. The GPS feeder transmits GPS signals.
The image shown here is indicative only. If there is any inconsistency between the image
and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
Before inserting an AE 905M module into an interface, lock the latch. Before removing an
AE 905M module from an optical interface, unlock the latch. For details, see Figure 3-137.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 711
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-137 Latch




Installation Procedure
NO TE

For details about how to install the GPS satellite antenna system, see the related GPS quick
installation guide.
1. Connect a two-sided female connector to the Protect interface of the surge
protector.


2. Connect one end of the coaxial cable to the Protect interface of the surge
protector and fasten the joint with a wrench.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 712
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


3. Implement 1+3+3 waterproof protection where the coaxial cable and the
Protect interface of the surge protector are connected, and fasten cable ties at
both ends.


4. Install the GPS support on the left or right side of the cabinet and tighten the
four screws.


5. Secure the surge protector on the GPS support.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 713
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


6. Install the ground cable of the surge protector. Connect one end of the
ground cable to the GND interface of the surge protector and the other end
to the ground point inside the cabinet.


NO TE

The surge protector must use OT M8 terminals.
7. Route the jumper through the cable inlet on the right side of the floor of the
cabinet, and connect the GPS feeder to the AE 905M.
8. Insert the AE 905M module into an optical interface of the device with the
latch of the AE 905M module locked.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 714
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NO TE

After the AE 905M module is inserted into the device, check whether the LINK
indicator of the optical module interface is steady on. If the indicator is steady on, the
module is properly inserted. If the indicator is off, the module is not properly inserted.
In this case, you need to remove the module and re-insert it.
9. Connect one end of the GPS feeder to the Surge interface of the surge
protector and the other end of the GPS feeder to the GPS antenna. Fasten
each connector with a wrench.
10. Implement 1+3+3 waterproof protection, and fasten cable ties at both ends.
– Implement waterproof protection where the feeder connector and the
Surge interface of the surge protector are connected.
– Implement waterproof protection where the feeder connector and the N
joint of the GPS antenna are connected.

NO TE

For details about how to make a GPS feeder connector, see the related GPS quick
installation guide.

3.6 Power distribution box

3.6.1 DPD63-8-8 DC PDB
The DPD63-8-8 is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to
devices in the cabinet.

Overview
The DPD63-8-8 provides two independent power areas A and B as a backup for
each other. Power areas A and B each have four –48 V/–60 V power inputs and
four power outputs.
Table 3-617 lists DPD63-8-8's typical power input configurations, which vary
according to the current of power supply devices in different equipment rooms.

Table 3-617 Typical power input configurations of the DPD63-8-8
N Input Current Output Current Circuit Copper Fitting
o. Breaker Configuration
Specifications

1 8 x 63 A 8 x 63 A 8 x 63 A None




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 715
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-138 Appearance of the DPD63-8-8


Figure 3-139 Components of the DPD63-8-8


1. Power input 2. Power output 3. Power input 4. Power output Circuit breaker
area (positive) area (positive) area (negative) area (negative)

The DPD63-8-8 consists of the following parts:

Power input area: connected to external power sources through power cables.

● Power input area (positive): Each power area has four input cable terminals
for connecting to the positive pole of external power cables. From left to

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 716
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

right, the terminals in the two areas are in turn marked from RTN(+) A1 to
RTN(+) A4 and from RTN(+) B1 to RTN(+) B4, respectively.
● Power input area (negative): Each power area has four input cable terminals
for connecting to the negative pole of external power cables. From left to
right, the terminals are in turn marked from INPUT A A1(-) to A4(-) and from
INPUT B B1(-) to B4(-).
Power output area: supplies power to devices through power cables.
● Power output area (positive): Each power area has four output cable
terminals for connecting to the positive pole of devices' power cables. From
left to right, the terminals in the two areas are in turn marked from RTN(+)
A1 to RTN(+) A4 and from RTN(+) B1 to RTN(+) B4, respectively.
● Power output area (negative): Each power area has four output cable
terminals for connecting to the negative pole of devices' power cables. From
left to right, the terminals in the two areas are in turn marked from OUTPUT
A A1(-) to A4(-) and from OUTPUT B B1(-) to B4(-), respectively.
Power areas A and B each have four circuit breakers that correspond to the output
cable terminals and control power supply to devices in the cabinet.

Figure 3-140 Internal connections of the DPD63-8-8


Physical Specifications

Table 3-618 Physical specifications
Item Description

Dimensions (H x W x D) 110 mm x 482.6 mm x 89.2 mm (4.33 in. x 19.00 in. x
3.51 in.)

Part number 02120724

Installation platform ETSI 21-inch; IEC 19-inch

Weight 3.26 kg (7.19 lb)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 717
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Description

DC Rated voltage –48 V/–60 V
input
voltag Maximum –40 V to –72 V
e voltage range

Power Maximum 4 x 63 A + 4 x 63 A
input current

Terminal Cord end terminal
specifications

Maximum 35 mm2
cross-sectional
area

Power Maximum 4 x 63 A + 4 x 63 A
output current

Terminal Cord end terminal
specifications

Maximum 16 mm2
cross-sectional
area

Circuit Replaceable 63 A
breake
r



3.7 Cables

3.7.1 NetEngine 8000 Power Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the power cable.

3.7.1.1 NetEngine 8000 M1A DC Power Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the DC-input
power cable.


NO TICE

If no special requirements are imposed on power cables, power cables are
delivered according to default configurations. Otherwise, power cables need to be
purchased locally.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 718
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview
A DC power cable is used to connect to the power modules to supply power to the
device.

NO TE

Cable colors below are for reference only. The actual cable colors depend on the
requirements of the target country or customer.

Appearance

Figure 3-141 DC power cable


Technical Specifications

Table 3-619 Technical specifications of DC power cables
Part Description Connector X1 Len Fire Rating
Numb gth
er

25032 Electronic|Electric Termi-Blok 10 IEC 60332-1,
786 Cable,1100V,Y(FR- Stacking m IEC
LSH),2.5mm2,Black,33A,For Connector,4PIN, 60332-3-22
India,BIS Side Screw/Side
Leading Wire

25032 Electronic|Electric Termi-Blok 10 IEC 60332-1,
786-00 Cable,1100V,Y(FR- Stacking m IEC
1 LSH),2.5mm2,Blue,33A,For Connector,4PIN, 60332-3-22
India,BIS Side Screw/Side
Leading Wire

02230 Assembly accessaries, Termi-Blok 3 m IEC 60332-1,
WFD Power Cable Stacking VM-1, Dca-
Package(Includes 3m Power Connector,4PIN, s2a2d2
Cable & 0.4m PGND Cable), Side Screw/Side
1U Box Leading Wire


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 719
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Connector X1 Len Fire Rating
Numb gth
er

02230 Assembly accessaries, Termi-Blok 5 m IEC 60332-1,
WFE Power Cable Stacking VM-1, Dca-
Package(Includes 5m Power Connector,4PIN, s2a2d2
Cable & 5m PGND Cable), Side Screw/Side
1U Box Leading Wire

02230 Site Materials Kit, Function Termi-Blok 10 IEC 60332-1,
HSP Unit Materials Kit,1U Box Stacking m VM-1, Dca-
Power Cable Connector,4PIN, s2a2d2
Package(Includes 10m Side Screw/Side
Power Cable & 10m PGND Leading Wire
Cable Set)

02232 MPE Site Materials Kit,1U Termi-Blok 8 m IEC 60332-1,
RWK Box Red,Blue Power Cable Stacking VM-1, Dca-
Package(Includes 8m Power Connector,4PIN, s2a2d2
Cable & 10m PGND Cable Side Screw/Side
Set),1U Box Leading Wire

02231 1U Box Power Cable Termi-Blok 10 IEC 60332-1,
DPL Package(Includes 10m Stacking m VM-1, Dca-
Power Cable & 10m PGND Connector,4PIN, s2a2d2
Cable Set), For UK Use Only Side Screw/Side
Leading Wire

02231 MPE Site Materials Termi-Blok 5 m IEC 60332-1,
MCR Kit,Power Cable Stacking VM-1, Dca-
Package(Includes 5m Power Connector,4PIN, s2a2d2
Cable & 5m PGND Cable), Side Screw/Side
1U Box,For South Africa Leading Wire
and Australia

02231 MPE Site Materials Termi-Blok 3 m IEC 60332-1,
MCS Kit,Power Cable Stacking VM-1, Dca-
Package(Includes 3m Power Connector,4PIN, s2a2d2
Cable & 0.4m PGND Cable), Side Screw/Side
1U Box,For South Africa Leading Wire
and Australia

14180 Termi-Blok Stacking - - IEC 60332-1,
251 Connector,4PIN,Side Screw/ VM-1, Dca-
Side Leading Wire s2a2d2


3.7.1.2 NetEngine 8000 M1C/M1D/M1D-B DC Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the DC-input
power cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 720
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


NO TICE

If no special requirements are imposed on power cables, power cables are
delivered according to default configurations. Otherwise, power cables need to be
purchased locally.

Overview
A DC power cable is used to connect to the power modules to supply power to the
device.

NO TE

Cable colors below are for reference only. The actual cable colors depend on the
requirements of the target country or customer.

Appearance

Figure 3-142 DC power cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 721
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-620 Technical specifications of DC power cables
Par Description Connector X1 Len Fire Rating
t gth
Nu
mb
er

022 MPE Site Materials Kit,ATN Power 8m IEC 60332-1,
33E 910D-A Package(Includes 8m Connector,2Pin, VM-1, Dca-
MV Power Cable & 10m PGND 220V,30A,Straig s2a2d2
Cable set),Red and Blue ht
Female,2.5mm2
-4mm2 without
crimping
terminal/
1mm2-1.5 mm2
with crimping
terminal,Easy
Power
Connector,With
Circle

022 MPE Site Materials Kit,ATN Power 8m IEC 60332-1,
33E 910D-A Package(Includes 8m Connector,2Pin, VM-1, Dca-
MX Power Cable & 10m PGND 220V,30A,Straig s2a2d2
Cable set),Black and Blue ht
Female,2.5mm2
-4mm2 without
crimping
terminal/
1mm2-1.5mm2
with crimping
terminal,Easy
Power
Connector,With
Circle


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 722
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Par Description Connector X1 Len Fire Rating
t gth
Nu
mb
er

022 MPE Site Materials Kit,ATN Power 8m IEC 60332-1,
33E 910D-A Package(Includes 8m Connector,2Pin, VM-1, Dca-
MW Power Cable & 10m PGND 220V,30A,Straig s2a2d2
Cable set),Black and Blue ht
Female,2.5mm2
-4mm2 without
crimping
terminal/
1mm2-1.5mm2
with crimping
terminal,Easy
Power
Connector,With
Circle


3.7.1.3 NetEngine 8000 M6 DC Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the DC-input
power cable.


NO TICE

If no special requirements are imposed on power cables, power cables are
delivered according to default configurations. Otherwise, power cables need to be
purchased locally.
If the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) is more than 35 m (114.83 ft.) away from
the device, install the PDF as near as possible.

Overview
A DC power cable is used to connect to the power modules to supply power to the
device.

NO TE

Cable colors below are for reference only. The actual cable colors depend on the
requirements of the target country or customer.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 723
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-143 DC power cable


Figure 3-144 DC power connector (straight female, 4-10mm2)


Figure 3-145 OT terminal


Figure 3-146 Heat shrink tubing


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 724
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-621 Technical specifications of DC power cables
Distan Part Description Fire Rating
ce Numb
from er
the
PDF to
the
device

Shorte 250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
r than 01 750V,H07Z-K UL3386,4mm2 Dca-s2a2d2
or Blue,45A,LSZH Cable,VDE,UL
equal
to 15 250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
m 00 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
UL3386,4mm2,Black,45A,LSZH
Cable,VDE,UL

250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
35 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
UL3386,4mm2,Gray,45A,LSZH
Cable,VDE,UL

250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
30 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
UL3386,4mm2,Red,45A,LSZH
Cable,VDE,UL

250327 Electronic|Electric Cable,1100V,Y(FR- IEC 60332-1,IEC
87-001 LSH),4mm2,Blue,45A,For India,BIS 60332-3-22

250327 Electronic|Electric Cable,1100V,Y(FR- IEC 60332-1,IEC
87 LSH),4mm2,Black,45A,For India,BIS 60332-3-22

141914 Power Connector,2pin,72V,63A,Straight -
80 Female,4~10mm2

Longer 250306 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
than 97 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
15 m UL3386,6mm2,Blue,58A,LSZH
and Cable,VDE,UL
shorter
than 250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
or 03 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
equal UL3386,6mm2,Black,58A,LSZH
to 20 Cable,VDE,UL
m
250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
17 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
UL3386,6mm2,Gray,58A,LSZH
Cable,VDE,UL


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 725
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Distan Part Description Fire Rating
ce Numb
from er
the
PDF to
the
device

250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
31 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
UL3386,6mm2,Red,58A,LSZH
Cable,VDE,UL

250327 Electronic|Electric Cable,1100V,Y(FR- IEC 60332-1,IEC
88-001 LSH),6mm2,Blue,58A,For India,BIS 60332-3-22

250327 Electronic|Electric Cable,1100V,Y(FR- IEC 60332-1,IEC
88 LSH),6mm2,Black,58A,For India,BIS 60332-3-22

141914 Power Connector,2pin,72V,63A,Straight -
80 Female,4~10mm2

Longer 250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
than 10 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
20 m UL3386,10mm2,Blue,80A,LSZH
and Cable,VDE,UL
shorter
than 250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
or 11 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
equal UL3386,10mm2,Black,80A,LSZH
to 35 Cable,VDE,UL
m
250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
36 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
UL3386,10mm2,Gray,80A,LSZH
Cable,VDE,UL

250307 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ IEC 60332-1, VM-1,
32 750V,H07Z-K Dca-s2a2d2
UL3386,10mm2,Red,80A,LSZH
Cable,VDE,UL

250327 Electronic|Electric Cable,1100V,Y(FR- IEC 60332-1,IEC
89-001 LSH),10mm2,Blue,For India,BIS 60332-3-22

250327 Electronic|Electric Cable,1100V,Y(FR- IEC 60332-1,IEC
89-002 LSH),10mm2,Blcack,For India,BIS 60332-3-22

141914 Power Connector,2pin,72V,63A,Straight -
80 Female,4~10mm2




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 726
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-622 Technical specifications of ground cables
Part Description Connect Connec Fire Rating
Num or X1 tor X2
ber

2503 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/ OT OT IEC 60332-1,
0699 750V,H07Z-K Terminal Termin VM-1, Dca-
UL3386,6mm^2,Yellow/ al s2a2d2
Green,58A,LSZH Cable,VDE,UL

2503 Electronic|Electric OT OT IEC
2788- Cable,1100V,Y(FR- Terminal Termin 60332-1,IEC
002 LSH),6mm^2,Yellow/Green,58A,For al 60332-3-22
India,BIS


Table 3-623 Technical specifications of power cable terminals
Dist Part Description Terminal Type
anc Nu
e mbe
fro r
m
the
PDF
to
the
devi
ce

Shor 0223 Subassembly | Naked Crimping
ter 0JAB Accessories,Package of Terminal,OT,6mm^2,M6,Tin
than Terminal for Single Input Plating,Insulated Ring
or 6mm^2 DC Power Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow
equ Cable(Exclude Backup) Naked Crimping
al to Terminal,OT,6mm^2,M8,Tin
20 Plating,Insulated Ring
m Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow
Common Terminal,Conductor Cross
Section 6mm^2,Length
20mm,Insertion Depth 12mm,Black


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 727
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Dist Part Description Terminal Type
anc Nu
e mbe
fro r
m
the
PDF
to
the
devi
ce

Lon 0223 Subassembly | Naked Crimping
ger 0HY Accessories,Package of Terminal,OT,10mm^2,M8,Tin
than Y Terminal for Single Input Plating,Naked Ring Terminal
20 10mm^2 DC Power Cable Naked Crimping
m (Exclude Backup) Terminal,OT,10mm^2,M6,Tin
and Plating,Naked Ring Terminal
shor
ter Common Terminal,Single Cord End
than Terminal,Conductor Cross Section
or 10mm^2,Length 22mm,Insertion
equ Depth 12mm,Ivory
al to
35
m



NO TE

The NetEngine 8000 M6 DC chassis (BOM number: 02353HHE) contains the power
terminal package (BOM number: 02233BUV). The BOM number 02233BUV contains the
following terminal types:
● Power Connector,2pin,72V,63A,Straight Female,4~10mm^2
● Naked Crimping Terminal,OT,10mm^2,M8,Tin Plating,Naked Ring Terminal
● Naked Crimping Terminal,OT,10mm^2,M6,Tin Plating,Naked Ring Terminal


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 728
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-624 Technical specifications of power cable terminals
Part Description Terminal Type
Num
ber

0223 Subassembly | Naked Crimping
0JAC Accessories,Package of Terminal,OT,6mm^2,M4,Tin
Terminal for Single Input Plating,Insulated Ring
6mm^2 Grounding Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow
Cable(Include Backup) Naked Crimping
Connector,OT2,6mm^2,M4,Tin Plating
Naked Crimping
Terminal,OT,6mm^2,M8,Tin
Plating,Insulated Ring
Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow


3.7.1.4 AC Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the AC-input
power cable.


NO TICE

If no special requirements are imposed on power cables, power cables are
delivered according to default configurations. Otherwise, power cables need to be
purchased locally.

Overview
An AC power cable is used to connect to the AC power module of a device to
supply power to the device.

NO TE

Cables must be in compliance with standards of the destination country or region. The
actual cable type depends on the requirements of the target country or customer.

Appearance

Figure 3-147 Connector C13 (PDU)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 729
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-148 Connector C13 (wall-mounted)


Figure 3-149 Heat shrink tubing


Technical Specifications

Table 3-625 Technical specifications of AC power cables in different countries or
regions (PDU)
Part Description Connecto Conne Leng Numb
Num r X1 ctor th er of
ber X2 Cores

0405 Power Cords Cable,China AC C14SM C13SF 1.5 m 3
0188 Power cores
250V10A,1.5m,C14SM,227IEC53(
RVV)1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU
Cable

0405 Power Cords Cable,Europe AC C14SM C13SF 1.8 m 3
G019 250V10A,1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-F- cores
3*1.00mm2,C13SF,PDU Cable

0405 Power cord,Europe AC C14SM C13SF 3 m 3
G019 250V10A,3.0m,C14SM,H05VV-F- cores
-002 3*1.00^2,C13SF,250V,10A,PDU
Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 730
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Connecto Conne Leng Numb
Num r X1 ctor th er of
ber X2 Cores

0405 Power Cords Cable,North C14SM C13SF 1.8 m 3
G029 America AC Power cores
250V10A,1.8m,C14SM,SJT
18AWG(3C),C13SF,PDU Cable

0405 Power Cords Cable,Japan AC C14SM C13SF 1.8 m 3
G02D Power cores
250V12A,1.8m,C14SM,HVCTF
1.25mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU Cable

0405 Power Cords Cable,Australia AC C14SM C13SF 1.8 m 3
G02F Power cores
250V10A,1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU Cable

0405 Power Cords Cable,Korea AC C14SM C13SF 1.8 m 3
G02H Power cores
250V10A,1.8m,C14SM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,PDU Cable

0405 Power cord,Europe AC Power C14SM C13SF 1.8 m 3
3158 250V10A,1.8m,C14SM,H05VV- cores
F-3*1.00^2,C13SF,250V,10A,Black-
Only for Saudi Arabia,Split from
0405G019

0405 Power cord,China AC Power C14SM C13SF 3 m 3
0846 Cable,250V10A,3.0m,C14SM, cores
(227IEC53-1.0^2(3C)),C13SF,250
V,10A,Black,PDU Cable


Table 3-626 Technical specifications of AC power cables in different countries or
regions (wall-mounted)
Part Description Connecto Conne Leng Numb
Num r X1 ctor th er of
ber X2 Cores

0404 Power Cords Cable,China AC PISM C13SF 3 m 3
1104 Power cores
250V10A,3.0m,PISM,227IEC53-1.0
mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0402 Power Cable,America AC Power PBSM C13SF 3 m 3
0728 Cable,125V10A,3.0m,PBSM,18SJ cores
T(3C),C13SF,Black


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 731
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Connecto Conne Leng Numb
Num r X1 ctor th er of
ber X2 Cores

0404 Power cord,Europe AC Power PFSM C13SF 3 m 3
1056 Cable,250V10A,3.0m,PFSM, cores
(H05VVF
1.0mm2(3C)),C13SF,250V,10A,BLa
ck

0404 Power Cable,Britain AC Power PGAM C13SF 3 m 3
0890 Cable cores
250V10A,3.0m,PGAM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0404 Power Cable,Japan AC Power PBSM C13SF 3 m 3
0887 Cable cores
125V12A,3.0m,PBSM,HVCTF-1.25
mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0404 Power cord,BS546 PM-IAM C13SF 3 m 3
0889 250V10A,3.0m,PM-IAM,H05VV- cores
F-1.5mm2(3C),C13SF,250V,10A,Bl
ack

0404 Power Cords Cable,Australia AC PISM C13SF 3 m 3
0888 Power Cable,250V cores
10A,3.0m,PISM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0404 Power Cable,Switzerland AC PJSM C13SF 3 m 3
1119 Power Cable cores
250V10A,3.0m,PJSM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0404 Power Cable,Italy AC Power PLSM C13SF 3 m 3
1120 Cable cores
250V10A,3.0m,PLSM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0404 Power Cords Cable,Argentina AC PISM C13SF 3 m 3
7785 Power cores
250V10A,3.0m,PISM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0415 Power Cable,Brazil AC Power PNSM C13SF 3 m 3
0258 Cable cores
250V10A,3.0m,PNSM ,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0405 Power Cords Cable,Korea AC PFSM C13SF 3 m 3
G028 Power cores
250V10A,3m,PFSM,H05VV-F
3*1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 732
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Connecto Conne Leng Numb
Num r X1 ctor th er of
ber X2 Cores

0405 Power Cords Cable,Denmark AC PKSM C13SF 3 m 3
G02K Power cores
250V10A,3m,PKSM,H05VV-
F-3*1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,Black

0405 Power Cords Cable,India AC PM-IIAM C13SF 3 m 3
1035 Power 250V10A,3.0m,PM-IIAM,IS cores
694-1.0mm2(3C), C13
SF,250V,10A,Black

0405 Power cord,South Africa AC PMAM C13SF 3 m 3
1080 Power cores
250V10A,3m,PMAM,H05VV-
F-1.0mm2(3C),C13SF,250V,10A,Bl
ack

0405 Power cord,Taiwan, China AC PBSM C13SF 3 m 3
2137 125V11A,3.0m,PBSM,HVCTF cores
3*1.25mm2,C13SF,125V,11A,Black,
BSMI

0405 Power cord,Britain AC Power PGAM C13SF 3 m 3
3153 250V10A,3.0m,PGAM,H05VV- cores
F-1.0mm^2(3C),C13SF,250V,10A,
Black-Only for Saudi Arabia,Split
from 04040890


3.7.2 ETP4860 Power Cable

3.7.2.1 ETP4860-4KW Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the
ETP4860-4KW power cable.

Overview
The ETP4860-4KW power cable is used by an external AC power system to supply
power to –48 V DC series communication devices.

NO TE

Required cable types vary according to the country/region. Determine which types of cables
to use based on the destination country/region or customer requirements.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 733
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-150 DC power cable


Figure 3-151 OT terminal


Technical Specifications

Table 3-627 Specifications of ETP 4860-4KW power cables

Part Number Description Fireproof
Level

25030461 Electronic|Electric Cable,300V/500V,60227 IEC IEC
10(BVV),2x6mm^2,Black(2Cores:Brown,Blue),46 60332-1,IEC
A,Outdoor Cable,CCC,CE 60332-3-22

25030699 Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/750V,H07Z-K IEC
UL3386,6mm^2,Yellow/Green,58A,LSZH 60332-1,VW
Cable,VDE,UL -1


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 734
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Number Description Fireproof
Level

25032798 Electronic|Electric Cable,1100V,YY(FR- IEC60332-1,I
LSH),3x6mm^2,Black(3Cores:Brown,Blue,Yellow EC60332-3-2
/Green),58A,For India,BIS 2

25032788-002 Electronic|Electric Cable,1100V,Y(FR- IEC60332-1,I
LSH),6mm^2,Yellow/Green,58A,For India,BIS EC60332-3-2
2


Table 3-628 Specifications of power cable terminals
Part Description Terminal Type
Numbe
r

02230X MPE Site Materials Naked Crimping
YB Kit,6mm^2 AC Power Terminal,OT,6mm^2,M4,Tin
Cable Connector Set Plating,Insulated Ring
Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow
Naked Crimping
Terminal,OT,6mm^2,M6,Tin
Plating,Insulated Ring
Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow
Naked Crimping
Terminal,OT,6mm^2,M8,Tin
Plating,Insulated Ring
Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow
Naked Crimping Connector


3.7.2.2 ETP4860-2KW-FE Power Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the
ETP4860-2KW-FE power cable.

Overview
The ETP4860-2KW-FE power cable is used by an external AC power system to
supply power to –48 V DC series communication devices.

NO TE

Required cable types vary according to the country/region. Determine which types of cables
to use based on the destination country/region or customer requirements.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 735
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-152 Structure of a socket-type power cable used in China


Figure 3-153 OT terminal


Figure 3-154 Heat-shrink tubing


Technical Specifications

Table 3-629 Specifications of ETP 4860-2KW power cables

Part Description Con Conne Ca Remarks
Numb nect ctor 2 ble
er or 1 Le
ng
th

04150 Power Cable,3m, Black, PI 3*OT1. 3 -
892 PI Straight Male, strai 5-4 m
227IEC53(RVV)1.0mm^2 ght
, 3*OT1.5-4 Terminal, male
China AC Power Cord,
250V, 10A


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 736
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Con Conne Ca Remarks
Numb nect ctor 2 ble
er or 1 Le
ng
th

04150 Power PF M4 OT 3 -
893 Cable,3m,Black,PFSM,H0 strai termin m
5VVF 1.0^2(3C),M4-OT ght al
terminal,Europe AC male
Power Cable 250V10A

04150 Power PG M4 OT 3 -
895 Cable,3m,Black,PGAM,H angl termin m
05VV- e al
F-1.0mm^2(3C),M4 OT male
Terminal,Britain AC
Power Cable 250V10A

04150 Power PD 3*OT1. 3 It can be replaced by
896 Cable,3m,3*1.5mm^2,Bl angl 5-4 m the following part
ack,PDAM,(H05VV- e numbers:
F-1.5mm^2(3C)),(3*OT male Power cable part
1.5-4),BS546 250V10A-- number:
Power supply
04020728/04052137
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PB M4 OT 3 It can be replaced by
897 Cable,3m,Black,PBSM,H strai termin m the following part
VCTF-1.25mm^2(3C),M ght al numbers:
4 OT Terminal,Japan AC male Power cable part
Power Cable 125V12A number: 04040887
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 737
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Con Conne Ca Remarks
Numb nect ctor 2 ble
er or 1 Le
ng
th

04150 Power PI M4 OT 3 It can be replaced by
902 Cable,3.02m,Power strai termin m the following part
supply ght al numbers:
male Power cable part
number: 04040888
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PB 3*OT1. 3 It can be replaced by
906 Cable,3m,Black,PBSM,16 strai 5-4 m the following part
SJT(3C),3*OT1.5-4,Ameri ght numbers:
ca AC Power Cable male Power cable part
125V10A number: 04052137
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PJ M4 OT 3 It can be replaced by
908 Cable,3m,Black,PJSM ,H strai termin m the following part
05VV- ght al numbers:
F-1.0mm^2(3C),M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal,Switzerland AC number: 04041119
Power Cable 250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 738
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Con Conne Ca Remarks
Numb nect ctor 2 ble
er or 1 Le
ng
th

04150 Power PL M4 OT 3.0 It can be replaced by
909 Cable,3.02m,Black,PLSM strai termin 2 the following part
,H05VV- ght al m numbers:
F-1.0mm^2(3C),M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal,Italy AC Power number: 04041120
Cable 250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PI M4 OT 10 It can be replaced by
910 Cable,10m,Black,PISM,2 strai termin m the following part
27IEC53(RVV)1.0mm^2( ght al numbers:
3C),M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal,China AC number: 04042697
Power Cable250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PI M4 OT 15 It can be replaced by
911 Cable,15m,Black,PISM,2 strai termin m the following part
27IEC53(RVV)1.0mm^2( ght al numbers:
3C),M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal,China AC number: 04042697
Power Cable250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PI M4 OT 20 -
912 Cable,20.0m,Black,PISM, strai termin m
227IEC53(RVV)1.0mm^ ght al
2(3C),M4 OT male
Termina,China AC Power
Cable250V10A


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 739
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Con Conne Ca Remarks
Numb nect ctor 2 ble
er or 1 Le
ng
th

04150 Power PI M4 OT 3 It can be replaced by
913 Cable,3m,Black,PISM ,H strai termin m the following part
05VV- ght al numbers:
F-1.0mm^2(3C),M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal,Argentina AC number: 04047785
Power Cable 250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PJ M4 OT 3 It can be replaced by
920 Cable,3m,Black,PJSM- strai termin m the following part
I ,H05VV- ght al numbers:
F-1.0mm^2(3C),M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal,Brazil AC number: 04150258
Power Cable 250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PI M4 OT 3 It can be replaced by
898 Cable,3m,Black,PISM,H0 strai termin m the following part
5VV-F 3*1.0^2(3C),M4 ght al numbers:
OT terminal,Korea AC male Power cable part
Power cable 250V10A number: 0405G028
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 740
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Con Conne Ca Remarks
Numb nect ctor 2 ble
er or 1 Le
ng
th

04150 Power PK M4 OT 3 It can be replaced by
988 Cable,3m,3*1.0mm^2,Bl strai termin m the following part
ack,(PKSM),(H05VV- ght al numbers:
F-3*1.0^2(3C)),(M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal),Denmark AC number: 0405G02K
Power cable 250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PI M4 OT 25 It can be replaced by
989 Cable,25m,Black,PISM,2 strai termin m the following part
27IEC53(RVV)3*1.0mm^ ght al numbers:
2(3C),M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal,China AC number: 04042701
Power Cable 250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04150 Power PI M4 OT 30 It can be replaced by
990 Cable,30m,3*1.0mm^2,B strai termin m the following part
lack,PISM,227IEC53(RVV ght al numbers:
)3*1.0mm^2(3C),M4 OT male Power cable part
Terminal,China AC number: 04042701
Power Cable 250V10A
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 741
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Part Description Con Conne Ca Remarks
Numb nect ctor 2 ble
er or 1 Le
ng
th

04051 Power cord,India PD-I OT1-4 3 It can be replaced by
123 exchange 250V10A,3M, angl m the following part
(PD-I AM),(IS e numbers:
694-1.0^2(3C)),M4 OT male Power cable part
terminal,250V,10A number: 04051035
OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

04153 Power PG 3*OT1. 2.8 It can be replaced by
942 Cable,2.8m,Black,PGAM, angl 5-4 m the following part
H05VV- e numbers:
F-1.0mm^2(3C),3*OT1.5 male Power cable part
-4,Saudi Arabia AC number: 04053153
Power Cable 250V10A,
SASO CB OT bare crimp
terminal part number:
14170002 (4 pcs)
Heat shrink tubing
part number:
28040016 (3 pcs)

02233 Subassembly | - - - -
CDF Accessories,BSP(Box
Scenario
Platform),Global AC
Power Cable Standard
Module-with C13
Connector


3.7.3 Chassis PGND Cable

Overview
One end of the chassis PGND cable is connected to the ground screw on the
cabinet column, and the other end is connected to the ground screw of the
chassis.

Appearance
Figure 3-155 shows the appearance of the chassis PGND cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 742
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-155 Appearance of the chassis PGND cable


1. OT bare crimp terminal

Technical Specifications

Table 3-630 Technical specifications of the chassis PGND cable

Part Mo Description Ter Termin Ca Nu Firepr
Nu del min al 2 ble mbe oof
mb al 1 Le r of Level
er ngt Cor
h es

250 CPG Electronic|Electric 141 141700 10 - IEC
306 N01 Cable,450V/750V,H07Z-K 700 56: m 60332-
98 001 UL3386,10mm^2,Yellow/ 16: Naked 1&VW-
Green,80A,LSZH Nak Crimpin 1
Cable,VDE,UL ed g
Cri Termina
mpi l,OT,10
ng mm^2,
Ter M8,Tin
min Plating,
al,O Naked
T,10 Ring
mm Termina
^2, l
M6,
Tin
Plati
ng,
Nak
ed
Ring
Ter
min
al



3.7.4 ETH/OAM Management Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 743
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

The ETH/OAM management interface, integrating the Ethernet NM interface and
console interface, uses the RJ45 connector. Tables below list the functions of
connector pins.

Table 3-631 ETH/OAM interface
Connector Pin Function

1 Transmit positive of the Ethernet NM
interface

2 Transmit negative of the Ethernet NM
interface

3 Receive positive of the Ethernet NM
interface

4 Console ground end

5 Console receive end

6 Receive negative of the Ethernet NM
interface

7 Unspecified

8 Console transmit end


Management Network Interface Cables
If the ETH/OAM interface functions only as a management network interface, it
uses an Ethernet cable to connect the device to the NMS. An ETH/OAM interface
can auto-sense whether it is using a straight-through cable or crossover cable. For
details about Ethernet cables, see Hardware Description > Cables > Ethernet
Cables.
If the ETH/OAM interface functions as both a management network interface and
a console interface, it uses an ETH/OAM 1-to-2 cable to connect the device to the
NMS. For details, see Hardware Description > Cables > ETH/OAM 1-to-2 Cables.
3.7.5 ETH/OAM 1-into-2 Transfer Cable

Overview
An ETH/OAM 1-into-2 transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at one end and two
RJ45 female connectors at the other end. As shown in Figure 3-156, X2 is a
management Ethernet port and X3 is a management console port. X2 can be
connected to a management Ethernet cable, and X3 can be connected to a
standard console cable.
Table 3-632 shows the usage scenario of this cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 744
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-632 Configuration principles of the ETH/OAM 1-into-2 transfer cable
Management Ethernet Management Console Management Ethernet
Port Port Port + Management
Console Port

N Y Y


Appearance

Figure 3-156 Structure of the ETH/OAM 1-into-2 transfer cable


Pin Assignment

Table 3-633 ETH/OAM port
Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Connector
Pin Usage Usage Usage

1 Transmit positive of Transmit positive of Undefined
the management the management
Ethernet port Ethernet port

2 Transmit negative Transmit negative Undefined
of the of the management
management Ethernet port
Ethernet port

3 Receive positive of Receive positive of Transmit end of the
the management the management console port
Ethernet port Ethernet port

6 Receive negative of Receive negative of Receive end of the
the management the management console port
Ethernet port Ethernet port

4 Ground end of the Undefined Undefined
console port


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 745
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Connector
Pin Usage Usage Usage

5 Receive end of the Undefined Ground end of the
console port console port

7 Undefined Undefined Undefined

8 Transmit end of the Undefined Undefined
console port


Table 3-634 Pin assignment of an ETH/OAM 1-into-2 transfer cable
Cable No. Connector Connector Core Wire Relationsh Cable No.
Start Pin End Pin Color ip

W1 X1.1 X2.1 White/ Twisted W2
Green

X1.2 X2.2 Green

X1.3 X2.3 White/Blue Twisted

X1.6 X2.6 Blue

X1.4 X3.5 White/ Twisted W3
Orange

X1.5 X3.6 Orange

X1.7 Undefined White/ Twisted
Brown

X1.8 X3.3 Brown




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 746
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-635 Technical Specifications of the ETH/OAM 1-into-2 transfer cable
Par Description Con Con Con Cable Type Le Nu Fire
t nect nect nec ng mb Rati
Nu or or tor th er ng
mb X1 X2 X3 of
er Cor
es

040 Traditional Signal RJ45 RJ45 RJ4 Symmetric 0.3 2 VW-
720 Cable, 0.3m, MP8- conn fem 5 al twisted m core 1
45 II, CC4P0.5GY(S), ector ale fem pair s/
2*MP8(S)-III, Serial con ale cable-100 pair
port and network nect con ohms-
port integrated or nect enhanced
cable or type 5
cable-0.52
mm-24
AWG-8
cores, four
pairs-
PANTONE
430U

3.7.6 Console Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the console
cable.

Overview
A console cable consists of a standard serial cable and a serial adapter cable, as
shown in Figure 3-157. A console cable is used to connect the serial port of a
computer to the console port of a device to transmit device configuration data.

Figure 3-157 Console cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 747
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

A standard console cable features a DB9 connector (used to connect to the serial
port of a computer) at one end and an RJ45 connector (used to connect to the
standard console port of a device) at the other end. If a device uses a non-
standard console port, a serial adapter cable is required between the RJ45
connector and the device.

Appearance
Figure 3-158 shows a standard serial cable, and Table 3-636 describes its
connections.

Figure 3-158 Standard serial cable (04040838: Traditional Signal,Serial Port
Cable,3m,D9F,CC2P0.32PWG1U,MP8-VI,S3026V)


1 DB9 female 2 RJ45 connector (network W communication cable
interface connector)

Table 3-636 Connections of a standard serial cable
DB9 Direction RJ45 Signal Color

X1.2 <- X2.3 RXD (Receive Black
Data)

X1.3 -> X2.6 TXD (Transmit Brown
Data)

X1.5 — X2.5 GND Red


A serial adapter cable features a network interface (used to connect to a standard
console cable) at one end and an RJ45 connector (used to connect to a router) at
the other end.
Figure 3-159 shows a serial adapter cable, and Table 3-637 describes its
connections.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 748
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-159 Serial adapter cable (04070730: Traditional Signal Cable,0.3m,MP8-
II,CC4P0.5GY(S),MP8(S)-III,Serial adapter cable)


1 RJ45 connector (network 2 Network interface W communication cable
interface connector)

Table 3-637 Connections of a serial adapter cable

Start End Color Relationship

X1.4 X2.5 White/Green Twisted

X1.5 X2.6 Green

X1.8 X2.3 White/Blue -



Technical Specifications

Table 3-638 Technical specifications of the standard serial cable and serial adapter
cable

Par Description Con Con Cable Type Ca Nu Fire
t nec nec ble mb pro
Nu tor tor Len er of
mb X1 X2 gth of Lev
er Cor el
es

040 Traditional D9 MP Twisted-Pair 3 m 2 -
408 Signal,Serial Port fem 8-VI Cable,UL2464,0.32m cor
38 Cable,3m,D9F,CC2P ale m,28AWG,2 es/
0.32PWG1U,MP8- Pairs,PANTONE pair
VI,S3026V WARM GRAY 1U

040 Traditional Signal MP MP Twisted-Pair 0.3 2 CM
707 Cable,0.3m,MP8- 8-II 8-III Cable,100ohm,Cate m cor
30 II,CC4P0.5GY(S),MP gory es/
8(S)-III,NO,ATN 5e,FTP,0.52mm,24A pair
Serial adapter WG,8Cores,4Pairs,PA
cable NTONE 430U,Use
with Plug:14080097



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 749
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.7.7 Alarm Input&Output Cable

Overview
The alarm input&output cable uses an RJ45 connector to connect to the ALMI/
ALMO interface of a device at one end and a connector tailored as required onsite
to connect to an external device or central alarm monitoring device at the other
end.

Appearance
Figure 3-160 shows the structure of the alarm input&output cable.

Figure 3-160 Structure of the alarm input&output cable


Pin Assignments

Table 3-639 Pin assignments of the alarm input&output cable (ALMI/ALMO)

Connector Color Relationship Description
X1 Pin

1 White/Orange Twisted Alarm input 1

2 Orange Ground end for alarm
input 1

3 White/Green Twisted Alarm input 2

6 Green Ground end for alarm
input 2

4 Blue Twisted Alarm input 3

5 White/Blue Ground end for alarm
input 3

7 White/Brown Twisted Positive for alarm
output

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 750
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Connector Color Relationship Description
X1 Pin

8 Brown Negative for alarm
output




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 751
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-640 Technical specifications of the alarm input&output cable

Part Mod Description Co Cabl Inn N Firepro
Num el nn e er u of
ber ect Leng Dia m Level
or th me be
X1 ter r
of
Co
res

2505 E- Twisted-Pair Ne - 0.5 2 CM
0057 Cat.5 Cable,100ohm,Category tw 2 cor
e- 5e,FTP,0.52mm,24AWG,8Cores ork mm es/
FTP- ,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U,Use Int pai
4pair with Plug:14080097 erf r
s ace
Co
nn
ect
or,
8PI
N,8
-
Bit,
Shi
eld
ed,
Cry
sta
l
Plu
g,A
W
G2
4–
26,
Sol
id-
Cor
e
Ca
ble
wit
h
Inn
er
Co
nd
uct
or

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 752
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description



3.7.8 16xE1 Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 16×E1 cable.

Overview
The E1 interfaces on a device use 75-ohm or 120-ohm trunk cables. The 16xE1
cable uses an Anea 96 connector to connect to the E1 electrical interface on a
board at one end and uses a connector made as required onsite to connect to the
digital distribution frame (DDF) at the other end.

Appearance
The 16xE1 cable uses an Anea 96 connector at one end. Figure 3-161 and Figure
3-162 show the appearance of the 16xE1 cable.

Figure 3-161 Appearance of the 75-ohm 16xE1 cable


Figure 3-162 Appearance of the 120-ohm 16xE1 cable


Figure 3-163 shows the structure of the 16xE1 cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 753
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-163 Structure of the 16xE1 cable


● Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 16xE1 cable
Table 3-641 describes the pin assignments of the 75-ohm 16xE1 cable. In this
table, Tip indicates the positive pole, and Ring indicates the negative pole,
and the pin pairs are numbered from 1 to 32.

Table 3-641 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 16xE1 cable
Conne Cable Remar Conne Cable Remar
ctor ks ctor ks
Pin Core No. Pin Core No.

1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0

2 Ring 26 Ring

3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1

4 Ring 28 Ring

5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2

6 Ring 30 Ring

7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3

8 Ring 32 Ring

9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4

10 Ring 34 Ring

11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 754
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Conne Cable Remar Conne Cable Remar
ctor ks ctor ks
Pin Core No. Pin Core No.

12 Ring 36 Ring

13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6

14 Ring 38 Ring

15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7

16 Ring 40 Ring

17 Tip 17 R8 41 Tip 18 T8

18 Ring 42 Ring

19 Tip 19 R9 43 Tip 20 T9

20 Ring 44 Ring

21 Tip 21 R10 45 Tip 22 T10

22 Ring 46 Ring

23 Tip 23 R11 47 Tip 24 T11

24 Ring 48 Ring

49 Tip 25 R12 73 Tip 26 T12

50 Ring 74 Ring

51 Tip 27 R13 75 Tip 28 T13

52 Ring 76 Ring

53 Tip 29 R14 77 Tip 30 T14

54 Ring 78 Ring

55 Tip 31 R15 79 Tip 32 T15

56 Ring 80 Ring

Externa External woven shield
l layer


Figure 3-164 Core


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 755
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

● Pin assignments of the 120-ohm 16xE1 cable
Table 3-642 describes the pin assignments of the 120-ohm 16xE1 cable.

Table 3-642 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm 16xE1 cable
Con Cable Re Con Cable Remarks
nec mar nec
tor Cor Cab ks tor Cor Cab
Pin e le Pin e le
Tie Tie

1 Whi Blue R0 25 Whi Blue T0
te te

2 Blue 26 Ora
nge

3 Whi R1 27 Whi T1
te te

4 Gre 28 Bro
en wn

5 Whi R2 29 Red T2
te

6 Gra 30 Blue
y

7 Red R3 31 Red T3

8 Ora 32 Gre
nge en

9 Red R4 33 Red T4

10 Bro 34 Gra
wn y

11 Blac R5 35 Blac T5
k k

12 Blue 36 Ora
nge

13 Blac R6 37 Blac T6
k k

14 Gre 38 Bro
en wn

15 Blac R7 39 Yell T7
k ow

16 Gra 40 Blue
y


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 756
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Con Cable Re Con Cable Remarks
nec mar nec
tor Cor Cab ks tor Cor Cab
Pin e le Pin e le
Tie Tie

17 Whi Ora R8 41 Whi Ora T8
te nge te nge

18 Blue 42 Ora
nge

19 Whi R9 43 Whi T9
te te

20 Gre 44 Bro
en wn

21 Whi R10 45 Red T10
te

22 Gra 46 Blue
y

23 Red R11 47 Red T11

24 Ora 48 Gre
nge en

49 Red R12 73 Red T12

50 Bro 74 Gra
wn y

51 Blac R13 75 Blac T13
k k

52 Blue 76 Ora
nge

53 Blac R14 77 Blac T14
k k

54 Gre 78 Bro
en wn

55 Blac R15 79 Yell T15
k ow

56 Gra 80 Blue
y

Exte External woven shield
rnal
laye
r



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 757
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications of the 75-ohm 16xE1 Cable

Table 3-643 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm 16xE1 cable
Part Description Co Cable Shield Inn In C Nu Firep
Num nn Type Layer er ne ab m roof
ber ec Diame Ins r le be Level
tor ter ula Co Le r
X1 tio nd n of
n uc gt Co
Dia tor h res
me Di
ter a
m
et
er

0412 Trunk An Coaxi 12.4 1.6 0.2 5 32 IEC
0638 Cable,5m,75ohm,1 ea al mm m 6 m cor 6033
6E1,1.6mm,Anea 96 Cable, m m es 2-1
96F- F- SYFV m
III,SYFVZP75-1.1/0. III ZP-
26*32(S),-45deg MC
75-1-
0412 Trunk An 1x32, 12.4 1.6 0.2 10 32 IEC
0638 Cable,10m,75ohm, ea 75oh mm m 6 m cor 6033
-001 16E1,1.6mm,Anea 96 m,12. m m es 2-1
96F- F- 4mm, m
III,SYFVZP75-1.1/0. III 1.1m
26*32(S),-45deg m,0.2
0412 Trunk An 6mm, 12.4 1.6 0.2 15 32 IEC
0638 Cable,15m,75ohm, ea Panto mm m 6 m cor 6033
-002 16E1,1.6mm,Anea 96 ne m m es 2-1
96F- F- Warm m
III,SYFVZP75-1.1/0. III Gray
26*32(S),-45deg 1U

0412 Trunk An 12.4 1.6 0.2 20 32 IEC
0638 Cable,20m,75ohm, ea mm m 6 m cor 6033
-003 16E1,1.6mm,Anea 96 m m es 2-1
96F- F- m
III,SYFVZP75-1.1/0. III
26*32(S),-45deg

0412 Trunk An 12.4 1.6 0.2 30 32 IEC
0638 Cable,30m,75ohm, ea mm m 6 m cor 6033
-004 16E1,1.6mm,Anea 96 m m es 2-1
96F- F- m
III,SYFVZP75-1.1/0. III
26*32(S),-45deg




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 758
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications of the 120-ohm 16xE1 Cable

Table 3-644 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm 16xE1 cable
Part Description Connec Cable Inne Cab Nu Firepr
Num tor X1 Type r le mb oof
ber Con Len er Level
duct gth of
or Cor
Dia es
met
er

0412 Trunk Anea Twisted- 0.4 5 m 2 IEC
0639 Cable,5m,120ohm 96F-II Pair mm core 60332
,16E1,0.4mm,Ane Cable,120o s/ -1
a 96F- hm,SEYVP,0 pair
II,120CC32P0.4P43 .4mm,26A
0U(S),-45deg WG,32Pairs
,Pantone
0412 Trunk Anea 430U 0.4 10 2 IEC
0639- Cable,10m,120oh 96F-II mm m core 60332
001 m,16E1,0.4mm,An s/ -1
ea 96F- pair
II,120CC32P0.4P43
0U(S),-45deg

0412 Trunk Anea 0.4 15 2 IEC
0639- Cable,15m,120oh 96F-II mm m core 60332
002 m,16E1,0.4mm,An s/ -1
ea 96F- pair
II,120CC32P0.4P43
0U(S),-45deg

0412 Trunk Anea 0.4 20 2 IEC
0639- Cable,20m,120oh 96F-II mm m core 60332
003 m,16E1,0.4mm,An s/ -1
ea 96F- pair
II,120CC32P0.4P43
0U(S),-45deg

0412 Trunk Anea 0.4 30 2 IEC
0639- Cable,30m,120oh 96F-II mm m core 60332
004 m,16E1,0.4mm,An s/ -1
ea 96F- pair
II,120CC32P0.4P43
0U(S),-45deg


3.7.9 16xE1 Adapter Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 759
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview
The 16xE1 cable required by a chassis is one that uses a negative 45-degree
connector. If a 16xE1 cable with a positive 45-degree connector has been used in
the equipment room, the cable cannot be directly connected to the chassis.
Instead, the cable needs to be connected to the X2 terminal of an adapter cable,
and then the X1 terminal of the adapter cable can be connected to the chassis.
Figure 3-165 shows the X1 and X2 terminals of such an adapter cable. The
adapter cable can be connected to either a 75-ohm or a 120-ohm 16xE1 cable.

Structure

Figure 3-165 Structure of the 16xE1 adapter cable


Pin Assignments

Table 3-645 Pin assignments of the 16xE1 adapter cable

Connec Connec Cable Remar Connect Connect Cable Remarks
tor X1 tor X2 ks or X1 Pin or X2 Pin
Pin Pin Core Cable Core Cable
Tie Tie

1 1 Whit Blue R0 25 25 White Blue T0
e

2 2 Blue 26 26 Orange

3 3 Whit R1 27 27 White T1
e

4 4 Gree 28 28 Brown
n

5 5 Whit R2 29 29 Red T2
e

6 6 Gray 30 30 Blue

7 7 Red R3 31 31 Red T3

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 760
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Connec Connec Cable Remar Connect Connect Cable Remarks
tor X1 tor X2 ks or X1 Pin or X2 Pin
Pin Pin Core Cable Core Cable
Tie Tie

8 8 Oran 32 32 Green
ge

9 9 Red R4 33 33 Red T4

10 10 Brow 34 34 Gray
n

11 11 Black R5 35 35 Black T5

12 12 Blue 36 36 Orange

13 13 Black R6 37 37 Black T6

14 14 Gree 38 38 Brown
n

15 15 Black R7 39 39 Yellow T7

16 16 Gray 40 40 Blue

17 17 Whit Orang R8 41 41 White Orang T8
e e e

18 18 Blue 42 42 Orange

19 19 Whit R9 43 43 White T9
e

20 20 Gree 44 44 Brown
n

21 21 Whit R10 45 45 Red T10
e

22 22 Gray 46 46 Blue

23 23 Red R11 47 47 Red T11

24 24 Oran 48 48 Green
ge

49 49 Red R12 73 73 Red T12

50 50 Brow 74 74 Gray
n

51 51 Black R13 75 75 Black T13

52 52 Blue 76 76 Orange

53 53 Black R14 77 77 Black T14


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 761
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Connec Connec Cable Remar Connect Connect Cable Remarks
tor X1 tor X2 ks or X1 Pin or X2 Pin
Pin Pin Core Cable Core Cable
Tie Tie

54 54 Gree 78 78 Brown
n

55 55 Black R15 79 79 Yellow T15

56 56 Gray 80 80 Blue

External External woven shield
layer




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 762
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-646 Technical specifications of the 16xE1 adapter cable
Par M Description Connecto Connecto Cabl In C Nu Fir
t od r X1 r X2 e ne a m epr
Nu el Type r bl be oof
mb Co e r Lev
er nd Le of el
uc n Co
to gt res
r h
Co
re
Di
a
m
et
er

04 - Trunk Cable Cable Twist 0.4 1 32 IEC
12 Cable,1.0m,12 Connector Connector, ed- m m pai 603
06 0ohm,16E1,1. ,Anea,96P ANEA,96PI Pair m rs 32-
97 6mm,Anea IN,IDC N,Right Cabl 1
96F- Type,Fem Angle e,120
II,120CC32P0. ale Male ohm,
4P430U(S)),A Connector Socket,PC SEYV
nea 96M,For and B PressFit P,0.4
Reuse Shielding Type,With mm,
Scenario Case(mee Shielding( 26A
t Meet WG,3
ClassB),Fo Class 2Pair
r 24~26 B),1A s,Pan
AWG tone
Solid 430U
Wire ,Mat
ching
Cable
Outer
Diameter
12.0mm~
14.0mm,1
A


3.7.10 75-ohm 155M Electrical Interface Module Cable
This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 75-ohm
155M electrical interface optical module cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 763
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview
The 155M electrical interface module uses the 75-ohm trunk cable. This cable is
connected to a 155M electrical interface optical module through an SAA
connector at one end, and connected to a digital distribution frame (DDF) through
a connector made as required onsite at the other end.

Appearance
One end of the 75-ohm 155M electrical interface optical module cable uses the
SAA connector. Figure 3-166 shows the cable appearance.

Figure 3-166 Appearance of the 75-ohm 155M electrical interface optical module
cable


Figure 3-167 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 155M electrical interface optical
module cable.

Figure 3-167 Structure of the 75-ohm 155M electrical interface optical module
cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 764
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-647 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm 155M electrical interface
optical module cable
Pa M Description Co Co Cable Sh Inn Inn C N Fire
rt o nne nn Type iel er er a u pro
N de cto ec d Ins Co bl m of
u l r to La ula nd e be Lev
m X1 r ye tio uct L r el
be X2 r n or e of
r Di Di Dia n Co
a am me g re
m ete ter t s
et r h
er

04 - Trunk SA - Coaxia 3.9 2.1 0.3 1 Si IEC
12 Cable,10m,75oh A75 l m m 4 0 ng 603
03 m,3.9mm,SAA75 SM Cable, m m mm m le 32-1
09 SM- -I SYV-7
I,SYV75-2/0.34( 5-2-2(
S) 4.0Z)-
1/0.34
mm,O
D3.9m
m,Dou
ble-
Layer
Coppe
r Braid
Shield
ed


3.7.11 Clock Cable (External Clock Mode, Delivery-Ready)

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the clock cable.

Overview
The external clock cable can be connected to the CLK or CLK/TOD interface on a
device.

Structure
The 120-ohm trunk cable adopts the RJ45 connector. The following figure shows
the structure of the cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 765
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-168 120-ohm trunk cable structure


Pin Assignments

Table 3-648 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm trunk cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

1 4 White Twisted

2 5 Blue

3 6 Orange -

4 1 White Twisted

5 2 Green

6 3 Brown -


Technical Specifications

Table 3-649 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm clock cable
Par Description Con Con Cable Type Ca Nu Firepr
t nect nect ble mb oof
Nu or or Le er Level
mb X1 X2 ng of
er th Cor
es

040 Trunk MP8 MP8 Twisted-Pair 3m 2 IEC603
404 Cable,3m,120ohm,1E -II -II Cable,120oh core 32-1
97 1,0.4mm,MP8- m,SEYVP,0.4 s/
II,120CC4P0.4P430U( mm,26AWG,4 pair
S),MP8-II Pairs,Pantone
430U
040 Trunk MP8 MP8 15 2 IEC603
402 Cable,15m,120ohm,1 -II -II m core 32-1
61 E1,0.4mm,MP8- s/
II,120CC4P0.4P430U( pair
S),MP8-II



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 766
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.7.12 Clock Cable (External Clock/External Time Mode,
Prepared Onsite)

Overview
A clock cable is used to connect the clock interface on the device to the clock
interface on another device. If the device is equipped with one , the device can
receive one-channel 2-Mbit/s clock signals, one-channel 2-MHz clock signals, one-
channel 1 PPS+TOD time signals, or one-channel DCLS time signals from the
upstream device and provide one-channel 2-Mbit/s clock signals, one-channel 2-
MHz clock signals, one-channel 1 PPS+TOD time signals, or one-channel DCLS
time signals to the downstream device. If the device is equipped with two s, the
device can receive two-channel 2-Mbit/s clock signals, two-channel 2-MHz clock
signals, two-channel 1 PPS+TOD time signals, or two-channel DCLS time signals
from the upstream device and provide two-channel 2-Mbit/s clock signals, two-
channel 2-MHz clock signals, two-channel 1 PPS+TOD time signals, or two-
channel DCLS time signals to the downstream device.
One end of the clock cable is an RJ45 connector connected to the clock interface
on the and the other end is connected to the clock interface on an external device.
An RJ45 connector is used together with the 120-ohm trunk cable.

NO TE

The wire sequence of a trunk cable used as a clock cable differs from the wire sequence of
an ordinary twisted cable.

Appearance
The 120-ohm clock cable uses the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-169 shows the
structure of the 120-ohm trunk cable.

Figure 3-169 Appearance of the 120-ohm clock cable connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 767
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Cable Pinouts

Table 3-650 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm clock cable
Conne Rela Description
ctor tion
Pin ship External Clock External Time External Time Mode
Mode Mode (DCLS)
(1PPS + Time
Information)

X1.1 Twis Negative Unspecified Unspecified
ted receive end of
pair CLK

X1.2 Positive receive Unspecified Unspecified
end of CLK

X1.3 Twis Unspecified Negative of 1PPS Negative of DCLS
ted signals signals
pair
X1.6 Unspecified Positive of 1PPS Positive of DCLS
signals signals

X1.4 Twis Negative Grounding end Grounding end
ted transmit end of
pair CLK

X1.5 Positive Grounding end Grounding end
transmit end of
CLK

X1.7 Twis Unspecified Negative of time Unspecified
ted information
pair
X1.8 Unspecified Positive of time Unspecified
information




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 768
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-651 Technical specifications of External Clock Cable
Part Mo Description Con Connect Num Fire
Nu del nect or X2 ber Rating
mbe or of
r X1 Core
s

1408 - Network Interface - - - -
0097 Connector,8-Bit
8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model
Connector,24-26AWG,Leads
Single Solide Cable,For OEM
Matching 25050057

2505 - Twisted-Pair - - 2 IEC603
0057 Cable,100ohm,Category Core 32-1
5e,FTP,0.52mm,24AWG,8Cores s/
,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U,Use Pairs
with Plug:14080097


3.7.13 Clock Bridging Cable

Overview
The clock bridging cable used by a device is the 120-ohm-to-75-ohm clock cable.

Structure
Figure 3-170 shows the structure of the 120-ohm-to-75-ohm clock cable.

Figure 3-170 Clock bridging cable structure


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 769
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Pin Assignments

Table 3-652 Pin assignments of clock bridging cables
120-ohm Cable 75-ohm
Cable

Connector Pin Core Wire Cable Relations Core Wire
Color Description hip No.

X1.1 Orange Receive Twisted W1
negative for the
120-ohm
external clock

X1.2 White Receive positive
for the 120-
ohm external
clock

X1.4 Blue Transmit Twisted W2
negative for the
120-ohm
external clock

X1.5 White Transmit
positive for the
120-ohm
external clock

X1.3 Green Not defined Twisted W3

X1.6 White Not defined

X1.7 White Not defined Twisted W4

X1.8 Brown Not defined




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 770
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-653 Technical specifications of a clock bridging cable
Part Mo Description Conn Con Cabl N Firepr
Nu del ector nect e u oof
mb X1 or Len m Level
er X2 gth be
r
of
C
or
es

040 T-1- Signal Cable,120ohm To MP8- - 30 - -
447 Sh- 75ohm Clock II m
26 RJ45 Cable,30m,MP8-II,
-30 (120CC4P0.4P430U(S)
+4*(SYV75-2/0.34(S))


3.7.14 Ethernet Cable

Overview
Ethernet cables are also known as network cables and can be classified into
straight-through cables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence
of the copper wire cores in the cables.
An Ethernet service interface can detect whether a straight-through or crossover
cable is plugged in, meaning it will work automatically with either cable type.
Therefore, you can choose either cable type as needed for your network setup.

NO TE

Ethernet cables need to be made onsite.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 771
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-171 Appearance of the Ethernet cable


Pin Assignments

Table 3-654 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable

Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted

X1.8 X2.8 Brown



Table 3-655 Pin assignment of the crossover cable

Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship

X1.1 X2.3 White/Orange Twisted

X1.2 X2.6 Orange

X1.3 X2.1 White/Green Twisted

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 772
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship

X1.6 X2.2 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted

X1.8 X2.8 Brown



Technical Specifications

Table 3-656 Technical specifications of the straight-through cable

Descr Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,Category
iptio 5e,FTP,0.52mm,24AWG,8Cores,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U
n

Conn Network Interface Connector,8PIN,8-Bit,Shielded,Crystal Plug,AWG24–
ector 26,Solid-Core Cable with Inner Conductor
X1

Conn Network Interface Connector,8PIN,8-Bit,Shielded,Crystal Plug,AWG24–
ector 26,Solid-Core Cable with Inner Conductor
X2

Cabl 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
e
Leng
th

Inner 0.52 mm
Diam
eter

Num 2 cores/pair
ber
of
Cores



Table 3-657 Technical specifications of the crossover cable

Descr Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,Category
iptio 5e,FTP,0.52mm,24AWG,8Cores,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U
n

Conn Network Interface Connector,8PIN,8-Bit,Shielded,Crystal Plug,AWG24–
ector 26,Solid-Core Cable with Inner Conductor
X1

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 773
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Conn Network Interface Connector,8PIN,8-Bit,Shielded,Crystal Plug,AWG24–
ector 26,Solid-Core Cable with Inner Conductor
X2

Cabl 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
e
Leng
th

Inner 0.52 mm
Diam
eter

Num 2 cores/pair
ber
of
Cores



NO TE

When the NetEngine 8000 M1D-B is used in an electric power or rail scenario, it is
recommended that all network interface cables be shielded enhanced cables with part
number 25050064. The cable length is optional. The part number of the matching RJ45
connector is 14080114.
3.7.15 1-to-2 Clock Cable

Overview
One end of a 1-to-2 cable is an RJ45 connector, and the other end is split into two
RJ45 female connectors, as shown in Figure 3-172. The X2 and X3 ports are a
clock port and a time port, respectively. The X2 port uses 120-ohm clock cables or
120-to-75-ohm clock cables, while the X3 port uses network cables.
Table 3-658 shows the usage scenario of such cables.

Table 3-658 Configuration rules for 1-to-2 cables
Clock (120- Clock (75- Time Clock (120- Clock (75-
ohm) + Time ohm) + Time ohm) ohm)

Y Y Y N N




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 774
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-172 Structure of a 1-to-2 clock cable


Pin Assignment

Table 3-659 Pin assignments of the 1-to-2 clock cable
Wire Start End Pin Color Relatio Wire
Pin nship

W1 X1.1 X2.1 Blue Pair W2

X1.2 X2.2 White/Blue

X1.4 X2.4 Orange Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Orange

X1.3 X3.3 Green Pair W3

X1.6 X3.6 White/Green

X1.7 X3.7 Brown Pair

X1.8 X3.8 White/Brown




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 775
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-660 Technical specifications of the 1-to-2 clock cable

Par Mo Description Con Con Cable Type Le Nu Flam
t del nect nect ng mb e
Nu or or th er Sprea
mb X1 X2/X of d
er 3 Cor Ratin
es g

040 - Signal Cable,Clock MP8 MP8 Twisted- 0.6 2 CM
715 Cable,0.6m,MP8- -II -III Pair m cor
32 II,3*CC4P0.5P430U( Cable,100o es/
S)-I,2*MP8-III,LSZH hm,FTP,CAT pair
5E,0.52mm,
24AWG,4Pa
irs,PANTON
E 430U,Low
Smoke Zero
Halogen
Cable



3.7.16 USB-to-Serial Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the USB-to-
serial cable.

Overview

The USB-to-serial cable uses a USB port to connect to a client device at one end
and uses two RJ45 connector-based serial ports (one standard and one non-
standard) to connect to a router at the other end. The pin assignments of the two
serial ports are different. For details, see Table 3-661.

Structure

Figure 3-173 Structure of the USB-to-serial cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 776
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Pin Assignments

Table 3-661 Pin assignments of the USB-to-serial cable

Wire Rela Core Cabl Start Conv End Cabl Core Rela Wire
No. tions Wire e Pin erter Pin e Wire tions No.
hip Colo Desc Desc Colo hip
r ripti ripti r
on on

W3- Twist Whit +5 V X1.1 USB- X2.6 RS23 Blue Twist W1-
Main ed e DC to- 2_RX ed Labe
Labe RS23 l 1
l Blue Data X1.2 2 X2.3 RS23 Whit (RS2
- conv 2_TX e 32)
Twist Oran Data X1.3 erter X2.5 GND Oran -
ed ge + ge

Whit GND X1.4 X3.5 RS23 Blue Twist W2-
e 2_RX ed Labe
l 2
- - - - - X3.8 RS23 Whit (Spe
2_TX e cial
- - - - - X3.4 GND Oran - RS23
ge 2)



Technical Specifications

Table 3-662 Technical specifications of the USB-to-serial cable

Part Description Connect Connect Cable
Number or X1 or X2 Length

0407185 Traditional Signal Cable,USB-to- USB-A MP8-II 1.5 m
1 Ethernet cable,1.5m,USB- (Male)
A(Male),CC2P0.48B(S),2*MP8-II




NO TICE

To use the USB-to-serial cable, you need to download the corresponding driver at
https://www.wch-ic.com/products/CH340.html? and configure the driver as
required.

3.7.17 Fiber Jumper


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 777
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview
A fiber jumper consists of one or more optical fibers of a certain length and the
optical connectors at both ends. A fiber jumper connects an optical module to a
fiber terminal box.

NO TE

The MPO-MPO optical fibers for routers use type B connectors (Key Up/Key Up).
Comply with the following rules when selecting fiber jumpers:
1. Determine the length of fiber jumpers based on the onsite cabling distance.
2. Determine the fiber type based on the optical module type.
– Use a multimode fiber jumper for a multimode optical module.
– Use a single-mode fiber jumper for a single-mode optical module.
3. Determine the optical connector type based on the port type.
Ensure that the optical connector at each end of a fiber jumper is of the same
type as the port to which it will be connected.
Optical Fiber Types
Optical fibers are generally classified into single-mode fibers and multimode
fibers.
● Single-mode fibers have a diameter of 5 to 10 μm and transmit laser in a
single mode with a specified wavelength. These fibers support a wide
frequency band and a large transmission capacity, so they are used for long-
distance transmission. Most single-mode fibers are yellow, as shown in Figure
3-175.
● Multimode fibers have a diameter of 50 or 62.5 μm and transmit laser in
multiple modes with a specified wavelength. They have a small capacity and
their performance is inferior to that of single-mode fibers, making them
suitable to short-distance transmission.
In the latest cabling infrastructure of ISO/IEC 11801, multimode fibers are
classified into four categories: OM1, OM2, OM3, and OM4.
– OM1: traditional 62.5/125 μm multimode fibers. OM1 fibers have a large
core diameter and numerical aperture, and provide high light gathering
ability and bending resistance.
– OM2: traditional 50/125 μm multimode fibers. OM2 fibers have a small
core diameter and numerical aperture. Compared with OM1 fibers, OM2
fibers provide higher bandwidth because they significantly reduce the
modal dispersion. When transmitting data at 1 Gbit/s with 850 nm
wavelength, OM1 and OM2 fibers support maximum link lengths of 220
m and 550 m, respectively. These two types of fibers can provide
sufficient bandwidth within a distance of 300 m. Generally, OM1 and
OM2 fibers are orange, as shown in Figure 3-176.
– OM3: next-generation multimode fibers, with longer transmission
distances than OM1 and OM2 fibers.
– OM4: laser optimized multimode fibers with 50 μm core diameter. OM4
is an improvement to OM3 and only increases the modal bandwidth.
OM4 fibers provide 4700 MHz*km of modal bandwidth, whereas OM3

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 778
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

fibers provide only 2000 MHz*km of modal bandwidth. Generally, OM3
and OM4 fibers are light green, as shown in Figure 3-177. You can
identify OM3 and OM4 fibers by their labels or printed marks.
MPO fibers are used for 40G and 100G optical modules. An MPO fiber consists of
multiple multimode fiber cores, and each multimode fiber core provides one laser
transmission channel. Some fiber suppliers produce 8-strand MPO fibers, while
some suppliers produce 12-strand or 24-strand MPO fibers.
● A 40G optical module uses four channels to transmit laser and four channels
to receive laser. That is, a total of eight channels are required for a 40G
optical module. 8-strand and 12-strand MPO fibers use the same definition of
fiber channels. Therefore, they are equivalent in functionality when
connecting to 40G optical modules.
● When 100G optical modules are used, choose MPO fibers according to the
optical module form factor. Choose 8-strand or 12-strand fibers for QSFP28
optical modules with MPO connectors.
Optical Connector
Optical connectors are used to connect optical fibers of the same type. Table
3-663 lists common optical connectors.

Table 3-663 Common optical connectors
Connector Optical Connector
Type

Square SC/PC LC/PC MTRJ/PC MPO
connector connector connector connector connector


Round FC/PC ST/PC - -
connector connector connector




Figure 3-174 shows an LC/PC optical connector.

Figure 3-174 LC/PC connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 779
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description


NO TICE

When connecting or removing an LC/PC optical connector, align the connector
with the optical port and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following
points:
● When inserting an optical fiber, align the optical connector with the optical
port and gently insert the optical fiber into the port.
● When removing an optical fiber, press the clip on the connector, push the
connector inward slightly, and then pull the fiber out.

Appearance
Figure 3-175 shows the appearance of an LC single-mode fiber.

Figure 3-175 Appearance of an LC single-mode fiber


Figure 3-176 shows the appearance of an LC multimode fiber.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 780
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-176 Appearance of an LC multimode fiber


Figure 3-177 shows the appearance of an MPO-MPO fiber.

Figure 3-177 Appearance of an MPO-MPO fiber


Ceramic Ferrule End Face
Based on the return loss, the end faces of the fiber's ceramic ferrule are classified
into three types: PC, UPC, and APC, as shown in Figure 3-178.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 781
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-178 Polishing types of the fiber's ceramic ferrule end face


Table 3-664 Polishing types of the fiber's ceramic ferrule end face
Polishing Return Loss Characteristics Application
Type Scenario

PC -35 dB Polished with a Scenarios with no
slight curvature high requirements
on return loss

UPC -50 dB Dome-shaped Scenarios with high
requirements on
APC -60 dB Polished with an 8- return loss
degree angle




NO TICE

In principle, optical fibers with different ceramic ferrule end faces cannot be
directly connected through optical connectors. Interconnection between PC and
UPC connectors does not cause permanent physical damage to them. The
structure of APC end faces is totally different from that of PC end faces. Therefore,
if fibers with APC end faces and fibers with PC end faces are connected through
optical connectors, their ceramic ferrule end faces will be damaged. To connect
them together, use a fiber jumper. This, however, adversely affects the
transmission performance.

Figure 3-179 shows the requirements of different types of ceramic ferrule end
face of fibers.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 782
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-179 Fiber's ceramic ferrule end faces


Table 3-665 End face requirements for fiber ceramic ferrules

Type Zone Diameter Defects Scratches

Single A. Core 0-25 μm None None
mode
conne B. Cladding 25-120 μm < 2 μm: no limit ≤ 3 μm: no limit
ctor 2-5 μm: 5 > 3 μm: 0
> 5 μm: 0

C. Adhesive 120-130 μm No limit No limit

D. Contact 130-250 μm ≥ 10 μm: 0 No limit

Multi A. Core 0-65 μm ≤ 5 μm: 4 ≤ 5 μm: no limit
mode > 5 μm: 0 > 5 μm: 0
conne
ctor B. Cladding 65-120 μm < 2 μm: no limit ≤ 5 μm: no limit
2-5 μm: 5 > 5 μm: 0
> 5 μm: 0

C. Adhesive 120-130 μm No limit No limit

D. Contact 130-250 μm ≥ 10 μm: 0 No limit



3.7.18 Other Types of Cables


3.7.18.1 V.35 DCE Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 783
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Overview

The V.35 DCE cable is connected to the V.35 port on a device through connector
X1 (DB28).

Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-180 Structure of a V.35 DCE cable


Pin Assignments

Table 3-666 Pin assignments of a V.35 DCE cable

X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2

19 RXD+ ← P

20 RXD- ← S

1 TXD+ → R

2 TXD- → T

15 TXCE+ → V

16 TXCE- → X

3 TXC+ → Y

4 TXC- → AA

17 RXC+ ← U

18 RXC- ← W

11 DCD+ → F

22 LL ← J

23 CTS+ ← C

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 784
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2

13 RTS+ → D

25 DSR+ ← H

27 DTR+ → E

21 GND ←→ B

6 GND ←→ A

7 MODE0

8 MODE1


Technical Specifications

Table 3-667 Technical specifications of a V.35 DCE cable
Part Mode Description Connec Connec Cable
Num l tor X1 tor X2 Lengt
ber h

0404 SS- Single Cable, V.35 Serial Port D28M D34F 3 m
3592 DL- Cable, 3m, D28M, CC(5P +D34PS
V35- +8C)0.32P296U(S), D34F+D34PS,
DCE-3 DCE


3.7.18.2 V.35 DTE Cable

Overview
The V.35 DTE cable is connected to the V.35 port on a device through connector X1
(DB28).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 785
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-181 Structure of a V.35 DTE cable


Pin Assignments

Table 3-668 Pin assignments of a V.35 DTE cable

X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2

1 TXD+ → P

2 TXD- → S

19 RXD+ ← R

20 RXD- ← T

17 RXC+ ← V

18 RXC- ← X

3 TXC+ ← Y

4 TXC- ← AA

15 TXCE+ → U

16 TXCE- → W

11 DCD+ ← F

22 LL → J

13 RTS+ → C

23 CTS+ ← D

27 DTR+ → H

25 DSR+ ← E

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 786
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2

21 GND ←→ B

6 GND ←→ A

10 MODE_DCE

7 MODE0

8 MODE1



Technical Specifications

Table 3-669 Technical specifications of a V.35 DTE cable

Part Mode Description Connect Connec Cable
Num l or X1 tor X2 Lengt
ber h

0404 SS- Single Cable, V.35 Serial Port D28M D34M 3 m
3591 DL- Cable, 3m, D28M, CC(5P +D34PS
V35- +8C)0.32P296U(S), D34M+D34PS,
DTE-3 DTE



3.7.18.3 V.24 DCE Cable

Overview

The V.24 DCE cable is connected to the V.24 port on a device through connector
X1 (DB28).

Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-182 Structure of a V.24 DCE cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 787
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Pin Assignments

Table 3-670 Pin assignments of a V.24 DCE cable
X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2 (DB25)

19 RXD ← 2

1 TXD → 3

23 CTS ← 4

13 RTS → 5

25 DSR ← 20

27 DTR → 6

11 DCD → 8

22 LL ← 18

3 TXC → 15

17 RXC ← 24

15 TXCE → 17

21 GND ←→ 1

6 GND ←→ 7

7 MODE0


Technical Specifications

Table 3-671 Technical specifications of a V.24 DCE cable
Part Mode Description Connec Connec Cable
Num l tor X1 tor X2 Lengt
ber h

0404 SS- Single Cable, V.24 Serial Port D25F D28M 3 m
3590 DL- Cable, 3m, D25F, CC(5P
V24- +8C)0.32P296U(S), D28M, DCE
DCE-3


3.7.18.4 V.24 DTE Cable

Overview
The V.24 DTE cable is connected to the V.24 port on a device through connector X1
(DB28).

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 788
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-183 Structure of a V.24 DTE cable


Pin Assignments

Table 3-672 Pin assignments of a V.24 DTE cable
X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2 (DB25)

1 TXD → 2

19 RXD ← 3

13 RTS → 4

23 CTS ← 5

27 DTR → 20

25 DSR ← 6

11 DCD ← 8

22 LL → 18

3 TXC ← 15

15 TXCE → 24

17 RXC ← 17

21 GND ←→ 1

6 GND ←→ 7

10 MODE_DCE

7 MODE0




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 789
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-673 Technical specifications of a V.24 DTE cable

Part Mode Description Connect Connec Cable
Num l or X1 tor X2 Lengt
ber h

0404 SS- Single Cable, V.24 Serial Port D25F D28M 3 m
3589 DL- Cable, 3m, D25M, CC(5P
V24- +8C)0.32P296U(S), D28M, DTE
DTE-3



3.7.18.5 X.21 DCE Cable

Connection
The X.21 DCE cable is connected to the X.21 port on a device through connector
X1 (DB28).

Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-184 Structure of an X.21 DCE cable


Pin Assignments

Table 3-674 Pin assignments of an X.21 DCE cable

X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2 (DB25)

13 RTS+ → 5

14 RTS- → 12

23 CTS+ ← 3

24 CTS- ← 10

19 RXD+ ← 2

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 790
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2 (DB25)

20 RXD- ← 9

1 TXD+ → 4

2 TXD- → 11

15 RXC+ → 6

16 RXC- → 13

21 GND → 1

6 GND ←→ 8

9 MODE_DCE

Technical Specifications

Table 3-675 Technical specifications of an X.21 DCE cable
Part Mode Description Conne Conn Cable
Num l ctor X1 ector Length
ber X2

0404 SS- Single Cable, X.21 Serial Port D28M D15F 3 m
3594 DL- Cable, 3m, D15F, CC(5P
X21- +8C)0.32P296U(S), D28M, DCE
DCE-3

3.7.18.6 X.21 DTE Cable

Overview
The X.21 DTE cable is connected to the X.21 port on a device through connector
X1 (DB28).

Appearance and Structure

Figure 3-185 Structure of an X.21 DTE cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 791
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Pin Assignments

Table 3-676 Pin assignments of an X.21 DTE cable
X1 (DB28) Signal Signal Direction X2 (DB25)

13 RTS+ → 3

14 RTS- → 10

23 CTS+ ← 5

24 CTS- ← 12

19 RXD+ ← 4

20 RXD- ← 11

1 TXD+ → 2

2 TXD- → 9

17 RXC+ ← 6

18 RXC- ← 13

21 GND ←→ 1

6 GND ←→ 8

10 MODE_DCE

9 MODE2


Technical Specifications

Table 3-677 Technical specifications of the X.21 DTE cable
Part Mode Description Connec Connec Cable
Num l tor X1 tor X2 Lengt
ber h

0404 SS- Signal Cable, X.21 Serial Port D28M D15F 3 m
3593 DL- Cable, 3m, D15M, CC(5P
X21- +8C)0.32P296U(S), D28M, DTE
DTE-3


3.8 Air deflectors


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 792
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.8.1 CR8M000ADFC1 (Air Deflector for Front-to-Back
Airflow)

Overview

Table 3-678 Basic information about the CR8M000ADFC1
Item Description

Description Air deflector (front-to-back airflow, for
an IEC 19-inch cabinet with a depth of
600 mm or more)

Part number 21042341

Model CR8M000ADFC1

Remarks NOTE
A group of air deflectors are used to
convert the airflow direction of 300 mm
deep fixed routers from left-to-right to
front-to-back.



Appearance

Figure 3-186 CR8M000ADFC1 appearance


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 793
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-679 Cabinet with air deflectors installed
No. Name

1 Upper air deflector

2 Lower air deflector

3 Filler Panel


Airflow
Figure 3-187 shows the airflow direction after devices and air reflectors are
properly installed.

Figure 3-187 Airflow direction


By default, air deflectors are equipped with air baffles. Before installing a device,
remove air baffles in the corresponding position, as shown in Figure 3-188.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 794
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-188 Removing an air baffle


Technical Specifications

Table 3-680 Technical specifications of the CR8M000ADFC1

Item Specification

Dimensions of air deflectors installed 622.3 mm x 443 mm x 306.5 mm, 14
in a cabinet (H x W x D) U

Dimensions of uninstalled air Upper air deflector: 90.6 mm
deflectors (H x W x D, excluding (including air baffles) x 443 mm x 221
packaging) mm
Lower air deflector: 92.4 mm
(including air baffles) x 443 mm x
306.5 mm (including the cable tray)

Air baffle dimensions (H x W x D) 24 mm x 43.5 mm x 226.5 mm
(including captive screws)

Filler Panel dimensions (H x W x D) 485.5 mm x 41.2 mm x 25 mm
(including handle)

Weight (excluding packaging) Upper air deflector: 4.0 kg
Lower air deflector: 4.0 kg
Filler Panel: 0.2 kg


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 795
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Vertical available space between upper 10 U (no clearance is required
and lower air deflectors between devices)

Remarks ● By default, air deflectors are
equipped with air baffles. Each air
baffle is 1 U wide. To prevent air
leakage, do not remove air baffles
in the position where no device is
installed.
● Devices are vertically installed
between upper and lower air
deflectors. Considering this, pay
attention to the insertion direction
of modules when replacing or
inserting modules in a device.




CA UTION

You are not advised to install devices from other vendors between Huawei's upper
and lower air deflectors. This is because the airflow direction and mounting
bracket installation positions of these devices may be incompatible with the air
deflectors.

3.8.2 1800 Air Guide Frame (Simple Box-shaped Air Deflector)

Overview

Table 3-681 Basic information
Item Description

Description Simple box-shaped air deflector

Part number 21032341

Model 1800 Air Guide Frame




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 796
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance


Airflow
Figure 3-189 shows the airflow direction after devices and air reflectors are
properly installed.

Figure 3-189 Airflow direction


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 797
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-682 Technical specifications
Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI 21-inch

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 84.1 mm x 442 mm x 335 mm (3.31 in.
x D) [mm (in.)] x 17.40 in. x 13.19 in.)

Weight (without packaging) [kg (lb)] 3.9 kg (8.60 lb)

Air deflector height [U] 2 U


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 798
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


4 Hardware Installation and Parts
Replacement


4.1 NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C/M1D/M1D-B Hardware Installation and
Maintenance Guide
4.2 NetEngine 8000 M6 Hardware installation and maintenance Guide
4.3 IMB05 Installation Guide
Quick Installstion Guide for Air Deflectors
A63B Cabinet Installation Guide
4.4 A66E Cabinet Installation Guide
4.5 A63E Cabinet Installation Guide

4.1 NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C/M1D/M1D-B Hardware
Installation and Maintenance Guide

4.1.1 Hardware Installation and Usage Precautions

Following All Safety Precautions
● To ensure human and device security, comply with all the safety precautions
marked on the device and instructed in this document before any operation.
The CAUTION, WARNING, and NOTE items in this document do not cover all
the safety precautions that must be obeyed. They are supplements to the
safety precautions.
● When operating Huawei products and equipment, comply with safety
precautions and special safety instructions relevant to the corresponding
equipment provided by Huawei. The safety precautions in this document are
only some that Huawei can predict. Huawei is not liable for any consequence
that results from violation of universal regulations for safety operations and
safety codes on design, production, and equipment use.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 799
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Complying with Local Rules and Regulations
When operating a device, comply with local laws and regulations.

Installation Personnel Requirement
Installation and maintenance personnel must be trained to perform operations
correctly and safely.

Personnel Safety
● A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct
human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through
damp objects can be fatal.
● Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or
electric shock, or both.
● Ground a device before powering it on; otherwise, the human body and the
device are exposed to danger.
● Before performing operations on the power supply facilities, power off these
facilities.
● Do not look into the optical port without eye protection when handling
optical fibers.
● To protect human respiratory organs and human eyes from dust, take
protective measures when drilling holes.
● When working at heights, prevent objects from falling down.

Device Security
● Keep an unpacked device upright and handle it with care when carrying it or
installing it into a cabinet.
● Use a ladder to lay out cables. Do not trample on a device.
● Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves when handling circuit boards.
Otherwise, the static electricity discharged from the human body may
damage the electrostatic sensitive components, such as large-scale integrated
circuits (LSIs) on the circuit board.
● Before operating the device, check the electrical connection of the device, and
ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Chassis
Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots to ensure the device functions
correctly. For example, they ensure electromagnetic compatibility, prevent the
ingress of dust or foreign objects, and maintain proper airflow for heat dissipation.

Power Module
● After a power module enters the protection state, it cannot supply power. If
the power module cannot automatically resume power supply after the
triggering condition of the protection state is removed, remove the power
module from the chassis and reinstall it at least 30s later. The power module
then can work properly.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 800
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● When a power module enters overtemperature protection state, take
measures to lower the temperature of the chassis. The power module can
automatically resume power supply when the temperature falls within the
normal range.

Card
● Before installing cards on a device, make sure that the device and cards are all
free from water drips.
● When installing a card, gently push the card along the guide rails, and be
careful not to crash the card connector. Distorted card connector will cause
pins on the opposite card connector or backplane connector to bend. If the
connector of a card has collided with the slot or other objects, ask Huawei
professionals whether the card can still be installed. Installing a card with
distorted connector may cause damage to the device.
● The RST button on an is used to manually reset the Exercise caution when
using this button.
– If the device has only one , pressing this button will cause the device to
restart.
– If the device has two s:

▪ Pressing the reset button on the active will trigger an active/standby
switchover.

▪ Pressing the reset button on the standby will reset the standby ,
which does not affect running of the system.

Cable
● To protect personal safety, do not install power cables when the power is on.
Before connecting power cables, make sure that the power switches of the
external power supply system and the device are all in OFF position.
● Before connecting signal cables, take ESD protection measures, for example,
wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap.
● Before connecting Ethernet cables, use an Ethernet cable tester to test cable
connectivity.
● Both ends of an idle high-speed cable must be covered by an ESD cap.
● The bend radius of high-speed cables must be larger than the minimum bend
radius. Overbending high-speed cables may damage wires in the cables.
● Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical
modules or optical fibers without eye protection.
● Cover idle optical ports and optical modules with dust plugs and cover idle
optical fibers with dust caps.
● Bundle optical fibers with binding tape. Apply appropriate force to ensure that
the optical fibers in a bundle can be moved easily.
● Fiber connectors must be tidy and clean to ensure normal communication. If
a fiber connector is contaminated, clean it using a piece of fiber cleaning
fabric.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 801
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Optical Module
● Devices must use optical modules that are certified for Huawei devices.
Optical modules that are not certified for Huawei devices cannot ensure
transmission reliability and may affect service stability. Huawei is not liable
for any problems caused by the use of optical modules that are not certified
for Huawei devices.
● The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical
fibers of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is
smaller than the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-
distance optical module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the
receive power on the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical
module may be burnt.
4.1.2 Device Installation Process

This section describes the general device installation process. Before installing
device, you need to determine the installation mode according to installation
environment. After unpacking and inspecting the device, you need to install the
chassis, boards, fibers, and cables in sequence, and then check the installation
result. After determining that the installation is correct, you can power on the
device and then check fiber connections.

Table 4-1 lists the general installation process.

Table 4-1 Device installation process

Installation Process Description

Preparing for the Before installing a device, plan and construct the
installation installation space and confirm the installation method
based on the requirements of device operation
environment. This is a prerequisite for smooth
installation, commissioning, and stable running of the
device. For details, see section " Hardware Installation
and Maintenance - Preparation before installation."

Unpacking a device After the project starts, the project supervisor should
unpack and check the device together with the customer
representative. For details, see section "Hardware
Installation and Maintenance- Preparing before
installation - Unpacking a Device."

Installing a chassis The installation method of the chassis varies according
to the installation environment. For details, see section
"Hardware Installation and Maintenance - Installing a
Chassis in Cabinet."

Installing Generally, the components are installed in the chassis. If
components the components are delivered separately, see section
"Hardware Installation and Maintenance - Installing of
Components."

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 802
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Installation Process Description

Planning cable To ensure that power cables are connected in order, you
routing are advised to plan power cable routing. For details, see
section "Hardware Installation and Maintenance - Cable
Routing Planning."

Installing cables The methods of installing cables vary according to the
installation environment of the chassis. For details, see
section "Hardware Installation and Maintenance -
Installation of cables."

Checking the To ensure normal and stable running of a device, you
installation need to check the installation of the device after all
hardware is installed. For details, see section "Hardware
Installation and Maintenance - Post-Installation Check."

Performing a power- Before powering on a device, you need to check the
on check voltage and fuse capacity of the external power supply.
After the power-on, you need to check whether the
device is running normally by observing the indicators.
For details, see section "Hardware Installation and
Maintenance - Power-on Check."

Maintaining a device Faulty fuses and other electronic components can only
be replaced by professionals authorized by Huawei. For
details, see section "Hardware Installation and
Maintenance - Maintenance of the device."


4.1.3 Preparation before installation

4.1.3.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Precautions

Before you start the installation procedure, read all safety precautions described in
this document and observe any warning labels affixed to the device. Doing so
ensures your safety and protects the device from damage.
Safety precautions provided in this document may not cover every eventuality, so
remain mindful of safety at all times.
Huawei is not liable for any consequence that results from violation of regulations
pertaining to safe operations or safety codes pertaining to design, production, and
equipment use.
Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to install, operate, or maintain
the device. Familiarize yourself with all safety precautions before performing any
operation on the device.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 803
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

General Safety


CA UTION

● Always take precautions against ESD whenever you handle a device. For
example, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap. To avoid electric shock or
burn, remove conductive objects like jewelry and watch.
● Connect the ground cable first after installing the device into a cabinet or rack.
Do not remove the ground cable unless all the other cables and modules have
been removed from the device.


NO TICE

● During device transport and installation, prevent the device from colliding with
objects like doors, walls, or shelves.
● Move an unpacked device upright gently to avoid damages to the device. Do
not lay down the unpacked device and drag it.
● Do not touch unpainted surfaces of the device with wet or contaminated
gloves.
● Do not open the ESD bags of cards and modules until they are delivered to the
equipment room. When taking a card out of the ESD bag, do not use the
connector to support the card's weight because this operation will distort the
connector and make the pins on the backplane connector bend.

Environmental Safety


DANGER

Do not place or operate the device in an environment with flammable or explosive
gases or smoke.


NO TICE

● Keep the device away from sources of water to prevent damages to circuits.
● The installation site must be well ventilated to prevent the device from
overheating.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 804
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Electrical Safety


DANGER

● Direct contact with a high-voltage power source or indirect contact through
damp objects can be fatal. Misoperations on high-voltage facilities may result
in fire, electric shock, or other accidents.
● Never install or remove the device or power cables when the power is on. The
electric arc or spark generated between a power cable and conductor may
cause fire or eye damage.
● To protect personal and equipment safety, ground the device before powering it
on.

Laser Safety


CA UTION

● Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical modules
or optical fibers without eye protection.
● Cover fiber connectors with dust caps when they are not connected.

Mechanical Safety


CA UTION

● Wear protective gloves when you are moving the device.
● Use safe lifting practices when moving the equipment. Never attempt to lift
objects that are too heavy for one person to handle. Instead, seek help or use
appropriate tools.
● Before installing the chassis into or removing it from a cabinet, ensure there are
no objects that could fall from the cabinet and cause injury.
● If main control boards, service boards, and power modules have been installed
on the chassis, you are advised to remove them before moving the chassis to
prevent them from falling off and causing injury.
● Do not drill unapproved holes into a cabinet, as doing so may impair its
electromagnetic shielding and damage cables inside. In addition, drilling holes
produces metal shavings that may enter the cabinet and cause short circuits on
printed circuit boards (PCBs).

4.1.3.2 Checking the Installation Site

The Device must be used indoors. To ensure normal operations and long service
life of the device, the installation site must meet the following requirements
described in Table 4-2.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 805
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-2 Requirements for the installation site

Item Requirement

Cleanliness The device must be installed in a clean, dry, and well
ventilated standard equipment room with stable
temperature. The equipment room must be free from
leaking or dripping water, heavy dew, and humidity.

Dust proofing Dustproof measures must be taken in the site. Dust will
cause electrostatic discharges on the chassis and affect
connections of metal connectors and joints. This shortens
service life of the device and may cause failures of the
device.

Temperature and The temperature and humidity in the installation site must
humidity be within specifications. For the operating temperature
and relative humidity ranges required by the device, see
device overview. If the relative humidity exceeds 70% RH,
using dehumidifiers or dehumidifying air conditioners is
recommended.

Corrosive gases The installation site must be free from acidic, alkaline, or
avoidance corrosive gases.

Heat dissipation Keep any objects or obstructions at least 75 mm away
space from the air intake and exhaust vents to facilitate heat
dissipation.

Maintenance The equipment must be stacked in the cabinet or installed
space at an interval of 2U or more to prevent the return air from
affecting heat dissipation.



4.1.3.3 Standard Compliance

4.1.3.3.1 Environmental Standards

Table 4-3 Environmental standards

Environmental Standards Remarks

ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 Environmental Engineering (EE)

Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment

Part 1-1: Classification of
environmental conditions: Storage

Class 1.1: Weatherprotected, partly
temperature-controlled storage
locations

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 806
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Environmental Standards Remarks

Class 1.2: Weatherprotected, not
temperature-controlled storage
locations

ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 Environmental Engineering (EE)

Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment

Part 1-2: Classification of
environmental conditions:
Transportation

Class 2.2: Careful transportation

ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 Environmental Engineering (EE)

Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment

Part 1-3: Classification of
environmental conditions: Stationary
use at weatherprotected locations

Class 3.1: Temperature-controlled
locations

Class 3.2: Partly temperature-
controlled location

IEC 60068-2 Basic Environmental Testing
Procedures

ETSI EN 300 753 Equipment Engineering (EE)

Acoustic noise emitted by
telecommunications equipment

ROHS Restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substance in electrical and
electronic equipment.


4.1.3.4 Checking the Cabinet

The device can be installed in a standard 21-inch or 19-inch cabinet. Huawei A63E
cabinet is recommended. If you purchase a cabinet by yourself, ensure that the
cabinet meets the following requirements:


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 807
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-1 A63E Cabinet


1. 19-inch or 21-inch cabinet with a depth of greater than or equal to 300 mm.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 808
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. The cabling space in front of the cabinet complies with the cabling space
requirements of boards.

NO TE

If a board requires optical modules or attenuators with a puller, GE electrical modules,
or shielded network cables, ensure that sufficient space is available for routing optical
fibers. For a convex door or open rack, it is recommended that the distance between
the cabinet door and the front panel of the board be greater than or equal to 120 mm
(4.72 in.).
3. The device is designed with left-to-right airflow. Therefore, leave a minimum
space of 75 mm on both the left and right sides of the cabinet to ensure good
ventilation.
4. The porosity of each cabinet door must be greater than 50%, meeting heat
dissipation requirements of devices.
5. The cabinet has installation accessories, such as guide rails, floating nuts, and
screws.
6. The cabinet has a ground terminal to connect to the device.
7. The cabinet has a cable outlet on the top or at the bottom for overhead or
underfloor cabling.
8. For cabinets with left-to-right air channels, such as open racks, installing
cabinets side by side may cause cascaded heating. Therefore, you are advised
to install cabinets with left-to-right air channels vertically at different levels
rather than side by side. If side-by-side installation cannot be avoided, it is
recommended that the distance between cabinets be at least 500 mm (19.67
in.). The following figures show equipment room installation in different heat
dissipation scenarios. Device 2 in scenarios 1 and 2 adopts the front-to-back
airflow, that is, cold air flows in from the front side and hot air is exhausted
from the rear side.

Figure 4-2 Equipment room installation in different heat dissipation scenarios


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 809
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


4.1.3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories

Table 4-4 lists the tools required for installing a device.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 810
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-4 Installation tools

Tool Description Picture

ESD gloves Used to
prevent
electrostatic
discharges.


Protective Used to
gloves protect hands
during
operation.


ESD wrist Used to
strap prevent
electrostatic
discharges.
Wear the
strap on your
wrist and
insert the
other end into
the ESD jack
on the
cabinet.

Utility knife Used to cut
cartons or
paper.

Scissors Used to cut
the
installation
template or
other
materials.

Tweezers Used to
unplug
Ethernet
cables and
optical fibers.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 811
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Measuring Used to
tape measure
distances.


Marker Used to mark
component
installation
positions.

Flat-head Used to turn
screwdriver slotted-head
screws and
bolts.

Phillips Used to turn
screwdriver cross-head
screws and
bolts.

Combinatio Used to clamp
n pliers or bend metal
sheets, cut
metal wires,
strip off
coating of
cables, and
unplug nails.

Diagonal Used to cut
pliers insulation
tubes and
cable ties.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 812
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Wire Used to strip
stripper off the
insulation
coating and
shields of
communicatio
n cables with
small cross-
sectional
areas.

RJ45 Used to crimp
crimping Ethernet
tool cables.


COAX Used to crimp
crimping the metal
tool shield at the
end of a
coaxial cable.

Ethernet Used to test
cable tester Ethernet cable
connectivity.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 813
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Multimeter Used to test
cabinet
insulation,
cable
connectivity,
and device
electrical
performance
indicators,
including
voltage,
current, and
resistance.

Adjustable Used to
wrench tighten or
loosen hex or
square bolts
and nuts. The
span can be
adjusted to
suit bolts or
nuts in
different sizes.


Table 4-5 lists the installation accessories required for installing a device.

Table 4-5 Installation accessories
Tool Description Picture

Insulation Used to
tape insulate
power wires
or other
conductors.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 814
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Corrugated Used to
pipe protect optical
fibers.




Table 4-6 lists the installation accessories delivered with the device.

Table 4-6 Installation accessories
Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Serial 1 Used to connect the console 04040838
cable port of the device to a serial
port of a maintenance terminal
for local commissioning or
maintenance of the device.

Panel 5U: 10 Used to fix expandable guide 26020141
screw 3U: 8 rails and the device.
(M6x12)
2U: 4
1U: 4

Floating 5U: 10 Installed on mounting rails of a 26020075
nut (M6) 3U: 8 cabinet or rack and used with
M6 screws to secure the
2U: 4 expandable guide rails and the
1U: 4 device in the cabinet or rack.

ESD wrist 1 Prevents ESD damages when 28050001
strap you touch or operate the
equipment or components.

Fiber 1 m Used to bundle optical fibers. 21101258
binding
tape

Cable tie 50 Used to bundle cables. 21100144
(300 x 3.6
mm)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 815
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Label 12 Used to bundle cables and 21200708
cable tie attach the power cable label
(29041061) to the cables.

Signal 1 Used to identify locations of 29041060
cable signal cables.
label

Power 1 Used to identify locations of 29041061
cable power cables.
label

Cable 1 Used to fix AC power cables. 21201529
Clamp

Cable 1 pair Used to route cables connected 21243763
managem to boards.
ent frame

Cable 1 Used to route cables connected 21243569
managem to boards.
ent frame


4.1.3.6 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters

4.1.3.6.1 Overview
This topic introduces the purpose and procedure of cleaning optical fiber
connectors, as well as polluters to optical fiber connectors.
Cleaning fiber connectors is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance
degradation of optical transmission systems.
Figure 4-3 shows an optical fiber connector.

Figure 4-3 Optical fiber connector


Optical fiber connectors should be free of:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 816
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Dust
● Grease (usually brought by hands)
● Condensate residue
● Powder (evaporated residue of water or solvent)
Dust is the most common dirt in optical fiber connectors. The dust particles that
can be seen only by a microscope can affect the quality of optical signals,
deteriorate the system performance, and cause instability in network operation.
A 1-micrometer dust particle on the single-mode fiber connector can block 1%
light and cause 0.05 dB attenuation. A 9-micrometer dust particle that cannot be
seen by human eyes can block an entire fiber core. Therefore, small dirt even that
cannot be seen by human eyes should be removed.

NO TE

Before you connect any optical component, make sure that you have checked and cleaned
the component.

4.1.3.6.2 Protection of Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes requirements for fiber connector protection.
The requirements are as follows:
● All boards with optical ports must be packed properly, to avoid mechanical
and electrostatic damages and to reduce vibrations.
● The protective caps must be put in an ESD bag.
● Protective caps must be installed on all optical fiber connectors when not in
use. The optical fiber connectors must be stored in proper packages to keep
them clean.
● Figure 4-4 shows the recommended protective caps, whereas Figure 4-5
shows the protective caps not recommended.

Figure 4-4 Protective caps recommended


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 817
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-5 Protective caps not recommended


NO TE

The protective caps not recommended are made of soft rubber, which are apt to absorb
dust and sundries, and difficult to clean.

4.1.3.6.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Optical connectors should be cleaned using recommended tools, equipment and
materials.
The following provides the recommended tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cassette cleaner
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air
● Special cleaning roll
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
shown in Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-7


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 818
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-6 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors


Figure 4-7 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors


4.1.3.6.4 Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes how to inspect the end face of optical fibers using a fiber
microscope.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials for inspecting
optical fiber connectors:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
Use a fiber microscope equipped with a safety device or a desktop video fiber
microscope when inspecting the optical fiber connectors.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 819
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Use a fiber microscope to check whether the fiber connector is contaminated
or damaged. See the examples below.
– Clean fiber and face
Figure 4-8 shows an image of a clean fiber end face under the fiber
microscope.

Figure 4-8 Clean fiber and face


– Damaged fiber end face
Figure 4-9 shows images of the damaged fiber end face. The image on
the left shows a severely damaged fiber. Severely damaged fibers can
cause damage to the equipment and should not be used. The image on
the right shows a defective fiber. If the output power is within a certain
range, the defective fiber might not cause any damage to the equipment.
If the output power is unstable or out of the range, however, the
defective fiber can cause damage to the equipment.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 820
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-9 Damaged or defective fiber end face


NO TE

Figure 4-9 shows only the 800-micrometer fiber cores.
For details on acceptable and unacceptable fibers, see Figure 4-10, Figure
4-11 and Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-10 Clean fiber end face


Figure 4-11 Acceptable fibers with imperfections


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 821
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-12 Unacceptable fibers with imperfections


4. If any dirt is detected, clean the optical fiber connector. For details, see
"Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner" and "Cleaning
Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue".
5. If any damage is detected, replace the fiber.

4.1.3.6.5 Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link
This section describes the insertion loss and reflection requirements of optical links
and the method of checking the quality of optical links for the application of 50G
optical modules with the PAM4 coding technology.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Tools and instruments for checking optical fiber links are as follows:
● OTDR meter
● Fiber microscope

Precautions

CA UTION

Because the transmit optical power of the OTDR meter is much higher than the
damaged optical power threshold at the receive end, the optical fiber must be
removed from the optical module when the OTDR meter is used to test the optical
path quality.

Currently, the Ethernet port rate is increasing. Since the 50G optical module link
uses the PAM4 encoding technology, there are higher requirements on the optical
fiber and cable quality and the link is more sensitive to multipath reflection
interference of signals. If the fiber link connector, fiber section, or fiber splicing
surface is dirty, optical signals are reflected back and forth on the fiber link,
causing interference due to co-channel noise on the receive side. As a result, the
optical link is unstable or intermittently disconnected.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 822
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

According to the national standard (GBT50312-2016), the loss of the optical fiber
link connector must meet the requirements described in Table 4-7.

Table 4-7 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector

Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber
connector (dB)

Fiber splicing connector 0.3

Optical mechanical connector 0.3

Optical connector 0.75



NO TE

Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.

Table 4-8 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the rate. More
connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.

Table 4-8 Maximum reflection of connectors

Number of Maximum Reflection of Each Connector (dB)
Optical Fiber
Connectors 50GBASE-FR 50GBASE-LR 50GBASE-ER

1 -25 -22 -19

2 -31 -29 -27

4 -35 -33 -32

6 -38 -35 -35

8 -40 -37 -37

10 -41 -39 -39



Procedure
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.
2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 823
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it. For details, see "Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber
Connectors and Adapters".
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.

4.1.3.6.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner

This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using a cassette cleaner.

Prerequisites

Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.

The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using
cartridge type cleaners.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials for cleaning optical
fiber connectors:

● cassette cleaner
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 824
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Press down and hold the lever of the cassette cleaner. The shutter slides back
and exposes a new cleaning area.
4. Place the fiber end face gently against the cleaning area.
5. Drag the fiber end face gently on one cleaning area in the arrow direction
each time. Do it again on the other cleaning area in the same direction as the
first time once.


NO TICE

Do not drag the fiber end face on the same cleaning area more than once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.

6. Release the lever of the cassette cleaner to close the cleaning area.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details see the examples shown in "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors".
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.

4.1.3.6.7 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue

This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue.

Prerequisites

Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 825
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air or cleaning roll

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Put a little cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.
4. Clean the fiber end face on the lens tissue. See Figure 4-13 and Figure 4-14.


NO TICE

Drag the fiber end face on the same area in the lens tissue only once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 826
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-13 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the desk


Figure 4-14 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the hand


5. Repeat 4 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been
used.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.

NO TE

● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
● If the compressed air is not available, use a cleaning roll instead.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details, see the examples shown in "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors".
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 827
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

8. Do not touch the fiber connector after cleaning it. Connect it to the optical
port immediately. If it is not used for the time being, put a protective cap on
it.
NO TE

Do not use the same cleaning area to clean the fiber connector for more than one
time.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.

4.1.3.6.8 Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs
This topic describes how to clean fiber adapters using dustfree absorbent swabs.

Prerequisites
There are several types of dustfree absorbent swabs available. Select appropriate
dustfree absorbent swabs based on site conditions. You can obtain the following
tools and materials from a fiber cable and connector manufacturer.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Special compressed air
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 828
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Select the dustfree absorbent swab with a proper diameter based on the type
of an adapter.

NO TE

For SC and FC fiber adapters, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a diameter of 2.5
mm (0.1 in.); for the LC fiber adapter, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a
diameter of 1.25 mm (0.05 in.). See Figure 4-15 and Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-15 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors


Figure 4-16 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors


4. Put a little cleaning solvent on the dustfree absorbent swab.
5. Place the dustfree absorbent swab gently on the adapter so that the cleaning
solvent is against the fiber end face. Draw out the dustfree absorbent swab
from the fiber adapter and then rotate the dustfree absorbent swab clockwise
once. Ensure that the tip of the dustfree absorbent swab directly contacts the
fiber end face.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.

NO TE

● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details, see "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors". If the fiber end face is
still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 829
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.

4.1.3.7 Inspection of power distribution environment


4.1.3.7.1 Introduction to the Power Distribution System

Devices support both AC and DC power supplies.

● AC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) obtains three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains power
outlet and transmits 380 V AC power to an AC power distribution frame. A
chassis receives power from the AC power distribution frame through the
power distribution unit (PDU) installed in the cabinet.

Figure 4-17 AC power supply mode


● High-voltage (240 V) DC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, a
rectifier system obtains three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains
power outlet and transmits 240 V DC power to a DC power distribution frame.
A chassis receives power from the DC power distribution frame through the
PDU installed in the cabinet/rack.

Figure 4-18 High-voltage (240 V) DC power supply mode


● DC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, a rectifier system receives
three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains power outlet and transmits
-48 V DC power to a DC power distribution frame. The device obtains power
from the DC power distribution frame.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 830
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-19 DC power supply mode


4.1.3.7.2 DC Power Distribution Guide


DANGER

Do not install power cables when the power is on. This is to avoid injuries.

Figure 4-20 Schematic diagram of the DC power distribution


DC Power Supply System
For cable specifications, see "Hardware Description"-Cables.

Table 4-9 PDF circuit breaker specifications of NetEngine 8000 M1A
Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥4 A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be no
less than 4 A.




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 831
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-10 PDF circuit breaker specifications of NetEngine 8000 M1C
Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥4 A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be no
less than 4 A.


Table 4-11 PDF circuit breaker specifications of NetEngine 8000 M1D
Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥6 A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be no
less than 6 A.


Table 4-12 PDF circuit breaker specifications of NetEngine 8000 M1D-B
Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥6 A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be no
less than 6 A.


Installing Power Cables
1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each power cable.
2. Route power cables along the cable ladder and lay them on the chassis.
3. Take off the plastic cover from each power module, connect one end of each
power cable to the corresponding terminal and the other end to the PDF.

NO TE

There are two installation modes for some steps. Select a proper connection mode
based on the cabling requirements.
The following figures are for reference only. The appearance of the device may vary
according to the actual situation.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 832
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-21 NetEngine 8000 M1A Installing the Power Cables


Figure 4-22 NetEngine 8000 M1C Installing the Power Cables


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 833
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-23 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B Installing the Power Cables


4. Use cable ties to bundle cables every 150 mm upwards from the bottom and
fasten the cables to the cable tray.
5. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each power cable.

NO TE

To ensure that the power cable is required, perform the following steps to install a power
cable:
1. Prepare a power cable a little longer than the distance between the power module and
PDF.
2. Install a terminal on one end of the power cable and connect the terminal to the device.
3. Connect power cables to the positive and negative electrodes securely. Otherwise, the
power test result is inaccurate.
4. Route the power cable, bind it to the cable tray, and cut any excess length of the cable.
Install a terminal on the other end of the power cable and connect the terminal to the
PDF.

4.1.3.7.3 AC Power Distribution Guide


DANGER

Do not install power cables when the power is on. This is to avoid injuries.


Figure 4-24 Schematic diagram of the AC power distribution


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 834
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

AC Power Supply System

For cable specifications, see "Hardware Description"-Cables.

Table 4-13 PDF circuit breaker specifications of NetEngine 8000 M1A

Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥1.5 A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be no
less than 1.5 A.



Table 4-14 PDF circuit breaker specifications of NetEngine 8000 M1C

Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥2 A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be no
less than 2 A.



Table 4-15 PDF circuit breaker specifications of NetEngine 8000 M1D

Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥4 A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be no
less than 4 A.



Table 4-16 PDF circuit breaker specifications of NetEngine 8000 M1D-B

Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥4 A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be no
less than 4 A.



Installing AC Power Cables
1. Route AC power cables along the cable ladder and lay them on the chassis.
2. Insert the AC power cable to the AC input port and secure it using the loose-
proof pinch as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-25. Connect the other end of the
AC power cable to the PDF of the equipment room.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 835
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

There are two installation modes for some steps. Select a proper connection mode
based on the cabling requirements.
The following figures are for reference only. The appearance of the device may vary
according to the actual situation.

Figure 4-25 Installing the AC power cable (NetEngine 8000 M1A)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 836
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-26 Installing the AC power cable (NetEngine 8000 M1C)


Figure 4-27 Installing the AC power cable (NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B)


3. Use cable ties to bundle AC cables every 150 mm upwards from the bottom
and fasten the cables to the cable tray.
4. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each AC power cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 837
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Instructions for Connecting the AC Power Cable to the Power Distribution
Box
1. Cut the PE ground cable (yellow-green wire) at the peeling place (wrap it
with PVC insulation tape to prevent leakage or short circuit), peel the L wire
(brown wire) and N wire (blue wire) and crimp the OT terminal Or cold-
pressed terminal (terminal type is selected according to actual conditions).


2. Connect the L and N wires to the corresponding L and N input terminals of
the power distribution box.
When using 110V power supply (dual live wire power supply), L and N are
connected to the two live wires (L) of the equipment room and connected to
the protective ground cable (PE). At the same time, both L and N poles must
be configured with circuit breakers.

4.1.3.8 Unpacking a Device
Unpack the chassis before starting the installation.

4.1.3.8.1 Unpacking a Carton
The chassis must be delivered to the site.

Tools
● ESD gloves
● Diagonal pliers
● Paper knife


CA UTION

● Integrated circuits (ICs) are sensitive to electrostatic discharge from the
human body. When handling boards or metallic parts of the equipment,
wear ESD gloves and hold only the edges of the boards during operation.
● If the equipment is transported from a cold and dry place to a warm and
damp place, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking it. Otherwise, the
moisture condenses on the board surface and damages the components.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 838
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
1. Transport the packing box to the equipment room.
2. Check the packing box, and stop unpacking it in any of the following cases:
– The outer package is severely damaged.
– There is water leakage on the outer package.
Find the causes and provide feedback to the local representative office of
Huawei.
3. Observe the labels on the carton to check the equipment configuration and
take a record.
4. Cut the strap with the diagonal plier and then split the adhesive tape properly
along the seam between the cover and the body of the box with the paper
knife. Do not scratch the articles inside the box. The following figures are for
reference only.

Figure 4-28 Unpacking the carton


1. Pressure- 2. Carton label 3. Packing box 4. Auxiliary box
sensitive adhesive
tape

5. Foam protector 6. Chassis 7. ESD PE bag -

5. Open the carton and take out the chassis box from the carton.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 839
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

6. Open the chassis box and take out the chassis. Then, check whether the
chassis is damaged.
4.1.4 Installing a Chassis in Cabinet

Precautions
Ensure that the cabinet has been properly installed before installing devices in the
cabinet. The cabinet can be installed on an ESD floor or concrete floor.


NO TICE

● When installing devices, ensure that the total heat consumption of all devices
in the cabinet is less than or equal to the heat dissipation capability of the
cabinet.
● To prevent heat dissipation from being affected by air return, devices must be
installed at an interval of 2 U or more in the cabinet. In addition, In addition,
the middle-column cabinets support device stacking.
● Ensure that heat dissipation holes on the panel are not blocked.
● When the chassis is installed together with other equipment in the same
cabinet, do not install the chassis near the air exhaust vent of other equipment.
● Determine whether the air exhaust vent affects adjacent devices to avoid high
temperature of adjacent devices.

Installing a Chassis in a Standard 19-Inch Cabinet
NO TE

There are two installation modes for some steps. Select a proper connection mode based on
the cabling requirements.
The following figures are for reference only. The appearance of the device may vary
according to the actual situation.
1. Fix floating nuts and M6 screws in the correct holes.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 840
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

When tightening floating nuts, ensure a minimum distance of 75 mm mm between a
chassis side and its adjacent column for ventilation.
2. Tighten the M4 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 1.2 N m.
Attach a PGND cable to the chassis through a two-hole or one-hole terminal.

Figure 4-29 NetEngine 8000 M1A


Figure 4-30 NetEngine 8000 M1C


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 841
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-31 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B


3. Tighten the M6 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 3 N m.
Install the chassis in the cabinet.

Figure 4-32 NetEngine 8000 M1A


Figure 4-33 NetEngine 8000 M1C


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 842
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-34 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B


Installing a Chassis in an ETSI Cabinet with Front Columns
1. Fix floating nuts and M6 screws in the correct holes.


NO TE

When tightening floating nuts, ensure a minimum distance of 75 mm between a
chassis side and its adjacent column for ventilation.
2. Tighten the M6 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 3 N m.
Install the mounting ears on both sides of the chassis.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 843
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-35 NetEngine 8000 M1A


Figure 4-36 NetEngine 8000 M1C


Figure 4-37 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B


3. Tighten the M4 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 1.2 N m.
Attach a PGND cable to the chassis through a two-hole or one-hole terminal.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 844
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-38 NetEngine 8000 M1A


Figure 4-39 NetEngine 8000 M1C


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 845
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-40 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B


4. Tighten the M6 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 3 N m.
Install the chassis in the cabinet.

Figure 4-41 NetEngine 8000 M1A


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 846
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-42 NetEngine 8000 M1C


Figure 4-43 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B


4.1.5 Cable Routing Planning

Context
To ensure that power cables are connected in order, you are advised to plan power
cable routing.

NO TICE

Do not bundle or route outdoor cables (such as outdoor antenna feeders and
outdoor power cables) and indoor cables together in the cabinet or on the cable
tray.
If the cables on the right side are tightly bundled but the cabling space is still
insufficient, you can route the extra cables on the left side. In the case of left-side
cabling, keep the cables away from the upper and lower board, power module,
and fan module insertion/removal areas to facilitate future maintenance.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 847
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Power Cable Routing Planning
For the NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C/M1D/M1D-B, it is recommended that power
cables and ground cables be routed on the left side of the cabinet or rack.
For the NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C/M1D/M1D-B, it is recommended that cables,
such as optical fibers and Ethernet cables, be on the right side of the cabinet or
rack.


WARNING

If cables are routed on the rear of a device, ensure that the cables do not block
the air vents of the device to achieve proper heat dissipation. Otherwise, the
cables may be damaged due to overheating.

Figure 4-44 NetEngine 8000 M1A Cable layout (AC)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 848
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-45 NetEngine 8000 M1C Cable layout (AC)


Figure 4-46 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B Cable layout (DC)


4.1.6 Installation of cables

4.1.6.1 Installing the Ground Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 849
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Specifications

Item Description Remark

Ground cable of the 25 mm2 The grounding cables must
cabinet be copper cables.

Ground cable of the 4 mm2 The grounding cables must
chassis be copper cables.

Grounding terminal Naked Crimping -
of the cabinet Terminal,OT,25mm^2,M8
,Tin Plating,Naked Ring
Terminal

Grounding terminal Naked Crimping -
of the chassis Terminal, OT, 6mm2, M6,
Tin Plating, Naked Ring
Terminal

Naked Crimping
Connector, OT2, 6mm2,
M6, Tin Plating

Naked Crimping
Terminal, OT, 6mm2, M6,
Tin Plating, Naked Ring
Terminal



Installing the Ground Cable

The chassis can be grounded in two ways. If the chassis is near the ground bar of
the equipment room, connect the ground cable of the chassis directly to the
ground bar. If the chassis is far away from the ground bar, connect the ground
cable of the chassis to the ground point of the cabinet.

NO TE

There are two installation modes for some steps. Select a proper connection mode based on
the cabling requirements.
The following figures are for reference only. The appearance of the device may vary
according to the actual situation.


NO TICE

● All ground terminals must be secured using captive screws.
● The grounding cables must connect to a common bonding network.

1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each ground cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 850
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Route the ground cable along the cable management tray and connect the
ground cable to the grounding terminal on the cabinet top. Connect the other
end of the ground cable to the ground bar of the equipment room.
3. Connect the ground cable of the chassis to the grounding terminal of the
cabinet.
4. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each ground cable.

Figure 4-47 Installing the ground cable for NetEngine 8000 M1A


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 851
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-48 Installing the ground cable for NetEngine 8000 M1C


Figure 4-49 Installing the ground cable for NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 852
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.6.2 Installing Optical Fibers


NO TICE

● Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before installing optical modules.
● The bending radius of a single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber is greater than or
equal to 10 mm, and the bending radius of a multi-mode A1b optical fiber is
greater than or equal to 30 mm.
● Cover empty optical interfaces and idle optical modules with dust caps.
● Do not bundle optical fibers too tightly. You must be able to conveniently
remove a single fiber from the bundle.


CA UTION

In a 300 mm deep cabinet with a flat door:
● When a QSFP28 or CFP2 optical module uses an attenuator, you are advised to
use ultra-short pigtail fibers.
● MPO optical fibers used by the QSFP28 or CFP2 optical module may push
against the door. Therefore, a convex-door cabinet or an open rack is
recommended.
● When using the ATOM GPS module, you are advised to purchase optical fibers
with curved SMA connectors.

Figure 4-50 The difference between ultra-short-tail fiber and short-tail fiber


1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each optical fiber.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 853
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Insert the corrugated pipe through the dedicated cable hole on the cabinet
top to the cabinet about 100 mm and tie the pipe to the cabinet.
3. Wrap adhesive tapes on both ends of the corrugated pipe to protect it from
cut.
4. Insert the corrugated pipe through the dedicated cable hole on the cabinet
top to the cabinet about 100 mm and tie the pipe to the cabinet.

NO TE

There are two installation modes for some steps. Select a proper connection mode
based on the cabling requirements.
The following figures are for reference only. The appearance of the device may vary
according to the actual situation.

Figure 4-51 NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C Inserting the corrugated pipe


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 854
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-52 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B Inserting the corrugated pipe


5. Install the optical module, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-53.
6. Install the optical module, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-54.
7. Route optical fibers along the cable tray, remove the dust caps from the
optical modules and optical fiber interfaces. Then connect the end of each
optical fiber to the corresponding optical interface, as shown in step 2 in
Figure 4-53.
8. Route optical fibers along the cable tray, remove the dust caps from the
optical modules and optical fiber interfaces. Then connect the end of each
optical fiber to the corresponding optical interface, as shown in step 2 in
Figure 4-54
9. Figure 4-53 NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C Installing Optical Fibers


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 855
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-54 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B Installing Optical Fibers


10. Connect the other end of each optical fiber to the ODF.
11. Bundle optical fibers with binding straps at an interval of 150 mm and fasten
the optical fibers to the cable tray.
12. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each optical fiber.

4.1.6.3 Installing Network Cables


NO TICE

Before bundling network cables, use a network cable tester to test cable
connectivity.
In a 300 mm deep cabinet with a flat door, common shielded network cables are
not recommended when electrical modules are used. Instead, use Huawei-
customized conversion short pigtail shielded network cables.

NO TE

Bundle the network cables in a rectangle shape. Ensure that the cable ties are evenly
spaced and face the same direction.
1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each network cable.
2. Route network cables along the cable tray and plug them into corresponding
interfaces.
3. Use a network cable tester to test the connectivity of network cables.
4. Use cable ties to bundle network cables at an interval of 150 mm and fasten
the network cables to the rack.
5. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each network cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 856
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-55 NetEngine 8000 M1A Installing network cables


Figure 4-56 NetEngine 8000 M1C Installing network cables


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 857
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-57 NetEngine 8000 M1D/M1D-B Installing network cables


4.1.7 Post-Installation Check


CA UTION

Before starting the post-installation check, make sure that the power switches of
the external power supply system are in OFF position.

After completing installation of a device, check the items listed in the following
table. If any item fails the check, check for the reason, reinstall the related
component, and check again. Ensure that all the items pass the check.
Check cabinets according to Table 4-17.

Table 4-17 Cabinet checklist

No. Item Method

1 The cabinet installation location complies Observe
with the engineering design document.

2 Components are correctly installed in a Observe
cabinet. No component is loose or damaged.

3 All the bolts are tightened, especially those Observe
for electrical connections. The flat washers
and spring washers are installed completely
and properly.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 858
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Item Method

4 The vertical deviation of a cabinet is less Measure
than 3 mm. You can use a plumb bob to
measure the vertical deviation.

5 The cabinets on the sides of the main path Measure
are aligned in a line, with a deviation of less
than 5 mm.

6 The surfaces of the cabinets in the same row Observe
are on the same plane. The cabinets are
deployed close to each other.

7 The front door of a cabinet can be opened Observe
and closed easily.

8 The cable outlets on the top and bottom of Observe
a cabinet are properly sealed.

9 Metal components in a cabinet have good Observe
electrical connections with the rack. Screw
mounting holes, guide rails, and mounting
brackets are not covered with insulation
painting.

10 Ground busbars of adjacent cabinets are Observe
connected through busbar cables.



Check cables according to Table 4-18.

Table 4-18 Cable checklist

No. Item Method

1 Routes of signal cables comply with the Observe
engineering design document.

2 Signal cables are not damaged or broken Observe
and have no splices.

3 Signal cable connectors are clean, intact, and Observe
correctly connected. Wires of each signal
cable are securely clamped in the
connectors.

4 Signal cables do not cross each other and Observe
have sufficient slack at the bent part. (Signal
cables can be crossed within 1 m outside the
cabinet.)

5 Pigtail fibers outside a cabinet are laid in a Observe
protection pipe or trough and are not
squeezed by other cables or objects.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 859
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Item Method

6 Optical fibers are led into a cabinet through Observe and
a corrugated pipe. The corrugated pipe measure
should be no longer than 100 mm and be
bundled on the cabinet.

7 The bend radius of optical fibers is 20 times Observe and
larger than their diameters. Generally, the measure
bend radius of optical fibers should be no
less than 40 mm. The path of optical fibers is
not blocked by any components.

8 Optical fibers are bundled by binding tape Observe
with appropriate force.

9 Each signal cable has correct, clear, and tidy Observe
labels attached on both ends.

10 The routes of power cables and ground Observe
cables conform to the engineering design
document, facilitating future maintenance
and system expansion.

11 All power cables and ground cables are Observe
complete copper wires without splices.
Coatings of power cables and ground cables
are intact.

12 Power cables and ground cables are Observe
connected properly.

13 Power cables and ground cables are routed Observe
in compliance with the engineering design
document, meeting power distribution
requirements.

14 Power cables and ground cables are Observe
separated from signal cables.

15 Power cables and ground cables are routed Observe
straightly and properly bundled, with
sufficient slack at the bend part.

16 Power cables, ground cables, and power Observe
switches on power distribution boxes and
power distribution frames are identified by
correct, clear, and tidy labels.

17 The yellow-green ground cables are correctly Observe
connected. One end of a ground cable is
connected to the PGND ground bar in the
power distribution cabinet, and the other
end is connected to the ground point on a
cabinet. Screws at both ends of a ground
cable are securely fastened.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 860
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement



Check the installation environment according to Table 4-19.

Table 4-19 Installation environment checklist
No. Item Method

1 No fingerprints or other smears exist on the Observe
surface of the equipment cabinet.

2 No excessive adhesive tapes or cable ties Observe
exist on the cables.

3 No tapes, cable ties, wastepaper, or packing Observe
bags are left around the equipment.

4 All the items around the equipment are neat, Observe
clean, and intact.

4.1.8 Power-on Check

Power-on Check Flowchart

Figure 4-58 Power-on Check Flowchart


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 861
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

The normal input voltage of the DC power supply system ranges from -40 V DC to
-72 V DC. The normal input voltage of the AC power supply system ranges from
100 V AC to 240 V AC.

Indicator description

Item Indica Color Status Description
tor

DC Power PWR Green The PIU works normally and its
supply status power supply is stable.
indicator
- The PIU is powered off or the PIU
hardware is faulty.

Status STAT Green The board works normally.
indicator
Red The board hardware is faulty.

- The board is not running or no
power is input.

Alarm ALM Red Critical alarms are generated.
indicator
Orange Major or minor alarms are
generated.

- No alarms are generated.

Connection LINK Green The data interface is transmitting
status or receiving data.
indicator
- The physical port connection fails.

Transmitting ACT Orange/Green Blinking: the data interface is
/receiving NOTE transmitting or receiving data.
status ● The color of
indicator the indicator
on the
electrical port
is orange.
● The color of
the indicator
on the optical
port is green.

- The data interface is not
transmitting or receiving data.



4.1.9 (Optional) Checking Optical Power

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 862
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

The following table describes comparison between the transmit optical power of
50 Gbps optical modules and damaged optical power threshold at the receive end:

Optical Maximum Minimum Damaged Description
Module Type Average Average Optical
Transmit Transmit Power
Optical Optical Threshold at
Power Power the Receive
End

50GBASE-FR 3 -4.1 5.2 The damaged
optical power
50GBASE-LR 4.2 -4.5 5.2 threshold is
greater than
the maximum
average
transmit
optical power,
posting low
self-loop risks.

50GBASE-ER 6.6 0.4 -2.4 The damaged
optical power
threshold is
9dBm lower
than the
maximum
average
transmit
optical power
and 2.8dBm
lower than
the minimum
average
transmit
optical power,
posing high
self-loop risks.
In this case,
an optical
attenuator
must be
configured for
self-loop.



For applications of the 50 Gbps optical module supporting a distance of 40 km:
1. To ensure that the optical module runs stably for a long time, adjust the
receive optical power of the optical module to a value lower than -4 dB.
According to the IEEE 802.3 standard, if the receive optical power of the
optical module exceeds -2.3 dB, the optical module may be permanently
damaged.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 863
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Before connecting to the optical module, use an optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dB, the optical
module can be directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dB, add an optical
attenuator at the receive end to ensure that the receive optical power is less
than -4 dB. Alternatively, add an optical attenuator (no less than 10 dB is
recommended) before the interconnection, and then adjust the optical
attenuator based on the site requirements to prevent the optical module from
being damaged.
3. If a loopback occurs on the pigtail of the optical module or the optical
module is connected for a short distance, an optical attenuator must be
added. It is recommended that the optical attenuator be no less than 10 dB.
4.1.10 Maintenance of the device

4.1.10.1 Replacing the Chassis

Context

The chassis is damaged due to external forces or a hardware fault.

Impact on the System

Services will be interrupted for about 30 minutes because the device needs to be
powered off to replace the chassis.

Precautions


DANGER

Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical interface
board or fiber.


NO TICE

● Before replacing the chassis, contact Huawei engineers to see if a license is
required. You can apply for a license or use Stick License to activate some
license control items.
● Before replacing the chassis, upgrade the software version of the new chassis to
be the same as that of the chassis to be replaced.
● When replacing a part, make sure that the interface is not connected to any
optical fibers or cables.
● Optical interfaces and optical fiber connectors must be clean. Optical fiber
connectors must be properly capped to keep dusts away.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 864
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver
● ESD bag

Procedure
1. Wear the ESD wrist strap, and insert the grounding end into the ESD jack on
the device, or wear ESD gloves.
2. Make sure that the spare part is the same as the one to be replaced in terms
of name, model, and parameters. If they do not meet the requirements,
contact Huawei GTAC.
3. Record the mapping between each fiber or cable and interface on the device.
When the replacement is complete, restore the fiber or cable connections.

NO TE

Two methods are available for backing up a device's configuration data:
● Using an NMS: Use an NE software management module to back up a device's
configuration data as a configuration file to an NMS server or client.
● Using a command: Run the save command to save a device's configuration data
to the device's storage unit as a configuration file and copy the configuration file
to the maintenance terminal for backup.
4. Power off the device.


CA UTION

Make sure that indicators are off which indicates that the device is powered
off.

5. Remove the power connectors and all fibers and cables connected to the
chassis.
6. Remove the mounting ears on the chassis and then take down the chassis.
(Skip this step if the chassis is installed on a desk.)


CA UTION

Hold the bottom of the chassis when you remove the mounting ears to
prevent injuries to human bodies or damage to other devices.

7. Remove the mounting ears, and install them onto the spare chassis. Install
the spare chassis to the previous position. Then, restore the fiber or cable
connections.
8. Power on the device and observe indicators.

NO TE

If the STAT indicator is steady green, the device works normally.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 865
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

9. Log in to the device and run the display device command to query the
running status of the device. If the Status column displays only Normal, the
device is running properly.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a part, collect the tools. If the part is faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and
the faulty part to Huawei for timely maintenance.
4.1.11 Appendix

4.1.11.1 Environmental Requirements for Device Operation

4.1.11.1.1 Environmental Requirements for Equipment Room

Requirements for Selecting a Site for Equipment Room

When designing a project, consider the communication network planning and
technical requirements of the equipment. Also consider hydrographic, geological,
seismic, power supply, and transportation factors.
Construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire-
proof construction of the equipment room should be designed by specialized
construction designers to suit the environmental requirements of devices. The
equipment room should also follow local regulations concerning the industrial
construction, environmental protection, fire safety, and civil air defense.
Construction must conform to government standards, regulations, and other
requirements.
The equipment room should be located in a place free from high temperature,
dust, toxic gases, explosive materials, or unstable voltage. Keep the equipment
room away from significant vibrations or loud noises, as well as power transformer
stations.
The specific requirements for selecting a site for an equipment room are as
follows:
● The room should be located at a distance of at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) from
heavy pollution sources such as smelting and coal mines. It should be located
at a distance of at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) from moderate pollution sources
such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization factories. It should be located at a
distance of at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) from light pollution sources such as
packinghouses and tanyards. If these pollution sources cannot be avoided,
ensure that the equipment room is upwind of the pollution sources. In
addition, use a high-quality equipment room or protection products.
● The room should be located away from livestock farms, or be upwind of the
livestock farms. Do not use an old livestock room or fertilizer warehouse as
the equipment room.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 866
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● The equipment room must be far away from residential areas. An equipment
room that is not far away from residential areas must comply with equipment
room construction standards to avoid noise pollution.
● The room should be located far away from industrial and heating boilers.
● The room should be at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from the seaside or salt
lake. Otherwise, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities.
In addition, alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction material.
Otherwise, equipment suitable for wet conditions must be used.
● The doors and windows of the equipment room must be kept closed to
maintain an airtight room.
● Using steel doors to ensure sound insulation is recommended.
● No cracks or openings are allowed on the walls or floors. The outlet holes on
the walls or windows must be sealed. Walls must be constructed such that
they are smooth, wear-resistant, dustproof, flame retardant, sound insulated,
heat absorptive, and have electromagnetic shielding.
● The air vent of the room should be far from the exhaust of city waste pipes,
big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The room should be in the positive
pressure state to prevent corrosive gases from entering the equipment room
and corroding components and circuit boards.
● It is recommended that the room be on or above the second floor. If this
requirement cannot be met, the ground for equipment installation in the
room should be at least 600 mm (23.62 in, ) above the maximum flood level.
● The equipment room should be strong enough to resist winds and downpours.
● The room should be located away from dusty roads or sand. If this is
unavoidable, the doors and windows of the equipment room must not face
pollution sources.
● Do not place air conditioning vents near the equipment so that they blow
directly on the equipment because condensation may be blown into the
equipment.
● Do not use decorative materials that contain sulfur in the equipment room.

Equipment Room Layout

An equipment room usually contains mobile switching equipment,
telecommunications equipment, power supply equipment, and other auxiliary
equipment. To ensure easy maintenance and management, place the equipment
in different rooms. Figure 4-59 shows the layout of the equipment room.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 867
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-59 Layout of the equipment room


The general layout principles of the equipment room are as follows:

● It should meet requirements for laying out and maintaining communication
cables and power cables.
● It should reduce the cabling distance, which facilitates cable maintenance,
reduces potential communication faults, and maximizes efficiency.

Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room

Table 4-20 describes the construction requirements for the equipment room.

Table 4-20 Construction requirements for the equipment room

Item Requirements

Area The smallest area of the equipment room can accommodate the
equipment with the largest capacity.

Net height The minimum height of the equipment room should not be less
than 3 m (9.84 ft). The minimum height of the equipment room
is the net height below overhead beams or ventilation pipes.

Floor The floor in the equipment room should be semi-conductive and
dustproof. A raised floor with an ESD covering is recommended.
Cover the raised floor tightly and solidly. The horizontal
tolerance of each square meter should be less than 2 mm (0.08
in.). If raised floors are unavailable, use a static-electricity-
conductive floor material, with a volume resistivity of 1.0 x 10^7
ohms to 1.0 x 10^10 ohms. Ground this floor material or raised
floor. You can connect them to ground using a one megohm
current-limiting resistor and connection line.

Load-bearing The floor must bear loads larger than 561 kg/m2 (0.79 bf/in.2).
capacity

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 868
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Door and The door of the equipment room should be 2 m (6.56 ft) high
windows and 1 m (3.28 ft) wide. One door is enough. Seal the doors and
windows with dustproof plastic tape. Use double-pane glass in
the windows and seal them tightly.

Wall surface Paste wallpaper on the wall or apply flat paint. Do not use
treatment pulverized paint.

Cable trays Use cable trays to arrange cables. The inner faces of the cable
trays must be smooth. The reserved length and width of the
cable trays, and the number, position and dimensions of the
holes must comply with the requirements of device
arrangement.

Water pipe Do not pass service pipes, drainpipes, and storm sewers through
the equipment room. Do not place a fire hydrant in the
equipment room, but place it in the corridor or near the
staircase.

Internal Separate the area where the equipment is installed from the
partition wall equipment room door. The partition wall can block some outside
dust. As shown in Figure 4-60.

Installation Install air conditioner vents so that the air does not blow directly
position of on equipment.
the air
conditioner

Other Avoid the proliferation of mildew, and keep out rodents (like
requirements mice).



Figure 4-60 Internal partition wall inside the equipment room


Equipment Room Environment


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 869
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Dust on devices may cause electrostatic discharge and result in poor contact for
connectors or metal connection points. This problem can shorten the life span of
devices and cause faults.
The equipment room must be free from explosive, conductive, magnetically-
permeable, and corrosive dust. Table 4-21 lists the requirement for dust
concentration in the equipment room.

Table 4-21 Requirements for dust particles in the equipment room
Mechanical active Unit Concentration
material

Dust particle Particle /m3 ≤ 3x 104
(no visible dust
accumulated on a
workbench in three
days)

Suspending dust mg/m3 ≤0.2

Precipitable dust mg/m2·h ≤1.5

NOTE
● Dust particle diameter ≥ 5 µm
● Suspending dust diameter ≤ 75 µm
● 75 µm ≤ precipitable dust diameter ≤ 150 µm



Take the following measures to meet the requirements:
● Use dustproof materials for ground, wall, and ceiling construction.
● Use screens on the door and windows facing outside. The outer windows
should be dust-proof.
● Clean the equipment room regularly and clean the air filter door monthly.
● Wear shoe covers and ESD clothing before entering the equipment room.

Requirements for Corrosive Gases

The room should be free from dusts and corrosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and
NH3. Table 4-22 lists the requirements for the corrosive gas concentration.

Table 4-22 Requirements for corrosive gas concentration
Chemical Unit Concentration
active material

3
SO2 mg/m ≤0.30

3
H2S mg/m ≤0.10

3
NOx mg/m ≤0.50

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 870
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Chemical Unit Concentration
active material

3
NH3 mg/m ≤1.00

3
Cl2 mg/m ≤0.10

HCl mg/m3 ≤0.10

HF mg/m3 ≤0.01

3
O3 mg/m ≤0.05



Take the following measures to meet the requirements:
● Avoid constructing the room near a place where the corrosive gas
concentration is high, such as a chemical plant.
● Ensure the air intake vent of the room is in the prevailing upwind direction
from any pollution source.
● Place batteries in different rooms.
● A professional service should monitor the corrosive gas conditions regularly.

Requirements for ESD Prevention

The absolute value of electrostatic voltage must be less than 1000 V.
Take the following measures to meet this requirement:
● Train operators about ESD prevention.
● Keep the correct humidity level in the equipment room to reduce the impact
of static electricity.
● Lay out an ESD floor in equipment rooms.
● Wear ESD shoes and clothing before entering equipment room.
● Use ESD tools, such as wrist straps, tweezers, and pullers.
● Ground all conductive materials in the room, including computer terminals.
Use ESD worktables.
● Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foam, and rubber) at least
30 cm (11.81 in.) away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.

Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room

All interference sources, inside or outside the equipment room, can cause
equipment problems with capacitive coupling, inductive coupling, electromagnetic
wave radiation, and common impedance (including grounding system) coupling.
Prevent the interference using these approaches:
● Take effective measures against electrical interference from the power supply
system.
● Do not use the working ground of the equipment as the same ground for
surge protection. Separate them as far as possible.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 871
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Keep the equipment far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar units,
and high-frequency and high-current equipment.
● Use electromagnetic shielding if necessary.

Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding

Table 4-23 lists the requirements for lightning proof grounding.

Table 4-23 Requirements for lightning proof grounding
Item Requirements

Capital ● Use reinforced concrete to construct the equipment room.
construction ● Install a lightning proof device like a lightning rod outside
the room.
● The lightning proof ground shares the same grounding
body with the protective ground of the room.

Power cables ● After the AC low-voltage power cables are led into the
leading in the room, install the surge protector for the power cables in the
equipment AC voltage stabilizer and the AC power distribution panel
room need to (box). Correctly ground the surge protector nearby.
be equipped ● After the DC power cable is led into the equipment room or
with a surge outdoor cabinet from outdoors or outside the cabinet,
protector install a power lightning protection device for the DC power
cable. The lightning protection device should be grounded
in proximity.
● For an equipment room in urban area, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of no less than 20 kA. For an equipment room that is built
in a suburb and subject to lightning strikes, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 60 kA. For an equipment room that is built in
a mountain area and subject to frequent lightning strikes,
or in a separate high-rise building in a city, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 100 kA.
● The ground cable of the surge protector should be no
longer than 1 m (3.28 ft).

Grounding for ● Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the -48 V
DC power DC power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power
distribution supply) with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The
total ground cable should meet the maximum load of the
equipment.
● The power equipment must have a DC working ground
cable, which can connect the power equipment to the
collective ground cable of the telecommunication site (or
the protective ground bar of the equipment room).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 872
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Equipotential ● Properly ground the devices and auxiliary devices in the
connection room such as mobile base station, transmission, switching
equipment, power supply equipment, and cable distribution
frame. Connect all PGND cables to the collective protective
ground bar. Connect all PGND cables in one equipment
room to one protective ground bar.
● Apply joint grounding to the working ground and protective
ground of devices, which means the two share one
grounding network.
● The cable tray, rack or shell, metal ventilation pipe, metal
door or window of the equipment should be grounded for
protection.

General ● Do not connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with
requirements the protective ground of any telecom equipment in the
for grounding equipment room.
● Do not install a fuse or switch on the ground cable.
● All ground cables should be as short as possible, and
arranged in a straight line.

Grounding ● The grounding resistance must be lower than 1 ohm.
resistance ● The upper end of the grounding body should be at least 0.7
m (2.30 ft) over the ground. In cold areas, bury the
grounding body below the frozen ground.
● Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure
effective grounding.

Routing of ● Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the
signal cable equipment room. All signal cables must be led into the site
underground.
● Use the cables with a metal jacket or place them into a
metal pipe if they come out/in the equipment room.
● Ground the idle lines inside the cable in the equipment
room.
● Signal cables should be deployed on internal walls. Do not
deploy outdoor aerial cables.
● Keep signal cables away from power cables and surge
protection devices.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 873
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Collective ● Use a ground ring or ground bar for the collective ground
ground cable cable.
● Do not use aluminum cables as ground cables. Adopt
measures to prevent electrification corrosion when
connecting different metal parts together.
● Use a copper busbar as the collective ground cable with a
cross-sectional area of no less than 120 mm2 (0.19 in.2), or
use the galvanized flat steel of the same resistance. Insulate
the collective ground cable from the reinforcing steel bars
of the building.

Grounding The grounding lead-in should be a maximum of 30 m (98.42
lead-in ft) long. Use the galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area
of 40 mm x 4 mm (1.58 in. x 0.158 in.) or 50 mm x 5 mm
(1.97 in. x 0.197 in.).



4.1.11.1.2 Requirements for Power Supply

Requirements for AC Power Supply

An AC power supply system consists of power mains, uninterruptible power
supplies (UPSs), and self-supplied electric generators, and should use a centralized
power supply mode. In addition to meeting the requirements of the server load,
the AC power supply must have a simple connection line, safe operation, flexible
scheduling, and easy maintenance.
The low-voltage power supply should be 3-phase, 5-wire mode or monophase 3-
wire mode. This AC power supply should be 110 V/220 V, with a frequency of 50
Hz.
The UPS should supply the same power and operate at the same phase as the
power mains. The switching time between the UPS and mains should be less than
10 ms; otherwise, the networking devices will reboot or reset.
For power distribution capacity in the equipment room, both the working current
and fault current of the devices should be considered. Ensure that independent AC
power supplies protect independent devices. Configure the current-carrying
capacity of the protection switch of the equipment room for more than that of the
devices.
Table 4-24 lists the voltage range of the AC power supply for the devices.

Table 4-24 Voltage range of AC power supply

Item Requirements

AC power capacity to -10% to +5% of the rated voltage
support the devices

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 874
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

AC power capacity to -15% to +10% of the rated voltage
support the power
modules and important
buildings

Frequency of alternating -4% to +4% of the rated value
current

Voltage wave shape sine Within 5% of the rated voltage
distortion


The automated electric generator must have a standard interface that supports
telecommunication protocols, remote telecommunication, monitoring, and control.
AC power cables should meet the following specifications:
● AC neutral should have a conductor with the same cross section as the phase
line.
● AC cables should have non-flammable insulation. The layout of AC cables
should comply with local regulations. Low-voltage power distribution rooms
should comply with local regulations.

Recommendations for AC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the AC power supply.
● If the voltage of the power mains that supply power directly to devices
exceeds the rated voltage by -10% to 5%, or exceeds the voltage range that
devices can support, a voltage regulating device or voltage stabilizing device
is required.
● If the mains do not supply power for the device directly, or if the mains
voltage exceeds the rated voltage by -15% to 10% or exceeds the input
voltage range of the DC power supply, a voltage regulating device or voltage
stabilizing device is required.
● A UPS or inverter power supply system is required to provide uninterrupted
AC power to support the telecommunication load.
● If abnormalities occur on the mains, telecommunication servers should be
equipped with a self-supplied electric generator to support the key
telecommunication load. The capacity should be not less than 150% to 200%
of the total uninterruptible power supply.
● Storage batteries are usually installed in a parallel connection of two groups.
UPS storage batteries are generally installed in one group. The redundancy
required for the UPS can rely on concatenation or parallel connection. When
an inverter or a UPS is used, the active inverter is determined by the
maximum power and a backup inverter is required.

Requirements for DC Power Supply

The equipment room should receive stable and reliable DC power. Deploy the
power equipment near the telecommunications equipment to make the DC feeder

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 875
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

as short as possible. To reduce power consumption and installation cost, the loop
voltage drop from the battery port to the equipment port should be less than 3.2
V.
● A large-scale enterprise can deploy an independent power supply system on
each floor to supply power to the telecommunications equipment room on
the respective floor.
● A medium-scale enterprise can use a power room and a battery room for
centralized power supply or use distributed power supply systems.
● A small-scale enterprise can deploy an integrated power supply system in its
equipment room but must take measures to prevent corrosive gases released
from batteries from eroding circuit boards of telecommunications equipment.
Table 4-25 lists the specifications for the DC power supply.

Table 4-25 Specifications for the DC power supply

Item Requirements

DC power Greater than 1.5 times the rated current
capacity to
support the
surge current

Regulated If the AC input voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of the
voltage rated value, and the load current is in the range of 5% to
precision 100% of the rated value, the output voltage of the rectifier
ranges from -46.0 V to -56.4 V, with the regulated voltage
precision less than or equal to 1%.

Overshoot Integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%
amplitude of
switch on/off

Peak noise ≤200 mV
voltage

Dynamic The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The overshoot is in the
response range of the integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%.



Recommendations for DC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the DC power supply.
● Use distributed power supply mode. Use multiple DC power supply systems
and put power equipment in multiple locations.
● Adopt a standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage to the
communications equipment within the required range.
● Improve reliability of the AC power supply system to reduce the necessary
capacity of storage batteries. For small offices, increase the capacity of
storage batteries if it is difficult to enhance reliability of the AC power supply
system.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 876
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● The total capacity of the high-frequency switching rectifier must satisfy the
power of the communication loading and battery charging. If there are 10 or
fewer active rectifier modules, configure one backup module. If there are
more than 10 active modules, configure one backup module for every 10
active modules.
● Install storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by
the duration for which the storage batteries must supply power. For most
offices, the batteries should be able to supply power for at least one hour.

4.1.11.2 On-site Cable Assembly and Installation

4.1.11.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions

Checking the Appearance of Cables
● If the cable jacket or insulation is visibly dirty, clean it before assembly.
● If the jacket or insulation of a cable has visible damage, irreparable scuffing,
or other defects, do not use the cable.
● If the shield layer of a cable is damaged, do not use the cable.
● If the cable jacket or insulation cracks after the cable is bent or twisted,
discard this cable and check whether other cables have the same problem. If
other cables have the same problem, replace these cables.

Checking the Appearance of Connectors
● Do not use connectors with visible defects, damage, rust, or scuffing.
● Do not use connectors if their shells or pins have exposed part or uneven
plating, or their pins are lost, broken, or bent.
● Do not use connectors that have dirt on their pins or in their jacks or if there
are conductors between pins or between pins and the shell.

Precautions for Assembly
● Use dedicated tools or tools delivered by Huawei and follow the methods
given here during assembly.
● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Take the following precautions when cutting or stripping cables:
– Make cables slightly longer than necessary.
– Coil cables longer than 2 m (6.56 ft) after cutting. Bind and fasten the
coils using bundling ropes. The inner diameters of the coils should be
larger than 20 times the outer diameters of the cables.
– When stripping the jackets of cables, avoid damaging the shield layers
(braid or aluminum foil), insulation, core conductors, and other jackets
that do not need to be stripped.
– After assembling cables, cut all visible cross sections of jackets to ensure
that the cross sections are arranged neatly.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 877
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

– Do not touch the core conductors of cables with your hands. Terminate
exposed conductors in a timely way after stripping off insulation so that
the surface of the conductors does not become oxidized.
● Take the following precautions when crimping and connecting cables or
connectors:
– The terminals and conductors should be connected tightly after they are
crimped. They should not be moved or turned.
– Cut all the exposed copper wires.
– Try to avoid a second crimping of sleeves.
– Keep all the conductors clean and aligned.

NO TE

The connectors, cables, and tools provided by different vendors may be different. The
figures in this document are for your reference only.

4.1.11.2.2 Assembling Power Cables

Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable

Background

Figure 4-61 shows the components of an OT terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-61 the components of an OT terminal and a power cable


A. Heat shrink B. Bare crimping C. Insulation D. Conductor
tubing terminal

Procedure
1. Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a length of
insulation coating C to expose the conductor D of length L1, as shown in
Figure 4-62. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 4-26.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 878
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-62 Stripping a power cable (OT terminal)


NO TICE

● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, the value of L1 is
1 mm (0.04 in.) to 2 mm (0.08 in.) greater than the value of L.

Table 4-26 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 (mm Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm
Sectional (in.)) Area of (in.))
Area of Conductor (mm2
Conductor (in.2))
(mm2 (in.2))

1 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 10 (0.015) 11 (0.43)

1.5 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)

2.5 (0.004) 7 (0.28) 25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)

4 (0.006) 8 (0.31) 35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)

6 (0.009) 9 (0.35) 50 (0.077) 16 (0.63)



NO TE

If you are proficient in assembling OT terminals and power cables, you can obtain the
value of L1 by comparing the part to be crimped with the power cable.
2. Put the heat-shrinkable (A) tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown
in Figure 4-63.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 879
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-63 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal


3. Put the OT terminal B onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the OT
terminal is in good contact with the insulation coating C, as shown in Figure
4-63.


NO TICE

After the conductor is fed into the OT terminal, the protruding part of the
conductor, or L2 in Figure 4-63, must not be longer than 2 mm (0.08 in.).

4. Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as
shown in Figure 4-64.

NO TE

The shapes of crimped parts may vary with the crimping dies.

Figure 4-64 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (OT terminal)


5. Push the heat shrink tubing (A) toward the connector until the tube covers
the crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in
Figure 4-65.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 880
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-65 Heating the heat shrink tubing (OT terminal)


NO TICE

Stop heating the shrink tubing when the connector is securely locked in the
shrink tubing. Do not heat the shrink tubing too long as this may damage the
insulation coating.

Assembling the JG2 Terminal and Power Cable

Bacnground
Figure 4-66 shows the components of a JG2 terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-66 Components of a JG2 terminal and a power cable


A. Heat shrink B. JG2 terminal C. Insulation layer D. Conductor of a
tubing of a power cable power cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 881
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
1. Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L,
as shown in Figure 4-67. The recommended values of L are listed in Table
4-27.

Figure 4-67 Stripping a power cable (JG2 terminal)


NO TICE

● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, you can adjust the
value of L as required

Table 4-27 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L
Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor Value of L (mm (in.))
(mm2 (in.2))

16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)

25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)

35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)

2. Put the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in
Figure 4-68.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 882
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-68 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal


3. Put the bare crimping terminal onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that
the bare crimping terminal is in good contact with the insulation of the power
cable, as shown in Figure 4-68.
4. Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as
shown in Figure 4-69.

Figure 4-69 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (JG2 terminal)


5. Push the heat shrink tubing toward the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure
4-70.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 883
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-70 Heating the heat shrink tubing (JG2 terminal)


Assembling the Cord End Terminal and Power Cable

Background
Figure 4-71 shows the components of a cord end terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-71 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable


A. Cord end terminal B. Insulation layer of a C. Conductor of a power
power cable cable

Procedure
1. Strip a part of the insulation layer to expose the cable conductor with a
length of L1, as shown in Figure 4-72. Determine the value of L1 based on
the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor. The recommended values of
L1 are listed in Table 4-28.


NO TICE

When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 884
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-72 Stripping a power cable (cord end terminal)


Table 4-28 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 (mm Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm
Sectional (in.)) Area of (in.))
Area of Conductor (mm2
Conductor (in.2))
(mm2 (in.2))

1 8 10 15

1.5 10 16 15

2.5 10 25 18

4 12 35 19

6 14 50 26

2. Put the cord end terminal onto the exposed conductor and ensure that the
conductor is aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in
Figure 4-73.


NO TICE

After the conductor is fed into the cord end terminal, the protruding part of
the conductor must not be longer than 1 mm (0.04 in.).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 885
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-73 Putting the cord end terminal onto the conductor


3. Select a proper cross-sectional area, and crimp the joint parts of the cord end
terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure 4-74.

Figure 4-74 Crimping the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the
conductor


4. Check the maximum width of the crimped terminal. Table 4-29 lists the
maximum width of a crimped terminal.

Table 4-29 Maximum width of a crimped terminal

Cross-Sectional Area of the Maximum Width of the Crimped
Terminal (mm2) Terminal — W1 (mm(in.))

0.25 1

0.5 1

1.0 1.5

1.5 1.5

2.5 2.4

4 3.1

6 4

10 5.3

16 6

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 886
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cross-Sectional Area of the Maximum Width of the Crimped
Terminal (mm2) Terminal — W1 (mm(in.))

25 8.7

35 10



4.1.11.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables


Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable

Background

Figure 4-75 shows the components of an RJ45 connector and a shielded Ethernet
cable.

Figure 4-75 Shielded RJ45 connector and cable


A. Jacket of B. Metal shell of C. Wire holder of D. Plug of
connector connector connector connector

E. Jacket of F. Shield layer of G. Twisted-pair -
Ethernet cable Ethernet cable wires

Procedure
1. Fit the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure
4-76.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 887
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-76 Fitting the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable


2. Remove a 30 mm (1.18 in.) long section of the jacket, cut off the nylon twine
inside the jacket, and cut a no more than 5 mm (0.20 in.) cleft in the jacket,
as shown in Figure 4-77.

Figure 4-77 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))


NO TICE

● When you remove a section of the jacket, do not damage the shield layer
of the twisted-pair cable.
● When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the
twisted-pair cable.

3. Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable. The shield layer is covered by
the metal shell, as shown in Figure 4-78.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 888
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-78 Fitting the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable


4. Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable until the shield layer is covered
completely. Along the edge of the metal shell, cut off the aluminum foil shield
layer and ensure that there is no surplus copper wire. The exposed twisted-
pair cable is about 20 mm (0.79 in.) long, as shown in Figure 4-79.

Figure 4-79 Removing the shield layer of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))


5. Lead the four pairs of twisted-pair wires through the wire holder, as shown in
Figure 4-80 and Figure 4-81. Ensure that the colored wires are in the correct
location in the cable.

Figure 4-80 Leading wires through the wire holder


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 889
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-81 Cable locations in a wire holder


6. Align the four pairs of cables in the holder, as shown in Figure 4-82. The
connections between the wires and the pins are shown in Figure 4-83 and
listed in Table 4-30.

Figure 4-82 Four pairs of cables on a wire holder


Figure 4-83 Connections between wires and pins


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 890
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-30 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through
cable as an example)
Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

1 White-Orange

2 Orange

3 White-Green

4 Blue

5 White-Blue

6 Green

7 White-Brown

8 Brown

7. Cut off the surplus cables along the lower edge of the wire holder, as shown
in Figure 4-84.

Figure 4-84 Cutting off surplus cables


8. Put the connector body onto the wire holder and turn the metal shell by 90°,
as shown in Figure 4-85.

Figure 4-85 Putting the connector body onto the wire holder


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 891
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

Ensure that the wire holder is in good contact with the connector body.
9. Push the metal shell toward the connector body until the wire holder and the
connector body are engaged completely. Crimp the connector, as shown in
Figure 4-86.

Figure 4-86 Crimping the connector


10. Push the jacket towards the metal shell until the metal shell is covered. This
completes the assembly of one end of the cable, as shown in Figure 4-87.

Figure 4-87 Pushing the metal shell


11. To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 10.

Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable

Background
Figure 4-88 shows the components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 892
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-88 Components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable


A. Plug of connector B. Jacket C. Twisted-pair wires

Procedure
1. Remove a 16-mm (0.63 in.) long section of the jacket, as shown in Figure
4-89.


NO TICE

When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the
twisted-pair cable.

Figure 4-89 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))


2. Align the four pairs of wires and cut the ends neatly, as shown in Figure 4-90.
The connections between the wires and the pins are listed in Table 4-31.

Figure 4-90 Connections between wires and pins (unit: mm (in.))


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 893
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-31 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through
cable as an example)

Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

1 White-Orange

2 Orange

3 White-Green

4 Blue

5 White-Blue

6 Green

7 White-Brown

8 Brown


3. Feed the cable into the plug, and crimp the connector, as shown in Figure
4-91.

NO TE

When inserting the cable, check from the side or bore of the plug to ensure that the
cable is completely seated in the plug.

Figure 4-91 Crimping the connector


4. To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips

Background
● To ensure proper contact between the crimped wires and the wire conductors,
the heights and sizes of the contact strips must be standard and the same.
● The contact strips must be parallel to each other, with an offset of less than ±
5°. The top margin of a strip must be parallel to the axis of the connector,
with an offset of less than ± 10°.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 894
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● To ensure conductivity, the surface of the contact strips must be clean.
● The contact strips must be in good contact with the RJ45 socket. The plastic
separators must remain intact and be aligned.
● The contact strip blade must extend beyond the ends of the wires. The ends
of the wires must be in contact with the edge of the RJ45. The distance
between them must be less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).

Procedure
1. Hold the crimped connector, with the front side facing you, and check
whether the contact strips are of the same height. The height should be 6.02
± 0.13 mm (0.237 ± 0.005). If a measuring tool is not available, you can
compare the connector with a standard connector. Figure 4-92 shows an
unqualified piece, and Figure 4-93 shows a qualified piece.

NO TE

All unqualified pieces must be crimped again.

Figure 4-92 Contact strips of different heights


Figure 4-93 Contact strips of the same height


2. Hold an RJ45 connector and turn it 45°. Observe the top edges of the metal
contact strips. Figure 4-94 shows an unqualified piece.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 895
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-94 Unparallel contact strips of different heights


3. Check whether the contact strips are clean. If they are not clean and the dirt
cannot be removed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 4-95 shows
an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-95 Dirt on a contract strip


4. Check whether the contact strips and the plastic separators are well aligned
and intact. If a separator is skewed and cannot be fixed, replace it with a new
RJ45 connector. Figure 4-96 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-96 Skewed plastic separators


5. Hold the connector with the side facing towards you, and check whether you
can see the cross-sections of the wires. Ensure that the ends of the wires are
in good contact with the edge of the RJ45, and that the contact strip blade
extends beyond the ends of the wires and is crimped with the wires. If not,
replace the connector. Figure 4-97 shows an unqualified piece.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 896
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-97 Wires not in good contact with the edge of the RJ45


Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables

Background
Huawei provides two types of Ethernet cables: straight-through cables and
crossover cables.
● Straight-through cables are connected in a one-to-one manner. They are used
to connect terminals such as a computer or switch to network devices. Table
Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector lists the
connections of core wires in a straight-through cable.

Table 4-32 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
Pin Pin

X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White-blue

X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

● Crossover cables are connected in a crossover manner. They are used to
connect terminals such as two computers or switches. Table Pin assignment
of the crossover cable connector lists the connections of core wires in a
crossover cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 897
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-33 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
Pin Pin

X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Orange

X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.2 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White-blue

X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown


Figure 4-98 shows the pins of an RJ45 connector.

Figure 4-98 Pins of an RJ45 connector


Procedure
1. Feed both connectors of the cable into the ports of the cable tester.
2. After the connectors are properly inserted, turn on the tester. If the indicators
from 1 to G turn on simultaneously, you can infer that the pins work normally
and the wires are correctly connected.

NO TE

Turn the switch to the S position to slow down lighting of the indicators so that you
can see the indicators more clearly, as shown in Figure 4-99.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 898
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-99 Testing the conduction and connections of wires


3. Gently shake the connector and repeat Step 2 to check whether the metal
contact strips are in good contact with the core wires and Ethernet ports, as
shown in Figure 4-100.

Figure 4-100 Checking the reliability


The procedure for testing a crossover cable is the same as that for testing a
straight-through cable except for the sequence in which the indicators turn
on, which depends on the wire connections of a crossover cable.

The Ethernet cable is qualified if the indicators turn on in the following
sequence:

At the master (left) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the
sequence of 1-8-G. At the slave (right) section of the tester, the indicators
turn on in the sequence of 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G.

If the indicators do not come on in this sequence, the Ethernet cable is
unqualified.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 899
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

If a tester is not available, you can use a multimeter to perform a simple test, as
shown in Figure 4-101.

Figure 4-101 Testing the connection of an Ethernet cable


4.1.11.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories

Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories

NO TE

The illustrations in this document may differ from actual situations, but the installation
methods are the same. For example, in this document, the adapters of cable connectors
have separate interfaces. In the actual situation, the adapters may have interfaces fixed on
equipment.

Tools

Use dedicated tools provided or specified by Huawei and follow the installation
procedure described here.

Bending Radius

Unless otherwise specified, bending radius (R) of cables or fibers must meet the
requirements listed in Table 4-34.

Table 4-34 Bending radius of cables or fibers

Cable or Fiber Bending Radius (R)

Ordinary cable In normal cases, R ≥ 2d. When the
cable is connected with a connector, R
≥ 5d.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 900
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable or Fiber Bending Radius (R)

Fiber Single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber: R ≥
10 mm (0.39 in.), bending angle > 90°
Multi-mode A1b optical fiber: 30 mm
(1.18 in.) ≤ R ≤ 40 mm (1.57 in.),
bending angle > 90°



NO TE

The letter d indicates the diameter of a cable or fiber.

Precautions for Installation
● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Do not insert a connector forcibly when the connector is blocked. Use a
dedicated tool to pull out the connector. Install the connector again after you
check that the pins are inserted properly.
● Before tightening screws on cable connectors, ensure that the connectors are
properly connected to their adapters. Tighten the screw with appropriate force
using a flat-head or Phillips screwdriver instead of bare hands or an electric
screwdriver. If the screw cannot be screwed into the tapped hole, determine
the reason and try again. Do not apply too much force, or the screw or
adapter may be damaged.
● When removing densely aligned cables or fiber connectors, use dedicated
pliers such as cable-pulling pliers and fiber-pulling pliers.
● Do not twist, bend, stretch, or extrude fibers during installation.
● Cover the idle fiber connectors with dust caps. Remove the dust caps before
using the fiber connectors.

Requirements for Cable Routing
● To protect cables, remove the burrs in the cable through-holes or install
protective rings in the holes.
● To ease the connection and to avoid stress, keep cable joints slack. After
connecting multiple cables to a connector that has multiple interfaces, keep
the cables slack to avoid generating stress.
● Bind or clean cables gently because cable distortion affects signal quality.
● Keep cables away from moveable components such as doors.
● Sharp objects must not touch cable wiring to prevent damage to cables.
● To protect power cables, route power cables of the active and standby power
modules separately.

Installing Power Adapters


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 901
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

?.1. Installing the OT Terminal
This section describes how to install OT terminals on the terminals. You can install
one OT terminal or two OT terminals on one terminal.

Procedure
● Install an OT terminal.
a. Align the hole of the OT terminal (conductor upward) with a connecting
hole, as shown in Figure 4-102.

Figure 4-102 Aligning the OT terminal with a connecting hole


NO TE

When you install an OT terminal, the crimping sleeve is installed as shown in
Figure 4-103, where A is correct and B is incorrect.

Figure 4-103 Installing an OT terminal, showing the orientation of
crimping sleeve


b. Place the spring washer and flat washer in turn, mount a matching screw,
and fasten it clockwise, as shown in Figure 4-104.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 902
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-104 Installing two terminals back to back


NO TICE

Ensure that the OT terminal is not in contact with other terminals or
metal components.

c. Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown
in Figure 4-105.

Figure 4-105 Installed OT terminal


● Install two OT terminals on a post.
Before you install two OT terminals on a post, ensure that the two terminals
can be installed on the post and that the electrical connecting pieces have a
large contact area. Two OT terminals can be installed using any of these
methods:
– Bend the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle, as shown in
Figure 4-106.
– Cross the two terminals, as shown in Figure 4-107.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 903
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-106 Bending the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle


Figure 4-107 Crossing two terminals


NO TICE

If the two terminals are different sizes, place the smaller one above the bigger
one. A maximum of two terminals can be installed on a post.

● To remove an OT terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.

?.2. Installing a DC Power Connector (Straight Female, 2.5 mm²)

Prerequisites

The fuse capacity of the external power supply meets requirements.

Background

NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C/M1D/M1D-B supports 2.5 mm2 cable.

NO TE

The colors and structures of cables may vary in different countries and regions. If cables are
purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 904
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NetEngine 8000 M1C/M1D/M1D-B Procedure
1. Take the power connector out of the packaging bag, and strip a power cable
at a length in line with the value marked on the silkscreen attached to the
connector.


CA UTION

To avoid damage to copper wires when a length of 8 mm power cable is
stripped, do not apply too much force when peeling insulation coating off the
wires.

2. Use a screwdriver to push sliding blocks until the in-position marks are
completely exposed.


3. When installing a DC power connector on the NetEngine 8000 M1C/M1D,
insert the NEG(-) wires (blue, blue, or gray) into the hole marked a negative
sign and the RTN(+) wires (black, red, or blue) into the hole marked a
positive sign. When the wires touch the end of the holes, use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the M2.5 screws with a torque of 0.45 N m.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 905
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

DANGER

Inserting the conducting wires to wrong holes may cause damage to the
device. Verify that the positive and negative wires are inserted in the correct
holes before powering on the device.

4. Push back the sliding blocks until they are in position. Then, pull each wire
slightly to check whether it is securely connected. If a cable slides outward or
the wires of a cable are exposed outside the hole for the cable, remove the
cable, cut the split wires, strip a power cable, and reinstall the cable.


NetEngine 8000 M1A Procedure
1. Take the power connector out of the packaging bag, and strip a power cable
at a length in line with the value marked on the silkscreen attached to the
connector.

CA UTION

To avoid damage to copper wires when a length of 8 mm power cable is
stripped, do not apply too much force when peeling insulation coating off the
wires.

2. Put the cord end terminal onto the exposed conductor and ensure that the
conductor is aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 906
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

3. Crimp the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the cable conductor.


4. When installing a DC power connector on the NetEngine 8000 M1A Insert the
NEG(-) wires (blue) into the hole marked a negative sign ("1-" and "2-") and
the RTN(+) wires (black/brown) into the hole marked a positive sign ("1+"
and "2+"). When the wires touch the end of the holes, slide the cover on the
top of the power connector to expose M4 screws and then use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the M2.5 screws, with a torque of 0.45 N m.


DANGER

Inserting the conducting wires to wrong holes may cause damage to the
device. Verify that the positive and negative wires are inserted in the correct
holes before powering on the device.

5. Pull each wire slightly to check whether it is securely connected. If a cable
slides outward or the wires of a cable are exposed outside the hole for the
cable, remove the cable, cut the split wires, strip a power cable, and reinstall
the cable.

4.1.11.2.5 Installing Ethernet Adapters

Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure
1. Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the
female connector, as shown in Figure 4-108.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 907
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-108 Holding the male and female shielded connectors


2. Insert the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure
4-109.

Figure 4-109 Feeding the male shielded connector into the female shielded
connector


3. When you hear a click, the cable connector is completely inserted in the port.
(The clip on the cable connector pops up to fix the connector in the port.) Pull
the connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in
Figure 4-110.

Figure 4-110 Installed shielded Ethernet connector


4. To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-111.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 908
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-111 Removing a shielded Ethernet connector


Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure
1. Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the
female connector, as shown in Figure 4-112.

Figure 4-112 Holding the male and female unshielded connectors


2. Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure
4-113.

Figure 4-113 Feeding the male connector into the female unshielded
connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 909
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

3. A crisp click indicates that the connector is locked by the locking key. Pull the
connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected. Figure 4-114
shows an installed Ethernet connector.

Figure 4-114 Installed unshielded Ethernet connector


4. To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-115.

Figure 4-115 Removing an unshielded Ethernet connector


4.1.11.2.6 Installing Fiber Connectors

NO TE

● After you remove the dustproof cap, ensure that the fiber pins are clean and install
them as soon as possible.
● When you disassemble fiber connectors, you must use a dedicated tool if the connectors
are densely installed. Do not pull fiber protection pipes to remove fiber connectors.

Installing an FC Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the FC connector and store it for future use.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 910
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-116.

Figure 4-116 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Align the male connector with the female connector and gently push the
male connector until it is completely seated in the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-117.

Figure 4-117 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


4. Fasten the locking nut clockwise and ensure that the connector is securely
installed, as shown in Figure 4-118.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 911
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-118 Fastening the locking nut


5. To disassemble an FC fiber connector, loosen the locking nut
counterclockwise, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure
4-119.

Figure 4-119 Disassembling an FC fiber connector


Installing an LC Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the LC fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-120.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 912
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-120 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Align the male connector with the fiber adapter and gently push the male
connector until it is completely seated in the fiber connector, as shown in
Figure 4-121.

Figure 4-121 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


4. A clicking sound indicates that the male connector is locked, as shown in
Figure 4-122.

Figure 4-122 Installed LC connector


5. To disassemble an LC fiber connector, press the locking nut to release the
locking clips from the bore, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in
Figure 4-123.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 913
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-123 Disassembling an LC fiber connector


Installing an SC Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the SC fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-124.

Figure 4-124 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Feed the fiber connector into the female connector, with your fingers holding
the shell of the fiber connector (not the pigtail). When you hear a click, the
fiber connector is secured by the clips (internal parts, not illustrated in the
figure). Pull the fiber connector gently. If the connector does not loosen, the
installation is complete. As shown in Figure 4-125.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 914
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-125 Installed SC fiber connector


4. To disassemble an SC fiber connector, hold the shell of the connector (do not
hold the fiber) and gently pull the connector in the direction vertical to the
adapter. Unlock the male connector, and then separate it from the shell, as
shown in Figure 4-126.

Figure 4-126 Disassembling an SC fiber connector


NO TICE

During operation, pinch the housing instead of the tail.

Installing an MTRJ Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the MTRJ fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector,
make sure that the center PINs of the two connectors are on the same axis,
and the pins and card slots are in the same direction, as shown in Figure
4-127.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 915
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-127 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Align the fiber adapter along the axis and gently push the fiber plug, as
shown in Figure 4-128.

Figure 4-128 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


4. When you hear a "click", it has been plugged into place. At this time, the
hook has popped up to lock the fiber plug. Pull gently without loosening, as
shown in Figure 4-129.

Figure 4-129 Installed MTRJ fiber connector


5. When disassembling, lightly press the button of the optical fiber plug to
disengage the hook from the slot, and gently pull the optical fiber plug
housing along the axis, and the disassembly is completed, as shown in Figure
4-130.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 916
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-130 Disassembling a MTRJ fiber connector


Installing an MPO Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the MPO fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-131.

Figure 4-131 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Hold the shell labeled "PUSH" and feed the male connector into the female
connector until you hear a clicking sound. The male and female connectors
are securely installed, as shown in Figure 4-132.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 917
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-132 Installed MPO fiber connector


4. To disassemble an MPO fiber connector, hold the shell labeled "PULL" and
remove the male connector, as shown in Figure 4-133.

Figure 4-133 Disassembling an MPO fiber connector


4.1.11.2.7 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool

Procedure
1. Hold the handles of a pair of COAX crimping tools. Loosen the two fastening
screws counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 4-134.

Figure 4-134 Loosening two fastening screws


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 918
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools to open the self-locking
mechanism. The jaw of the COAX crimping tools opens automatically, as
shown in Figure 4-135.

Figure 4-135 Pliers jaw opening automatically


3. Remove the mold from the COAX crimping tools, as shown in Figure 4-136.

Figure 4-136 Removing the mold from the COAX crimping tools


4. Place the mold to be installed into the jaw of the COAX crimping tools and
align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-137.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 919
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-137 Installing a new mold in the COAX crimping tool


NO TICE

Keep the short side of the mold inwards and the long side outwards, with the
teeth of the mold aligning from the larger size to the smaller size.

5. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools tightly to match the mold and
the jaw completely. Align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-138.

Figure 4-138 Aligning the screw holes


6. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools with one hand. Tighten the two
fastening screws clockwise. Figure 4-139 and Figure 4-140 shows the mold
installed in the COAX crimping tool.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 920
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-139 Mold installed in the COAX crimping tool


Figure 4-140 An installed mold


4.1.11.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications

4.1.11.3.1 General Grounding Specifications

Table 4-35 shows the general grounding specifications.

Table 4-35 General grounding specifications
No. Description

1 The working ground and protective ground, including the shielded
ground and the lightning-proof ground of the cable distribution frame
should share the same grounding conductor.

2 The cable trays, shells, metal ventilation pipes, metal doors and windows
in the equipment room should be grounded for protection.

3 The metal parts of the equipment which are electrically floating in
normal conditions should be grounded for protection.

4 The ground cable must be connected securely to the protective ground
bar of the equipment room.

5 Do not use other equipment as part of the ground cable or electrical
connection.



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 921
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.11.3.2 Grounding Specifications for Equipment Room

The grounding resistance of a comprehensive communication building should be
less than or equal to one ohm. The grounding resistance of an ordinary
communication office should be less than five ohms. The grounding resistance in
an area where the earth resistance rate is high should be less than 10 ohms.

4.1.11.3.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices

Table 4-36 lists the equipment grounding specifications.

Table 4-36 Equipment Grounding Specifications

No. Description

1 All communication devices and auxiliary devices (such as mobile base
stations, transmission and switching devices, power supply devices) in
the equipment room should be grounded for protection. Connect all
protective ground for various devices jointly to a general ground bar, and
then to the same protective ground bar in the room together with the
protective ground (PGND) of the device.

2 The PGND of the equipment is shorted to the copper ground bar
provided by the customer. The short-circuiting cable used should be a
yellow-green plastic insulated cable with a copper core and a cross-
sectional area greater than 25 sq. mm (0.039 sq. in.).

3 There are grounding terminals and grounding lugs at the lower part of
the front door, rear door and side panel of the cabinet, connected to the
grounding terminals of the cabinet framework through connection
cables with cross-sectional area of no less than 1.6 sq. mm (0.002 sq.
in.).

4 Ensure that all metal components of the cabinet conduct well. No
insulating coating should be sprayed on the connection part of the metal
components.

5 Connect the cabinets in the same row by fastening captive screws and
gaskets on the top of the cabinets. Do not spray any coating into a
rectangular area measuring 30 mm x 50 mm (1.18 in. x 1.97 in.) around
the connection hole for a captive bolt. Measures to prevent rust and
corrosion must be taken for this area. Zinc electroplating with iridescent
yellow chromate conversion coating should be applied to the gasket and
nut to ensure good electrical contact.

6 When combining cabinets of the same type, short-circuiting cables are
required to connect the ground busbars (if any) of the cabinets. The
cross-sectional area of the short-circuiting cable is 6 sq. mm (0.009 sq.
in.) and is no more than 300 mm (11.8 in.) long. Connect the two ends
of the short-circuiting cable to the ground busbar terminals of
neighboring cabinets and fix them firmly.



Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 922
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.11.3.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply

Table 4-37 shows the grounding specifications for communication power supplies.

Table 4-37 Grounding specifications for communication power supplies

No. Description

1 The inlet for the AC power cable at the equipment room should be
equipped with a surge protection device (C-level) with a nominal
discharge current no less than 20 kA.

2 The protective ground for the power supply and that for communication
equipment share the same grounding conductor. If the power supply and
the equipment are in the same equipment room, use the same
protective ground bar for them if possible.

3 Use a surge protection circuit on the AC power interface.

4 The positive of the -48 V DC power supply or negative pole of the 24 V
DC power supply should be grounded at the output of the DC power
supply.

5 The working ground and protective ground of the DC power supply
equipment should use the same grounding conductor with the protective
ground of the switching equipment. If the power supply and equipment
are in the same equipment room, use the same protection ground bar
for them if possible.

6 Add surge protection on the DC power interface.

7 You are not advised to use two telecom power systems to supply power
to the equipment. If two telecom power systems are required in special
scenarios, install them in the same equipment room and use the same
ground bar. The recommended ground cable length is less than 3 m.



4.1.11.3.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables

Table 4-38 lists the grounding specifications for signal cables.

Table 4-38 Grounding specifications for signal cables

No. Description

1 Equip the cable outdoors with a metal jacket, well grounded at both
ends, or connect the ends of the metal jacket to the protective ground
bar of the equipment room. For cables inside the equipment room,
install surge protection devices at the interface to the equipment. The
PGND cable for the surge protection devices should be as short as
possible.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 923
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Description

2 The incoming and outgoing signal cables to and from the office and
unused wires inside the cable should be grounded for protection.

3 The Tone & Data Access (TDA) cable must pass through the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) with surge protective device (SPD) when
going out of the office. The cable's shield layer should be connected to
the protective ground of the MDF. The MDF should use the same
grounding conductor as the cabinet.

4 Do not route signal cables overhead.



4.1.11.3.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables

Table 4-39 shows the specifications for the ground cable.

Table 4-39 Specifications for laying out ground cables

No. Description

1 The grounding wire should not run parallel to or twist around the signal
cable.

2 Bury ground underground or arrange them indoors. Do not route ground
cables overhead.

3 Do not connect two cables together to extend the PGND cable, or add
any switches or fuses.

4 The PGND cable should be an alternating yellow and green plastic
insulated one with a copper core.

5 The neutral line of the AC power cable cannot be connected to the
protective ground of transmission and communication equipment in the
equipment room.

6 A PGND cable should be as short as possible, with a length of no more
than 45 m (147.64 ft).



4.1.11.4 Engineering Labels for Cables

An engineering label serves as an identifier for on-site installation and
maintenance after the installation. Labels on the cables facilitate correct and
orderly connection of cables, and easy maintenance after installation.

Engineering labels are specialized for power cables and signal cables:

● Signal cables include network cables, optical fibers, and user cables.
● Power cables include the AC power cables and DC power cables.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 924
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

Fill in labels according to specified requirements to keep consistency of labels in the
equipment room. Make a relevant statement in the self-check report.

4.1.11.4.1 Introduction to Labels

Label Materials

Features:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
● Color: chalk white
● Material: polyester (PET)
● Ambient temperature: -29°C (-20.2°F) to +149°C (300.2°F)
● Printed by a laser printer and written with a marker
● Pass UL and CSA authentication

Type and Structure

Label for Signal Cables
The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure
4-141.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 925
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-141 Label for signal cable


To specify more clearly the position of a cable, use the dividing lines on the label.
For example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the chassis
number, and another one between the chassis number and the slot number. Each
dividing line is light blue (Pantone 656c) and 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm (0.06 in. x 0.02
in.).
The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixed to the cable, and its size is
1 mm x 2 mm (0.04 in. x 0.08 in.).
The word "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label
is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.

Power Cable Label
The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the
cable ties that are attached to the cable. The identification plate has an embossed
area 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm (0.008 in. x 0.02 in.) around (symmetric on both sides), and
the area in the middle is for affixing the label, as shown in Figure 4-142.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 926
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-142 Power Cable Label


Label Printing

The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for
the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.

Template for Printing
The label template "Label of Contents and Printing Template" is a must for label
printout, which is available through the following two ways:

● Log in to the technical support website at https://support.huawei.com to
download the template. Here is the path: Cable Engineering Label Printing
Template.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 927
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Obtain the template from Huawei local office.
The template is made in Word. Follow these instructions to use the template:
● You can modify the contents of the template. Do not change settings of
centered characters, direction, and fonts.
● If many characters need to be filled in, decrease the font size, but make sure
that the printouts are clear and legible.

Merging Cells in the Template
To merge two or more cells, do as follows:
1. Select Edit/Select All.
2. Select Format/Borders and Shading/Borders. Select Box tab and click OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select cells to be merged and select the Table/Merge
Cells.

Requirements on the Printer
To print labels, use a laser jet printer of any model. Before printing labels, set up
the page and try printing.
1. Try printing on ordinary paper with both sides blank. Place the blank paper
over the whole page of the label paper, and check whether the page setup
conforms to the label layout.
2. Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have
been set correctly.
– If the printout conforms to the sheet of labels, print the labels on the
label paper.
– If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try printing
again until the correct printout is produced.
The method for adjusting the page setup is as follows.
1. Select File/Page Setup.
2. Select Layout and set Header and Footer as 0.
3. Select the Margins tab page. Select Left for Gutter Position and adjust the
values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right.

NO TE

If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 4-143 appears before printing, click Ignore
to continue the printing.

Figure 4-143 Warning prompt before printing


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 928
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

After the page setup has been made correctly, save it for future use. This page
setup is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.

Requirements for Feeding the Printer

The label paper consists of two layers and has undergone multiple processing
procedures such as printing and cutting. No matter what model of printer you use,
feed in the labels one page at a time. To avoid jamming the labels, never use the
auto-feed mode.

Feed in the label paper in the correct direction to ensure that the text is printed in
a correct position.

Requirements for the Printed Label

Make sure that the printed labels satisfy the following requirements:

● All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the
backing layer of the label page.
● Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout,
the dividing lines and the word "TO:" should not be covered by printed
characters.
● When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the word "TO:" when printing the text. Use the space bar to move
the text to the next line.

Writing Labels

Writing Tools

To make sure the printouts are clear and legible, use black markers instead of
ball-point pens to write the labels.

If no marker is available, black ball-point pens are allowed, although not
recommended. Compared with ball-point pens, waterproof markers are better.
When writing with a ball-point pen, do not leave the oil on the label, which may
contaminate the label and blur the words.

NO TE

The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.

Font

For the sake of legibility, use standard block letters and numbers as shown in
Table 4-40.

Table 4-40 Standard typeface for handwriting

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 A B C D E F G H

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 929
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z


Determine the size of characters based on the number of letters or digits and
ensure that the characters are distinct and tidy.
Placement of text on a label is shown in Figure 4-144.

Figure 4-144 Placement of text on a label


Attaching Labels

After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the page and attach it to
the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. The methods for
attaching labels are described in the following sections.

Label for Signal Cables
● Choose the place to attach labels.
The label is attached 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connector on a signal cable. In
special cases (for example, to avoid cable bending or affecting other cables),
other positions are allowed to attach the labels. The rectangular part with
text is attached facing right or downward, as shown in Figure 4-145. The
details are as follows:
– The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
– The identification card should be downward when you lay out the cable
horizontally.

Figure 4-145 Text area of the label


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 930
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Procedure for attaching labels
Figure 4-146 shows the methods and procedures for attaching labels.

Figure 4-146 Label for signal cables


Power Cable Label
Remove the label from the backing page, and attach it to the identification plate
on the cable tie. The label should be attached to the rectangular flute on the
identification plate, and attached to only one side of the identification plate. In an
equipment room, all labels should be attached in the same way. The cable ties are
bundled at 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in
special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bound on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the
finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or
on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling, as shown in Figure 4-147. The
details are as follows:
● The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
● The identification card is on the top of the cable in horizontal cabling. Make
sure that the label is facing out.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 931
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-147 Binding the label for the power cable


Contents of Engineering Labels

Contents of Labels for Power Cables

Labels for power cables are affixed on only one side of the identification plates.
On the labels, there is information (the part after the word "TO:") about the
location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control
cabinet, distribution box or power socket.

Contents of Labels for Signal Cables

The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the
location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. Figure 4-148 shows the
information on both sides of the labels affixed to the signal cables.

● Area 1 contains the location information of the local end of the cable.
● Area 2 (with the word "TO:") contains the location information of the
opposite end of the cable.
● Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.

Figure 4-148 Printed parts on the label for signal cables


Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the
right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the
location information of the opposite end; and the other side carries the location
information of the local end.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 932
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

In other words, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the
information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable.

Precautions for Using Engineering Labels

When using labels, pay attention to the following points:

● When printing, writing, or attaching labels, keep the labels clean.
● Since the label paper is made of moistureproof material, ink-jet printers and
ink pens cannot be used to print and write labels.
● Labels should be attached neatly. New-type labels are L-shaped. If they are
pasted at incorrect locations or in the incorrect direction, the appearance of
the device is affected.
● Power cable ties should be attached in the same positions on power cables,
with identification plates on the same side.
● The positions of "up", "down", "left" or "right" are all based on the viewpoint
of the engineering person who is working on the label.

4.1.11.4.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers

These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on
the boards in a chassis, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for
optical cables:

● One is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices.
● The other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices

Meaning of the Label

Table 4-41 lists information on both sides of the labels affixed to the optical fibers
that connect two devices.

Table 4-41 Information on labels affixed to the fibers between two devices

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
R/T number numbered from A to Z.
N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
numbered from 01 to 99.
For example, A01 is the cabinet in row A and
column 01.

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,
number for example, 01.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 933
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Example

C: physical Numbered in top-down and left-right order
slot number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot
at the top left of the chassis.

D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,
interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.

R: Receiving -
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface



Example of the Label
Figure 4-149 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.

Figure 4-149 Sample label on an optical fiber between two devices


The meaning of the label is listed in Figure 4-149.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected
to the optical receiving interface 01 in slot 5, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row
A, column 01 in the machine room.
● "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected with optical transmitting interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 01 in the
cabinet in row G, column 01 in the machine room.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF

Meaning of the Labels
Table 4-42 shows information on both sides of labels attached to an optical fiber
between a device and an optical distribution frame (ODF).

Table 4-42 Information on labels affixed to a fiber between a device and an ODF

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet For example, A01.
R/T number

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 934
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Example

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,
number for example, 01.

C: physical slot Numbered in top-down and left-right order
number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first
slot at the top left of the chassis.

D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,
interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.

R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface

ODF-MN-B- MN: row M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
C-R/T number and numbered from A to Z.
column N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
number of an numbered from 01 to 99.
ODF
For example, G01 is the ODF of row G and
column 01.

B: row number Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.
of the terminal
device

C: column
number of the
terminal
device

R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface


Example of the Label
Figure 4-150 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 935
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-150 Sample label on an optical fiber between the device and the ODF


Meaning of the label in Figure 4-150:

● "ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is
connected to the optical receiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF
in row G, column 01 in the machine room.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected to optical receiving interface 1 in slot 05, chassis 01 in the cabinet
in row A, column 01 in the machine room.

4.1.11.4.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables

Applicable Ranges

The labels can be applied to Ethernet cables.

Label Content

Table 4-43 shows the information on both sides of the labels affixed to Ethernet
cables.

You can also decide the label content based on the actual environment. If the
device is not installed in the cabinet, for example, you can remove the cabinet
number.

Table 4-43 Information on the Ethernet cables

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two
number digits, for example, 01.

C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

D: network port Numbered in top-down and left-right orders.
number For example, 01.

MN-Z MN: cabinet For example, B02 is the second cabinet in
number row B.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 936
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Example

Z: Location Fill in the location number of the terminal
number device on site. If the cable is connected to a
device in a cabinet, specify the serial
numbers of the cabinet, the chassis, and the
Ethernet interface of the device. For example,
B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the
Network Management Station (NMS),
specify the specific location of the NMS.


The contents of the labels for network cables connecting hubs and devices or
agents and the network cables for other purposes should be specified according to
actual connections. The details are as follows:
● For a network cable connecting a hub and device, the label on the hub end
should indicate the numbers of the chassis and cabinet where the hub resides,
and the serial number on the hub. The label on the device end should indicate
the number of the chassis and cabinet where the device is located. If the
device is a standalone device, provide the specific position of the device.
● For a network cable connecting a hub and an agent or terminal, the label on
the agent or terminal end should contain the serial number of the network
interface. The definitions of the cabinet number and chassis number are the
same as those described in Table 1-28.
● If the hub is a standalone device without a cabinet or chassis, the label should
contain specific location information that identifies the hub.
The serial number on the hub, the network interface number of the agent or
terminal, and the location of the standalone device should be specified according
to actual connections.

Label Example
Figure 4-151 shows a sample label on an Ethernet cable.

Figure 4-151 Sample label on an Ethernet cable


Meaning of the label in Figure 4-151:
● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that one end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01
in the equipment room.
● "B02-03-01" indicates that another end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in chassis 03 of the cabinet on row B, column 02 in the
equipment room. No slot number is given.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 937
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.11.4.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables

Attach labels to both ends of a user cable to indicate the locations of the cable on
the device and main distribution frame (MDF).

Meaning of the Engineering Labels for User Cables
Table 4-44 shows the contents of the labels.

Table 4-44 Contents of the engineering labels for user cables

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number

B: frame Numbered in the bottom-up order with two
number digits, for example, 03.

C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

D: cable Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

MDF-MN-B-C MN: row M: The rows of cabinets from front to back
number and are numbered from A to Z. N: The columns of
column number cabinets from left to right are numbered
of the MDF from 01 to 99. For example, G01 is the MDF
of Row G and Column 01.

B: row number Ranges from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.
of the terminal
device

C: column
number of the
terminal device



Example of the Label
Figure 4-152 shows a sample label on a user cable.

Figure 4-152 Sample label on a user cable


The meaning of the label in Figure 4-152 is as follows:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 938
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the user cable is connected to
port 1 in slot 1, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the
equipment room.
● "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the user cable is
connected to the terminal in row 01, column 01 of the MDF in row G, column
01 in the equipment room.

4.1.11.4.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables

Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables

These labels are affixed to the DC power cables that provide power supply for
cabinets, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. Here, the DC power cables
also include power cables and PGND cables.

The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates
on cable ties. For details of the labels, see Table 4-45.

Table 4-45 Contents of the label

Content Meaning

MN(BC)- MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.
B--48Vn B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two
digits, for example, 01.
MN(BC)-B-
BGND n: power socket number, numbered as 1 to 3 in the bottom-
up and left-to-right orders.
MN(BC)-B- On the loaded cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the
PGND cabinet.
On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column
number of the power distribution equipment like a control
cabinet and distribution box, and BC identifies the row and
column number of the -48 V connector. If there is no row
number or column number, or the connector can be identified
without them, BC can be omitted. It is unnecessary to identify
the row and column number for BGND and PGND.



The label only carries location information about the destination direction of the
power cable whereas information about the local end is unnecessary. That is, the
label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control
cabinet, or the distribution box. Table 1-30 lists the information on two -48 V
power supplies on the label. The information on other DC voltages, such as 24 V
and 60 V should be given in similar methods.

Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable
ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should
face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same
direction. For details, see Figure 4-153.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 939
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-153 Example of the labels for DC power cables


The meaning of the label in Figure 4-153 is as follows:
● On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01/B08--48V2" on the cable indicates
that the cable is -48 V DC supply, which is from the eighth connector in row B
of -48 V bus bar in the cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment
room.
● On the distribution box side, the label "B03--48V2" indicates that the cable is
-48 V DC supply, connected to DC power socket 2 in row B, column 03 in the
equipment room.

NO TE

In the power distribution box or the first power cabinet of a row in a transmission
equipment room, every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric
identification. For example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8")
is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are short-
circuited. Therefore, it makes no difference which terminal is connected to them. It
is only necessary to give the row and column of the power distribution box,
instead of giving the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper
bar. For example, if the label on the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means
that the power cable is a BGND that connects BGND copper bar in the power
distribution box in row A, column 01 in the machine room. Information on the
labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.

4.2 NetEngine 8000 M6 Hardware installation and
maintenance Guide

4.2.1 Hardware Installation and Usage Precautions

Following All Safety Precautions
● To ensure human and device security, comply with all the safety precautions
marked on the device and instructed in this document before any operation.
The CAUTION, WARNING, and NOTE items in this document do not cover all
the safety precautions that must be obeyed. They are supplements to the
safety precautions.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 940
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● When operating Huawei products and equipment, comply with safety
precautions and special safety instructions relevant to the corresponding
equipment provided by Huawei. The safety precautions in this document are
only some that Huawei can predict. Huawei is not liable for any consequence
that results from violation of universal regulations for safety operations and
safety codes on design, production, and equipment use.

Complying with Local Rules and Regulations

When operating a device, comply with local laws and regulations.

Installation Personnel Requirement

Installation and maintenance personnel must be trained to perform operations
correctly and safely.

Personnel Safety
● A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct
human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through
damp objects can be fatal.
● Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or
electric shock, or both.
● Ground a device before powering it on; otherwise, the human body and the
device are exposed to danger.
● Before performing operations on the power supply facilities, power off these
facilities.
● Do not look into the optical port without eye protection when handling
optical fibers.
● To protect human respiratory organs and human eyes from dust, take
protective measures when drilling holes.
● When working at heights, prevent objects from falling down.

Device Security
● Keep an unpacked device upright and handle it with care when carrying it or
installing it into a cabinet.
● Use a ladder to lay out cables. Do not trample on a device.
● Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves when handling circuit boards.
Otherwise, the static electricity discharged from the human body may
damage the electrostatic sensitive components, such as large-scale integrated
circuits (LSIs) on the circuit board.
● Before operating the device, check the electrical connection of the device, and
ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Chassis

Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots to ensure the device functions
correctly. For example, they ensure electromagnetic compatibility, prevent the
ingress of dust or foreign objects, and maintain proper airflow for heat dissipation.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 941
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Power Module
● After a power module enters the protection state, it cannot supply power. If
the power module cannot automatically resume power supply after the
triggering condition of the protection state is removed, remove the power
module from the chassis and reinstall it at least 30s later. The power module
then can work properly.
● When a power module enters overtemperature protection state, take
measures to lower the temperature of the chassis. The power module can
automatically resume power supply when the temperature falls within the
normal range.

Card
● Before installing cards on a device, make sure that the device and cards are all
free from water drips.
● When installing a card, gently push the card along the guide rails, and be
careful not to crash the card connector. Distorted card connector will cause
pins on the opposite card connector or backplane connector to bend. If the
connector of a card has collided with the slot or other objects, ask Huawei
professionals whether the card can still be installed. Installing a card with
distorted connector may cause damage to the device.
● The RST button on an is used to manually reset the Exercise caution when
using this button.
– If the device has only one , pressing this button will cause the device to
restart.
– If the device has two s:

▪ Pressing the reset button on the active will trigger an active/standby
switchover.

▪ Pressing the reset button on the standby will reset the standby ,
which does not affect running of the system.

Cable
● To protect personal safety, do not install power cables when the power is on.
Before connecting power cables, make sure that the power switches of the
external power supply system and the device are all in OFF position.
● Before connecting signal cables, take ESD protection measures, for example,
wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap.
● Before connecting Ethernet cables, use an Ethernet cable tester to test cable
connectivity.
● Both ends of an idle high-speed cable must be covered by an ESD cap.
● The bend radius of high-speed cables must be larger than the minimum bend
radius. Overbending high-speed cables may damage wires in the cables.
● Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical
modules or optical fibers without eye protection.
● Cover idle optical ports and optical modules with dust plugs and cover idle
optical fibers with dust caps.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 942
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Bundle optical fibers with binding tape. Apply appropriate force to ensure that
the optical fibers in a bundle can be moved easily.
● Fiber connectors must be tidy and clean to ensure normal communication. If
a fiber connector is contaminated, clean it using a piece of fiber cleaning
fabric.

Optical Module
● Devices must use optical modules that are certified for Huawei devices.
Optical modules that are not certified for Huawei devices cannot ensure
transmission reliability and may affect service stability. Huawei is not liable
for any problems caused by the use of optical modules that are not certified
for Huawei devices.
● The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical
fibers of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is
smaller than the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-
distance optical module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the
receive power on the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical
module may be burnt.
4.2.2 Device Installation Process

This section describes the general device installation process. Before installing
device, you need to determine the installation mode according to installation
environment. After unpacking and inspecting the device, you need to install the
chassis, boards, fibers, and cables in sequence, and then check the installation
result. After determining that the installation is correct, you can power on the
device and then check fiber connections.
Table 4-46 lists the general installation process.

Table 4-46 Device installation process
Installation Process Description

Preparing for the Before installing a device, plan and construct the
installation installation space and confirm the installation method
based on the requirements of device operation
environment. This is a prerequisite for smooth
installation, commissioning, and stable running of the
device. For details, see section " Hardware Installation
and Maintenance - Preparation before installation."

Unpacking a device After the project starts, the project supervisor should
unpack and check the device together with the customer
representative. For details, see section "Hardware
Installation and Maintenance- Preparing before
installation - Unpacking a Device."


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 943
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Installation Process Description

Installing a chassis The installation method of the chassis varies according
to the installation environment. For details, see section
"Hardware Installation and Maintenance - Installing a
Chassis in Cabinet."

Installing Generally, the components are installed in the chassis. If
components the components are delivered separately, see section
"Hardware Installation and Maintenance - Installing of
Components."

Planning cable To ensure that power cables are connected in order, you
routing are advised to plan power cable routing. For details, see
section "Hardware Installation and Maintenance - Cable
Routing Planning."

Installing cables The methods of installing cables vary according to the
installation environment of the chassis. For details, see
section "Hardware Installation and Maintenance -
Installation of cables."

Checking the To ensure normal and stable running of a device, you
installation need to check the installation of the device after all
hardware is installed. For details, see section "Hardware
Installation and Maintenance - Post-Installation Check."

Performing a power- Before powering on a device, you need to check the
on check voltage and fuse capacity of the external power supply.
After the power-on, you need to check whether the
device is running normally by observing the indicators.
For details, see section "Hardware Installation and
Maintenance - Power-on Check."

Maintaining a device Faulty fuses and other electronic components can only
be replaced by professionals authorized by Huawei. For
details, see section "Hardware Installation and
Maintenance - Maintenance of the device."



4.2.3 Preparation before installation


4.2.3.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Precautions

Before you start the installation procedure, read all safety precautions described in
this document and observe any warning labels affixed to the device. Doing so
ensures your safety and protects the device from damage.

Safety precautions provided in this document may not cover every eventuality, so
remain mindful of safety at all times.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 944
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Huawei is not liable for any consequence that results from violation of regulations
pertaining to safe operations or safety codes pertaining to design, production, and
equipment use.
Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to install, operate, or maintain
the device. Familiarize yourself with all safety precautions before performing any
operation on the device.

General Safety


CA UTION

● Always take precautions against ESD whenever you handle a device. For
example, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap. To avoid electric shock or
burn, remove conductive objects like jewelry and watch.
● Connect the ground cable first after installing the device into a cabinet or rack.
Do not remove the ground cable unless all the other cables and modules have
been removed from the device.


NO TICE

● During device transport and installation, prevent the device from colliding with
objects like doors, walls, or shelves.
● Move an unpacked device upright gently to avoid damages to the device. Do
not lay down the unpacked device and drag it.
● Do not touch unpainted surfaces of the device with wet or contaminated
gloves.
● Do not open the ESD bags of cards and modules until they are delivered to the
equipment room. When taking a card out of the ESD bag, do not use the
connector to support the card's weight because this operation will distort the
connector and make the pins on the backplane connector bend.

Environmental Safety


DANGER

Do not place or operate the device in an environment with flammable or explosive
gases or smoke.


NO TICE

● Keep the device away from sources of water to prevent damages to circuits.
● The installation site must be well ventilated to prevent the device from
overheating.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 945
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Electrical Safety


DANGER

● Direct contact with a high-voltage power source or indirect contact through
damp objects can be fatal. Misoperations on high-voltage facilities may result
in fire, electric shock, or other accidents.
● Never install or remove the device or power cables when the power is on. The
electric arc or spark generated between a power cable and conductor may
cause fire or eye damage.
● To protect personal and equipment safety, ground the device before powering it
on.

Laser Safety


CA UTION

● Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical modules
or optical fibers without eye protection.
● Cover fiber connectors with dust caps when they are not connected.

Mechanical Safety


CA UTION

● Wear protective gloves when you are moving the device.
● Use safe lifting practices when moving the equipment. Never attempt to lift
objects that are too heavy for one person to handle. Instead, seek help or use
appropriate tools.
● Before installing the chassis into or removing it from a cabinet, ensure there are
no objects that could fall from the cabinet and cause injury.
● If main control boards, service boards, and power modules have been installed
on the chassis, you are advised to remove them before moving the chassis to
prevent them from falling off and causing injury.
● Do not drill unapproved holes into a cabinet, as doing so may impair its
electromagnetic shielding and damage cables inside. In addition, drilling holes
produces metal shavings that may enter the cabinet and cause short circuits on
printed circuit boards (PCBs).

4.2.3.2 Checking the Installation Site

The Device must be used indoors. To ensure normal operations and long service
life of the device, the installation site must meet the following requirements
described in Table 4-47.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 946
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-47 Requirements for the installation site

Item Requirement

Cleanliness The device must be installed in a clean, dry, and well
ventilated standard equipment room with stable
temperature. The equipment room must be free from
leaking or dripping water, heavy dew, and humidity.

Dust proofing Dustproof measures must be taken in the site. Dust will
cause electrostatic discharges on the chassis and affect
connections of metal connectors and joints. This shortens
service life of the device and may cause failures of the
device.

Temperature and The temperature and humidity in the installation site must
humidity be within specifications. For the operating temperature
and relative humidity ranges required by the device, see
device overview. If the relative humidity exceeds 70% RH,
using dehumidifiers or dehumidifying air conditioners is
recommended.

Corrosive gases The installation site must be free from acidic, alkaline, or
avoidance corrosive gases.

Heat dissipation Keep any objects or obstructions at least 75 mm away
space from the air intake and exhaust vents to facilitate heat
dissipation.

Maintenance The equipment must be stacked in the cabinet or installed
space at an interval of 2U or more to prevent the return air from
affecting heat dissipation.



4.2.3.3 Standard Compliance

4.2.3.3.1 Environmental Standards

Table 4-48 Environmental standards

Environmental Standards Remarks

ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 Environmental Engineering (EE)

Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment

Part 1-1: Classification of
environmental conditions: Storage

Class 1.1: Weatherprotected, partly
temperature-controlled storage
locations

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 947
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Environmental Standards Remarks

Class 1.2: Weatherprotected, not
temperature-controlled storage
locations

ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 Environmental Engineering (EE)

Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment

Part 1-2: Classification of
environmental conditions:
Transportation

Class 2.2: Careful transportation

ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 Environmental Engineering (EE)

Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment

Part 1-3: Classification of
environmental conditions: Stationary
use at weatherprotected locations

Class 3.1: Temperature-controlled
locations

Class 3.2: Partly temperature-
controlled location

IEC 60068-2 Basic Environmental Testing
Procedures

ETSI EN 300 753 Equipment Engineering (EE)

Acoustic noise emitted by
telecommunications equipment

ROHS Restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substance in electrical and
electronic equipment.


4.2.3.4 Checking the Cabinet
The device can be installed in a standard 21-inch or 19-inch cabinet. Huawei A63B
or A66E cabinet is recommended. If you purchase a cabinet by yourself, ensure
that the cabinet meets the following requirements:


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 948
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-154 A63B Cabinet


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 949
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-155 A66E Cabinet


1. 19-inch or 21-inch cabinet with a depth of greater than or equal to 300 mm.
2. The cabling space in front of the cabinet complies with the cabling space
requirements of boards.
NO TE

If a board requires optical modules or attenuators with a puller, GE electrical modules,
or shielded network cables, ensure that sufficient space is available for routing optical
fibers. For a convex door or open rack, it is recommended that the distance between
the cabinet door and the front panel of the board be greater than or equal to 120 mm
(4.72 in.).
3. The device is designed with left-to-right airflow. Therefore, leave a minimum
space of on both the left and right sides of the cabinet to ensure good
ventilation.
4. The porosity of each cabinet door must be greater than 50%, meeting heat
dissipation requirements of devices.
5. The cabinet has installation accessories, such as guide rails, floating nuts, and
screws.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 950
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

6. The cabinet has a ground terminal to connect to the device.
7. The cabinet has a cable outlet on the top or at the bottom for overhead or
underfloor cabling.
8. For cabinets with left-to-right air channels, such as open racks, installing
cabinets side by side may cause cascaded heating. Therefore, you are advised
to install cabinets with left-to-right air channels vertically at different levels
rather than side by side. If side-by-side installation cannot be avoided, it is
recommended that the distance between cabinets be at least 500 mm (19.67
in.). The following figures show equipment room installation in different heat
dissipation scenarios. Device 2 in scenarios 1 and 2 adopts the front-to-back
airflow, that is, cold air flows in from the front side and hot air is exhausted
from the rear side.

Figure 4-156 Equipment room installation in different heat dissipation scenarios


4.2.3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories

Table 4-49 lists the tools required for installing a device.

Table 4-49 Installation tools
Tool Description Picture

ESD gloves Used to
prevent
electrostatic
discharges.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 951
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Protective Used to
gloves protect hands
during
operation.


ESD wrist Used to
strap prevent
electrostatic
discharges.
Wear the
strap on your
wrist and
insert the
other end into
the ESD jack
on the
cabinet.

Utility knife Used to cut
cartons or
paper.

Scissors Used to cut
the
installation
template or
other
materials.

Tweezers Used to
unplug
Ethernet
cables and
optical fibers.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 952
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Measuring Used to
tape measure
distances.


Marker Used to mark
component
installation
positions.

Flat-head Used to turn
screwdriver slotted-head
screws and
bolts.

Phillips Used to turn
screwdriver cross-head
screws and
bolts.

Combinatio Used to clamp
n pliers or bend metal
sheets, cut
metal wires,
strip off
coating of
cables, and
unplug nails.

Diagonal Used to cut
pliers insulation
tubes and
cable ties.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 953
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Wire Used to strip
stripper off the
insulation
coating and
shields of
communicatio
n cables with
small cross-
sectional
areas.

RJ45 Used to crimp
crimping Ethernet
tool cables.


COAX Used to crimp
crimping the metal
tool shield at the
end of a
coaxial cable.

Ethernet Used to test
cable tester Ethernet cable
connectivity.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 954
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Multimeter Used to test
cabinet
insulation,
cable
connectivity,
and device
electrical
performance
indicators,
including
voltage,
current, and
resistance.

Adjustable Used to
wrench tighten or
loosen hex or
square bolts
and nuts. The
span can be
adjusted to
suit bolts or
nuts in
different sizes.


Table 4-50 lists the installation accessories required for installing a device.

Table 4-50 Installation accessories
Tool Description Picture

Insulation Used to
tape insulate
power wires
or other
conductors.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 955
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool Description Picture

Corrugated Used to
pipe protect optical
fibers.




Table 4-51 lists the installation accessories delivered with the device.

Table 4-51 Installation accessories
Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Serial 1 Used to connect the console 04040838
cable port of the device to a serial
port of a maintenance terminal
for local commissioning or
maintenance of the device.

Panel 5U: 10 Used to fix expandable guide 26020141
screw 3U: 8 rails and the device.
(M6x12)
2U: 4
1U: 4

Floating 5U: 10 Installed on mounting rails of a 26020075
nut (M6) 3U: 8 cabinet or rack and used with
M6 screws to secure the
2U: 4 expandable guide rails and the
1U: 4 device in the cabinet or rack.

ESD wrist 1 Prevents ESD damages when 28050001
strap you touch or operate the
equipment or components.

Fiber 1 m Used to bundle optical fibers. 21101258
binding
tape

Cable tie 50 Used to bundle cables. 21100144
(300 x 3.6
mm)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 956
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Accessory Quantity Description Part Number

Label 12 Used to bundle cables and 21200708
cable tie attach the power cable label
(29041061) to the cables.

Signal 1 Used to identify locations of 29041060
cable signal cables.
label

Power 1 Used to identify locations of 29041061
cable power cables.
label

Cable 1 Used to fix AC power cables. 21201529
Clamp

Cable 1 pair Used to route cables connected 21243763
managem to boards.
ent frame

Cable 1 Used to route cables connected 21243569
managem to boards.
ent frame


4.2.3.6 Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors and Adapters

4.2.3.6.1 Overview
This topic introduces the purpose and procedure of cleaning optical fiber
connectors, as well as polluters to optical fiber connectors.
Cleaning fiber connectors is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance
degradation of optical transmission systems.
Figure 4-157 shows an optical fiber connector.

Figure 4-157 Optical fiber connector


Optical fiber connectors should be free of:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 957
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Dust
● Grease (usually brought by hands)
● Condensate residue
● Powder (evaporated residue of water or solvent)
Dust is the most common dirt in optical fiber connectors. The dust particles that
can be seen only by a microscope can affect the quality of optical signals,
deteriorate the system performance, and cause instability in network operation.
A 1-micrometer dust particle on the single-mode fiber connector can block 1%
light and cause 0.05 dB attenuation. A 9-micrometer dust particle that cannot be
seen by human eyes can block an entire fiber core. Therefore, small dirt even that
cannot be seen by human eyes should be removed.

NO TE

Before you connect any optical component, make sure that you have checked and cleaned
the component.

4.2.3.6.2 Protection of Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes requirements for fiber connector protection.
The requirements are as follows:
● All boards with optical ports must be packed properly, to avoid mechanical
and electrostatic damages and to reduce vibrations.
● The protective caps must be put in an ESD bag.
● Protective caps must be installed on all optical fiber connectors when not in
use. The optical fiber connectors must be stored in proper packages to keep
them clean.
● Figure 4-158 shows the recommended protective caps, whereas Figure 4-159
shows the protective caps not recommended.

Figure 4-158 Protective caps recommended


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 958
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-159 Protective caps not recommended


NO TE

The protective caps not recommended are made of soft rubber, which are apt to absorb
dust and sundries, and difficult to clean.

4.2.3.6.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Optical connectors should be cleaned using recommended tools, equipment and
materials.
The following provides the recommended tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cassette cleaner
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air
● Special cleaning roll
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
shown in Figure 4-160 and Figure 4-161


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 959
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-160 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors


Figure 4-161 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors


4.2.3.6.4 Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors
This topic describes how to inspect the end face of optical fibers using a fiber
microscope.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials for inspecting
optical fiber connectors:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.
Use a fiber microscope equipped with a safety device or a desktop video fiber
microscope when inspecting the optical fiber connectors.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 960
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Use a fiber microscope to check whether the fiber connector is contaminated
or damaged. See the examples below.
– Clean fiber and face
Figure 4-162 shows an image of a clean fiber end face under the fiber
microscope.

Figure 4-162 Clean fiber and face


– Damaged fiber end face
Figure 4-163 shows images of the damaged fiber end face. The image on
the left shows a severely damaged fiber. Severely damaged fibers can
cause damage to the equipment and should not be used. The image on
the right shows a defective fiber. If the output power is within a certain
range, the defective fiber might not cause any damage to the equipment.
If the output power is unstable or out of the range, however, the
defective fiber can cause damage to the equipment.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 961
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-163 Damaged or defective fiber end face


NO TE

Figure 4-163 shows only the 800-micrometer fiber cores.
For details on acceptable and unacceptable fibers, see Figure 4-164, Figure
4-165 and Figure 4-166.

Figure 4-164 Clean fiber end face


Figure 4-165 Acceptable fibers with imperfections


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 962
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-166 Unacceptable fibers with imperfections


4. If any dirt is detected, clean the optical fiber connector. For details, see
"Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner" and "Cleaning
Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue".
5. If any damage is detected, replace the fiber.

4.2.3.6.5 Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link
This section describes the insertion loss and reflection requirements of optical links
and the method of checking the quality of optical links for the application of 50G
optical modules with the PAM4 coding technology.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Tools and instruments for checking optical fiber links are as follows:
● OTDR meter
● Fiber microscope

Precautions

CA UTION

Because the transmit optical power of the OTDR meter is much higher than the
damaged optical power threshold at the receive end, the optical fiber must be
removed from the optical module when the OTDR meter is used to test the optical
path quality.

Currently, the Ethernet port rate is increasing. Since the 50G optical module link
uses the PAM4 encoding technology, there are higher requirements on the optical
fiber and cable quality and the link is more sensitive to multipath reflection
interference of signals. If the fiber link connector, fiber section, or fiber splicing
surface is dirty, optical signals are reflected back and forth on the fiber link,
causing interference due to co-channel noise on the receive side. As a result, the
optical link is unstable or intermittently disconnected.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 963
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

According to the national standard (GBT50312-2016), the loss of the optical fiber
link connector must meet the requirements described in Table 4-52.

Table 4-52 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector

Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber
connector (dB)

Fiber splicing connector 0.3

Optical mechanical connector 0.3

Optical connector 0.75



NO TE

Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.

Table 4-53 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the rate. More
connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.

Table 4-53 Maximum reflection of connectors

Number of Maximum Reflection of Each Connector (dB)
Optical Fiber
Connectors 50GBASE-FR 50GBASE-LR 50GBASE-ER

1 -25 -22 -19

2 -31 -29 -27

4 -35 -33 -32

6 -38 -35 -35

8 -40 -37 -37

10 -41 -39 -39



Procedure
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.
2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 964
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it. For details, see "Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber
Connectors and Adapters".
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.

4.2.3.6.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using the Cassette Cleaner

This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using a cassette cleaner.

Prerequisites

Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.

The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using
cartridge type cleaners.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials for cleaning optical
fiber connectors:

● cassette cleaner
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 965
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Press down and hold the lever of the cassette cleaner. The shutter slides back
and exposes a new cleaning area.
4. Place the fiber end face gently against the cleaning area.
5. Drag the fiber end face gently on one cleaning area in the arrow direction
each time. Do it again on the other cleaning area in the same direction as the
first time once.


NO TICE

Do not drag the fiber end face on the same cleaning area more than once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.

6. Release the lever of the cassette cleaner to close the cleaning area.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details see the examples shown in "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors".
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.

4.2.3.6.7 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue

This topic describes how to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue.

Prerequisites

Before cleaning, inspect the fiber end face with a fiber microscope or a magnifier
to confirm the degree of fiber contamination. Clean the fiber only when it is
severely contaminated. This is because the cleaning operation itself may introduce
dust, dirt, or cause damage to the fiber.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

The following provides the required tools, equipment and materials:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 966
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Non-woven lens tissue, fiber cleaning tissue, and dustfree cloth (Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.)
● Special compressed air or cleaning roll

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.
2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Put a little cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.
4. Clean the fiber end face on the lens tissue. See Figure 4-167 and Figure
4-168.


NO TICE

Drag the fiber end face on the same area in the lens tissue only once.
Otherwise, the connector can be contaminated or damaged.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 967
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-167 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the desk


Figure 4-168 Cleaning the fiber end face using the lens tissue on the hand


5. Repeat 4 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been
used.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.

NO TE

● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
● If the compressed air is not available, use a cleaning roll instead.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details, see the examples shown in "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors".
If the fiber end face is still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 968
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

8. Do not touch the fiber connector after cleaning it. Connect it to the optical
port immediately. If it is not used for the time being, put a protective cap on
it.
NO TE

Do not use the same cleaning area to clean the fiber connector for more than one
time.
9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.

4.2.3.6.8 Cleaning Optical Fiber Adapters Using Dustfree Absorbent Swabs
This topic describes how to clean fiber adapters using dustfree absorbent swabs.

Prerequisites
There are several types of dustfree absorbent swabs available. Select appropriate
dustfree absorbent swabs based on site conditions. You can obtain the following
tools and materials from a fiber cable and connector manufacturer.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
The following lists the required tools, equipment and materials:
● Optical power meter
● 400X fiber microscope (A video fiber microscope is recommended.)
● Cleaning solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl alcohol is the next, and
alcohol or formalin is forbidden.)
● Special compressed air
● Dustfree absorbent swab (made of medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

Precautions


CA UTION

Laser energy is invisible and may cause eye injuries. Never look directly into fiber
connectors or ports.


NO TICE

Electrostatic discharge is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Wear an ESD
wrist strap and ensure that the strap is grounded properly before touching the
equipment and boards, to protect the static-sensitive components against
electrostatic discharge of the human body. Otherwise, the equipment may be
damaged or the service may be interrupted.

Procedure
1. Shut down the laser and disconnect the fiber end before inspecting the fiber
connector.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 969
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Test the optical power using a power meter to ensure that the laser is shut
down.
3. Select the dustfree absorbent swab with a proper diameter based on the type
of an adapter.

NO TE

For SC and FC fiber adapters, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a diameter of 2.5
mm (0.1 in.); for the LC fiber adapter, use the dustfree absorbent swab with a
diameter of 1.25 mm (0.05 in.). See Figure 4-169 and Figure 4-170.

Figure 4-169 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the SC and FC connectors


Figure 4-170 Dustfree absorbent swabs for cleaning the LC connectors


4. Put a little cleaning solvent on the dustfree absorbent swab.
5. Place the dustfree absorbent swab gently on the adapter so that the cleaning
solvent is against the fiber end face. Draw out the dustfree absorbent swab
from the fiber adapter and then rotate the dustfree absorbent swab clockwise
once. Ensure that the tip of the dustfree absorbent swab directly contacts the
fiber end face.
6. Use the compressed air to blow off dust on the fiber end face.

NO TE

● When using the compressed air, keep the nozzle as close as possible to the fiber
end face without touching it.
● Before using the compressed air, first spray it into the air to expel deposits in the
compressed air.
7. Use a fiber microscope to inspect the fiber to check whether there is any dirt.
For details, see "Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors". If the fiber end face is
still dirty, repeat 1 to 6.
8. Connect the fiber to the optical port immediately. If it is not used for the time
being, put a protective cap on it.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 970
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

9. Turn on the laser after connecting the fiber to the board.

4.2.3.7 Inspection of power distribution environment


4.2.3.7.1 Introduction to the Power Distribution System

Devices support both AC and DC power supplies.

● AC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) obtains three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains power
outlet and transmits 380 V AC power to an AC power distribution frame. A
chassis receives power from the AC power distribution frame through the
power distribution unit (PDU) installed in the cabinet.

Figure 4-171 AC power supply mode


● High-voltage (240 V) DC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, a
rectifier system obtains three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains
power outlet and transmits 240 V DC power to a DC power distribution frame.
A chassis receives power from the DC power distribution frame through the
PDU installed in the cabinet/rack.

Figure 4-172 High-voltage (240 V) DC power supply mode


● DC power supply mode: Under normal conditions, a rectifier system receives
three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains power outlet and transmits
-48 V DC power to a DC power distribution frame. The device obtains power
from the DC power distribution frame.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 971
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-173 DC power supply mode


4.2.3.7.2 DC Power Distribution Guide


DANGER

Do not install power cables when the power is on. This is to avoid injuries.

Figure 4-174 Schematic diagram of the DC power distribution




DC Power Supply System
For cable specifications, see "Hardware Description"-Equipment Cables-Power
Cables.

Table 4-54 PDF circuit breaker specifications
Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥16A, ≤40A Based on long-term evolution
each channel requirements and site conditions, the
recommended current is greater than
or equal to 32 A.


Installing Power Cables
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector. For specific operations,
please refer to "Appendix-Field Assembly and Installation of Cables".

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 972
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each power cable.
3. Route power cables along the cable ladder and lay them on the chassis.
4. Take off the plastic cover from each power module, connect one end of each
power cable to the corresponding terminal and the other end to the PDF.

Figure 4-175 Installing the power cables


5. Use cable ties to bundle cables every 150 mm upwards from the bottom and
fasten the cables to the cable tray.
6. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each power cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 973
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

To ensure that the power cable is required, perform the following steps to install a power
cable:
1. Prepare a power cable a little longer than the distance between the power module and
PDF.
2. Install a terminal on one end of the power cable and connect the terminal to the device.
3. Connect power cables to the positive and negative electrodes securely. Otherwise, the
power test result is inaccurate.
4. Route the power cable, bind it to the cable tray, and cut any excess length of the cable.
Install a terminal on the other end of the power cable and connect the terminal to the
PDF.

4.2.3.7.3 AC Power Distribution Guide


DANGER

Do not install power cables when the power is on. This is to avoid injuries.

Figure 4-176 Schematic diagram of the AC power distribution




AC Power Supply System

For cable specifications, see "Hardware Description"-Equipment Cables-Power
Cables.

Table 4-55 PDF circuit breaker specifications

Item Description Remarks

Circuit breaker of ≥10A, ≤16A For hierarchical power supplying
each channel protection, the current of the circuit
breaker at the user side should be 10
A.



Installing AC Power Cables
1. Route AC power cables along the cable ladder and lay them on the chassis.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 974
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Insert the AC power cable to the AC input port and secure it using the loose-
proof pinch as shown in step 1 and 2 in Figure 4-177. Connect the other end
of the AC power cable to the PDF of the equipment room.

Figure 4-177 Installing the AC power cable


3. Use cable ties to bundle AC cables every 150 mm upwards from the bottom
and fasten the cables to the cable tray.
4. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each AC power cable.

Instructions for Connecting the AC Power Cable to the Power Distribution
Box
1. Cut the PE ground cable (yellow-green wire) at the peeling place (wrap it
with PVC insulation tape to prevent leakage or short circuit), peel the L wire
(brown wire) and N wire (blue wire) and crimp the OT terminal Or cold-
pressed terminal (terminal type is selected according to actual conditions).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 975
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


2. Connect the L and N wires to the corresponding L and N input terminals of
the power distribution box.
When using 110V power supply (dual live wire power supply), L and N are
connected to the two live wires (L) of the equipment room and connected to
the protective ground cable (PE). At the same time, both L and N poles must
be configured with circuit breakers.

4.2.3.8 Unpacking a Device
Unpack the chassis before starting the installation.

4.2.3.8.1 Unpacking a Carton
The chassis must be delivered to the site.

Tools
● ESD gloves
● Diagonal pliers
● Paper knife


CA UTION

● Integrated circuits (ICs) are sensitive to electrostatic discharge from the
human body. When handling boards or metallic parts of the equipment,
wear ESD gloves and hold only the edges of the boards during operation.
● If the equipment is transported from a cold and dry place to a warm and
damp place, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking it. Otherwise, the
moisture condenses on the board surface and damages the components.

Procedure
1. Transport the packing box to the equipment room.
2. Check the packing box, and stop unpacking it in any of the following cases:
– The outer package is severely damaged.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 976
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

– There is water leakage on the outer package.
Find the causes and provide feedback to the local representative office of
Huawei.
3. Observe the labels on the carton to check the equipment configuration and
take a record.
4. Cut the strap with the diagonal plier and then split the adhesive tape properly
along the seam between the cover and the body of the box with the paper
knife. Do not scratch the articles inside the box.

Figure 4-178 Unpacking the carton


1. Pressure- 2. Carton label 3. Packing box 4. Auxiliary box
sensitive adhesive
tape

5. Foam protector 6. Chassis 7. ESD PE bag -

5. Open the carton and take out the chassis box from the carton.
6. Open the chassis box and take out the chassis. Then, check whether the
chassis is damaged.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 977
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.3.8.2 Unpacking a Card

A card is packed in an ESD bag, which is placed in a carton with foam packaging.
You are advised to open the ESD bag only when the card needs to be installed in a
chassis.


NO TICE

● Electronic components are vulnerable to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Before
touching a card, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap (with the other end
inserted into an ESD jack). Do not touch electronic components on the card.
● If a card is moved from a cold, dry place to a warm, humid place, wait more
than 30 minutes before unpacking the card. Otherwise, the humidity will
damage the card.

Tools
● ESD gloves or ESD wrist strap
● Utility knife

Procedure
1. Inspect the carton. If the carton or the seals on the carton are damaged,
contact the equipment supplier immediately. If the carton is intact, go to the
next step.
2. Wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap. When wearing an ESD wrist strap,
ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in close contact with your wrist, and insert
the other end into the ESD jack of the cabinet or rack.
3. Unpack the carton.
a. Cut the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape on the carton with a utility knife.
b. Open the carton, remove the foam packaging, and take out the ESD bag.


c. Open the ESD bag and take out the card.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 978
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4. Inspect the card. If any damage is found on the card, analyze the cause and
contact the equipment supplier immediately.
4.2.4 Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-4KW)

For devices that use a DC power supply in equipment rooms that offer only AC
power, you can install ETP4860-4KWs.

4.2.4.1 Planning Cable Routes

An ETP4860-4KW provides one AC or HVDC input and a maximum of five power
outputs. As shown by (4) in Figure 4-179, the power outputs from left to right
include one 16 A circuit breaker, two 40 A circuit breakers, and two 63 A circuit
breakers. ETP4860-4KWs possess communication and alarm capabilities, support
remote management and online upgrade, and feature hot-swappable rectifiers
and monitor modules.
Figure 4-179 shows the appearance of an ETP4860-4KW. For details, see
Hardware Description > Power > ETP4860-4KW Embedded Power.

Figure 4-179 Appearance of an ETP4860-4KW


1. Power input 2. Monitor 3. Rectifier 4. Load circuit 5. Battery
terminal module (used to breaker circuit breaker
SMU11B (used convert AC
to monitor and power into
manage the stable DC
power system) power)

Two methods are available for connecting an ETP4860-4KW to a device,
depending on whether the NMS monitoring port of the power box is directly
connected to the IP network. Use either method as needed.

NO TE

An ETP4860-4KW can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or a 600 mm deep ETSI cabinet, but
not in a 300 mm deep ETSI cabinet.
If an ETP4860 is installed in an A63B cabinet, the cabinet must use a convex door.

Connecting ETP4860-4KWs to a Device
A device requires two ETP4860-4KWs that work in 1+1 backup mode. The
following figures show cable connections between the power boxes and devices.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 979
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

The devices in the following figures are for reference only.

Figure 4-180 Connecting ETP4860-4KWs to a 3 U device (NMS monitoring ports
connected to the IP network through the device)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 980
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-181 Connecting ETP4860-4KWs to a 2 U device (NMS monitoring ports
connected to the IP network through the device)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 981
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-182 Connecting ETP4860-4KWs to a 5 U device (NMS monitoring ports
connected to the IP network through the device)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 982
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-56 Cable connections
Cable Cable Left or Upper Right or Remarks Cab
Num Type Part Lower Part le
ber Pre
par
ati
on

AC power Power source in 220 V AC or - See
cable the equipment 240 V/380 V "Ins
room HVDC input talli
port of power ng
box A Inp
ut
Po
wer
Cab
les.
"

AC power Power source in 220 V AC or Two power -
cable the equipment 240 V/380 V boxes work in
room HVDC input 1+1 backup
port of power mode.
box B

Ethernet FE electrical port FE electrical It is See
cable on the monitor port on the recommended "Ins
module of power device that cables be talli
box A routed along ng
the left side. a
Co
mm
uni
cati
ons
Cab
le
(S
MU
11B
)."


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 983
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Cable Left or Upper Right or Remarks Cab
Num Type Part Lower Part le
ber Pre
par
ati
on

Ethernet FE electrical port FE electrical It is -
cable on the monitor port on the recommended
module of power device that cables be
box B routed along
the left side.
The network
management
device
remotely
manages the
power box
through this
cable.

DC power DC output port of DC power It is See
cable power box A module 1 of recommended "Ins
the device that power talli
cables of a 5 U ng
device be DC
routed along Out
the left side. put
It is Po
recommended wer
that power Cab
cables of a 2 U les.
or 3 U device "
be routed
along the right
side.
NOTE
Power boxes
support circuit
breakers with
different
output
specifications.
Select the
appropriate
circuit breakers
based on the
device type.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 984
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Cable Left or Upper Right or Remarks Cab
Num Type Part Lower Part le
ber Pre
par
ati
on

DC power DC output port of DC power It is -
cable power box B module 2 of recommended
the device that power
cables of a 5 U
device be
routed along
the left side.
It is
recommended
that power
cables of a 2 U
or 3 U device
be routed
along the right
side.

Service Service port or Network - -
cable network management
management device on the
port of the device IP network




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 985
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-183 Connecting ETP4860-4KWs to a device (NMS monitoring ports
directly connected to the IP network)


Here, a 3 U device is used as an example.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 986
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-57 Cable connections
Cable Cable Type Left or Upper Right or Lower Remarks Cab
Numbe Part Part le
r Pre
par
ati
on

AC power Power source in 220 V AC or 240 - See
cable the equipment V/380 V HVDC "Ins
room input port of talli
power box A ng
Inp
ut
Po
wer
Cab
les.
"

AC power Power source in 220 V AC or 240 Two power -
cable the equipment V/380 V HVDC boxes work
room input port of in 1+1
power box B backup
mode.

Ethernet FE electrical FE electrical It is See
cable port on the port on the recommende "Ins
monitor network d that cables talli
module of management be routed ng
power box A device of an IP along the a
network left side. Co
mm
uni
cati
ons
Cab
le
(S
MU
11B
)."


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 987
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Cable Type Left or Upper Right or Lower Remarks Cab
Numbe Part Part le
r Pre
par
ati
on

Ethernet FE electrical FE electrical It is -
cable port on the port on the recommende
monitor network d that cables
module of management be routed
power box B device of an IP along the
network left side.
The network
managemen
t device
remotely
manages the
power box
through this
cable.

DC power DC output port DC power It is See
cable of power box A module 1 of the recommende "Ins
device d that power talli
cables of a 5 ng
U device be DC
routed along Out
the left side. put
It is Po
recommende wer
d that power Cab
cables of a 2 les.
U or 3 U "
device be
routed along
the right
side.
NOTE
Power boxes
support
circuit
breakers
with
different
output
specification
s. Select the
appropriate
circuit
breakers
based on the
device type.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 988
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Cable Type Left or Upper Right or Lower Remarks Cab
Numbe Part Part le
r Pre
par
ati
on

DC power DC output port DC power It is -
cable of power box B module 2 of the recommende
device d that power
cables of a 5
U device be
routed along
the left side.
It is
recommende
d that power
cables of a 2
U or 3 U
device be
routed along
the right
side.


4.2.4.2 Installing a Subrack (ETP4860-4KW)

Procedure
1. (Optional) Remove the cover of the RTN ground bar at the bottom of the
subrack.

NO TE

The RTN ground bar does not require grounding and is not grounded by default.
However, it can be grounded if necessary.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 989
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-184 Removing the cover of the RTN ground bar at the bottom of the
subrack


2. (Optional) Install an RTN ground bar.

Figure 4-185 Installing an RTN ground bar


3. To ensure good heat dissipation, it is recommended that the distance between
the AC power box and the rear door of the cabinet be greater than 21 mm.
You can relocate the mounting ears based on the cabinet depth.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 990
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-186 Installation positions for mounting ears


(1) Adjustable positions (2) Default positions

When mounting ears are installed in a cabinet with a shallow depth, such as
an A63B, you are advised to install screws as shown in the following figure to
reserve sufficient space for heat dissipation and prevent the system from
generating alarms after long-term running.

Figure 4-187 Installation positions for mounting ears (applicable to the A63B
cabinet)


(1) Adjustable positions (2) Default positions

4. (Optional) When installing the subrack in an ETSI cabinet, you need to install
19-inch-to-ETSI mounting ears onto existing 19-inch mounting ears.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 991
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-188 Installing 19-inch-to-ETSI mounting ears


5. Install the subrack in a 19-inch cabinet.


CA UTION

When installing an ETP4860-4KW (AC), you are advised to reserve at least a
space of 2 U above and below the power box to ensure good heat dissipation.

Figure 4-189 Installing a subrack


6. Install a ground cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 992
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-190 Installing a ground cable


(1) Site ground bar

4.2.4.3 Installing Components (ETP4860-4KW)

4.2.4.3.1 Installing an SMU11B

Procedure
1. Gently push the monitor module into its slot along the guide rails.
2. Push the monitor module handle upwards until it is in place.

Figure 4-191 Installing a monitor module


NO TICE

● If no battery string is connected to the power supply system, you must log
in to the power supply system to set Battery n Connected to No and click
Submit. For details, see Commissioning > SMU11B.

4.2.4.3.2 Installing a Rectifier

Prerequisites
The rectifier is intact after being unpacked.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 993
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● If the rectifier is damaged, contact your local Huawei office.
● The rectifier slot presents a risk of electric shock. Do not touch the slot with
your hands.
● High temperature is generated around the air exhaust vent when the rectifier is
running. Do not touch the vent with your hands or cover the vent with cables
or other objects.
● In an indoor environment, you are advised to power on the rectifier within
seven days after the package is removed. If the rectifier cannot be powered on
in a timely manner, place it in an indoor environment that is dry and without
corrosive gas.
● In an outdoor environment, you are advised to power on the rectifier within 24
hours after the package is removed. If the rectifier cannot be powered on in a
timely manner, place it in an indoor environment that is dry and without
corrosive gas.
● Cover the vacant slots with filler panels.

Procedure
1. Push the locking latch towards the left.
2. Draw the handle downwards.
3. Gently push the rectifier into its slot along the guide rails.
4. Push the handle upwards.
5. Push the locking latch towards the right to secure the handle.

Figure 4-192 Installing a rectifier


4.2.4.4 Installing Cables (ETP4860-4KW)

4.2.4.4.1 (Optional) Installing a Dry Contact Signal Cable

Procedure
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to hold the contact in a dry contact port.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 994
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Install a signal cable in the dry contact port.
3. Remove the screwdriver and check that the signal cable is securely connected
to the dry contact.

Figure 4-193 Installing a dry contact signal cable


NO TE

Connect the output dry contacts to IO1 and IO2 ports.

4.2.4.4.2 (Optional) Installing Signal Cables for a Battery Temperature Sensor
If a battery temperature sensor is required, perform the following steps to install
the cable.
Connect the signal cable of the battery temperature sensor to the SIG2 BTE port
on the monitor module.


NO TICE

● Ensure that the metal probe of the temperature sensor is not in contact with a
metal or an energized conductor.
● The battery temperature sensor should not be directly exposed to sunlight, be
placed near an air vent or air conditioner vent, or come into direct contact with
a heat source or cold source.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 995
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-194 Installing signal cables for a battery temperature sensor


(1) Battery temperature sensor

4.2.4.4.3 (Optional) Installing Signal Cables for a Door Status Sensor

Connect the signal cable of the door status sensor to the SIG2 GAT port on the
monitor module.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 996
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-195 Installing signal cables for a door status sensor


(1) Door status sensor

4.2.4.4.4 (Optional) Installing an Alarm Signal Cable for the Cable Distribution
Frame

Connect the alarm signal cable for the cable distribution frame to the VD2 port on
the monitor module.

Figure 4-196 Installing an alarm signal cable for the cable distribution frame


4.2.4.4.5 Installing a Communications Cable (SMU11B)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 997
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NCE-based Management

If you use NCE to remotely manage the power system, connect the FE port on the
SMU11B to the device.

Figure 4-197 Installing a communications cable


(1) UI terminal (2) FE port

Third-Party NMS-based Management (SNMP)

Connect the FE port on the SMU to the device using a network cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 998
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-198 Installing a communications cable (third-party NMS-based
management)


(1) SNMP-based NMS terminal (2) FE port

4.2.4.4.6 Installing DC Output Power Cables

Prerequisites


DANGER

● Switch off the upstream input circuit breaker, and attach warning labels such as
"Operation Prohibited."
● Before installing the power cable, set the status of all the circuit breakers in the
subrack to OFF.

Procedure
1. Use cables (cross-sectional area: 0.75 mm2–16 mm2) and cord end terminals
to prepare DC output power cables.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 999
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-58 Cables
Cross-sectional Recommended Cord End Terminal Specifications
Area

0.75mm2-6mm2 Pre-insulated and with an insertion depth of 12 mm–
18 mm (supporting bare wire installation)

10mm2 Pre-insulated and with an insertion depth of 18 mm
(supporting bare wire installation)

16mm2 Not pre-insulated and with an insertion depth of 18
mm (supporting bare wire installation)



NO TE

Cord end terminals are recommended. When bare wires are used, you are advised to
add heat shrink tubing to ensure that the wire ends are not split.

Figure 4-199 Preparing a cord end terminal


(1) Cable (2) Cord end terminal (3) Crimping tool

2. Install DC output power cables.
a. Use a flat-head screwdriver (2 mm wide) to push the slider in a wiring
hole in place.
b. Install a battery cable at the wiring hole.
c. Remove the screwdriver and ensure that the battery cable is securely
installed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1000
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-200 Installing DC output power cables


(1) Device

4.2.4.4.7 Installing Battery Cables


DANGER

● Smoking and sources of ignition are prohibited near batteries.
● Flip the battery switch to OFF before installing batteries.
● Comply with regulations and warnings issued by manufacturers.
● Use tools with insulated handles. Using tools without insulated handles may
cause personal injury or result in batteries burning out.
● Before handling batteries, wear goggles, rubber gloves, and protective clothes.
Remove all conductive objects, such as watches, bracelets, bangles, and rings.
● If battery acid gets into your eyes, rinse with cold water for more than 15
minutes and seek medical advice immediately. If battery acid comes into
contact with skin or clothing, wash with soap and water immediately.
● Do not use conductors such as metal to simultaneously touch two or more
battery terminals or touch battery terminals and grounded objects (for
example, the battery compartment); otherwise, transient short circuits occur,
which may produce sparks or explosions.
● During battery installation, ensure that the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly connected to prevent reverse polarity. Connect the
negative battery cable and then the positive battery cable.
● Secure battery cables with the torque specified in battery documentation. Loose
connections will result in excessive voltage drops or cause batteries to burn out
when the current increases.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1001
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
1. Prepare battery cables using cables with a cross-sectional area ranging from
10 mm2 to 16 mm2 and cord end terminals.

Table 4-59 Preparing cables
Cross-sectional Area Recommended Cord End Terminal
Specifications

10 mm2 Pre-insulated and with an insertion
depth of 18 mm

16 mm2 Pre-insulated and with an insertion
depth of 18 mm


Figure 4-201 Preparing a cord end terminal


(1) Cable (2) Cord end terminal (3) Crimping tool

2. Install battery cables.


CA UTION

Do not connect battery cables to load circuit breakers. This is because
batteries do not support current limiting and may bulge or fail due to
overcharge.

a. Use a flat-head screwdriver (2 mm wide) to push the sliding block
corresponding to the wiring hole in place.
b. Install the battery cables in wiring holes.
c. Take out the screwdriver and ensure that the battery cables are securely
installed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1002
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-202 Installing a lead-acid battery cable


(1) Battery

Figure 4-203 Installing a lithium battery cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1003
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-60 Mapping between lithium battery and SMU communications
ports

Lithium Battery Communications Port SMU
Communicatio
ns Port

1 RS485 T+ -

2 RS485 T-

3 NC

4 RS485 R+

5 RS485 R-

6 NC

7 CANH CAN+

8 CANL CAN-



4.2.4.4.8 Installing Input Power Cables

The system supports the 220 V AC single-phase input and 110 V AC dual-live wire
input. Choose the appropriate type of input based on site requirements.

Installing 220 V AC Single-Phase Input Power Cables

Procedure
1. Remove the protective cover from AC input terminals.
2. Connect the AC input power cables to the corresponding AC input terminals.

Figure 4-204 Installing 220 V AC single-phase input power cables


L: live wire N: neutral wire PE: ground cable

3. Reinstall the protective cover for the AC input terminals.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1004
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Installing 110 V AC Dual-Live Wire Input Power Cables

Procedure
1. Remove the protective cover from AC input terminals.
2. Connect the AC input power cables to the corresponding AC input terminals.

Figure 4-205 Installing 110 V AC dual-live wire input power cables


L1: live wire L1 L2: live wire L2 PE: ground cable

3. Reinstall the protective cover for the AC input terminals.

Installing DC Input Power Cables

Procedure
1. Remove the protective cover from DC input terminals.
2. Connect the DC input power cables to the corresponding DC input terminals.

Figure 4-206 Installing DC input power cables


HV+: HVDC positive HV-: HVDC negative PE: ground cable
terminal terminal

3. Reinstall the protective cover for the DC input terminals.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1005
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.4.5 Commissioning


NO TICE

● The following commissioning procedure may result in power failure or alarm
generation. Inform the alarm center before and after the operations.
● Device commissioning involves various technologies. Only trained personnel are
allowed to perform commissioning. Perform operations in strict compliance
with the manual.
● The commissioning is performed with power on. During commissioning, stand
on dry insulating objects, and remove conductive articles such as watches and
rings. Use insulated tools.
● During operation, do not come into contact with two electric bodies that have
different currents.
● During commissioning, check that the status of the related unit or component
meets requirements before turning on any switch.
● If you do not want others to operate the power distribution device during your
work, attach the sign "Operation in Progress: Do Not Close the Circuit" to the
device.
● During commissioning, immediately shut down the device if any fault is
detected, and rectify the fault before proceeding with the commissioning.

4.2.4.5.1 Connecting the AC or DC Power Supply

Procedure
1. Measure the input voltage of the upstream input circuit breaker. The value
should range from 85 V AC to 300 V AC or from 85 V DC to 420 V DC.
2. Switch on the upstream input circuit breaker and measure the output voltage
of the circuit breaker. The value should range from 85 V AC to 300 V AC or
from 85 V DC to 420 V DC.
3. Check that the indicators on the rectifiers are steady green.
4. Measure the voltage between the –48 V busbar and the RTN+ busbar. The
value should range from –42 V DC to –58 V DC.

4.2.4.5.2 SMU11B

NO TE

If the IP address of the SMU11B is changed on the WebUI, record the IP address for future
login.

Logging In to the WebUI

Step 1 Connect the network port on a PC to the FE port on the SMU using a network
cable.
Step 2 Configure the PC IP address to be on the same network segment as the SMU IP
address.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1006
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

The SMU has a default IP address of 192.168.0.10, a subnet mask of
255.255.255.0, and a default gateway address of 192.168.0.1. On the PC, set the IP
address to 192.168.0.11, subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, and default gateway
address to 192.168.0.1.

Figure 4-207 Setting the PC IP address (Windows 10 as an example)


Step 3 Enter https://local IP address of the SMU (https://192.168.0.10 by default) in the
address box of the browser and press Enter to access the WebUI login page.

Figure 4-208 Login page


NO TE

● The preset usernames include admin, engineer, and operator, and the preset password
is Changeme. The preceding usernames are intended for administrators, engineers, and
operators, respectively.
● To ensure system security, change the preset password when you log in for the first
time.

----End

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1007
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Setting Parameters on the WebUI (SMU11B)

Selecting a Language
The SMU11B supports English, Chinese, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian,
Italian, German, Turkish, and Japanese.

Figure 4-209 Selecting a language


Setting the Date and Time

Figure 4-210 Setting the date and time


(Optional) Disabling the Door Status Alarm Function
NO TE

If the power system is not connected to any door status sensor, disable the door status
alarm function.

Step 1 Set Alarm Enable to Disable and click Submit.
Path: System Settings > Alarm Parameters > Door Sensor> Door Open Alarm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1008
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-211 Disabling the door status alarm function


----End

Setting Basic Battery Parameters

Basic battery parameters are fundamental for the SMU to manage batteries and
should be set based on the actual number and capacity of battery strings
connected.


NO TICE

● Incorrectly setting basic battery parameters affects battery charge and
discharge management and reduces battery lifespan.
● If no battery is connected to the power system, set Battery n Connected to No
and click Submit. Path: Monitoring > Acid Battery Group > Running
Parameter > Basic Parameters


Figure 4-212 Setting battery parameters (no battery connected)


Step 1 Set the battery detect way.

Path: Monitoring > Power System > Running Parameter > Basic Parameters

Step 2 Optional: (Optional) Set lead-acid battery parameters.

Path: Monitoring > Acid Battery Group > Running Parameter > Basic
Parameters

Step 3 Optional: (Optional) Set lithium battery parameters.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1009
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Path: Monitoring > Lithium Battery Group > Running Parameter > Basic
Parameters

----End

Configuring IO Ports
You can set the IO ports on the SMU panel to dry contact inputs or outputs based
on site requirements.

Figure 4-213 Configuring IO ports


Setting Alarm Actions for Dry Contact Outputs
You can set alarm actions for dry contact outputs based on site requirements. The
initial status is as follows: When an alarm is generated, dry contacts are closed;
when no alarm is generated, dry contacts are open.

Figure 4-214 Setting alarm actions for drt contact outputs


Setting Alarm Conditions for Dry Contact Inputs
You can set alarm conditions for dry contact inputs based on site requirements.
For example, if DIN1 Alarm Condition is set to Close, the SMU generates a DIN1
Alarm for dry contact input DIN1 when it is closed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1010
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-215 Setting alarm conditions for dry contact inputs


Clearing Associations Between Alarms and Dry Contacts

You can clear associations between all alarms and each dry contact output.

Figure 4-216 Clearing associations between alarms and dry contacts


Setting the Alarm Enable Option, Alarm Severity, and Associated Relays
● You can enable or disable each alarm, set the severity for each alarm, or
associate each alarm with relays that have specific dry contact outputs based
on site requirements.
● If an alarm is enabled, the SMU generates the alarm when the alarm
condition is met. If an alarm is disabled, the SMU does not generate the
alarm.
● Alarm severities are classified into critical, major, minor, and warning.

Step 1 Access the Alarm Parameters menu.

Path: System Settings > Alarm Parameters

Step 2 Select a device type and set alarm parameters.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1011
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-217 Setting the alarm enable option, alarm severity, and associated
relays


----End

4.2.4.5.3 Connecting the Battery Supply

Prerequisites


NO TICE

To avoid damage to batteries, switch on the battery circuit breaker only after you
correctly set battery parameters on the SMU.

Procedure
1. Switch on the battery circuit breakers.
2. Check whether the batteries communicate properly. If the run indicator on a
battery is steady on, the battery communicates properly with the monitoring
device. If it blinks fast (4 Hz), the communication between them is
interrupted. If so, check whether the communications cable is properly
connected.
3. Observe the batteries for 15 minutes. The batteries are running properly if the
alarm indicators are off.
4. Set all the circuit breakers to the appropriate status based on site
requirements.
5. Observe the power system for 15 minutes. If no alarm (except the door status
alarm) is generated on the SMU during this period, the current and voltage
for batteries and loads are normal.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1012
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

If the door status sensor is not configured, you need to disable the door status sensor alarm
function. For details, see Commissioning > SMU11B > Setting Parameters on the WebUI
(SMU11B) > Setting the Alarm Enable Option, Alarm Severity, and Associated Relays.

4.2.4.6 NMS connection configuration
This chapter describes how to set up a Layer 2 route between the NMS and the AC
power box to connect and manage the SMU11B communication module through
the NMS.

4.2.4.6.1 Network Configuration Scenario
This topic describes how to set up a Layer 2 route between the NMS and the AC
power box.

Networking Requirements
Figure1 shows the typical networking of the NMS and AC power box.

Figure 4-218 Networking between the NMS and the AC power box


Device Port IP Address

Device A Left: GE1/0/0 192.168.0.1
Right: GE1/0/1

Device B Left: GE0/1/0 192.168.0.2
Right: GE0/1/1

SMU11B FE 192.168.0.3



Procedure
# Create a local CCC connection on Device B so that Device A and SMU11B can
communicate with each other.

<HUAWEI> system-view
<~HUAWEI> mpls
<*HUAWEI-mpls> commit
<~HUAWEI-mpls> quit
<~HUAWEI> mpls l2vpn
<*HUAWEI-l2vpn> commit

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1013
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

<~HUAWEI-l2vpn> quit
<~HUAWEI> ccc 1 interface GigabitEthernet0/1/0 out-interface GigabitEthernet0/1/1
# Create a local CCC connection on Device A so that the NMS and SMU11B can
communicate with each other.

<HUAWEI> system-view
<~HUAWEI> mpls
<*HUAWEI-mpls> commit
<~HUAWEI-mpls> quit
<~HUAWEI> mpls l2vpn
<*HUAWEI-l2vpn> commit
<~HUAWEI-l2vpn> quit
<~HUAWEI> ccc 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 out-interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1

NO TE

● The IP address of the management port on SMU11B must be in the same network
segment as that of the management port on Device A.
● If the IP address of the NCE server and the IP address of the management interface on
Device A are on the same network segment, the NCE server is directly connected to
1/0/0 on Device A.
● If the IP address of the NCE server is not on the same network segment as the IP
address of the management interface on Device A, connect interface 1/0/0 on Device A
to the switch directly connected to the management interface on Device A.

4.2.4.6.2 Interconnection Between the NMS and the SMU11B Communication
Module
This topic describes how to connect the SMU11B to the network management
system (NMS).

Prerequisites
● Ensure that the communication between the NMS server and the AC power
box is normal.
● You have Operator Group or higher permissions.

Procedure
Log in to iMaster NCE and add the SMU11B NE. For details, see "Creating a Single
Router, Switch, or Security NE" in Creating a Single Router/Switch/Security NE
"Basic NCE (IP Domain) Commissioning."

NO TE

When adding an NE, pay attention to the following points:
1. IP address: The value must be the same as the local IP address configured on the
SMU11B.
2. SNMP parameters: Keep consistent with the SNMP protocol configured on the SMU11B.
After the configuration is complete, you can manage and configure the AC power
box on the NMS.
4.2.5 Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-2KW-FE)

For devices that use a DC power supply in equipment rooms that offer only AC
power, you can install ETP4860-2KW-FEs.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1014
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.5.1 Planning Cable Routes

An ETP4860-2KW-FE provides one AC or HVDC input and a maximum of five
power outputs. As shown by (4) in Figure 4-219, the power outputs from left to
right include one 16 A circuit breaker, two 40 A circuit breakers, and two 63 A
circuit breakers. ETP4860-2KW-FEs possess communication and alarm capabilities,
support remote management and online upgrade, and feature hot-swappable
rectifiers and monitor modules.

Figure 4-219 shows the appearance of an ETP4860-2KW-FE. For details, see
Hardware Description > Power > ETP4860-2KW-FE Embedded Power.

Figure 4-219 Appearance of an ETP4860-2KW-FE


1. Power input 2. Monitoring 3. Rectifier 4. Load circuit 5. Battery
terminal module (used to breaker circuit breaker
SMU11B (used convert AC
to monitor and power into
manage the stable DC
power system) power)


Two methods are available for connecting an ETP4860-2KW-FE to a device,
depending on whether the NMS monitoring port of the power box is directly
connected to the IP network. Select either method as needed.

NO TE

An ETP4860-2KW-FE can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or a 300 mm or 600 mm deep
ETSI cabinet.
If an ETP4860 is installed in an A63B cabinet, the cabinet must use a convex door.

Connecting ETP4860-2KW-FEs to a Device

Two ETP4860-2KW-FE power boxes that work in 1+1 redundancy mode are
required. The cable connections between the power boxes and device are shown in
the following figure.

NO TE

The device in the following figure is for reference only.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1015
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-220 Connecting ETP4860-2KW-FEs to a 3 U device (NMS monitoring
ports connected to the IP network through the 3 U device)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1016
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-221 Connecting ETP4860-2KW-FEs to a device (NMS monitoring port
connected to the IP network through a 2 U device)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1017
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-61 Cable connections
Cable Cable Left or Upper Right or Remarks Cab
Num Type Part Lower Part le
ber Pre
par
ati
on

AC power Power source in 220 V AC or - See
cable the equipment 240 V/380 V "Ins
room HVDC input talli
port of power ng
box A Inp
ut
Po
wer
Cab
les.
"

AC power Power source in 220 V AC or Two power -
cable the equipment 240 V/380 V boxes work in
room HVDC input 1+1 backup
port of power mode.
box B

Ethernet FE electrical port FE electrical It is See
cable on the port on the recommended "Ins
monitoring device that cables be talli
module of power routed along ng
box A the left side. a
Co
mm
uni
cati
ons
Cab
le
(S
MU
11B
)."


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1018
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Cable Left or Upper Right or Remarks Cab
Num Type Part Lower Part le
ber Pre
par
ati
on

Ethernet FE electrical port FE electrical It is -
cable on the port on the recommended
monitoring device that cables be
module of power routed along
box B the left side.
The network
management
device
remotely
manages the
power box
through this
cable.

DC power DC output port of DC power It is See
cable power box A module 1 of recommended "Ins
the device that power talli
cables of a 5 U ng
device be DC
routed along Out
the left side. put
It is Po
recommended wer
that power Cab
cables of a 2 U les.
or 3 U device "
be routed
along the right
side.
NOTE
The power box
has different
output circuit
breakers. Select
a proper circuit
breaker based
on the device
type.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1019
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Cable Left or Upper Right or Remarks Cab
Num Type Part Lower Part le
ber Pre
par
ati
on

DC power DC output port of DC power It is -
cable power box B module 2 of recommended
the device that power
cables of a 5 U
device be
routed along
the left side.
It is
recommended
that power
cables of a 2 U
or 3 U device
be routed
along the right
side.

Service Service port or Network - -
cable network management
management device on the
port of the device IP network




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1020
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-222 Connecting ETP4860-2KW-FEs to a device (NMS monitoring ports
directly connected to the IP network)


The preceding uses a 3 U device as an example.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1021
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-62 Cable connections
Cable Cable Type Left or Upper Right or Lower Remarks Cab
Numbe Part Part le
r Pre
par
ati
on

AC power Power source in 220 V AC or 240 - See
cable the equipment V/380 V HVDC "Ins
room input port of talli
power box A ng
Inp
ut
Po
wer
Cab
les.
"

AC power Power source in 220 V AC or 240 Two power -
cable the equipment V/380 V HVDC boxes work
room input port of in 1+1
power box B backup
mode.

Ethernet FE electrical FE electrical It is See
cable port on the port of the recommende "Ins
monitoring network d that cables talli
module of management be routed ng
power box A device on an IP along the a
network left side. Co
mm
uni
cati
ons
Cab
le
(S
MU
11B
)."


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1022
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Cable Type Left or Upper Right or Lower Remarks Cab
Numbe Part Part le
r Pre
par
ati
on

Ethernet FE electrical FE electrical It is -
cable port on the port of the recommende
monitoring network d that cables
module of management be routed
power box B device on an IP along the
network left side.
The network
managemen
t device
remotely
manages the
power box
through this
cable.

DC power DC output port DC power It is See
cable of power box A module 1 of the recommende "Ins
device d that power talli
cables of a 5 ng
U device be DC
routed along Out
the left side. put
It is Po
recommende wer
d that power Cab
cables of a 2 les.
U or 3 U "
device be
routed along
the right
side.
NOTE
The power
box has
different
output
circuit
breakers.
Select a
proper
circuit
breaker
based on the
device type.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1023
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cable Cable Type Left or Upper Right or Lower Remarks Cab
Numbe Part Part le
r Pre
par
ati
on

DC power DC output port DC power It is -
cable of power box B module 2 of the recommende
device d that power
cables of a 5
U device be
routed along
the left side.
It is
recommende
d that power
cables of a 2
U or 3 U
device be
routed along
the right
side.


4.2.5.2 Installing a Subrack (ETP4860-2KW-FE)

Procedure
1. (Optional) Remove the cover of the RTN ground bar at the bottom of the
subrack.

NO TE

The RTN ground bar does not require grounding and is not grounded by default.
However, it can be grounded if necessary.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1024
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-223 Removing the cover of the RTN ground bar at the bottom of the
subrack


2. (Optional) Install an RTN ground cable.

Figure 4-224 Installing an RTN ground cable


3. To ensure good heat dissipation, it is recommended that the distance between
the AC power box and the rear door of the cabinet be greater than 21 mm.
You can relocate the mounting ears based on the cabinet depth.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1025
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-225 Installation positions for mounting ears


(1) Adjustable positions (2) Default positions

When mounting ears are installed in a cabinet with a shallow depth, such as
an A63B, you are advised to install screws as shown in the following figure to
reserve sufficient space for heat dissipation and prevent the system from
generating alarms after long-term running.

Figure 4-226 Installation positions of mounting ears (applicable to the A63B
cabinet)


(1) Adjustable positions (2) Default positions

4. (Optional) When installing the power box in an ETSI cabinet, you need to
install 19-inch-to-ETSI mounting ears onto existing 19-inch ones.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1026
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-227 Installing 19-inch-to-ETSI mounting ears


5. Install the subrack in a 19-inch cabinet.


CA UTION

When installing an ETP4860-2KW-FE (AC), you are advised to reserve at least
a space of 2 U above and below the power box to ensure good heat
dissipation.

Figure 4-228 Installing a subrack


6. Install a ground cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1027
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-229 Installing a ground cable


(1) Site ground bar

4.2.5.3 Installing Components (ETP4860-2KW-FE)

4.2.5.3.1 Installing an SMU11B

Procedure
1. Gently push the monitor module into its slot along the guide rails.
2. Push the monitor module handle upwards until it is in place.

Figure 4-230 Installing a monitor module


NO TICE

If no battery string is connected to the power supply system, you must log in
to the power supply system to set Battery n Connected to No, and click
Submit. For details, see Commissioning > SMU11B.

4.2.5.3.2 Installing a Rectifier

Prerequisites
The rectifier is intact after being unpacked.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1028
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● If the rectifier is damaged, contact your local Huawei office.
● The rectifier slot presents a risk of electric shock. Do not touch the slot with
your hands.
● High temperature is generated around the air exhaust vent when the rectifier is
running. Do not touch the vent with your hands or cover the vent with cables
or other objects.
● In an indoor environment, you are advised to power on the rectifier within
seven days after the package is removed. If the rectifier cannot be powered on
in a timely manner, place it in an indoor environment that is dry and without
corrosive gas.
● In an outdoor environment, you are advised to power on the rectifier within 24
hours after the package is removed. If the rectifier cannot be powered on in a
timely manner, place it in an indoor environment that is dry and without
corrosive gas.
● Cover the vacant slots with filler panels.

Procedure
1. Push the locking latch towards the left.
2. Draw the handle downwards.
3. Gently push the rectifier into its slot along the guide rails.
4. Push the handle upwards.
5. Push the locking latch towards the right to secure the handle.

Figure 4-231 Installing a rectifier


4.2.5.4 Installing Cables (ETP4860-2KW-FE)

4.2.5.4.1 (Optional) Installing a Dry Contact Signal Cable

Procedure
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to hold the contact in a dry contact port.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1029
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Install a signal cable in the dry contact port.
3. Remove the screwdriver and check that the signal cable is securely connected
to the dry contact.

Figure 4-232 Installing a dry contact signal cable


NO TE

Connect the output dry contacts to IO1 and IO2 ports.

4.2.5.4.2 (Optional) Installing Signal Cables for a Battery Temperature Sensor
If a battery temperature sensor is required, perform the following steps to install
the cable.
Connect the signal cable of the battery temperature sensor to the SIG2 BTE port
on the monitor module.


NO TICE

● Ensure that the metal probe of the temperature sensor is not in contact with a
metal or an energized conductor.
● The battery temperature sensor should not be directly exposed to sunlight, be
placed near an air vent or air conditioner vent, or come into direct contact with
a heat source or cold source.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1030
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-233 Installing signal cables for a battery temperature sensor


(1) Battery temperature sensor

4.2.5.4.3 (Optional) Installing Signal Cables for a Door Status Sensor

Connect the signal cable of the door status sensor to the SIG2 GAT port on the
monitor module.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1031
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-234 Installing signal cables for a door status sensor


(1) Door status sensor

4.2.5.4.4 (Optional) Installing an Alarm Signal Cable for the Cable Distribution
Frame

Connect the alarm signal cable for the cable distribution frame to the VD2 port on
the monitor module.

Figure 4-235 Installing an alarm signal cable for the cable distribution frame


4.2.5.4.5 Installing a Communications Cable (SMU11B)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1032
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NCE-based Management

If you use NCE to remotely manage the power system, connect the FE port on the
SMU11B to the device.

Figure 4-236 Installing a communications cable


(1) UI terminal (2) FE port

Third-Party NMS-based Management (SNMP)

Connect the FE port on the SMU to the device using a network cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1033
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-237 Installing a communications cable (third-party NMS-based
management)


(1) SNMP-based NMS terminal (2) FE port

4.2.5.4.6 Installing DC Output Power Cables

Prerequisites


DANGER

● Switch off the upstream input circuit breaker, and attach warning labels such as
"Operation Prohibited."
● Before installing the power cable, set the status of all the circuit breakers in the
subrack to OFF.

Procedure
1. Use cables (cross-sectional area: 0.75 mm2–16 mm2) and cord end terminals
to prepare DC output power cables.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1034
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-63 Cables
Cross-sectional Recommended Cord End Terminal Specifications
Area

0.75 mm2-6 mm2 Pre-insulated and with an insertion depth of 12 mm–
18 mm (supporting bare wire installation)

10 mm2 Pre-insulated and with an insertion depth of 18 mm
(supporting bare wire installation)

16 mm2 Not pre-insulated and with an insertion depth of 18
mm (supporting bare wire installation)



NO TE

Cord end terminals are recommended. When bare wires are used, you are advised to
add heat shrink tubing to ensure that the wire ends are not split.

Figure 4-238 Preparing a cord end terminal


(1) Cable (2) Cord end terminal (3) Crimping tool

2. Installing DC output power cables.
a. Use a flat-head screwdriver (2 mm wide) to push the slider in a wiring
hole in place.
b. Install a battery cable at the wiring hole.
c. Remove the screwdriver and ensure that the battery cable is securely
installed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1035
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-239 Installing DC output power cables


(1) Device

4.2.5.4.7 Installing Battery Cables


DANGER

● Smoking and sources of ignition are prohibited near batteries.
● Flip the battery switch to OFF before installing batteries.
● Comply with regulations and warnings issued by manufacturers.
● Use tools with insulated handles. Using tools without insulated handles may
cause personal injury or result in batteries burning out.
● Before handling batteries, wear goggles, rubber gloves, and protective clothes.
Remove all conductive objects, such as watches, bracelets, bangles, and rings.
● If battery acid gets into your eyes, rinse with cold water for more than 15
minutes and seek medical advice immediately. If battery acid comes into
contact with skin or clothing, wash with soap and water immediately.
● Do not use conductors such as metal to simultaneously touch two or more
battery terminals or touch battery terminals and grounded objects (for
example, the battery compartment); otherwise, transient short circuits occur,
which may produce sparks or explosions.
● During battery installation, ensure that the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly connected to prevent reverse polarity. Connect the
negative battery cable and then the positive battery cable.
● Secure battery cables with the torque specified in battery documentation. Loose
connections will result in excessive voltage drops or cause batteries to burn out
when the current increases.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1036
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
1. Prepare battery cables using cables with a cross-sectional area ranging from
10 mm2 to 16 mm2 and cord end terminals.

Table 4-64 Preparing cables
Cross-sectional Area Recommended Cord End Terminal
Specifications

10 mm2 Pre-insulated and with an insertion
depth of 18 mm

16 mm2 Pre-insulated and with an insertion
depth of 18 mm


Figure 4-240 Preparing a cord end terminal


(1) Cable (2) Cord end terminal (3) Crimping tool

2. Install battery cables.


CA UTION

Do not connect battery cables to load circuit breakers. This is because
batteries do not support current limiting and may bulge or fail due to
overcharge.

a. Use a flat-head screwdriver (2 mm wide) to push the sliding block
corresponding to the wiring hole in place.
b. Install the battery cables in wiring holes.
c. Take out the screwdriver and ensure that the battery cables are securely
installed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1037
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-241 Installing a lead-acid battery cable


(1) Battery

Figure 4-242 Installing a lithium battery cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1038
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-65 Mapping between lithium battery and SMU communications
ports

Lithium Battery Communications Port SMU
Communicatio
ns Port

1 RS485 T+ -

2 RS485 T-

3 NC

4 RS485 R+

5 RS485 R-

6 NC

7 CANH CAN+

8 CANL CAN-



4.2.5.4.8 Installing Input Power Cables

The system supports the 220 V AC single-phase input, 110 V AC dual-live wire
input. Choose the appropriate type of input based on site requirements.

Installing 220 V AC Single-Phase Input Power Cables

Procedure
1. Remove the protective cover from AC input terminals.
2. Connect the AC input power cables to the corresponding AC input terminals.

Figure 4-243 Installing 220 V AC single-phase input power cables


L: live wire N: neutral wire PE: ground cable

3. Reinstall the protective cover for the AC input terminals.

Installing 110 V AC Dual-Live Wire Input Power Cables

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1039
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
1. Remove the protective cover from AC input terminals.
2. Connect the AC input power cables to the corresponding AC input terminals.

Figure 4-244 Installing 110 V AC dual-live wire input power cables


L1: live wire L1 L2: live wire L2 PE: ground cable

3. Reinstall the protective cover for the AC input terminals.

Installing DC Input Power Cables

Procedure
1. Remove the protective cover from DC input terminals.
2. Connect the DC input power cables to the corresponding DC input terminals.

Figure 4-245 Installing DC input power cables


HV+: HVDC positive HV-: HVDC negative PE: ground cable
terminal terminal

3. Reinstall the protective cover for the DC input terminals.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1040
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.5.5 Commissioning


NO TICE

● The following commissioning procedure may result in power failure or alarm
generation. Inform the alarm center before and after the operations.
● Device commissioning involves various technologies. Only trained personnel are
allowed to perform commissioning. Perform operations in strict compliance
with the manual.
● The commissioning is performed with power on. During commissioning, stand
on dry insulating objects, and remove conductive articles such as watches and
rings. Use insulated tools.
● During operation, do not come into contact with two electric bodies that have
different currents.
● During commissioning, check that the status of the related unit or component
meets requirements before turning on any switch.
● If you do not want others to operate the power distribution device during your
work, attach the sign "Operation in Progress: Do Not Close the Circuit" to the
device.
● During commissioning, immediately shut down the device if any fault is
detected, and rectify the fault before proceeding with the commissioning.

4.2.5.5.1 Connecting the AC or DC Power Supply

Procedure
1. Measure the input voltage of the upstream input circuit breaker. The value
should range from 85 V AC to 300 V AC or from 85 V DC to 420 V DC.
2. Switch on the upstream input circuit breaker and measure the output voltage
of the circuit breaker. The value should range from 85 V AC to 300 V AC or
from 85 V DC to 420 V DC.
3. Check that the indicators on the rectifiers are steady green.
4. Measure the voltage between the –48 V busbar and the RTN+ busbar. The
value should range from –42 V DC to –58 V DC.

4.2.5.5.2 SMU11B

NO TE

If the IP address of the SMU11B is changed on the WebUI, record the IP address for future
login.

Logging In to the WebUI

Step 1 Connect the network port on a PC to the FE port on the SMU using a network
cable.
Step 2 Configure the PC IP address to be on the same network segment as the SMU IP
address.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1041
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

The SMU has a default IP address of 192.168.0.10, a subnet mask of
255.255.255.0, and a default gateway address of 192.168.0.1. On the PC, set the IP
address to 192.168.0.11, subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, and default gateway
address to 192.168.0.1.

Figure 4-246 Setting the PC IP address (Windows 10 as an example)


Step 3 Enter https://local IP address of the SMU (https://192.168.0.10 by default) in the
address box of the browser and press Enter to access the WebUI login page.

Figure 4-247 Login page


NO TE

● The preset usernames include admin, engineer, and operator, and the preset password
is Changeme. The preceding usernames are intended for administrators, engineers, and
operators, respectively.
● To ensure system security, change the preset password when you log in for the first
time.

----End

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1042
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Setting Parameters on the WebUI (SMU11B)

Selecting a Language
The SMU11B supports English, Chinese, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian,
Italian, German, Turkish, and Japanese.

Figure 4-248 Selecting a language


Setting the Date and Time

Figure 4-249 Setting the date and time


(Optional) Disabling the Door Status Alarm Function
NO TE

If the power system is not connected to any door status sensor, disable the door status
alarm function.

Step 1 Set Alarm Enable to Disable and click Submit.
Path: System Settings > Alarm Parameters > Door Sensor> Door Open Alarm


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1043
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-250 Disabling the door status alarm function


----End

Setting Basic Battery Parameters

Basic battery parameters are fundamental for the SMU to manage batteries and
should be set based on the actual number and capacity of battery strings
connected.


NO TICE

● Incorrectly setting basic battery parameters affects battery charge and
discharge management and reduces battery lifespan.
● If no battery is connected to the power system, set Battery n Connected to No
and click Submit. Path: Monitoring > Acid Battery Group > Running
Parameter > Basic Parameters


Figure 4-251 Setting battery parameters (no battery connected)


Step 1 Set the battery detect way.

Path: Monitoring > Power System > Running Parameter > Basic Parameters

Step 2 Optional: (Optional) Set lead-acid battery parameters.

Path: Monitoring > Acid Battery Group > Running Parameter > Basic
Parameters

Step 3 Optional: (Optional) Set lithium battery parameters.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1044
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Path: Monitoring > Lithium Battery Group > Running Parameter > Basic
Parameters

----End

Configuring IO Ports
You can set the IO ports on the SMU panel to dry contact inputs or outputs based
on site requirements.

Figure 4-252 Configuring IO ports


Setting Alarm Actions for Dry Contact Outputs
You can set alarm actions for dry contact outputs based on site requirements. The
initial status is as follows: When an alarm is generated, dry contacts are closed;
when no alarm is generated, dry contacts are open.

Figure 4-253 Setting alarm actions for drt contact outputs


Setting Alarm Conditions for Dry Contact Inputs
You can set alarm conditions for dry contact inputs based on site requirements.
For example, if DIN1 Alarm Condition is set to Close, the SMU generates a DIN1
Alarm for dry contact input DIN1 when it is closed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1045
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-254 Setting alarm conditions for dry contact inputs


Clearing Associations Between Alarms and Dry Contacts

You can clear associations between all alarms and each dry contact output.

Figure 4-255 Clearing associations between alarms and dry contacts


Setting the Alarm Enable Option, Alarm Severity, and Associated Relays
● You can enable or disable each alarm, set the severity for each alarm, or
associate each alarm with relays that have specific dry contact outputs based
on site requirements.
● If an alarm is enabled, the SMU generates the alarm when the alarm
condition is met. If an alarm is disabled, the SMU does not generate the
alarm.
● Alarm severities are classified into critical, major, minor, and warning.

Step 1 Access the Alarm Parameters menu.

Path: System Settings > Alarm Parameters

Step 2 Select a device type and set alarm parameters.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1046
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-256 Setting the alarm enable option, alarm severity, and associated
relays


----End

4.2.5.5.3 Connecting the Battery Supply

Prerequisites


NO TICE

To avoid damage to batteries, switch on the battery circuit breaker only after you
correctly set battery parameters on the SMU.

Procedure
1. Switch on the battery circuit breakers.
2. Check whether the batteries communicate properly. If the run indicator on a
battery is steady on, the battery communicates properly with the monitoring
device. If it blinks fast (4 Hz), the communication between them is
interrupted. If so, check whether the communications cable is properly
connected.
3. Observe the batteries for 15 minutes. The batteries are running properly if the
alarm indicators are off.
4. Set all the circuit breakers to the appropriate status based on site
requirements.
5. Observe the power system for 15 minutes. If no alarm (except the door status
alarm) is generated on the SMU during this period, the current and voltage
for batteries and loads are normal.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1047
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

If the door status sensor is not configured, you need to disable the door status sensor alarm
function. For details, see Commissioning > SMU11B > Setting Parameters on the WebUI
(SMU11B) > Setting the Alarm Enable Option, Alarm Severity, and Associated Relays.

4.2.5.6 NMS Interconnection Configuration

This section describes how to set up a Layer 2 route between the NMS and AC
power box for the NMS to connect to and manage the SMU11B.

4.2.5.6.1 Network Configuration Scenario

This section describes how to set up a Layer 2 connection between the NMS and
AC power box.

Networking Requirements

Figure 4-257 shows the typical network diagram of the NMS and AC power box.

Figure 4-257 Network diagram of the NMS and AC power box


Device Port IP Address

Device A Left: GE1/0/0 192.168.0.1
Right: GE1/0/1

Device B Left: GE0/1/0 192.168.0.2
Right: GE0/1/1

SMU11B FE 192.168.0.3



Procedure

# Create a local CCC connection on Device B so that Device A and the SMU11B
can communicate with each other.

<HUAWEI> system-view
<~HUAWEI> mpls
<*HUAWEI-mpls> commit
<~HUAWEI-mpls> quit
<~HUAWEI> mpls l2vpn
<*HUAWEI-l2vpn> commit
<~HUAWEI-l2vpn> quit
<~HUAWEI> ccc 1 interface GigabitEthernet0/1/0 out-interface GigabitEthernet0/1/1

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1048
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

# Create a local CCC connection on Device A so that the NMS and SMU11B can
communicate with each other.

<HUAWEI> system-view
<~HUAWEI> mpls
<*HUAWEI-mpls> commit
<~HUAWEI-mpls> quit
<~HUAWEI> mpls l2vpn
<*HUAWEI-l2vpn> commit
<~HUAWEI-l2vpn> quit
<~HUAWEI> ccc 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 out-interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1

NO TE

● The IP address of the management port on the SMU11B must be on the same network
segment as that of the management port on Device A.
● If the IP address of the NCE server and that of the management port on Device A are on
the same network segment, the NCE server can be directly connected to GE1/0/0 on
Device A.
● If the IP address of the NCE server is not on the same network segment as that of the
management port on Device A, connect GE1/0/0 on Device A to a switch that is directly
connected to the management port on Device A.

4.2.5.6.2 Interconnection Between the NMS and SMU11B

This section describes how to connect the SMU11B to the NMS.

Prerequisites
● The communication between the NMS server and AC power box is normal.
● You have Operator Group or higher permissions.

Procedure

Log in to iMaster NCE and add the SMU11B as an NE. For details, see "Creating a
Single Router, Switch, or Security NE" in iMaster NCE-IP Product Documentation.

NO TE

When adding an NE, pay attention to the following points:
1. IP address: It must be the same as the local IP address configured for the SMU11B.
2. SNMP parameters: The settings must be consistent with those for the SMU11B.

After the configuration is complete, you can manage and configure the AC power
box on the NMS.
4.2.6 Electrical Subrack Installation

Context

Electrical subracks need to be installed in a power application scenario where
customers require that devices comply with Class 1 specifications of IEC 61850-3,
and do not need to be installed in other application scenarios. The electrical
subrack is applicable only to the standard 19-inch cabinet and used with
NetEngine 8000 M6.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1049
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

This section details only how to install an electrical subrack. For details about how
to install the chassis, see "Installing a Chassis in a Standard 19-Inch Cabinet".

Tools and Materials
● Screwdriver
● M4x6 screws and M6 screws
● Connecting plate

Procedure
1. Tighten the M4 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 1.2 N m.
Place an electrical subrack under the chassis, and secure it to the chassis using
a total of six connecting plates and 20 screws (three connecting plates and 10
screws on both the left and right sides of the chassis).

NO TE

The rubber washers on the electrical subrack may cause misalignment between
mounting holes on the connecting plate and those on the device. Therefore, you need
to press the chassis downwards until the mounting holes are aligned. Then tighten the
screws.

Figure 4-258 Installing Electrical Subrack


2. Tighten the M6 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 3 N m.
Install the chassis with an electrical subrack to the cabinet.

NO TE

The electrical subrack has a ground point. You can connect the ground cable as
required.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1050
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-259 Installing Electrical Subrack on cabinet


4.2.7 Installing Simple Box-shaped Air Deflectors

Background

When a device is installed in a cabinet, an air deflector can be used to increase the
air intake space, streamline air ducts, and improve the heat dissipation capability
of the cabinet. An air deflector is applicable to a 300 mm deep cabinet and is used
together with a 1 U, 2 U, 3 U, or 5 U device.

An air deflector is installed at the upper and lower parts of the device. Air flows in
from the left side and exhausts from the right side. When installing the air
deflector, ensure that the air deflector is closely installed with the device and no
gap exists between the air deflector and the device. Two air deflectors need to be
added to each device. Each air deflector occupies 2 U space. Therefore, a total of 4
U space needs to be added. Three air deflectors need to be installed for two
devices, requiring a total of 6 U space. The rest can be deduced by analogy.

This section describes only how to install an air deflector. For details about how to
install a chassis, see "Installing a Chassis."

Prerequisites

Determine whether to adjust the position of the protruding module of the air
deflector based on whether the cabinet is a convex door or a flat door.

● If the cabinet has a convex door, perform the following steps to install a
convex door.
● For a flat-door cabinet, loosen the four screws on both sides of the air
deflector and push the protruding module in front of the air deflector
inwards.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1051
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


Tighten the screws on the side to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.), and then proceed with
the subsequent installation.


Installing an Air Deflector in an ETSI Cabinet with Middle Columns
1. Install floating nuts onto the cabinet.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1052
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M6 screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.)
and install the air deflector in the cabinet.


Installing an Air Deflector in an ETSI Cabinet with Front Columns
1. Install floating nuts onto the cabinet.


2. Remove the delivered mounting brackets and tighten the screws to 1.4 N·m
(12.39 lbf·in.).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1053
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


3. Move the mounting brackets to the front of the chassis, and then install the
mounting brackets on the chassis.


4. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M6 screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.)
and install the air deflector in the cabinet.


NO TE

The installation of the air deflector in the convex door cabinet is used as an example.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1054
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Installation Diagram
Figure 4-260 and Figure 4-261 show the air deflectors and chassis installed in a
convex cabinet and a flat door cabinet respectively.

Figure 4-260 Installation in a cabinet with a convex door


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1055
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-261 Installation in a flat door cabinet


NO TE

This section uses a 2 U chassis installed in an ETSI cabinet with front columns as an
example.
4.2.8 Installing a Chassis in Cabinet

Precautions
● Ensure that the cabinet has been properly installed before installing devices in
the cabinet. The cabinet can be installed on an ESD floor or concrete floor.
● No guide rail is required during device installation. If a guide rail is installed,
do not install a device in a position close to the guide rail. If necessary,
remove the guide rail.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1056
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● When installing devices, ensure that the total heat consumption of all devices
in the cabinet is less than or equal to the heat dissipation capability of the
cabinet.
● To prevent heat dissipation from being affected by air return, devices must be
installed at an interval of 2 U or more in the cabinet. In addition, the middle-
column cabinets support device stacking.
● Ensure that heat dissipation holes on the panel are not blocked.
● When the chassis is installed together with other equipment in the same
cabinet, do not install the chassis near the air exhaust vent of other equipment.
● Determine whether the air exhaust vent affects adjacent devices to avoid high
temperature of adjacent devices.

Installing a Chassis in a Standard 19-Inch Cabinet
1. Fix floating nuts and M6 screws in the correct holes.


NO TE

When tightening floating nuts, ensure a minimum distance of 75 mm between a
chassis side and its adjacent column for ventilation.
2. Tighten the M3 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 0.55 N m.
Install the cable management frame in the chassis.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1057
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


3. Tighten the M4 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 1.2 N m.
Attach a PGND cable to the chassis through a two-hole or one-hole terminal.
The PGND cable can be installed on the front or side of the chassis.


4. Tighten the M6 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 3 N m.
Install the chassis in the cabinet.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1058
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Installing a Chassis in an ETSI Cabinet with Front Columns
1. Tighten the M3 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 0.55 N m.
Install the cable management frame in the chassis.


2. Take out a pair of ETSI conversion mounting ears from the auxiliary material
package. Use a torque screwdriver to install the ETSI conversion mounting
ears on the left and right mounting ears using M6 screws with a torque of 3
N m.


3. Tighten the M4 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 1.2 N m.
Attach a PGND cable to the chassis through a two-hole or one-hole terminal.
The PGND cable can be installed on the front or side of the chassis.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1059
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


4. Tighten the M6 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 3 N m.
Install the chassis in the cabinet.


Installing a Chassis in an ETSI Cabinet with Middle Columns
1. Tighten the M3 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 0.55 N m.
Install the cable management frame in the chassis.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1060
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Tighten the M4 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 1.2 N m.
Attach a PGND cable to the chassis through a two-hole or one-hole terminal.
The PGND cable can be installed on the front or side of the chassis.


3. Remove the 19-inch mounting ear that has already been installed on the
other side of the chassis. Move this mounting ear to the position at the
middle of the cabinet's width and install the remaining ETSI conversion
mounting ear on this mounting ear. Take out a 19-inch mounting ear and a
pair of ETSI conversion mounting ears from the auxiliary material package.
Install one ETSI conversion mounting ear on the 19-inch mounting ear and
then install them on the left side (the side with cable management frames) of
the chassis. M6 screws are used to install ETSI conversion mounting ears on
19-inch mounting ears with a torque of 3 N m.


4. Tighten the M4 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 1.2 N m.
Install the 19-inch mounting ears and conversion mounting ears on both the
left and right sides of the chassis.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1061
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

5. Tighten the M6 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque of 3 N m.
Install the chassis in the cabinet.


4.2.9 Installation of components

4.2.9.1 Installing a Interface Board (PIC)


NO TICE

● Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots to ensure the device functions
correctly. For example, they ensure electromagnetic compatibility, prevent the
ingress of dust or foreign objects, and maintain proper airflow for heat
dissipation.
● Before installing cards in a device, make sure that the device and cards are all
free from water drips.
● When installing a card, ensure that ejector levers of the card are at the bottom
to avoid incorrect card installation. Incorrect card installation will damage the
connector at the rear of the card.
● When installing a card, gently push the card along the guide rails, and be
careful not to crash the card connector. Distorted card connector will cause pins
on the backplane connector to bend.
● If the connector of a card has collided with the slot or other objects, ask
Huawei professionals whether the card can still be installed. Installing a card
with distorted connector will cause damage to the device.

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1062
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap,
ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in close contact with your wrist, and insert
the other end into the ESD jack of the device or cabinet/rack.
2. (Optional) If the slot where the PIC will be installed has a filler panel, remove
the filler panel first.
3. Take a PIC out from the ESD bag and verify that the captive screws on the PIC
panel are loosened. Rotate the ejector levers of the PIC 45 degrees outward.
See step 1 in Figure 4-262.
4. With one hand supporting the PIC bottom and the other hand grasping the
PIC panel, slowly slide the PIC into the slot along the guide rails, until the PIC
cannot move forward. See step 2 in Figure 4-262.

NO TE

When inserting the PIC, align it with the slot and gently slide it in. If you close the
ejector levers before the PIC is fully seated, the terminal blocks may be compressed,
affecting the insertion and removal of PICs in adjacent slots. In this case, you need to
remove the PIC and re-insert it properly.
5. Rotate the ejector levers inward and push them until they cannot move
forward. See step 3 in Figure 4-262.
6. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on both ends of the
PIC panel. See step 4 in Figure 4-262. Tighten the captive screws with a
torque of 12 kgf·cm.

Figure 4-262 Installing a PIC


4.2.9.2 Installing Control Boards (CXP)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1063
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots to ensure the device functions
correctly. For example, they ensure electromagnetic compatibility, prevent the
ingress of dust or foreign objects, and maintain proper airflow for heat
dissipation.
● Before installing cards in a device, make sure that the device and cards are all
free from water drips.
● When installing a card, ensure that ejector levers of the card are at the bottom
to avoid incorrect card installation. Incorrect card installation will damage the
connector at the rear of the card.
● When installing a card, gently push the card along the guide rails, and be
careful not to crash the card connector. Distorted card connector will cause pins
on the backplane connector to bend.
● If the connector of a card has collided with the slot or other objects, ask
Huawei professionals whether the card can still be installed. Installing a card
with distorted connector will cause damage to the device.

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap,
ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in close contact with your wrist, and insert
the other end into the ESD jack of the device or cabinet/rack.
2. (Optional) If the slot where the CXP will be installed has a filler panel, remove
the filler panel first.
3. Take a CXP out from the ESD bag and verify that the captive screws on the
CXP panel are loosened. Rotate the ejector levers of the CXP 45 degrees
outward. See step 1 in Figure 4-263.
4. With one hand supporting theCXP bottom and the other hand grasping the
CXP panel, slowly slide the CXP into the slot along the guide rails, until the
CXP cannot move forward. See step 2 in Figure 4-263.

NO TE

When inserting the CXP, align it with the slot and gently slide it in. If you close the
ejector levers before the CXP is fully seated, the terminal blocks may be compressed,
affecting the insertion and removal of CXPs in adjacent slots. In this case, you need to
remove the CXP and re-insert it properly.
5. Rotate the ejector levers inward and push them until they cannot move
forward. See step 3 in Figure 4-263.
6. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on both ends of the
CXP panel. See step 4 in Figure 4-263. Tighten the captive screws with a
torque of 12 kgf·cm.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1064
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-263 Installing a CXP card


4.2.9.3 Installing an Optical Module


NO TICE

● Huawei-certified optical modules are strongly recommended because non-
Huawei-certified optical modules cannot ensure transmission reliability and
may affect service stability.
● Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before installing optical modules.
● Install dust-proof caps on optical ports without optical modules.
● Do not insert an optical module reversely. If an optical module cannot be
completely inserted into an optical port, do not force it into the port. Turn the
optical module over and try again.

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Dust caps
● (Optional) Optical port dust plug

Procedure
1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap,
ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in close contact with your wrist, and insert
the other end into the ESD jack of the device or cabinet/rack.
2. Insert the optical module into the optical port until the optical module is
secured in the optical port.
3. Connect the optical fibers in sequence.
4. Check the LINK indicator on the corresponding optical port. If the LINK
indicator is steady green, the optical module is working normally.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1065
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-264 Installing an optical module


Follow-up Procedure

If the optical module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier for
technical support.
4.2.10 Cable Routing Planning


4.2.10.1 DC Power Cable Routing Planning

Context

To ensure that power cables are connected in order, you are advised to plan power
cable routing.


NO TICE

Do not bundle or route outdoor cables (such as outdoor antenna feeders and
outdoor power cables) and indoor cables together in the cabinet or on the cable
tray.

Power Cable Routing Planning

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, it is recommended that DC power cables be routed
on the right side of the cabinet or rack.

For the NetEngine 8000 M6, it is recommended that cables, such as E1 cables,
optical fibers, and Ethernet cables, be routed on the left side of the cabinet or
rack, as shown in the Figure 4-265.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1066
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-265 Cable layout


WARNING

If cables are routed on the rear of a device, ensure that the cables do not block
the air vents of the device to achieve proper heat dissipation. Otherwise, the
cables may be damaged due to overheating.


NO TICE

If the cables on the left side are tightly bundled but the cabling space is still
insufficient, you can route the extra cables on the right side. In the case of right-
side cabling, keep the cables away from the upper and lower board, power
module, and fan module insertion/removal areas to facilitate future maintenance.

4.2.10.2 AC Power Cable Routing Planning

Context
To ensure that power cables are connected in order, you are advised to plan power
cable routing.


NO TICE

Do not bundle or route outdoor cables (such as outdoor antenna feeders and
outdoor power cables) and indoor cables together in the cabinet or on the cable
tray.

Power Cable Routing Planning
For the NetEngine 8000 M6, it is recommended that cables, such as AC power
cables, E1 cables, optical fibers, and Ethernet cables, be routed on the left side of
the cabinet or rack.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1067
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-266 shows the cable layout of an AC device.

Figure 4-266 Cable layout


WARNING

If cables are routed on the rear of a device, ensure that the cables do not block
the air vents of the device to achieve proper heat dissipation. Otherwise, the
cables may be damaged due to overheating.


NO TICE

If the cables on the left side are tightly bundled but the cabling space is still
insufficient, you can route the extra cables on the right side. In the case of right-
side cabling, keep the cables away from the upper and lower board, power
module, and fan module insertion/removal areas to facilitate future maintenance.

4.2.11 Installation of cables


4.2.11.1 Installing the Ground Cable

Cable Specifications

Item Description BOM number Remark

Ground cable of 25 mm2 25030431 The grounding
the cabinet cables must be
copper cables.
Ground cable of 10 mm2 25030698
the chassis


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1068
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Description BOM number Remark

Grounding Naked Crimping 14170056 The grounding
terminal of the Terminal,OT,10m cables must use
chassis m2,M6,Tin two-hole OT
Plating,Naked terminals and
Ring Terminal have antioxidant
coating.
Naked Crimping 14170123
Connector,OT2,10
mm2,M6,Tin
Plating

Naked Crimping 14170016
Terminal,OT,10m
m2,M6,Tin
Plating,Naked
Ring Terminal


Installing the Ground Cable
NO TE

● The chassis can be grounded in two ways. If the chassis is near the ground bar of the
equipment room, connect the ground cable of the chassis directly to the ground bar. If
the chassis is far away from the ground bar, connect the ground cable of the chassis to
the ground point of the cabinet.
● The ground bars of the Huawei A63B cabinet are located at the inner side of each
mounting bar. The screw-hole bars on which no coating exists are ground bars. You can
install the ground cable at any one of the screw holes.
● Before installing a DC chassis into an A63B cabinet, connect the ground cable to the
chassis. You cannot connect the ground cable to the grounding terminal on the side
panel of the chassis when the chassis is installed in the cabinet.


NO TICE

● All ground terminals must be secured using captive screws, as shown below:


● The grounding cables must connect to a common bonding network.

1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each ground cable.
2. Route the ground cable along the cable ladder, tighten the M8 screws using a
torque screwdriver with a torque of 13 N m, and connect the ground cable to

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1069
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

the grounding terminal on the cabinet top, as shown by callout 1 in Figure
4-267. Connect the other end of the ground cable to the ground bar of the
equipment room.
3. Connect the ground cable of the chassis to the grounding terminal of the
cabinet and tighten the M4 screws using a torque screwdriver with a torque
of 1.2 N m, as shown by callout 2 in Figure 4-267.
4. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each ground cable, as
shown by callout 3 in Figure 4-267.

Figure 4-267 Installing the ground cable for the DC chassis in the A63B cabinet


4.2.11.2 Installing E1 Cables

NO TE

● Avoid blocking boards when routing E1 cables.
1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each E1 cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1070
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

2. Route E1 cables along the cable management frames and insert the E1 cables
to the ports on the board.
– By default, E1 cables delivered with a device have a negative 45-degree
connector. If such a cable is used, directly connect the connector of the E1
cable to the port on the board and tighten captive screws using a Phillips
screwdriver. Figure 4-268 shows cable routing details.
NO TE

If there is no sufficient space for using a Phillips screwdriver, use a smaller-size
screwdriver.

Figure 4-268 Installing E1 Cables


– Legacy devices in live network equipment rooms use E1 cables with
positive 45-degree connectors. In addition, cables must be routed without
affecting installation and removal of fan modules. In this case, if you
want to use such cables, do not directly connect them to board ports.
Instead, use E1 transfer cables. That is, connect E1 cables with positive
45-degree connectors to E1 transfer cables and then connect the E1
transfer cables to board ports. Figure 4-269 shows cable routing details.
NO TE

The following figure uses a device as an example to describe how to use the E1
transfer cable. The device appearance may differ from that onsite. For details
about the E1 transfer cable, see "16xE1 Transfer Cable" located under Hardware
Description > Cables.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1071
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-269 Installing an E1 cable (reusing the E1 cable with a positive
45-degree connector on the existing device)


3. Connect the other ends of E1 cables to the DDF.
4. Use cable ties to fasten the E1 cables to the rack.
5. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each E1 cable.

4.2.11.3 Installing Optical Fibers


NO TICE

● Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before installing optical modules.
● The bending radius of a single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber is greater than or
equal to 10 mm, and the bending radius of a multi-mode A1b optical fiber is
greater than or equal to 30 mm.
● Cover empty optical interfaces and idle optical modules with dust caps.
● Do not bundle optical fibers too tightly. You must be able to conveniently
remove a single fiber from the bundle.
● Avoid blocking boards when routing optical fibers.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1072
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CA UTION

In a 300 mm deep cabinet with a flat door:
● When a QSFP28 or CFP2 optical module uses an attenuator, you are advised to
use ultra-short pigtail fibers.
● MPO optical fibers used by the QSFP28 or CFP2 optical module may push
against the door. Therefore, a convex-door cabinet or an open rack is
recommended.
● When using the ATOM GPS module, you are advised to purchase optical fibers
with curved SMA connectors.


WARNING

Optical fibers cannot block the air intake or exhaust vents. Otherwise, heat
dissipation of the device will be affected and the optical fibers will be aged.

Figure 4-270 The differences of LC connector of the ultra-short pigtail fiber and
LC connector of the short pigtail fiber


1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each optical fiber.
2. Arrange optical fibers into a bundle and feed them through the corrugated
pipe.
3. Wrap adhesive tapes on both ends of the corrugated pipe to protect it from
cuts, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-271.
4. Route the corrugated pipe along the cable ladder.
5. Insert the corrugated pipe through the dedicated cable hole on the cabinet
top to the cabinet about 100 mm and tie the pipe to the cabinet, as shown in
step 2 in Figure 4-271.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1073
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-271 Inserting the corrugated pipe


6. Install the optical module, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-272.
7. Route optical fibers along the cable tray, remove the dust caps from the
optical modules and optical fiber interfaces. Then connect the end of each
optical fiber to the corresponding optical interface, as shown in step 2 in
Figure 4-272.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1074
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-272 Installing Optical Fibers


8. Connect the other end of each optical fiber to the ODF.
9. Bundle optical fibers with binding straps at an interval of 150 mm and fasten
the optical fibers to the cable tray.
10. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each optical fiber.

4.2.11.4 Installing Network Cables


NO TICE

Before bundling network cables, use a network cable tester to test cable
connectivity.
In a 300 mm deep cabinet with a flat door, common shielded network cables are
not recommended when electrical modules are used. Instead, use Huawei-
customized conversion short pigtail shielded network cables.

NO TE

● Bundle the network cables in a rectangle shape. Ensure that the cable ties are evenly
spaced and face the same direction.
● Avoid blocking boards when routing network cables.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1075
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each network cable.
2. Route network cables along the cable tray and plug them into corresponding
interfaces.
3. Use a network cable tester to test the connectivity of network cables.
4. Use cable ties to bundle network cables at an interval of 150 mm and fasten
the network cables to the rack.
5. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each network cable.

Figure 4-273 Installing network cables


4.2.11.5 Installing 75-ohm coaxial cables

NO TE

● Avoid blocking boards when routing E1 cables.
1. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each coaxial cable.
2. Install the 155 Mbit/s copper transceiver, as shown in Figure 4-274(1).
3. Route the coaxial cable along the cable tray, connect it to the 155 Mbit/s
copper transceiver, and turn the connector clockwise to tighten the cable, as
shown in Figure 4-274(2) and (3).
4. Connect the coaxial cable to the peer device.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1076
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

5. Use cable ties to fasten the coaxial cable to the rack.
6. Attach permanent labels 20 mm from both ends of each coaxial cable.

Figure 4-274 Installing coaxial cables


4.2.12 Post-Installation Check


CA UTION

Before starting the post-installation check, make sure that the power switches of
the external power supply system are in OFF position.

After completing installation of a device, check the items listed in the following
table. If any item fails the check, check for the reason, reinstall the related
component, and check again. Ensure that all the items pass the check.

Check cabinets according to Table 4-66.

Table 4-66 Cabinet checklist

No. Item Method

1 The cabinet installation location complies Observe
with the engineering design document.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1077
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Item Method

2 Components are correctly installed in a Observe
cabinet. No component is loose or damaged.

3 All the bolts are tightened, especially those Observe
for electrical connections. The flat washers
and spring washers are installed completely
and properly.

4 The vertical deviation of a cabinet is less Measure
than 3 mm. You can use a plumb bob to
measure the vertical deviation.

5 The cabinets on the sides of the main path Measure
are aligned in a line, with a deviation of less
than 5 mm.

6 The surfaces of the cabinets in the same row Observe
are on the same plane. The cabinets are
deployed close to each other.

7 The front door of a cabinet can be opened Observe
and closed easily.

8 The cable outlets on the top and bottom of Observe
a cabinet are properly sealed.

9 Metal components in a cabinet have good Observe
electrical connections with the rack. Screw
mounting holes, guide rails, and mounting
brackets are not covered with insulation
painting.

10 Ground busbars of adjacent cabinets are Observe
connected through busbar cables.


Check cables according to Table 4-67.

Table 4-67 Cable checklist
No. Item Method

1 Routes of signal cables comply with the Observe
engineering design document.

2 Signal cables are not damaged or broken Observe
and have no splices.

3 Signal cable connectors are clean, intact, and Observe
correctly connected. Wires of each signal
cable are securely clamped in the
connectors.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1078
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Item Method

4 Signal cables do not cross each other and Observe
have sufficient slack at the bent part. (Signal
cables can be crossed within 1 m outside the
cabinet.)

5 Pigtail fibers outside a cabinet are laid in a Observe
protection pipe or trough and are not
squeezed by other cables or objects.

6 Optical fibers are led into a cabinet through Observe and
a corrugated pipe. The corrugated pipe measure
should be no longer than 100 mm and be
bundled on the cabinet.

7 The bend radius of optical fibers is 20 times Observe and
larger than their diameters. Generally, the measure
bend radius of optical fibers should be no
less than 40 mm. The path of optical fibers is
not blocked by any components.

8 Optical fibers are bundled by binding tape Observe
with appropriate force.

9 Each signal cable has correct, clear, and tidy Observe
labels attached on both ends.

10 The routes of power cables and ground Observe
cables conform to the engineering design
document, facilitating future maintenance
and system expansion.

11 All power cables and ground cables are Observe
complete copper wires without splices.
Coatings of power cables and ground cables
are intact.

12 Power cables and ground cables are Observe
connected properly.

13 Power cables and ground cables are routed Observe
in compliance with the engineering design
document, meeting power distribution
requirements.

14 Power cables and ground cables are Observe
separated from signal cables.

15 Power cables and ground cables are routed Observe
straightly and properly bundled, with
sufficient slack at the bend part.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1079
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Item Method

16 Power cables, ground cables, and power Observe
switches on power distribution boxes and
power distribution frames are identified by
correct, clear, and tidy labels.

17 The yellow-green ground cables are correctly Observe
connected. One end of a ground cable is
connected to the PGND ground bar in the
power distribution cabinet, and the other
end is connected to the ground point on a
cabinet. Screws at both ends of a ground
cable are securely fastened.


Check the installation environment according to Table 4-68.

Table 4-68 Installation environment checklist
No. Item Method

1 No fingerprints or other smears exist on the Observe
surface of the equipment cabinet.

2 No excessive adhesive tapes or cable ties Observe
exist on the cables.

3 No tapes, cable ties, wastepaper, or packing Observe
bags are left around the equipment.

4 All the items around the equipment are neat, Observe
clean, and intact.


4.2.13 Power-on Check


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1080
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Power-on Check Flowchart

Figure 4-275 Power-on Check Flowchart


NO TICE

The normal input voltage of the DC power supply system ranges from -40 V DC to
-72 V DC. The normal input voltage of the AC power supply system ranges from
90 V AC to 290 V AC.

Indicator description
Item Indicator Color Status Description

DC power PWR Green The PIU works normally and its
supply unit power supply is stable.
(PIU)
Off The PIU is powered off or the PIU
hardware is faulty.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1081
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Indicator Color Status Description

AC power PWR Green Steady green: The power module
supply unit is working properly and the
(PIU) power output is normal.
The green light flashes (0.1S on
and 0.1S off), indicating that the
program is loaded online.

Red The power supply is abnormal. An
output fault, overtemperature
protection alarm, or
communication fault occurs.

Off The PIU is powered off or the PIU
hardware is faulty.

Fan module FAN Green The fan module works normally.

Red The fan module fails.

Orange The fan module is not registered.

Off The fan module is not powered
on or the fan hardware is faulty.

Control STAT Green The board works normally.
Boards
Red The bopard hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not running or no
power is input.

ACTC Green ● If this indicator is steady green,
the board is in the working
control state.
● If this indicator is on for 100
ms and off for 100 ms
alternately , the data of the
equipment is backed up in
batch.

Off The board is in the protection
control state.

ALM Red A critical alarm is generated on
the device.

Orange A major alarm or a minor alarm
is generated on the device.

Off No alarm is generated on the
device.

Interface STAT Green The PIC works normally.
Board
Red The PIC hardware is faulty.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1082
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Indicator Color Status Description

Orange The PIC is installed in a slot for a
PIC and an alarm is reported or
the PIC is not loaded with the
logic.

Off The PIC is not powered on or
registered.

L/A Green ● If the indicator is steady on,
the link is normal.
● If the indicator is off, the link is
Down.
● If the indicator blinks, data is
being transmitted.

SRV Green The board has no CRC alarm.

Orange The board has CRC alarms.

Off The board is not running or no
power is input.



NO TE

To power off the device, turn off the circuit breaker corresponding to the power module in
the PDF.
4.2.14 (Optional) Checking Optical Power

The following table describes comparison between the transmit optical power of
50 Gbps optical modules and damaged optical power threshold at the receive end:

Optical Maximum Minimum Damaged Description
Module Type Average Average Optical
Transmit Transmit Power
Optical Optical Threshold at
Power Power the Receive
End

50GBASE-FR 3 -4.1 5.2 The damaged
optical power
50GBASE-LR 4.2 -4.5 5.2 threshold is
greater than
the maximum
average
transmit
optical power,
posting low
self-loop risks.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1083
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Optical Maximum Minimum Damaged Description
Module Type Average Average Optical
Transmit Transmit Power
Optical Optical Threshold at
Power Power the Receive
End

50GBASE-ER 6.6 0.4 -2.4 The damaged
optical power
threshold is
9dBm lower
than the
maximum
average
transmit
optical power
and 2.8dBm
lower than
the minimum
average
transmit
optical power,
posing high
self-loop risks.
In this case,
an optical
attenuator
must be
configured for
self-loop.


For applications of the 50 Gbps optical module supporting a distance of 40 km:
1. To ensure that the optical module runs stably for a long time, adjust the
receive optical power of the optical module to a value lower than -4 dB.
According to the IEEE 802.3 standard, if the receive optical power of the
optical module exceeds -2.3 dB, the optical module may be permanently
damaged.
2. Before connecting to the optical module, use an optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dB, the optical
module can be directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dB, add an optical
attenuator at the receive end to ensure that the receive optical power is less
than -4 dB. Alternatively, add an optical attenuator (no less than 10 dB is
recommended) before the interconnection, and then adjust the optical
attenuator based on the site requirements to prevent the optical module from
being damaged.
3. If a loopback occurs on the pigtail of the optical module or the optical
module is connected for a short distance, an optical attenuator must be
added. It is recommended that the optical attenuator be no less than 10 dB.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1084
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.15 Maintenance of the device

4.2.15.1 Basic Operation Process and Precautions

Context
To ensure that the device provides uninterrupted communication services for users
in networks, parts of a device are replaced mostly when the power is on.
Therefore, to ensure safe operation of a device and to minimize the impact of
parts replacement on services, maintenance personnel must strictly abide by the
basic operation process regulated in the manual, as shown in Figure 4-276.

Figure 4-276 Basic operation process of replacing parts


Procedure
1. Assess the feasibility of the operation.
During the process of troubleshooting or repairing a device, maintenance
personnel must assess whether the operation is feasible before replacing a
certain part.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1085
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

a. Whether the needed spare parts are available in the depot.
b. Whether the maintenance personnel is qualified for carrying out the
operation.

NO TE

Parts replacement can be carried out only by maintenance personnel who are
professionally trained. That is, maintenance personnel must familiarize
themselves with the functions of each part of the device, know the basic
operation process of parts replacement, and master the basic skills of parts
replacement.
c. Whether the risks of the operation can be controlled.


NO TICE

Parts replacement is risky to a certain extent. Hence, improper operation
may cause abnormal running of the device, service interruption, or
injuries to the personnel. Therefore, before replacing parts, maintenance
personnel must comprehensively evaluate the risks of the operation, that
is, whether the risks can be controlled through certain measures if the
system remains active. Maintenance personnel can replace the parts only
when the risks can be controlled. Otherwise, contact a Huawei local
office for timely technical support.

2. Prepare tools and spare parts.
After determining that the operation is feasible, maintenance personnel need
to prepare tools and spare parts.
a. Prepare spare parts.


NO TICE

Before replacing the component, contact Huawei engineers to see if a
license is required. You can apply for a license or use Stick License to
activate some license control items.

b. The common tools include the multimeter, cable tester, ESD wrist strap,
Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, needle-nose pliers, cutter, and
pliers.
3. Take protective measures.
Although parts replacement is risky, in most cases, however, maintenance
personnel can prevent the risks by taking protective measures. For example,
before replacing a master board, maintenance personnel can switch services
on the master board to the slave board. After the slave board runs properly,
maintenance personnel can replace the master board. In this manner,
interruption of services is prevented.
Therefore, to ensure safe operation of a device and to minimize the impact of
parts replacement on services, maintenance personnel must take related
protective measures.
4. Replace parts.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1086
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

After checking that the protective measures are available, maintenance
personnel can carry out parts replacement according to the regulations
specified in the manual.


DANGER

Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before replacing parts when the power
is on.
Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical
interface board or fiber.

5. Verify the functions of the new parts.
After completing part replacement, maintenance personnel must verify the
functions of the new parts through the testing methods described in this
section.

NO TE

The operation is considered successful only when the new parts are proved to be
running normally. Otherwise, contact Huawei technical support personnel.
6. Return and repair the faulty parts.
If a part that is replaced is confirmed to be faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card
and the faulty part to a Huawei local office for timely maintenance.


NO TICE

Carefully maintain the damaged control board that store data to prevent
information leak.
Before you replace the control board, delete data from it to prevent data
embezzlement.
Use either of the following methods to delete data from the control board:
● Connect the control board to a PC and then delete data from the control
board on the PC.
● Physically destroy the control board.

4.2.15.2 Replacing a Interface Board (PIC)

This section describes the precautions and replacement procedures for replacing
the PIC.

Impact on the System

Replacing the PIC board will interrupt services for about three to five minutes.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1087
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Precautions


DANGER

Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical interface
board or fiber.


NO TICE

● When replacing a part, make sure that the interface is not connected to any
optical fibers or cables.
● Optical interfaces and optical fiber connectors must be clean. Optical fiber
connectors must be properly capped to keep dusts away.

Tool
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver
● ESD bag

Procedure
1. Check the location of the PIC to be replaced.
Before pulling out an PIC to be replaced, you should first check the location of
the PIC, for example, the cabinet, chassis, and slot where the PIC resides.
Then, locate the PIC to be replaced in the chassis and attach a label to
identify the PIC.
2. Check whether the backplane connector corresponding to the slot has bent
pins.
3. Pull out the cables from the PIC and label the cables to mark the
corresponding interface numbers.
4. Run the power off slot slot-id card card-id command, and power off the PIC
to be replaced.
5. Pull out the PIC to be replaced from the chasiss.
a. Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground terminal to the ESD
jack on the rack.
b. Turn the Phillips screwdriver counter-clockwise to loosen the captive
screws, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-277.
c. Turn the ejector levers on the panel of the PIC outward. When the ejector
levers and the panel form a 45-degree angle, the PIC is removed from the
backplane, as shown in step 2 in Figure 4-277.
d. Hold the captive screws of the PIC and pull out the PIC, as shown in step
3 in Figure 4-277.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1088
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● During the operation, pull out the board slowly and smoothly to
prevent it from colliding with the neighboring boards and from
interrupting other running boards.
● When removing an board, do not touch the parts on it to avoid
damages to the board.

e. Place the removed PIC into the ESD bag.

Figure 4-277 Pull out the PIC


6. Insert a new PIC into the chasiss.
a. Take out the new PIC from the ESD bag.


NO TICE

● During the operation, pull out the board slowly and smoothly to
prevent it from colliding with the neighboring boards and from
interrupting other running boards.
● When removing an board, do not touch the parts on it to avoid
damages to the board.

b. Turn the ejector levers on the PIC outward to form a 45-degree angle, as
shown in step 1 in Figure 4-278.
c. Hold the captive screws of the PIC, and insert the PIC smoothly along the
guide rails of the slot till the PIC is completely seated in the slot, as
shown in step 2 in Figure 4-278.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1089
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

When inserting the PIC, align it with the slot and gently slide it in. If you close
the ejector levers before the PIC is fully seated, the terminal blocks may be
compressed, affecting the insertion and removal of PICs in adjacent slots. In this
case, you need to remove the PIC and re-insert it properly.
d. Rotate the ejector levers inward and push them until they cannot move
forward, as shown in step 3 in Figure 4-278.
e. Turn the Phillips screwdriver clockwise to tighten the two captive screws,
as shown in step 4 in Figure 4-278.

Figure 4-278 Insert the PIC


7. Connect the cables to the corresponding interfaces in the original sequence.
8. Check the running status of the new PIC.
Check the running status of the new PIC in the following ways:
– If the STAT indicator on the panel of the PIC is on (green), it indicates
that the PIC is running normally.
– Check the alarms. In normal situations, the system does not generate any
alarm related to the new PIC.
– Run the display device command on the console interface to view the
running status of PIC. If the Status is displayed as Registered, it indicates
that the PIC are running normally.
9. Check whether services are normal.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing the PIC, collect the tools. If the PIC that is replaced is confirmed to
be faulty, you should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials and send
the faulty PIC together with the card to the Huawei local office for timely repair.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1090
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.15.3 Replacing a Control Boards (CXP)

This section describes the precautions and replacement procedures for replacing
the CXP.

Precautions

Before replacing the CXP, you need to note the following points:

● When the system is running, you can replace only the slave CXP.
● All CXPs support hot swap.

Tools

Before replacing the CXP, you need the following tools:

● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
● Phillips screwdriver
● ESD bag

Procedure
1. Check the location of the CXP to be replaced.
Before pulling out a CXP that is to be replaced, you should first determine the
location of the CXP, for example, the cabinet, chassis, and slot where the CXP
resides. Then find the CXP to be replaced in the case, and stick the
replacement label on its panel to avoid misoperation.

NO TE

The NetEngine 8000 M6 has two CXPs in slots 7 and 8.
2. Check whether the backplane connector corresponding to the slot has bent
pins.
3. Unplug the cable from CXP, and attach a label to mark the corresponding
interface number of the cable.
4. Run the power off slot slot-id command to power off the CXP to be replaced.
5. Unplug the CXP from the chassis.
a. Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground terminal to the ESD
jack on the rack.
b. Turn the Phillips screwdriver counter-clockwise to loosen the captive
screws, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-279.
c. Turn the ejector levers on the panel of the CXP outward. When the
ejector levers and the panel form a 45-degree angle, the CXP is removed
from the backplane, as shown in step 2 in Figure 4-279.
d. Hold the captive screws of the CXP and pull out the CXP, as shown in
step 3 in Figure 4-279.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1091
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● During the operation, pull out the board slowly and smoothly to
prevent it from colliding with the neighboring boards and from
interrupting other running boards.
● When removing a board, do not touch the parts on it to avoid
damages to the board.

Figure 4-279 Pull out the CXP


e. Place the removed CXP into the ESD bag.
6. Insert the new CXP into the chasiss.
a. Take out the new CXP from the ESD bag.


NO TICE

● During the operation, pull out the board slowly and smoothly to
prevent it from colliding with the neighboring boards and from
interrupting other running boards.
● When removing a board, do not touch the parts on it to avoid
damages to the board.

b. Turn the ejector levers on the CXP outward to form a 45-degree angle, as
shown in step 1 in Figure 4-280.
c. Hold the captive screws of the CXP, and insert the CXP smoothly along
the guide rails of the slot till the CXP is completely seated in the slot, as
shown in step 2 in Figure 4-280.
NO TE

When inserting the CXP, align it with the slot and gently slide it in. If you close
the ejector levers before the CXP is fully seated, the terminal blocks may be
compressed, affecting the insertion and removal of CXPs in adjacent slots. In this
case, you need to remove the CXP and re-insert it properly.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1092
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

d. Rotate the ejector levers inward and push them until they cannot move
forward, as shown in step 3 in Figure 4-280.
e. Turn the Phillips screwdriver clockwise to tighten the two captive screws,
as shown in step 4 in Figure 4-280.

Figure 4-280 Insert the CXP


7. Connect the cables to the corresponding interfaces in the original sequence.
8. Check the running status of the new CXP.
Check the running status of the new CXP in the following ways:
– If the STAT indicator on the panel of the CXP is on (green), it indicates
that the CXP is running normally.
– Check the alarms. In normal situations, the system does not generate any
alarm related to the new CXP.
– Run the display device command on the console interface to view the
running status of CXP. If the Status is displayed as Registered, it indicates
that the CXP are running normally.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing the CXP, collect the tools. If the CXP that is replaced is confirmed
to be faulty, you should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials and
send the faulty CXP together with the card to the Huawei local office for timely
repair.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1093
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

When replacing the , you are advised to delete the data from the 's NAND Flash
die or M.2 storage card to prevent data theft. You can use either of the following
methods:
● Use a card reader to connect the NAND Flash die or M.2 storage card to a PC
for data deletion, and then recycle the NAND Flash die or M.2 storage card
after data is deleted.
● Physically destroy the NAND Flash die or M.2 storage card.

4.2.15.4 Replacing a power module

4.2.15.4.1 Replacing the DC Power Module

Precautions

Before replacing a power module, you need to note the following points:

Before replacing a power module, switch off the corresponding circuit breaker on
the power distribution cabinet.

Tools

Before replacing a power module, you need the following tools:

● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
1. Check the location of the power module to be replaced.
Before pulling out a power module that is to be replaced, you should first
check the location of the module, for example, the cabinet and chassis where
the power module resides. Then, locate the power module to be replaced in
the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the power module.
2. Switch off the corresponding circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.
Thus, the power module to be replaced is powered off.
3. Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the ESD jack
on the rack.
4. Remove the protective cover from the wiring terminals on the power module,
and then disconnect power cables from the wiring terminals.
5. Loosen the captive screws on both sides of the power module with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-281.
6. Hold both sides of the power module and pull the power module out of the
chassis, as shown in step 2 in Figure 4-281.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1094
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-281 Pull out the power module


7. Hold both sides of the power module and insert the module into the guide
rail of the slot. Ensure that the power module is in good contact with the
backplane of the chassis, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-282.
8. Fasten the power module to the chassis by screwing the captive screws with a
Phillips screwdriver, as shown in step 2 in Figure 4-282.

Figure 4-282 Insert the power module


9. Connect the cables to the power module in the original sequence, and
reinstall the protective cover.
10. Switch on the corresponding circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.
Verify the functions of the new power module.
– If the PWR indicator on the panel of the power module is on and is
green, power module works normally.
– Run the display device command on the console interface to check the
running status of the new power module. If the Status is displayed as
Normal, it indicates that the power module runs normally.
If the fan module fails to return to the normal state, you should contact a
Huawei local office for timely technical support.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1095
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Follow-up Procedure

After replacing the power module, collect the tools. If a power module that is
replaced is confirmed to be faulty, you should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for
Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty power module to a Huawei
local office for timely maintenance.

4.2.15.4.2 Replacing the AC Power Module

Precautions

Before replacing a power module, you need to note the following points:

Before replacing a power module, switch off the corresponding circuit breaker on
the power distribution cabinet.

Tools

Before replacing a power module, you need the following tools:

● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
1. Check the location of the power module to be replaced.
Before pulling out a power module that is to be replaced, you should first
check the location of the module, for example, the cabinet and chassis where
the power module resides. Then, locate the power module to be replaced in
the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the power module.
2. Switch off the corresponding circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.
Thus, the power module to be replaced is powered off.
3. Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the ESD jack
on the rack.
4. Remove the protective cover from the wiring terminals on the power module,
and then disconnect power cables from the wiring terminals.
5. Loosen the captive screws on both sides of the power module with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-283.


NO TICE

Do not remove the power transfer board when removing an AC power
module.

6. Hold both sides of the power module and pull the power module out of the
chassis, as shown in step 2 in Figure 4-283.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1096
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-283 Pull out the power module


7. Hold both sides of the power module and insert the module into the guide
rail of the slot. Ensure that the power module is in good contact with the
backplane of the chassis, as shown in step 1 in Figure 4-284.
8. Fasten the power module to the chassis by screwing the captive screws with a
Phillips screwdriver, as shown in step 2 in Figure 4-284.

Figure 4-284 Insert the power module


9. Connect the cables to the power module in the original sequence, and
reinstall the protective cover.
10. Switch on the corresponding circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.
Verify the functions of the new power module.
– If the PWR indicator on the panel of the power module is on and is
green, power module works normally.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1097
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

– Run the display device command on the console interface to check the
running status of the new power module. If the Status is displayed as
Normal, it indicates that the power module runs normally.
If the fan module fails to return to the normal state, you should contact a
Huawei local office for timely technical support.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing the power module, collect the tools. If a power module that is
replaced is confirmed to be faulty, you should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for
Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty power module to a Huawei
local office for timely maintenance.

4.2.15.5 Replacing the Fan Module

Precautions
● To ensure that system heat dissipation is not affected, a fan module must be
replaced within one minute.
● The fans are exposed on the left side of the fan tray. Keep your fingers,
clothing, and jewelry away from the fans. Always handle the fan tray by the
handle.
● When removing the FAN board, do not touch the rotating fan leaves.

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
1. Check the location of the fan module to be replaced.
Before removing the old fan module, check its location, for example, the
cabinet and chassis where the fan module resides. Then, find the fan module
to be replaced in the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the
fan module to avoid misoperation.
2. Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground terminal to the ESD jack on
the chassis.
3. Hold the handle on the fan module with one hand and pull part of it. Support
the bottom of the fan module with the other hand until the fan module is
completely pulled out, as shown in Figure 4-285.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1098
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-285 Pull out the fan module


4. Hold the handle on the new fan module with one hand and support the
bottom of the fan module with the other hand. Then, insert the fan module
into the chassis, as shown in Figure 4-286.

Figure 4-286 Insert the fan module


NO TE

If the FAN indicator is steady green, the fan is working properly.
5. Log in to the device and run the display fan command to query the running
status of the new FAN.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a part, collect the tools. If the part is faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and
the faulty part to Huawei for timely maintenance.

4.2.15.6 Replacing an Optical Module
This section describes the procedure for replacing an Optical Module.

Context


CA UTION

Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of Optical Modules or
optical fibers without eye protection.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1099
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

● Huawei-certified Optical Modules are strongly recommended because non-
Huawei-certified Optical Modules cannot ensure transmission reliability and
may affect service stability.
● Optical Modules are hot swappable, and you do not need to power off the
device when replacing Optical Modules.
● Optical Modules are electrostatic-sensitive components. Therefore, you must
take ESD protection measures when replacing Optical Modules.
● Only external Optical Modules can be replaced and pluggable. Built-in Optical
Modules cannot be replaced.

Follow these guidelines when replacing an Optical Module:

● Replacing an Optical Module interrupts service transmission. Therefore,
replace an Optical Module only when you confirm that the Optical Module
has failed.
● Ensure that the new Optical Module has the same center wavelength and
complies with the same standards as the old one.
● When replacing an Optical Module, ensure that no optical fiber is connected
to the Optical Module. Install or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid
damages to fiber connectors. Exercise caution when installing or removing
optical fibers to prevent damage to the Optical Module.
● After removing the optical fibers from an Optical Module, cover the fiber
connectors with dust caps. Place the optical fibers in an appropriate place to
prevent them from swinging.
● Use assistant tools like the tweezers delivered with the device to remove an
Optical Module in a confined space.
● After removing a copper transceiver, wait at least 2 seconds before inserting a
new one. Otherwise, the port may fail to go Up. If the port cannot go Up,
remove the copper transceiver and install it 2 seconds later.
● If the LINK indicator on an optical port with two optical fibers is off, swap the
two optical fibers.
● During the replacement, keep the bores of the Optical Module and fiber
connectors clean, protecting them from dust and other contamination
sources. Install dust plugs on idle optical ports.

Tools and Accessories
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Spare Optical Module
● Dust caps
● (Optional) Optical port dust plug
● (Optional) Tweezers

Procedure
1. Check the location of the Optical Module to be replaced.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1100
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Before pulling out an Optical Module that is to be replaced, you should first
check the location of the module, for example, the cabinet and chassis where
the Optical Module resides. Then, locate the Optical Module to be replaced in
the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the Optical Module.
2. Run the display interface interface-type interface-number command to view
and record the type of the Optical Module to be replaced, as the following
output in bold displays:
<HUAWEI> display interface gigabitethernet 0/1/0
GigabitEthernet0/1/0 current state : DOWN(TRANSCEIVER_OFFLINE) (ifindex: 16)
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Link quality grade : --
Description:
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit(L3) is 1500 bytes, The Maximum Receive Unit(L2) is 9700
bytes Internet Address is 10.1.1.1/1
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc12-3458
Last physical up time : 2013-07-29 15:39:23
Last physical down time : 2013-07-29 15:38:41
Current system time: 2013-07-30 09:15:33
Statistics last cleared:never
Last 300 seconds input rate: 23513 bits/sec, 2 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate: 64319 bits/sec, 3 packets/sec
Input peak rate 26099 bits/sec, Record time: 2013-07-29 15:40:58
Output peak rate 64809 bits/sec, Record time: 2013-07-30 03:59:41
Input: 183126871 bytes, 182525 packets
Output: 509287017 bytes, 244628 packets
Input:
Unicast: 55 packets, Multicast: 160762 packets
Broadcast: 21708 packets JumboOctets: 31031 packets
CRC: 0 packets, Symbol: 0 packets
Overrun: 0 packets, InRangeLength: 0 packets
LongPacket: 0 packets, Jabber: 0 packets, Alignment: 0 packets
Fragment: 0 packets, Undersized Frame: 0 packets
RxPause: 0 packets
Output:
Unicast: 53 packets, Multicast: 243990 packets
Broadcast: 585 packets JumboOctets: 0 packets
Lost: 0 packets, Overflow: 0 packets, Underrun: 0 packets
System: 0 packets, Overruns: 0 packets
TxPause: 0 packets
Last 300 seconds input utility rate: 0.01%
Last 300 seconds output utility rate: 0.01%
Ipv4: Last 300 seconds input rate:512 bits/sec, 1 packets/sec Last 300 seconds output
rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Input 63318 packets,4052352 bytes Output 0 packets,0
bytes Input bandwidth utilization: 0.00% Output bandwidth utilization: 0.00%
Ipv6: Last 300 seconds input rate:0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Last 300 seconds output rate: 0
bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Input 0 packets,0 bytes Output 0 packets,0 bytes Output
bandwidth utilization: 0.00% Output bandwidth utilization: 0.00%
3. Record the location of the cables and check whether the labels on the cables
are correct and clear. If the labels are hard to identify, re-make labels and re-
label the cables in case the cables are not connected properly.
4. Wear the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the
ESD jack on the rack.
5. Pull out the Optical Module to be replaced.
a. Remove the optical cables from the connector and cover the connector
with a dust cap.
b. Turn the pulled handle of the Optical Module downward, as (1) shown in
Figure 4-288.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1101
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

When the operation space is insufficient, you can use a fiber interface clamp to
remove an Optical Module. Figure 4-287 shows the appearance of a fiber
interface clamp.

Figure 4-287 Fiber interface clamp


c. Hold the handle to pull out the Optical Module carefully from the optical
interface, as (2) shown in Figure 4-288. When installing a CFP Optical
Module, hold the screw rods with both hands, and slightly pull out the
Optical Module from the optical port.
d. Place the removed Optical Module in the ESD bag.

Figure 4-288 Pulling out an Optical Module


6. Insert the new Optical Module into the optical interface.
a. Take out the new Optical Module from the ESD bag and check whether
there is any damage or component missing. Check whether the new
Optical Module is of the same type as the Optical Module to be replaced.
b. Insert the new Optical Module into the optical interface, as shown in
Figure 4-289. When the click of the reed in the Optical Module is heard,
it indicates that the Optical Module is correctly inserted. If the new
Optical Module is a CFP one, insert the new Optical Module into the
optical port of the card, push the transceiver panel horizontally into the
connector using even force with both thumbs. After the transceiver is
inserted, push the transceiver slightly to ensure that it has reached the
stop position. Pull out the two screw rods slightly to ensure that they can
properly function. Pre-tighten one of the screw rods. Then, tighten the
other screw rod. After that, tighten the first screw rod. To prevent the
Optical Module from getting loosened due to vibration or collision, you
are advised to use a screwdriver to tighten the screw rods.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1102
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CA UTION

Do not insert an Optical Module reversely. If an Optical Module cannot
be completely inserted into an optical port, do not force it into the port.
Instead, turn the Optical Module over and try again.

Figure 4-289 Inserting an Optical Module


c. Remove the dust cap from the connector and insert the optical cables in
the original sequence.
7. Verify the functions of the new Optical Module.
Then, you can verify the functions of the new Optical Module in the following
ways:
– Check whether the LINK indicator on the optical interface works
normally. If the indicator is green, it indicates that the links connected to
the interface are Up.
– Run the display interface interface-type interface-number command on
the console interface to view the type and running status of the new
Optical Module. Check whether the type of the new Optical Module
corresponds to that of the original Optical Module, as the following
output in bold displays:
<HUAWEI> display interface gigabitethernet 0/1/0
GigabitEthernet0/1/0 current state : DOWN(TRANSCEIVER_OFFLINE) (ifindex: 16)
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Link quality grade : --
Description:
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit(L3) is 1500 bytes, The Maximum Receive Unit(L2) is
9700 bytes Internet Address is 10.1.1.1/1
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc12-3458
Last physical up time : 2013-07-29 15:39:23
Last physical down time : 2013-07-29 15:38:41
Current system time: 2013-07-30 09:15:33
Statistics last cleared:never
Last 300 seconds input rate: 23513 bits/sec, 2 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate: 64319 bits/sec, 3 packets/sec
Input peak rate 26099 bits/sec, Record time: 2013-07-29 15:40:58
Output peak rate 64809 bits/sec, Record time: 2013-07-30 03:59:41
Input: 183126871 bytes, 182525 packets
Output: 509287017 bytes, 244628 packets
Input:
Unicast: 55 packets, Multicast: 160762 packets
Broadcast: 21708 packets JumboOctets: 31031 packets

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1103
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CRC: 0 packets, Symbol: 0 packets
Overrun: 0 packets, InRangeLength: 0 packets
LongPacket: 0 packets, Jabber: 0 packets, Alignment: 0 packets
Fragment: 0 packets, Undersized Frame: 0 packets
RxPause: 0 packets
Output:
Unicast: 53 packets, Multicast: 243990 packets
Broadcast: 585 packets JumboOctets: 0 packets
Lost: 0 packets, Overflow: 0 packets, Underrun: 0 packets
System: 0 packets, Overruns: 0 packets
TxPause: 0 packets
Last 300 seconds input utility rate: 0.01%
Last 300 seconds output utility rate: 0.01%
Ipv4: Last 300 seconds input rate:512 bits/sec, 1 packets/sec Last 300 seconds
output rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Input 63318 packets,4052352 bytes Output 0
packets,0 bytes Input bandwidth utilization: 0.00% Output bandwidth
utilization: 0.00% Ipv6: Last 300 seconds input rate:0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Last
300 seconds output rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Input 0 packets,0 bytes Output 0
packets,0 bytes Output bandwidth utilization: 0.00% Output bandwidth utilization:
0.00%
– Check whether there is any new alarm or performance event.
– Check whether the services are normal on the new Optical Module. If the
services are normal, it indicates that replacing an Optical Module is
successful.
If the new Optical Module fails to return to the normal state, you should
contact a Huawei local office for timely technical support.

Follow-up Procedure

After replacing an Optical Module, collect the tools. If an Optical Module that is
replaced and is confirmed to be faulty, you should fill in the Offsite Repair Card
for Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty Optical Module to a Huawei
local office for timely maintenance.

4.2.15.7 Replacing an Optical Cable

This section describes the optical cable of the device and the procedure for
replacing the optical cable.

Context

Before replacing an optical cable, you need to note the flowing points:

● During the process of replacing an optical cable, the services are interrupted
temporarily.
● Be careful when you remove or insert an optical cable in case that the
connector of the optical cable is damaged.
● When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or an optical cable,
do not observe an optical interface or connectors of an optical cable.
● The bending radius of a single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber is greater than or
equal to 10 mm, and the bending radius of a multi-mode A1b optical fiber is
greater than or equal to 30 mm.
● Connectors of optical cables are divided into the LC type and the SC type. You
must select an optical cable according to the interface type.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1104
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tool
Before replacing an optical cable, you need the following tools:
● Cutter
● Binding strap
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove

Procedure
1. Record the location of both ends of the optical cable to be replaced and the
cabling mode.
2. Take out the new optical cable and check whether the type of the new optical
cable is consistent with that of the old one. The multi-mode optical cable is
orange and the single-mode optical cable is yellow.
3. Make a new label according to the contents of the label on the old optical
cable.
4. Lay out the new optical cable in the original place.
5. Remove the old optical cable.
a. Put on the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal
to the ESD jack on the rack.
b. Hold the connectors and remove them. Then, cover the connectors with
dust caps.

NO TE

If a connector is dusty, clean it with dust-free cloth or fiber cleaning paper.
c. Remove the old optical cable from the corrugated pipe.
6. Insert the new optical cable.
Before inserting the new optical cable, remove the dust caps and keep them
properly for future use. Then, connect both ends of the new optical cable to
the optical interfaces and secure the optical cables.
7. Attach a label to the new optical cable, as shown in Figure 4-290.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1105
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-290 Attaching a label to a new optical cable


8. Lay out the new optical cable in a tidy manner in the cabinet and bind the
optical cable with a binding strap. Note that the optical cable should be
bound with proper strength and with even space in between. Bind the
redundancies of the optical cable at the ODF side.
9. Check whether the new optical cable works normally.
– Check the LINK indicator at the optical interface. If the indicator is steady
on and green, it indicates that the link is Up.
– Check whether the service on the board where the new optical cable
connects is normal. If the services are normal, it indicates that the optical
cable is replaced successfully.
– Check whether there is any new alarm or performance event.

Follow-up Procedure

After replacing an optical cable, collect the tools and the replaced optical cable.
Do not place the old and the new optical cables together to avoid confusions.

4.2.15.8 Replacing a Power Cable

Precautions

Before replacing a power cable, you need to note the following points:

● Make sure that service data is backed up before replacing a power cable.
● Before operation, make sure to cut off all input power supplies in the power
distribution cabinet, and attach a label to the switch to be used.
● The terminals of a DC power cable and other exposed surfaces must be fully
insulated.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1106
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tools
Before replacing a power cable, you need the following tools:
● Terminal of the power module
● Power cable
● ESD wrist strap
● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
1. Record the location of both ends of the power cable to be replaced and the
cabling mode in case of misoperation.
2. Make a new external power cable and a ground cable. For details, refer to the
"Cables" in the Hardware Description.
3. Loosen the screws on the terminal of the power module with a wrench. Then,
remove the terminal. Pull out the power cable from the guide-in hole on the
cabinet.
4. Install the power cable and ground cable. Pass the new power cable through
the guide-in hole on the cabinet, and connect the terminal of the power
module to the input terminal of the power module in the power distribution
cabinet. Then, tighten the setscrews with a wrench.
5. Make new labels according to the contents of the labels on the old power
cable.

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a power cable, collect the tools and the replaced cable. Do not
place the old and the new cables together to avoid confusions.

4.2.15.9 Replacing a Network Cable
This section describes the network cable of the device and the procedure for
replacing the network cable.

Context
Before replacing a network cable, you need to note the following points:
● During the process of replacing a network cable, the services are interrupted
temporarily.
● It is recommended that you replace a network cable during the hours when
the network is not busy, for example, from 00:00 am to 06:00 am.

Tool
Before replacing a network cable, you need the following tools:
● Cutter
● Cable tie
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1107
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Cable tester
● Crimper

Procedure
1. Check the location and cabling of the network cable to be replaced.
2. Prepare a new network cable. The type of the new network cable must be
consistent with that of the old network cable. When a network cable is made,
test its connectivity with a cable tester.
3. Wear the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the
ESD jack on the rack.
4. Lay out the new network cable according to the original cabling mode.
If you need to replace more than one network cable at a time, you should
attach temporary labels to the new network cables to identify the cables. The
new network cables must be numbered consistently with the network cables
to be replaced.
5. Remove the old network cable and record the location where the old network
cable is installed.
a. Remove the connectors of the network cable.
b. Cut the cable tie with a cutter and remove the network cable.
6. Insert the new network cable connector into the network interface of which
the location is recorded. If a click is heard, it indicates that the insertion is
successful. The indicator of the network interface being steady on and green
indicates that the link is Up.
7. Attach a label to the new network cable, as shown in Figure 4-291.

Figure 4-291 Attaching a label to a new network cable


8. Bind the cable with a cable tie and cut the redundancies of the tie.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1108
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

9. Run the ping command to check the connection between both ends of the
new network cable. If both ends fail to communicate normally, check whether
the network cable is damaged or whether the connectors are secured.

Follow-up Procedure

After replacing a network cable, collect the tools and the replaced cable. Do not
place the old and the new cables together to avoid confusions.

4.2.15.10 Replacing a Trunk Cable

This section describes the trunk cable of the device and the procedure for
replacing the trunk cable.

Precautions

Before replacing a trunk cable, you need to note the following points:

● During the process of replacing a trunk cable, the services are interrupted
temporarily.
● It is recommended that you replace a trunk cable during the hours when the
network is not busy, for example, from 00:00 am to 06:00 am.

Tools

Before replacing a trunk cable, you need the following tools"

● Flat-head screwdriver
● Cutter
● Cable tie
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
● Multimeter

Procedure
1. Record the location of both ends of the trunk cable to be replaced and the
cabling mode.
2. Check the type of the new trunk cable.
There are two types of trunk cables:
– 75–ohm coaxial cable
– 120–ohm twisted pair cable
The type of the new trunk cable must be consistent with that of the old one.
3. Make a new label according to the contents of the label on the old trunk
cable.
4. Lay out the new trunk cable according to the original cabling mode.
5. Remove the old trunk cable.
a. Put on the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal
to the ESD jack on the rack.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1109
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

b. Turn a screwdriver counter-clockwise to loosen the screws on the
connector of the trunk cable that connects the board.
c. Hold the connector and remove it.
d. Cut the cable tie with a cutter and take out the trunk cable.
6. Insert the connector of the trunk cable into the interface of which the location
is recorded and turn the screwdriver clockwise to tighten the screws on the
connector.
7. Attach a label to the new trunk cable, as shown in Figure 4-292.

Figure 4-292 Schematic diagram of attaching a label to a trunk cable


8. Bind the cable with a cable tie and cut the redundancies of the tie.
9. Check whether the new trunk cable works normally.
– Check whether the services on the board to which the new cable
connects are normal.
– If there is any alarm or if the services, you need to test the connectivity of
the cable with the multimeter.

Follow-up Procedure

After replacing a trunk cable, collect the tools and the replaced cable. Do not
place the old and the new cables together to avoid confusions.

4.2.15.11 Replacing the Chassis

Context

The chassis is damaged due to external forces or a hardware fault.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1110
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Impact on the System
Services will be interrupted for about 30 minutes because the device needs to be
powered off to replace the chassis.

Precautions


DANGER

Avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beam launched from the optical interface
board or fiber.


NO TICE

● Before replacing the chassis, contact Huawei engineers to see if a license is
required. You can apply for a license or use Stick License to activate some
license control items.
● Before replacing the chassis, upgrade the software version of the new chassis to
be the same as that of the chassis to be replaced.
● When replacing a part, make sure that the interface is not connected to any
optical fibers or cables.
● Optical interfaces and optical fiber connectors must be clean. Optical fiber
connectors must be properly capped to keep dusts away.

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver
● ESD bag

Procedure
1. Wear the ESD wrist strap, and insert the grounding end into the ESD jack on
the device, or wear ESD gloves.
2. Make sure that the spare part is the same as the one to be replaced in terms
of name, model, and parameters. If they do not meet the requirements,
contact Huawei GTAC.
3. Record the slot of each board and mapping between each fiber or cable and
interface on the device. When the part replacement is complete, restore the
fiber or cable connections.
NO TE

Two methods are available for backing up a device's configuration data:
● Using an NMS: Use an NE software management module to back up a device's
configuration data as a configuration file to an NMS server or client.
● Using a command: Run the save command to save a device's configuration data
to the device's storage unit as a configuration file and copy the configuration file
to the maintenance terminal for backup.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1111
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4. Power off the device.


CA UTION

Make sure that indicators on all the boards are off which indicates that the
device is powered off.

5. Remove the power connectors and all fibers and cables connected to the
chassis. For devices on which cards are pluggable, remove all boards.
6. Remove the mounting ears on the chassis and then take down the chassis.
(Skip this step if the chassis is installed on a desk).


CA UTION

Hold the bottom of the chassis when you remove the mounting ears to
prevent injuries to human bodies or damage to other devices.

7. Remove the mounting ears, and install them onto the spare chassis. Install
the spare chassis to the previous position. Then, restore all boards and fiber or
cable connections.
8. Power on the device and observe indicators.

NO TE

If the PROG indicator is blinking, the board is being initialized, and software is being
loaded. If the STAT and PROG indicators are steady green, the device and board have
been powered on, and software has been loaded.
9. Log in to the device and run the display device command to query the
running status of the device. If the Status column displays only Normal, the
device is running properly.

Follow-up Procedure

After replacing a part, collect the tools. If the part is faulty, maintenance personnel
should fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and
the faulty part to Huawei for timely maintenance.
4.2.16 Appendix

4.2.16.1 Environmental Requirements for Device Operation

4.2.16.1.1 Environmental Requirements for Equipment Room

Requirements for Selecting a Site for Equipment Room

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1112
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

When designing a project, consider the communication network planning and
technical requirements of the equipment. Also consider hydrographic, geological,
seismic, power supply, and transportation factors.

Construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire-
proof construction of the equipment room should be designed by specialized
construction designers to suit the environmental requirements of devices. The
equipment room should also follow local regulations concerning the industrial
construction, environmental protection, fire safety, and civil air defense.
Construction must conform to government standards, regulations, and other
requirements.

The equipment room should be located in a place free from high temperature,
dust, toxic gases, explosive materials, or unstable voltage. Keep the equipment
room away from significant vibrations or loud noises, as well as power transformer
stations.

The specific requirements for selecting a site for an equipment room are as
follows:

● The room should be located at a distance of at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) from
heavy pollution sources such as smelting and coal mines. It should be located
at a distance of at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) from moderate pollution sources
such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization factories. It should be located at a
distance of at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) from light pollution sources such as
packinghouses and tanyards. If these pollution sources cannot be avoided,
ensure that the equipment room is upwind of the pollution sources. In
addition, use a high-quality equipment room or protection products.
● The room should be located away from livestock farms, or be upwind of the
livestock farms. Do not use an old livestock room or fertilizer warehouse as
the equipment room.
● The equipment room must be far away from residential areas. An equipment
room that is not far away from residential areas must comply with equipment
room construction standards to avoid noise pollution.
● The room should be located far away from industrial and heating boilers.
● The room should be at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from the seaside or salt
lake. Otherwise, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities.
In addition, alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction material.
Otherwise, equipment suitable for wet conditions must be used.
● The doors and windows of the equipment room must be kept closed to
maintain an airtight room.
● Using steel doors to ensure sound insulation is recommended.
● No cracks or openings are allowed on the walls or floors. The outlet holes on
the walls or windows must be sealed. Walls must be constructed such that
they are smooth, wear-resistant, dustproof, flame retardant, sound insulated,
heat absorptive, and have electromagnetic shielding.
● The air vent of the room should be far from the exhaust of city waste pipes,
big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The room should be in the positive
pressure state to prevent corrosive gases from entering the equipment room
and corroding components and circuit boards.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1113
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● It is recommended that the room be on or above the second floor. If this
requirement cannot be met, the ground for equipment installation in the
room should be at least 600 mm (23.62 in, ) above the maximum flood level.
● The equipment room should be strong enough to resist winds and downpours.
● The room should be located away from dusty roads or sand. If this is
unavoidable, the doors and windows of the equipment room must not face
pollution sources.
● Do not place air conditioning vents near the equipment so that they blow
directly on the equipment because condensation may be blown into the
equipment.
● Do not use decorative materials that contain sulfur in the equipment room.

Equipment Room Layout

An equipment room usually contains mobile switching equipment,
telecommunications equipment, power supply equipment, and other auxiliary
equipment. To ensure easy maintenance and management, place the equipment
in different rooms. Figure 4-293 shows the layout of the equipment room.

Figure 4-293 Layout of the equipment room


The general layout principles of the equipment room are as follows:

● It should meet requirements for laying out and maintaining communication
cables and power cables.
● It should reduce the cabling distance, which facilitates cable maintenance,
reduces potential communication faults, and maximizes efficiency.

Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room

Table 4-69 describes the construction requirements for the equipment room.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1114
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-69 Construction requirements for the equipment room
Item Requirements

Area The smallest area of the equipment room can accommodate the
equipment with the largest capacity.

Net height The minimum height of the equipment room should not be less
than 3 m (9.84 ft). The minimum height of the equipment room
is the net height below overhead beams or ventilation pipes.

Floor The floor in the equipment room should be semi-conductive and
dustproof. A raised floor with an ESD covering is recommended.
Cover the raised floor tightly and solidly. The horizontal
tolerance of each square meter should be less than 2 mm (0.08
in.). If raised floors are unavailable, use a static-electricity-
conductive floor material, with a volume resistivity of 1.0 x 10^7
ohms to 1.0 x 10^10 ohms. Ground this floor material or raised
floor. You can connect them to ground using a one megohm
current-limiting resistor and connection line.

Load-bearing The floor must bear loads larger than 561 kg/m2 (0.79 bf/in.2).
capacity

Door and The door of the equipment room should be 2 m (6.56 ft) high
windows and 1 m (3.28 ft) wide. One door is enough. Seal the doors and
windows with dustproof plastic tape. Use double-pane glass in
the windows and seal them tightly.

Wall surface Paste wallpaper on the wall or apply flat paint. Do not use
treatment pulverized paint.

Cable trays Use cable trays to arrange cables. The inner faces of the cable
trays must be smooth. The reserved length and width of the
cable trays, and the number, position and dimensions of the
holes must comply with the requirements of device
arrangement.

Water pipe Do not pass service pipes, drainpipes, and storm sewers through
the equipment room. Do not place a fire hydrant in the
equipment room, but place it in the corridor or near the
staircase.

Internal Separate the area where the equipment is installed from the
partition wall equipment room door. The partition wall can block some outside
dust. As shown in Figure 4-294.

Installation Install air conditioner vents so that the air does not blow directly
position of on equipment.
the air
conditioner

Other Avoid the proliferation of mildew, and keep out rodents (like
requirements mice).




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1115
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-294 Internal partition wall inside the equipment room


Equipment Room Environment

Dust on devices may cause electrostatic discharge and result in poor contact for
connectors or metal connection points. This problem can shorten the life span of
devices and cause faults.
The equipment room must be free from explosive, conductive, magnetically-
permeable, and corrosive dust. Table 4-70 lists the requirement for dust
concentration in the equipment room.

Table 4-70 Requirements for dust particles in the equipment room
Mechanical active Unit Concentration
material

Dust particle Particle /m3 ≤ 3x 104
(no visible dust
accumulated on a
workbench in three
days)

Suspending dust mg/m3 ≤0.2

Precipitable dust mg/m2·h ≤1.5

NOTE
● Dust particle diameter ≥ 5 µm
● Suspending dust diameter ≤ 75 µm
● 75 µm ≤ precipitable dust diameter ≤ 150 µm


Take the following measures to meet the requirements:
● Use dustproof materials for ground, wall, and ceiling construction.
● Use screens on the door and windows facing outside. The outer windows
should be dust-proof.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1116
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Clean the equipment room regularly and clean the air filter door monthly.
● Wear shoe covers and ESD clothing before entering the equipment room.

Requirements for Corrosive Gases

The room should be free from dusts and corrosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and
NH3. Table 4-71 lists the requirements for the corrosive gas concentration.

Table 4-71 Requirements for corrosive gas concentration

Chemical Unit Concentration
active material

3
SO2 mg/m ≤0.30

3
H2S mg/m ≤0.10

3
NOx mg/m ≤0.50

3
NH3 mg/m ≤1.00

3
Cl2 mg/m ≤0.10

HCl mg/m3 ≤0.10

HF mg/m3 ≤0.01

3
O3 mg/m ≤0.05



Take the following measures to meet the requirements:
● Avoid constructing the room near a place where the corrosive gas
concentration is high, such as a chemical plant.
● Ensure the air intake vent of the room is in the prevailing upwind direction
from any pollution source.
● Place batteries in different rooms.
● A professional service should monitor the corrosive gas conditions regularly.

Requirements for ESD Prevention

The absolute value of electrostatic voltage must be less than 1000 V.
Take the following measures to meet this requirement:
● Train operators about ESD prevention.
● Keep the correct humidity level in the equipment room to reduce the impact
of static electricity.
● Lay out an ESD floor in equipment rooms.
● Wear ESD shoes and clothing before entering equipment room.
● Use ESD tools, such as wrist straps, tweezers, and pullers.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1117
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Ground all conductive materials in the room, including computer terminals.
Use ESD worktables.
● Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foam, and rubber) at least
30 cm (11.81 in.) away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.

Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room

All interference sources, inside or outside the equipment room, can cause
equipment problems with capacitive coupling, inductive coupling, electromagnetic
wave radiation, and common impedance (including grounding system) coupling.
Prevent the interference using these approaches:
● Take effective measures against electrical interference from the power supply
system.
● Do not use the working ground of the equipment as the same ground for
surge protection. Separate them as far as possible.
● Keep the equipment far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar units,
and high-frequency and high-current equipment.
● Use electromagnetic shielding if necessary.

Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding

Table 4-72 lists the requirements for lightning proof grounding.

Table 4-72 Requirements for lightning proof grounding
Item Requirements

Capital ● Use reinforced concrete to construct the equipment room.
construction ● Install a lightning proof device like a lightning rod outside
the room.
● The lightning proof ground shares the same grounding
body with the protective ground of the room.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1118
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Power cables ● After the AC low-voltage power cables are led into the
leading in the room, install the surge protector for the power cables in the
equipment AC voltage stabilizer and the AC power distribution panel
room need to (box). Correctly ground the surge protector nearby.
be equipped ● After the DC power cable is led into the equipment room or
with a surge outdoor cabinet from outdoors or outside the cabinet,
protector install a power lightning protection device for the DC power
cable. The lightning protection device should be grounded
in proximity.
● For an equipment room in urban area, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of no less than 20 kA. For an equipment room that is built
in a suburb and subject to lightning strikes, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 60 kA. For an equipment room that is built in
a mountain area and subject to frequent lightning strikes,
or in a separate high-rise building in a city, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 100 kA.
● The ground cable of the surge protector should be no
longer than 1 m (3.28 ft).

Grounding for ● Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the -48 V
DC power DC power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power
distribution supply) with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The
total ground cable should meet the maximum load of the
equipment.
● The power equipment must have a DC working ground
cable, which can connect the power equipment to the
collective ground cable of the telecommunication site (or
the protective ground bar of the equipment room).

Equipotential ● Properly ground the devices and auxiliary devices in the
connection room such as mobile base station, transmission, switching
equipment, power supply equipment, and cable distribution
frame. Connect all PGND cables to the collective protective
ground bar. Connect all PGND cables in one equipment
room to one protective ground bar.
● Apply joint grounding to the working ground and protective
ground of devices, which means the two share one
grounding network.
● The cable tray, rack or shell, metal ventilation pipe, metal
door or window of the equipment should be grounded for
protection.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1119
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

General ● Do not connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with
requirements the protective ground of any telecom equipment in the
for grounding equipment room.
● Do not install a fuse or switch on the ground cable.
● All ground cables should be as short as possible, and
arranged in a straight line.

Grounding ● The grounding resistance must be lower than 1 ohm.
resistance ● The upper end of the grounding body should be at least 0.7
m (2.30 ft) over the ground. In cold areas, bury the
grounding body below the frozen ground.
● Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure
effective grounding.

Routing of ● Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the
signal cable equipment room. All signal cables must be led into the site
underground.
● Use the cables with a metal jacket or place them into a
metal pipe if they come out/in the equipment room.
● Ground the idle lines inside the cable in the equipment
room.
● Signal cables should be deployed on internal walls. Do not
deploy outdoor aerial cables.
● Keep signal cables away from power cables and surge
protection devices.

Collective ● Use a ground ring or ground bar for the collective ground
ground cable cable.
● Do not use aluminum cables as ground cables. Adopt
measures to prevent electrification corrosion when
connecting different metal parts together.
● Use a copper busbar as the collective ground cable with a
cross-sectional area of no less than 120 mm2 (0.19 in.2), or
use the galvanized flat steel of the same resistance. Insulate
the collective ground cable from the reinforcing steel bars
of the building.

Grounding The grounding lead-in should be a maximum of 30 m (98.42
lead-in ft) long. Use the galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area
of 40 mm x 4 mm (1.58 in. x 0.158 in.) or 50 mm x 5 mm
(1.97 in. x 0.197 in.).


4.2.16.1.2 Requirements for Power Supply

Requirements for AC Power Supply

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1120
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

An AC power supply system consists of power mains, uninterruptible power
supplies (UPSs), and self-supplied electric generators, and should use a centralized
power supply mode. In addition to meeting the requirements of the server load,
the AC power supply must have a simple connection line, safe operation, flexible
scheduling, and easy maintenance.
The low-voltage power supply should be 3-phase, 5-wire mode or monophase 3-
wire mode. This AC power supply should be 110 V/220 V, with a frequency of 50
Hz.
The UPS should supply the same power and operate at the same phase as the
power mains. The switching time between the UPS and mains should be less than
10 ms; otherwise, the networking devices will reboot or reset.
For power distribution capacity in the equipment room, both the working current
and fault current of the devices should be considered. Ensure that independent AC
power supplies protect independent devices. Configure the current-carrying
capacity of the protection switch of the equipment room for more than that of the
devices.
Table 4-73 lists the voltage range of the AC power supply for the devices.

Table 4-73 Voltage range of AC power supply
Item Requirements

AC power capacity to -10% to +5% of the rated voltage
support the devices

AC power capacity to -15% to +10% of the rated voltage
support the power
modules and important
buildings

Frequency of alternating -4% to +4% of the rated value
current

Voltage wave shape sine Within 5% of the rated voltage
distortion


The automated electric generator must have a standard interface that supports
telecommunication protocols, remote telecommunication, monitoring, and control.
AC power cables should meet the following specifications:
● AC neutral should have a conductor with the same cross section as the phase
line.
● AC cables should have non-flammable insulation. The layout of AC cables
should comply with local regulations. Low-voltage power distribution rooms
should comply with local regulations.

Recommendations for AC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the AC power supply.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1121
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● If the voltage of the power mains that supply power directly to devices
exceeds the rated voltage by -10% to 5%, or exceeds the voltage range that
devices can support, a voltage regulating device or voltage stabilizing device
is required.
● If the mains do not supply power for the device directly, or if the mains
voltage exceeds the rated voltage by -15% to 10% or exceeds the input
voltage range of the DC power supply, a voltage regulating device or voltage
stabilizing device is required.
● A UPS or inverter power supply system is required to provide uninterrupted
AC power to support the telecommunication load.
● If abnormalities occur on the mains, telecommunication servers should be
equipped with a self-supplied electric generator to support the key
telecommunication load. The capacity should be not less than 150% to 200%
of the total uninterruptible power supply.
● Storage batteries are usually installed in a parallel connection of two groups.
UPS storage batteries are generally installed in one group. The redundancy
required for the UPS can rely on concatenation or parallel connection. When
an inverter or a UPS is used, the active inverter is determined by the
maximum power and a backup inverter is required.

Requirements for DC Power Supply

The equipment room should receive stable and reliable DC power. Deploy the
power equipment near the telecommunications equipment to make the DC feeder
as short as possible. To reduce power consumption and installation cost, the loop
voltage drop from the battery port to the equipment port should be less than 3.2
V.
● A large-scale enterprise can deploy an independent power supply system on
each floor to supply power to the telecommunications equipment room on
the respective floor.
● A medium-scale enterprise can use a power room and a battery room for
centralized power supply or use distributed power supply systems.
● A small-scale enterprise can deploy an integrated power supply system in its
equipment room but must take measures to prevent corrosive gases released
from batteries from eroding circuit boards of telecommunications equipment.
Table 4-74 lists the specifications for the DC power supply.

Table 4-74 Specifications for the DC power supply
Item Requirements

DC power Greater than 1.5 times the rated current
capacity to
support the
surge current


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1122
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Regulated If the AC input voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of the
voltage rated value, and the load current is in the range of 5% to
precision 100% of the rated value, the output voltage of the rectifier
ranges from -46.0 V to -56.4 V, with the regulated voltage
precision less than or equal to 1%.

Overshoot Integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%
amplitude of
switch on/off

Peak noise ≤200 mV
voltage

Dynamic The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The overshoot is in the
response range of the integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%.



Recommendations for DC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the DC power supply.
● Use distributed power supply mode. Use multiple DC power supply systems
and put power equipment in multiple locations.
● Adopt a standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage to the
communications equipment within the required range.
● Improve reliability of the AC power supply system to reduce the necessary
capacity of storage batteries. For small offices, increase the capacity of
storage batteries if it is difficult to enhance reliability of the AC power supply
system.
● The total capacity of the high-frequency switching rectifier must satisfy the
power of the communication loading and battery charging. If there are 10 or
fewer active rectifier modules, configure one backup module. If there are
more than 10 active modules, configure one backup module for every 10
active modules.
● Install storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by
the duration for which the storage batteries must supply power. For most
offices, the batteries should be able to supply power for at least one hour.

4.2.16.2 On-site Cable Assembly and Installation

4.2.16.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions

Checking the Appearance of Cables
● If the cable jacket or insulation is visibly dirty, clean it before assembly.
● If the jacket or insulation of a cable has visible damage, irreparable scuffing,
or other defects, do not use the cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1123
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● If the shield layer of a cable is damaged, do not use the cable.
● If the cable jacket or insulation cracks after the cable is bent or twisted,
discard this cable and check whether other cables have the same problem. If
other cables have the same problem, replace these cables.

Checking the Appearance of Connectors
● Do not use connectors with visible defects, damage, rust, or scuffing.
● Do not use connectors if their shells or pins have exposed part or uneven
plating, or their pins are lost, broken, or bent.
● Do not use connectors that have dirt on their pins or in their jacks or if there
are conductors between pins or between pins and the shell.

Precautions for Assembly
● Use dedicated tools or tools delivered by Huawei and follow the methods
given here during assembly.
● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Take the following precautions when cutting or stripping cables:
– Make cables slightly longer than necessary.
– Coil cables longer than 2 m (6.56 ft) after cutting. Bind and fasten the
coils using bundling ropes. The inner diameters of the coils should be
larger than 20 times the outer diameters of the cables.
– When stripping the jackets of cables, avoid damaging the shield layers
(braid or aluminum foil), insulation, core conductors, and other jackets
that do not need to be stripped.
– After assembling cables, cut all visible cross sections of jackets to ensure
that the cross sections are arranged neatly.
– Do not touch the core conductors of cables with your hands. Terminate
exposed conductors in a timely way after stripping off insulation so that
the surface of the conductors does not become oxidized.
● Take the following precautions when crimping and connecting cables or
connectors:
– The terminals and conductors should be connected tightly after they are
crimped. They should not be moved or turned.
– Cut all the exposed copper wires.
– Try to avoid a second crimping of sleeves.
– Keep all the conductors clean and aligned.

NO TE

The connectors, cables, and tools provided by different vendors may be different. The
figures in this document are for your reference only.

4.2.16.2.2 Assembling Power Cables

Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1124
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Background
Figure 4-295 shows the components of an OT terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-295 the components of an OT terminal and a power cable


A. Heat shrink B. Bare crimping C. Insulation D. Conductor
tubing terminal

Procedure
1. Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a length of
insulation coating C to expose the conductor D of length L1, as shown in
Figure 4-296. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 4-75.

Figure 4-296 Stripping a power cable (OT terminal)


NO TICE

● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, the value of L1 is
1 mm (0.04 in.) to 2 mm (0.08 in.) greater than the value of L.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1125
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-75 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L1

Cross- Value of L1 (mm Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm
Sectional (in.)) Area of (in.))
Area of Conductor (mm2
Conductor (in.2))
(mm2 (in.2))

1 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 10 (0.015) 11 (0.43)

1.5 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)

2.5 (0.004) 7 (0.28) 25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)

4 (0.006) 8 (0.31) 35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)

6 (0.009) 9 (0.35) 50 (0.077) 16 (0.63)



NO TE

If you are proficient in assembling OT terminals and power cables, you can obtain the
value of L1 by comparing the part to be crimped with the power cable.
2. Put the heat-shrinkable (A) tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown
in Figure 4-297.

Figure 4-297 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal


3. Put the OT terminal B onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the OT
terminal is in good contact with the insulation coating C, as shown in Figure
4-297.


NO TICE

After the conductor is fed into the OT terminal, the protruding part of the
conductor, or L2 in Figure 4-297, must not be longer than 2 mm (0.08 in.).

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1126
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4. Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as
shown in Figure 4-298.

NO TE

The shapes of crimped parts may vary with the crimping dies.

Figure 4-298 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (OT terminal)


5. Push the heat shrink tubing (A) toward the connector until the tube covers
the crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in
Figure 4-299.

Figure 4-299 Heating the heat shrink tubing (OT terminal)


NO TICE

Stop heating the shrink tubing when the connector is securely locked in the
shrink tubing. Do not heat the shrink tubing too long as this may damage the
insulation coating.

Assembling the JG2 Terminal and Power Cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1127
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Bacnground
Figure 4-300 shows the components of a JG2 terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-300 Components of a JG2 terminal and a power cable


A. Heat shrink B. JG2 terminal C. Insulation layer D. Conductor of a
tubing of a power cable power cable

Procedure
1. Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L,
as shown in Figure 4-301. The recommended values of L are listed in Table
4-76.

Figure 4-301 Stripping a power cable (JG2 terminal)


NO TICE

● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, you can adjust the
value of L as required

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1128
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-76 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L
Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor Value of L (mm (in.))
(mm2 (in.2))

16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)

25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)

35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)

2. Put the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in
Figure 4-302.

Figure 4-302 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal


3. Put the bare crimping terminal onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that
the bare crimping terminal is in good contact with the insulation of the power
cable, as shown in Figure 4-302.
4. Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as
shown in Figure 4-303.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1129
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-303 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (JG2 terminal)


5. Push the heat shrink tubing toward the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure
4-304.

Figure 4-304 Heating the heat shrink tubing (JG2 terminal)


Assembling the Cord End Terminal and Power Cable

Background
Figure 4-305 shows the components of a cord end terminal and a power cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1130
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-305 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable


A. Cord end terminal B. Insulation layer of a C. Conductor of a power
power cable cable

Procedure
1. Strip a part of the insulation layer to expose the cable conductor with a
length of L1, as shown in Figure 4-306. Determine the value of L1 based on
the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor. The recommended values of
L1 are listed in Table 4-77.


NO TICE

When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.

Figure 4-306 Stripping a power cable (cord end terminal)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1131
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-77 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and
the value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 (mm Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm
Sectional (in.)) Area of (in.))
Area of Conductor (mm2
Conductor (in.2))
(mm2 (in.2))

1 8 10 15

1.5 10 16 15

2.5 10 25 18

4 12 35 19

6 14 50 26

2. Put the cord end terminal onto the exposed conductor and ensure that the
conductor is aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in
Figure 4-307.


NO TICE

After the conductor is fed into the cord end terminal, the protruding part of
the conductor must not be longer than 1 mm (0.04 in.).

Figure 4-307 Putting the cord end terminal onto the conductor


3. Select a proper cross-sectional area, and crimp the joint parts of the cord end
terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure 4-308.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1132
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-308 Crimping the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the
conductor


4. Check the maximum width of the crimped terminal. Table 4-78 lists the
maximum width of a crimped terminal.

Table 4-78 Maximum width of a crimped terminal
Cross-Sectional Area of the Maximum Width of the Crimped
Terminal (mm2) Terminal — W1 (mm(in.))

0.25 1

0.5 1

1.0 1.5

1.5 1.5

2.5 2.4

4 3.1

6 4

10 5.3

16 6

25 8.7

35 10


4.2.16.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables

Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable

Background
Figure 4-309 shows the components of an RJ45 connector and a shielded
Ethernet cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1133
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-309 Shielded RJ45 connector and cable


A. Jacket of B. Metal shell of C. Wire holder of D. Plug of
connector connector connector connector

E. Jacket of F. Shield layer of G. Twisted-pair -
Ethernet cable Ethernet cable wires

Procedure
1. Fit the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure
4-310.

Figure 4-310 Fitting the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable


2. Remove a 30 mm (1.18 in.) long section of the jacket, cut off the nylon twine
inside the jacket, and cut a no more than 5 mm (0.20 in.) cleft in the jacket,
as shown in Figure 4-311.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1134
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-311 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))


NO TICE

● When you remove a section of the jacket, do not damage the shield layer
of the twisted-pair cable.
● When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the
twisted-pair cable.

3. Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable. The shield layer is covered by
the metal shell, as shown in Figure 4-312.

Figure 4-312 Fitting the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable


4. Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable until the shield layer is covered
completely. Along the edge of the metal shell, cut off the aluminum foil shield
layer and ensure that there is no surplus copper wire. The exposed twisted-
pair cable is about 20 mm (0.79 in.) long, as shown in Figure 4-313.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1135
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-313 Removing the shield layer of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm
(in.))


5. Lead the four pairs of twisted-pair wires through the wire holder, as shown in
Figure 4-314 and Figure 4-315. Ensure that the colored wires are in the
correct location in the cable.

Figure 4-314 Leading wires through the wire holder


Figure 4-315 Cable locations in a wire holder


6. Align the four pairs of cables in the holder, as shown in Figure 4-316. The
connections between the wires and the pins are shown in Figure 4-317 and
listed in Table 4-79.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1136
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-316 Four pairs of cables on a wire holder


Figure 4-317 Connections between wires and pins


Table 4-79 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through
cable as an example)

Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

1 White-Orange

2 Orange

3 White-Green

4 Blue

5 White-Blue

6 Green

7 White-Brown

8 Brown

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1137
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


7. Cut off the surplus cables along the lower edge of the wire holder, as shown
in Figure 4-318.

Figure 4-318 Cutting off surplus cables


8. Put the connector body onto the wire holder and turn the metal shell by 90°,
as shown in Figure 4-319.

Figure 4-319 Putting the connector body onto the wire holder


NO TE

Ensure that the wire holder is in good contact with the connector body.
9. Push the metal shell toward the connector body until the wire holder and the
connector body are engaged completely. Crimp the connector, as shown in
Figure 4-320.

Figure 4-320 Crimping the connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1138
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

10. Push the jacket towards the metal shell until the metal shell is covered. This
completes the assembly of one end of the cable, as shown in Figure 4-321.

Figure 4-321 Pushing the metal shell


11. To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 10.

Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable

Background

Figure 4-322 shows the components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable.

Figure 4-322 Components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable


A. Plug of connector B. Jacket C. Twisted-pair wires

Procedure
1. Remove a 16-mm (0.63 in.) long section of the jacket, as shown in Figure
4-323.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1139
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the
twisted-pair cable.

Figure 4-323 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))


2. Align the four pairs of wires and cut the ends neatly, as shown in Figure
4-324. The connections between the wires and the pins are listed in Table
4-80.

Figure 4-324 Connections between wires and pins (unit: mm (in.))


Table 4-80 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through
cable as an example)
Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color

1 White-Orange

2 Orange

3 White-Green

4 Blue

5 White-Blue

6 Green

7 White-Brown

8 Brown

3. Feed the cable into the plug, and crimp the connector, as shown in Figure
4-325.

NO TE

When inserting the cable, check from the side or bore of the plug to ensure that the
cable is completely seated in the plug.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1140
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-325 Crimping the connector


4. To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips

Background
● To ensure proper contact between the crimped wires and the wire conductors,
the heights and sizes of the contact strips must be standard and the same.
● The contact strips must be parallel to each other, with an offset of less than ±
5°. The top margin of a strip must be parallel to the axis of the connector,
with an offset of less than ± 10°.
● To ensure conductivity, the surface of the contact strips must be clean.
● The contact strips must be in good contact with the RJ45 socket. The plastic
separators must remain intact and be aligned.
● The contact strip blade must extend beyond the ends of the wires. The ends
of the wires must be in contact with the edge of the RJ45. The distance
between them must be less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).

Procedure
1. Hold the crimped connector, with the front side facing you, and check
whether the contact strips are of the same height. The height should be 6.02
± 0.13 mm (0.237 ± 0.005). If a measuring tool is not available, you can
compare the connector with a standard connector. Figure 4-326 shows an
unqualified piece, and Figure 4-327 shows a qualified piece.

NO TE

All unqualified pieces must be crimped again.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1141
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-326 Contact strips of different heights


Figure 4-327 Contact strips of the same height


2. Hold an RJ45 connector and turn it 45°. Observe the top edges of the metal
contact strips. Figure 4-328 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-328 Unparallel contact strips of different heights


3. Check whether the contact strips are clean. If they are not clean and the dirt
cannot be removed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 4-329 shows
an unqualified piece.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1142
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-329 Dirt on a contract strip


4. Check whether the contact strips and the plastic separators are well aligned
and intact. If a separator is skewed and cannot be fixed, replace it with a new
RJ45 connector. Figure 4-330 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-330 Skewed plastic separators


5. Hold the connector with the side facing towards you, and check whether you
can see the cross-sections of the wires. Ensure that the ends of the wires are
in good contact with the edge of the RJ45, and that the contact strip blade
extends beyond the ends of the wires and is crimped with the wires. If not,
replace the connector. Figure 4-331 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-331 Wires not in good contact with the edge of the RJ45


Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables

Background
Huawei provides two types of Ethernet cables: straight-through cables and
crossover cables.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1143
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Straight-through cables are connected in a one-to-one manner. They are used
to connect terminals such as a computer or switch to network devices. Table
Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector lists the
connections of core wires in a straight-through cable.

Table 4-81 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
Pin Pin

X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White-blue

X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

● Crossover cables are connected in a crossover manner. They are used to
connect terminals such as two computers or switches. Table Pin assignment
of the crossover cable connector lists the connections of core wires in a
crossover cable

Table 4-82 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
Pin Pin

X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Orange

X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.2 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White-blue

X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown


Figure 4-332 shows the pins of an RJ45 connector.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1144
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-332 Pins of an RJ45 connector


Procedure
1. Feed both connectors of the cable into the ports of the cable tester.
2. After the connectors are properly inserted, turn on the tester. If the indicators
from 1 to G turn on simultaneously, you can infer that the pins work normally
and the wires are correctly connected.

NO TE

Turn the switch to the S position to slow down lighting of the indicators so that you
can see the indicators more clearly, as shown in Figure 4-333.

Figure 4-333 Testing the conduction and connections of wires


3. Gently shake the connector and repeat Step 2 to check whether the metal
contact strips are in good contact with the core wires and Ethernet ports, as
shown in Figure 4-334.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1145
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-334 Checking the reliability


The procedure for testing a crossover cable is the same as that for testing a
straight-through cable except for the sequence in which the indicators turn
on, which depends on the wire connections of a crossover cable.

The Ethernet cable is qualified if the indicators turn on in the following
sequence:

At the master (left) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the
sequence of 1-8-G. At the slave (right) section of the tester, the indicators
turn on in the sequence of 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G.

If the indicators do not come on in this sequence, the Ethernet cable is
unqualified.

NO TE

If a tester is not available, you can use a multimeter to perform a simple test, as
shown in Figure 4-335.

Figure 4-335 Testing the connection of an Ethernet cable


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1146
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.16.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories

Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories

NO TE

The illustrations in this document may differ from actual situations, but the installation
methods are the same. For example, in this document, the adapters of cable connectors
have separate interfaces. In the actual situation, the adapters may have interfaces fixed on
equipment.

Tools
Use dedicated tools provided or specified by Huawei and follow the installation
procedure described here.

Bending Radius
Unless otherwise specified, bending radius (R) of cables or fibers must meet the
requirements listed in Table 4-83.

Table 4-83 Bending radius of cables or fibers
Cable or Fiber Bending Radius (R)

Ordinary cable In normal cases, R ≥ 2d. When the
cable is connected with a connector, R
≥ 5d.

Fiber Single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber: R ≥
10 mm (0.39 in.), bending angle > 90°
Multi-mode A1b optical fiber: 30 mm
(1.18 in.) ≤ R ≤ 40 mm (1.57 in.),
bending angle > 90°



NO TE

The letter d indicates the diameter of a cable or fiber.

Precautions for Installation
● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Do not insert a connector forcibly when the connector is blocked. Use a
dedicated tool to pull out the connector. Install the connector again after you
check that the pins are inserted properly.
● Before tightening screws on cable connectors, ensure that the connectors are
properly connected to their adapters. Tighten the screw with appropriate force
using a flat-head or Phillips screwdriver instead of bare hands or an electric
screwdriver. If the screw cannot be screwed into the tapped hole, determine

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1147
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

the reason and try again. Do not apply too much force, or the screw or
adapter may be damaged.
● When removing densely aligned cables or fiber connectors, use dedicated
pliers such as cable-pulling pliers and fiber-pulling pliers.
● Do not twist, bend, stretch, or extrude fibers during installation.
● Cover the idle fiber connectors with dust caps. Remove the dust caps before
using the fiber connectors.

Requirements for Cable Routing
● To protect cables, remove the burrs in the cable through-holes or install
protective rings in the holes.
● To ease the connection and to avoid stress, keep cable joints slack. After
connecting multiple cables to a connector that has multiple interfaces, keep
the cables slack to avoid generating stress.
● Bind or clean cables gently because cable distortion affects signal quality.
● Keep cables away from moveable components such as doors.
● Sharp objects must not touch cable wiring to prevent damage to cables.
● To protect power cables, route power cables of the active and standby power
modules separately.

Installing Power Adapters


?.1. Installing the OT Terminal

This section describes how to install OT terminals on the terminals. You can install
one OT terminal or two OT terminals on one terminal.

Procedure
● Install an OT terminal.
a. Align the hole of the OT terminal (conductor upward) with a connecting
hole, as shown in Figure 4-336.

Figure 4-336 Aligning the OT terminal with a connecting hole


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1148
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

When you install an OT terminal, the crimping sleeve is installed as shown in
Figure 4-337, where A is correct and B is incorrect.

Figure 4-337 Installing an OT terminal, showing the orientation of
crimping sleeve


b. Place the spring washer and flat washer in turn, mount a matching screw,
and fasten it clockwise, as shown in Figure 4-338.

Figure 4-338 Installing two terminals back to back


NO TICE

Ensure that the OT terminal is not in contact with other terminals or
metal components.

c. Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown
in Figure 4-339.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1149
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-339 Installed OT terminal


● Install two OT terminals on a post.
Before you install two OT terminals on a post, ensure that the two terminals
can be installed on the post and that the electrical connecting pieces have a
large contact area. Two OT terminals can be installed using any of these
methods:
– Bend the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle, as shown in
Figure 4-340.
– Cross the two terminals, as shown in Figure 4-341.

Figure 4-340 Bending the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle


Figure 4-341 Crossing two terminals


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1150
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

If the two terminals are different sizes, place the smaller one above the bigger
one. A maximum of two terminals can be installed on a post.

● To remove an OT terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.

?.2. Installing a DC Power Connector (Straight Female, 2.5 mm²)

Prerequisites
The fuse capacity of the external power supply meets requirements.

Background
NetEngine 8000 M1A/M1C/M1D/M1D-B supports 2.5 mm2 cable.

NO TE

The colors and structures of cables may vary in different countries and regions. If cables are
purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

NetEngine 8000 M1C/M1D/M1D-B Procedure
1. Take the power connector out of the packaging bag, and strip a power cable
at a length in line with the value marked on the silkscreen attached to the
connector.

CA UTION

To avoid damage to copper wires when a length of 8 mm power cable is
stripped, do not apply too much force when peeling insulation coating off the
wires.

2. Use a screwdriver to push sliding blocks until the in-position marks are
completely exposed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1151
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

3. When installing a DC power connector on the NetEngine 8000 M1C/M1D,
insert the NEG(-) wires (blue, blue, or gray) into the hole marked a negative
sign and the RTN(+) wires (black, red, or blue) into the hole marked a
positive sign. When the wires touch the end of the holes, use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the M2.5 screws with a torque of 0.45 N m.


DANGER

Inserting the conducting wires to wrong holes may cause damage to the
device. Verify that the positive and negative wires are inserted in the correct
holes before powering on the device.

4. Push back the sliding blocks until they are in position. Then, pull each wire
slightly to check whether it is securely connected. If a cable slides outward or
the wires of a cable are exposed outside the hole for the cable, remove the
cable, cut the split wires, strip a power cable, and reinstall the cable.


NetEngine 8000 M1A Procedure
1. Take the power connector out of the packaging bag, and strip a power cable
at a length in line with the value marked on the silkscreen attached to the
connector.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1152
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CA UTION

To avoid damage to copper wires when a length of 8 mm power cable is
stripped, do not apply too much force when peeling insulation coating off the
wires.

2. Put the cord end terminal onto the exposed conductor and ensure that the
conductor is aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal.


3. Crimp the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the cable conductor.


4. When installing a DC power connector on the NetEngine 8000 M1A Insert the
NEG(-) wires (blue) into the hole marked a negative sign ("1-" and "2-") and
the RTN(+) wires (black/brown) into the hole marked a positive sign ("1+"
and "2+"). When the wires touch the end of the holes, slide the cover on the
top of the power connector to expose M4 screws and then use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the M2.5 screws, with a torque of 0.45 N m.


DANGER

Inserting the conducting wires to wrong holes may cause damage to the
device. Verify that the positive and negative wires are inserted in the correct
holes before powering on the device.

5. Pull each wire slightly to check whether it is securely connected. If a cable
slides outward or the wires of a cable are exposed outside the hole for the
cable, remove the cable, cut the split wires, strip a power cable, and reinstall
the cable.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1153
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

?.3. Installing a DC Power Connector (Straight Female, 4-10 mm²)
Straight Female, 4-10 mm²

Prerequisites
The fuse capacity of the external power supply meets requirements.

Table 4-84 Recommended fuse capacity

Maximum Current of a Device Recommended Fuse Capacity

30 A NetEngine 8000 M6:≥16A
NOTE
NetEngine 8000 M6 : Based on long-term
evolution requirements and site conditions,
the recommended current is greater than
or equal to 32 A.



Background

The NetEngine 8000 M6 device supports 4 mm2 to 10 mm2 cables.

NO TE

The colors and structures of cables may vary in different countries and regions. If cables are
purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Procedure
1. Take the power connector out of the packaging bag, and strip a power cable
(/4mm to 10mm2) at a length in line with the value marked on the silkscreen
attached to the connector.


CA UTION

To avoid damage to copper wires when a length of 12 mm power cable is
stripped, do not apply too much force when peeling insulation coating off the
wires.


2. Unfasten the connector buckle.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1154
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


3. Insert the NEG(-) wire (blue) into the hole marked a negative sign and the
RTN(+) wire (black/brown) into the hole marked a positive sign. When the
wires touch the end of the holes, unfasten the buckles at both sides of the
power connector to expose M4 screws and then use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M4 screws, with a torque of 1.2 N m.


DANGER

Inserting the conducting wires to wrong holes may cause damage to the
device. Verify that the positive and negative wires are inserted in the correct
holes before powering on the device.

4. Fasten the buckles after the screws are tightened.
5. Pull each wire slightly to check whether it is securely connected. If a cable
slides outward or the wires of a cable are exposed outside the hole for the
cable, remove the cable, cut the split wires, strip a power cable, and reinstall
the cable.
6. Check whether the cables have been properly connected and whether the
cable sheath is pressed through the view windows. If a cable is not properly
connected or the cable sheath is pressed, repeat the preceding steps to
prepare a power cable again.


7. Insert the power connector into the power interface unit (PIU).

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1155
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


CA UTION

The conductor of the power cable must be completely inserted into the power
connector to prevent electric shocks. Before connecting or removing a power
cable, you need to power off the device.

4.2.16.2.5 Installing Ethernet Adapters

Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure
1. Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the
female connector, as shown in Figure 4-342.

Figure 4-342 Holding the male and female shielded connectors


2. Insert the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure
4-343.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1156
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-343 Feeding the male shielded connector into the female shielded
connector


3. When you hear a click, the cable connector is completely inserted in the port.
(The clip on the cable connector pops up to fix the connector in the port.) Pull
the connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in
Figure 4-344.

Figure 4-344 Installed shielded Ethernet connector


4. To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-345.

Figure 4-345 Removing a shielded Ethernet connector


Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1157
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
1. Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the
female connector, as shown in Figure 4-346.

Figure 4-346 Holding the male and female unshielded connectors


2. Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure
4-347.

Figure 4-347 Feeding the male connector into the female unshielded
connector


3. A crisp click indicates that the connector is locked by the locking key. Pull the
connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected. Figure 4-348
shows an installed Ethernet connector.

Figure 4-348 Installed unshielded Ethernet connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1158
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4. To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-349.

Figure 4-349 Removing an unshielded Ethernet connector


4.2.16.2.6 Installing Fiber Connectors

NO TE

● After you remove the dustproof cap, ensure that the fiber pins are clean and install
them as soon as possible.
● When you disassemble fiber connectors, you must use a dedicated tool if the connectors
are densely installed. Do not pull fiber protection pipes to remove fiber connectors.

Installing an FC Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the FC connector and store it for future use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-350.

Figure 4-350 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1159
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

3. Align the male connector with the female connector and gently push the
male connector until it is completely seated in the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-351.

Figure 4-351 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


4. Fasten the locking nut clockwise and ensure that the connector is securely
installed, as shown in Figure 4-352.

Figure 4-352 Fastening the locking nut


5. To disassemble an FC fiber connector, loosen the locking nut
counterclockwise, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure
4-353.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1160
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-353 Disassembling an FC fiber connector


Installing an LC Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the LC fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-354.

Figure 4-354 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Align the male connector with the fiber adapter and gently push the male
connector until it is completely seated in the fiber connector, as shown in
Figure 4-355.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1161
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-355 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


4. A clicking sound indicates that the male connector is locked, as shown in
Figure 4-356.

Figure 4-356 Installed LC connector


5. To disassemble an LC fiber connector, press the locking nut to release the
locking clips from the bore, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in
Figure 4-357.

Figure 4-357 Disassembling an LC fiber connector


Installing an SC Fiber Connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1162
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the SC fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-358.

Figure 4-358 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Feed the fiber connector into the female connector, with your fingers holding
the shell of the fiber connector (not the pigtail). When you hear a click, the
fiber connector is secured by the clips (internal parts, not illustrated in the
figure). Pull the fiber connector gently. If the connector does not loosen, the
installation is complete. As shown in Figure 4-359.

Figure 4-359 Installed SC fiber connector


4. To disassemble an SC fiber connector, hold the shell of the connector (do not
hold the fiber) and gently pull the connector in the direction vertical to the
adapter. Unlock the male connector, and then separate it from the shell, as
shown in Figure 4-360.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1163
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-360 Disassembling an SC fiber connector


NO TICE

During operation, pinch the housing instead of the tail.

Installing an MTRJ Fiber Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the MTRJ fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector,
make sure that the center PINs of the two connectors are on the same axis,
and the pins and card slots are in the same direction, as shown in Figure
4-361.

Figure 4-361 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Align the fiber adapter along the axis and gently push the fiber plug, as
shown in Figure 4-362.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1164
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-362 Feeding the male connector into the female connector


4. When you hear a "click", it has been plugged into place. At this time, the
hook has popped up to lock the fiber plug. Pull gently without loosening, as
shown in Figure 4-363.

Figure 4-363 Installed MTRJ fiber connector


5. When disassembling, lightly press the button of the optical fiber plug to
disengage the hook from the slot, and gently pull the optical fiber plug
housing along the axis, and the disassembly is completed, as shown in Figure
4-364.

Figure 4-364 Disassembling a MTRJ fiber connector


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1165
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Installing an MPO Connector

Procedure
1. Remove the dustproof cap of the MPO fiber connector and store it for future
use.
2. Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
shown in Figure 4-365.

Figure 4-365 Aligning the male connector with the female connector


3. Hold the shell labeled "PUSH" and feed the male connector into the female
connector until you hear a clicking sound. The male and female connectors
are securely installed, as shown in Figure 4-366.

Figure 4-366 Installed MPO fiber connector


4. To disassemble an MPO fiber connector, hold the shell labeled "PULL" and
remove the male connector, as shown in Figure 4-367.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1166
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-367 Disassembling an MPO fiber connector


4.2.16.2.7 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool

Procedure
1. Hold the handles of a pair of COAX crimping tools. Loosen the two fastening
screws counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 4-368.

Figure 4-368 Loosening two fastening screws


2. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools to open the self-locking
mechanism. The jaw of the COAX crimping tools opens automatically, as
shown in Figure 4-369.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1167
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-369 Pliers jaw opening automatically


3. Remove the mold from the COAX crimping tools, as shown in Figure 4-370.

Figure 4-370 Removing the mold from the COAX crimping tools


4. Place the mold to be installed into the jaw of the COAX crimping tools and
align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-371.

Figure 4-371 Installing a new mold in the COAX crimping tool


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1168
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


NO TICE

Keep the short side of the mold inwards and the long side outwards, with the
teeth of the mold aligning from the larger size to the smaller size.

5. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools tightly to match the mold and
the jaw completely. Align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-372.

Figure 4-372 Aligning the screw holes


6. Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools with one hand. Tighten the two
fastening screws clockwise. Figure 4-373 and Figure 4-374 shows the mold
installed in the COAX crimping tool.

Figure 4-373 Mold installed in the COAX crimping tool


Figure 4-374 An installed mold


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1169
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.16.3 Equipment Grounding Specifications


4.2.16.3.1 General Grounding Specifications

Table 4-85 shows the general grounding specifications.

Table 4-85 General grounding specifications

No. Description

1 The working ground and protective ground, including the shielded
ground and the lightning-proof ground of the cable distribution frame
should share the same grounding conductor.

2 The cable trays, shells, metal ventilation pipes, metal doors and windows
in the equipment room should be grounded for protection.

3 The metal parts of the equipment which are electrically floating in
normal conditions should be grounded for protection.

4 The ground cable must be connected securely to the protective ground
bar of the equipment room.

5 Do not use other equipment as part of the ground cable or electrical
connection.



4.2.16.3.2 Grounding Specifications for Equipment Room

The grounding resistance of a comprehensive communication building should be
less than or equal to one ohm. The grounding resistance of an ordinary
communication office should be less than five ohms. The grounding resistance in
an area where the earth resistance rate is high should be less than 10 ohms.

4.2.16.3.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices

Table 4-86 lists the equipment grounding specifications.

Table 4-86 Equipment Grounding Specifications

No. Description

1 All communication devices and auxiliary devices (such as mobile base
stations, transmission and switching devices, power supply devices) in
the equipment room should be grounded for protection. Connect all
protective ground for various devices jointly to a general ground bar, and
then to the same protective ground bar in the room together with the
protective ground (PGND) of the device.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1170
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Description

2 The PGND of the equipment is shorted to the copper ground bar
provided by the customer. The short-circuiting cable used should be a
yellow-green plastic insulated cable with a copper core and a cross-
sectional area greater than 25 sq. mm (0.039 sq. in.).

3 There are grounding terminals and grounding lugs at the lower part of
the front door, rear door and side panel of the cabinet, connected to the
grounding terminals of the cabinet framework through connection
cables with cross-sectional area of no less than 1.6 sq. mm (0.002 sq.
in.).

4 Ensure that all metal components of the cabinet conduct well. No
insulating coating should be sprayed on the connection part of the metal
components.

5 Connect the cabinets in the same row by fastening captive screws and
gaskets on the top of the cabinets. Do not spray any coating into a
rectangular area measuring 30 mm x 50 mm (1.18 in. x 1.97 in.) around
the connection hole for a captive bolt. Measures to prevent rust and
corrosion must be taken for this area. Zinc electroplating with iridescent
yellow chromate conversion coating should be applied to the gasket and
nut to ensure good electrical contact.

6 When combining cabinets of the same type, short-circuiting cables are
required to connect the ground busbars (if any) of the cabinets. The
cross-sectional area of the short-circuiting cable is 6 sq. mm (0.009 sq.
in.) and is no more than 300 mm (11.8 in.) long. Connect the two ends
of the short-circuiting cable to the ground busbar terminals of
neighboring cabinets and fix them firmly.


4.2.16.3.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply

Table 4-87 shows the grounding specifications for communication power supplies.

Table 4-87 Grounding specifications for communication power supplies
No. Description

1 The inlet for the AC power cable at the equipment room should be
equipped with a surge protection device (C-level) with a nominal
discharge current no less than 20 kA.

2 The protective ground for the power supply and that for communication
equipment share the same grounding conductor. If the power supply and
the equipment are in the same equipment room, use the same
protective ground bar for them if possible.

3 Use a surge protection circuit on the AC power interface.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1171
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Description

4 The positive of the -48 V DC power supply or negative pole of the 24 V
DC power supply should be grounded at the output of the DC power
supply.

5 The working ground and protective ground of the DC power supply
equipment should use the same grounding conductor with the protective
ground of the switching equipment. If the power supply and equipment
are in the same equipment room, use the same protection ground bar
for them if possible.

6 Add surge protection on the DC power interface.

7 You are not advised to use two telecom power systems to supply power
to the equipment. If two telecom power systems are required in special
scenarios, install them in the same equipment room and use the same
ground bar. The recommended ground cable length is less than 3 m.



4.2.16.3.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables

Table 4-88 lists the grounding specifications for signal cables.

Table 4-88 Grounding specifications for signal cables

No. Description

1 Equip the cable outdoors with a metal jacket, well grounded at both
ends, or connect the ends of the metal jacket to the protective ground
bar of the equipment room. For cables inside the equipment room,
install surge protection devices at the interface to the equipment. The
PGND cable for the surge protection devices should be as short as
possible.

2 The incoming and outgoing signal cables to and from the office and
unused wires inside the cable should be grounded for protection.

3 The Tone & Data Access (TDA) cable must pass through the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) with surge protective device (SPD) when
going out of the office. The cable's shield layer should be connected to
the protective ground of the MDF. The MDF should use the same
grounding conductor as the cabinet.

4 Do not route signal cables overhead.



4.2.16.3.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables

Table 4-89 shows the specifications for the ground cable.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1172
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-89 Specifications for laying out ground cables

No. Description

1 The grounding wire should not run parallel to or twist around the signal
cable.

2 Bury ground underground or arrange them indoors. Do not route ground
cables overhead.

3 Do not connect two cables together to extend the PGND cable, or add
any switches or fuses.

4 The PGND cable should be an alternating yellow and green plastic
insulated one with a copper core.

5 The neutral line of the AC power cable cannot be connected to the
protective ground of transmission and communication equipment in the
equipment room.

6 A PGND cable should be as short as possible, with a length of no more
than 45 m (147.64 ft).



4.2.16.4 Engineering Labels for Cables

An engineering label serves as an identifier for on-site installation and
maintenance after the installation. Labels on the cables facilitate correct and
orderly connection of cables, and easy maintenance after installation.
Engineering labels are specialized for power cables and signal cables:
● Signal cables include network cables, optical fibers, and user cables.
● Power cables include the AC power cables and DC power cables.

NO TE

Fill in labels according to specified requirements to keep consistency of labels in the
equipment room. Make a relevant statement in the self-check report.

4.2.16.4.1 Introduction to Labels

Label Materials

Features:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
● Color: chalk white
● Material: polyester (PET)
● Ambient temperature: -29°C (-20.2°F) to +149°C (300.2°F)
● Printed by a laser printer and written with a marker
● Pass UL and CSA authentication

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1173
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Type and Structure

Label for Signal Cables
The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure
4-375.

Figure 4-375 Label for signal cable


To specify more clearly the position of a cable, use the dividing lines on the label.
For example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the chassis
number, and another one between the chassis number and the slot number. Each
dividing line is light blue (Pantone 656c) and 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm (0.06 in. x 0.02
in.).
The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixed to the cable, and its size is
1 mm x 2 mm (0.04 in. x 0.08 in.).
The word "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label
is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.

Power Cable Label
The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the
cable ties that are attached to the cable. The identification plate has an embossed
area 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm (0.008 in. x 0.02 in.) around (symmetric on both sides), and
the area in the middle is for affixing the label, as shown in Figure 4-376.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1174
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-376 Power Cable Label


Label Printing

The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for
the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.

Template for Printing
The label template "Label of Contents and Printing Template" is a must for label
printout, which is available through the following two ways:

● Log in to the technical support website at https://support.huawei.com to
download the template. Here is the path: Cable Engineering Label Printing
Template.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1175
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Obtain the template from Huawei local office.
The template is made in Word. Follow these instructions to use the template:
● You can modify the contents of the template. Do not change settings of
centered characters, direction, and fonts.
● If many characters need to be filled in, decrease the font size, but make sure
that the printouts are clear and legible.

Merging Cells in the Template
To merge two or more cells, do as follows:
1. Select Edit/Select All.
2. Select Format/Borders and Shading/Borders. Select Box tab and click OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select cells to be merged and select the Table/Merge
Cells.

Requirements on the Printer
To print labels, use a laser jet printer of any model. Before printing labels, set up
the page and try printing.
1. Try printing on ordinary paper with both sides blank. Place the blank paper
over the whole page of the label paper, and check whether the page setup
conforms to the label layout.
2. Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have
been set correctly.
– If the printout conforms to the sheet of labels, print the labels on the
label paper.
– If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try printing
again until the correct printout is produced.
The method for adjusting the page setup is as follows.
1. Select File/Page Setup.
2. Select Layout and set Header and Footer as 0.
3. Select the Margins tab page. Select Left for Gutter Position and adjust the
values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right.

NO TE

If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 4-377 appears before printing, click Ignore
to continue the printing.

Figure 4-377 Warning prompt before printing


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1176
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

After the page setup has been made correctly, save it for future use. This page
setup is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.

Requirements for Feeding the Printer

The label paper consists of two layers and has undergone multiple processing
procedures such as printing and cutting. No matter what model of printer you use,
feed in the labels one page at a time. To avoid jamming the labels, never use the
auto-feed mode.

Feed in the label paper in the correct direction to ensure that the text is printed in
a correct position.

Requirements for the Printed Label

Make sure that the printed labels satisfy the following requirements:

● All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the
backing layer of the label page.
● Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout,
the dividing lines and the word "TO:" should not be covered by printed
characters.
● When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the word "TO:" when printing the text. Use the space bar to move
the text to the next line.

Writing Labels

Writing Tools

To make sure the printouts are clear and legible, use black markers instead of
ball-point pens to write the labels.

If no marker is available, black ball-point pens are allowed, although not
recommended. Compared with ball-point pens, waterproof markers are better.
When writing with a ball-point pen, do not leave the oil on the label, which may
contaminate the label and blur the words.

NO TE

The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.

Font

For the sake of legibility, use standard block letters and numbers as shown in
Table 4-90.

Table 4-90 Standard typeface for handwriting

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 A B C D E F G H

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1177
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z


Determine the size of characters based on the number of letters or digits and
ensure that the characters are distinct and tidy.
Placement of text on a label is shown in Figure 4-378.

Figure 4-378 Placement of text on a label


Attaching Labels

After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the page and attach it to
the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. The methods for
attaching labels are described in the following sections.

Label for Signal Cables
● Choose the place to attach labels.
The label is attached 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connector on a signal cable. In
special cases (for example, to avoid cable bending or affecting other cables),
other positions are allowed to attach the labels. The rectangular part with
text is attached facing right or downward, as shown in Figure 4-379. The
details are as follows:
– The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
– The identification card should be downward when you lay out the cable
horizontally.

Figure 4-379 Text area of the label


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1178
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Procedure for attaching labels
Figure 4-380 shows the methods and procedures for attaching labels.

Figure 4-380 Label for signal cables


Power Cable Label
Remove the label from the backing page, and attach it to the identification plate
on the cable tie. The label should be attached to the rectangular flute on the
identification plate, and attached to only one side of the identification plate. In an
equipment room, all labels should be attached in the same way. The cable ties are
bundled at 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in
special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bound on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the
finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or
on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling, as shown in Figure 4-381. The
details are as follows:
● The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
● The identification card is on the top of the cable in horizontal cabling. Make
sure that the label is facing out.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1179
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-381 Binding the label for the power cable


Contents of Engineering Labels

Contents of Labels for Power Cables

Labels for power cables are affixed on only one side of the identification plates.
On the labels, there is information (the part after the word "TO:") about the
location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control
cabinet, distribution box or power socket.

Contents of Labels for Signal Cables

The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the
location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. Figure 4-382 shows the
information on both sides of the labels affixed to the signal cables.

● Area 1 contains the location information of the local end of the cable.
● Area 2 (with the word "TO:") contains the location information of the
opposite end of the cable.
● Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.

Figure 4-382 Printed parts on the label for signal cables


Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the
right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the
location information of the opposite end; and the other side carries the location
information of the local end.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1180
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

In other words, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the
information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable.

Precautions for Using Engineering Labels

When using labels, pay attention to the following points:

● When printing, writing, or attaching labels, keep the labels clean.
● Since the label paper is made of moistureproof material, ink-jet printers and
ink pens cannot be used to print and write labels.
● Labels should be attached neatly. New-type labels are L-shaped. If they are
pasted at incorrect locations or in the incorrect direction, the appearance of
the device is affected.
● Power cable ties should be attached in the same positions on power cables,
with identification plates on the same side.
● The positions of "up", "down", "left" or "right" are all based on the viewpoint
of the engineering person who is working on the label.

4.2.16.4.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers

These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on
the boards in a chassis, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for
optical cables:

● One is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices.
● The other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices

Meaning of the Label

Table 4-91 lists information on both sides of the labels affixed to the optical fibers
that connect two devices.

Table 4-91 Information on labels affixed to the fibers between two devices

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
R/T number numbered from A to Z.
N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
numbered from 01 to 99.
For example, A01 is the cabinet in row A and
column 01.

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,
number for example, 01.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1181
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Example

C: physical Numbered in top-down and left-right order
slot number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot
at the top left of the chassis.

D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,
interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.

R: Receiving -
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface



Example of the Label
Figure 4-383 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.

Figure 4-383 Sample label on an optical fiber between two devices


The meaning of the label is listed in Figure 4-383.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected
to the optical receiving interface 01 in slot 5, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row
A, column 01 in the machine room.
● "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected with optical transmitting interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 01 in the
cabinet in row G, column 01 in the machine room.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF

Meaning of the Labels
Table 4-92 shows information on both sides of labels attached to an optical fiber
between a device and an optical distribution frame (ODF).

Table 4-92 Information on labels affixed to a fiber between a device and an ODF

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet For example, A01.
R/T number

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1182
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Example

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,
number for example, 01.

C: physical slot Numbered in top-down and left-right order
number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first
slot at the top left of the chassis.

D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,
interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.

R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface

ODF-MN-B- MN: row M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
C-R/T number and numbered from A to Z.
column N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
number of an numbered from 01 to 99.
ODF
For example, G01 is the ODF of row G and
column 01.

B: row number Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.
of the terminal
device

C: column
number of the
terminal
device

R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface


Example of the Label
Figure 4-384 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1183
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-384 Sample label on an optical fiber between the device and the ODF


Meaning of the label in Figure 4-384:

● "ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is
connected to the optical receiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF
in row G, column 01 in the machine room.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected to optical receiving interface 1 in slot 05, chassis 01 in the cabinet
in row A, column 01 in the machine room.

4.2.16.4.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables

Applicable Ranges

The labels can be applied to Ethernet cables.

Label Content

Table 4-93 shows the information on both sides of the labels affixed to Ethernet
cables.

You can also decide the label content based on the actual environment. If the
device is not installed in the cabinet, for example, you can remove the cabinet
number.

Table 4-93 Information on the Ethernet cables

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number

B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two
number digits, for example, 01.

C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

D: network port Numbered in top-down and left-right orders.
number For example, 01.

MN-Z MN: cabinet For example, B02 is the second cabinet in
number row B.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1184
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Example

Z: Location Fill in the location number of the terminal
number device on site. If the cable is connected to a
device in a cabinet, specify the serial
numbers of the cabinet, the chassis, and the
Ethernet interface of the device. For example,
B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the
Network Management Station (NMS),
specify the specific location of the NMS.


The contents of the labels for network cables connecting hubs and devices or
agents and the network cables for other purposes should be specified according to
actual connections. The details are as follows:
● For a network cable connecting a hub and device, the label on the hub end
should indicate the numbers of the chassis and cabinet where the hub resides,
and the serial number on the hub. The label on the device end should indicate
the number of the chassis and cabinet where the device is located. If the
device is a standalone device, provide the specific position of the device.
● For a network cable connecting a hub and an agent or terminal, the label on
the agent or terminal end should contain the serial number of the network
interface. The definitions of the cabinet number and chassis number are the
same as those described in Table 1-28.
● If the hub is a standalone device without a cabinet or chassis, the label should
contain specific location information that identifies the hub.
The serial number on the hub, the network interface number of the agent or
terminal, and the location of the standalone device should be specified according
to actual connections.

Label Example
Figure 4-385 shows a sample label on an Ethernet cable.

Figure 4-385 Sample label on an Ethernet cable


Meaning of the label in Figure 4-385:
● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that one end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01
in the equipment room.
● "B02-03-01" indicates that another end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in chassis 03 of the cabinet on row B, column 02 in the
equipment room. No slot number is given.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1185
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.16.4.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables

Attach labels to both ends of a user cable to indicate the locations of the cable on
the device and main distribution frame (MDF).

Meaning of the Engineering Labels for User Cables
Table 4-94 shows the contents of the labels.

Table 4-94 Contents of the engineering labels for user cables

Content Meaning Example

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number

B: frame Numbered in the bottom-up order with two
number digits, for example, 03.

C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

D: cable Numbered with two digits in top-down and
number left-right order. For example, 01.

MDF-MN-B-C MN: row M: The rows of cabinets from front to back
number and are numbered from A to Z. N: The columns of
column number cabinets from left to right are numbered
of the MDF from 01 to 99. For example, G01 is the MDF
of Row G and Column 01.

B: row number Ranges from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.
of the terminal
device

C: column
number of the
terminal device



Example of the Label
Figure 4-386 shows a sample label on a user cable.

Figure 4-386 Sample label on a user cable


The meaning of the label in Figure 4-386 is as follows:

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1186
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the user cable is connected to
port 1 in slot 1, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the
equipment room.
● "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the user cable is
connected to the terminal in row 01, column 01 of the MDF in row G, column
01 in the equipment room.

4.2.16.4.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables

Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables

These labels are affixed to the DC power cables that provide power supply for
cabinets, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. Here, the DC power cables
also include power cables and PGND cables.

The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates
on cable ties. For details of the labels, see Table 4-95.

Table 4-95 Contents of the label

Content Meaning

MN(BC)- MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.
B--48Vn B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two
digits, for example, 01.
MN(BC)-B-
BGND n: power socket number, numbered as 1 to 3 in the bottom-
up and left-to-right orders.
MN(BC)-B- On the loaded cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the
PGND cabinet.
On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column
number of the power distribution equipment like a control
cabinet and distribution box, and BC identifies the row and
column number of the -48 V connector. If there is no row
number or column number, or the connector can be identified
without them, BC can be omitted. It is unnecessary to identify
the row and column number for BGND and PGND.



The label only carries location information about the destination direction of the
power cable whereas information about the local end is unnecessary. That is, the
label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control
cabinet, or the distribution box. Table 1-30 lists the information on two -48 V
power supplies on the label. The information on other DC voltages, such as 24 V
and 60 V should be given in similar methods.

Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable
ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should
face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same
direction. For details, see Figure 4-387.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1187
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-387 Example of the labels for DC power cables


The meaning of the label in Figure 4-387 is as follows:

● On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01/B08--48V2" on the cable indicates
that the cable is -48 V DC supply, which is from the eighth connector in row B
of -48 V bus bar in the cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment
room.
● On the distribution box side, the label "B03--48V2" indicates that the cable is
-48 V DC supply, connected to DC power socket 2 in row B, column 03 in the
equipment room.

NO TE

In the power distribution box or the first power cabinet of a row in a transmission
equipment room, every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric
identification. For example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8")
is the numeric identification of the terminal block.

PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are short-
circuited. Therefore, it makes no difference which terminal is connected to them. It
is only necessary to give the row and column of the power distribution box,
instead of giving the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper
bar. For example, if the label on the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means
that the power cable is a BGND that connects BGND copper bar in the power
distribution box in row A, column 01 in the machine room. Information on the
labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.

4.3 IMB05 Installation Guide

4.3.1 Requirements for Site Selection

Sites provided by Huawei must be deployed in places that meet specified
requirements.

Requirements for Indoor Base Stations
● Equipment rooms for indoor base stations cannot be constructed in livestock
rooms or fertilizer warehouses. If an equipment room has to be located near a
livestock house or a fertilizer warehouse, it must be located in the upwind
direction.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1188
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● It is recommended that the equipment room of an indoor site be located in a
floor higher than the second. If this requirement cannot be met, the ground
height of the equipment room must be 600 mm (23.62 in.) higher than the
maximum flood level in the local history.
● The following recommendations are provided to optimize equipment rooms
that are sensitive to noise:
– Equipment is installed as far as possible from human activity areas.
– Equipment rooms are not located adjacent to bedrooms of residents. If an
equipment room has to be adjacent to bedrooms of residents, the
equipment room and the bedrooms should be separated by at least two
walls.
– Equipment is installed 5 m (16.4 ft) farther from doors and windows.
– The front doors of equipment are facing towards a direction that people
rarely pass by.
– The thickness of the floor in the equipment room is greater than or equal
to 150 mm (5.91 in.).
– Rubber pads are placed under equipment to reduce noise and solid-borne
sound.
– It is recommended that sound-absorbing materials be stuck to
appropriate positions on walls in the equipment room to reduce noise.
4.3.2 Installation Preparations
This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the
installation. It also specifies the skills that the onsite personnel must have.

4.3.2.1 Tools and Instruments
The following primary and auxiliary installation tools must be ready before the
installation.

Primary Installation Tools
The primary installation tools must be provided for onsite installation, such as
tools for measuring dimensions, preparing cables, and fastening, as listed in Table
4-96.

Table 4-96 Primary installation tools
Marker Phillips screwdriver (M4, Diagonal pliers
M5, M6 and M8)

Flat-head screwdriver
(M4, M5, M6 and M8)


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1189
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Adjustable wrench Socket wrench (M10 and Torque wrench (30 N·m
(capacity ≤ 19 mm) M12) to 50 N·m)


Phillips torque Crimping tool Wire clippers
screwdriver


Rubber mallet Guarded blade utility Wire stripper
knife


Hammer drill (Ø14) Heat gun Level


Multimeter Measuring tape Vacuum cleaner


ESD gloves ESD wrist strap Hydraulic pliers




Auxiliary installation tools
The auxiliary installation tools provide protection or facilitate the installation, as
listed in Table 4-97.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1190
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-97 Auxiliary installation tools

Protective gloves ESD gloves Utility knife


Diagonal pliers Multimeter Vacuum cleaner


Marker pen(diameter ≤ Rubber mallet -
10 mm or 0.39 in.)




4.3.2.2 Requirements for Onsite Personnel

Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation,
onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety
precautions.

Before the installation, pay attention to the following:

● The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be
familiar with the proper installation and operation methods.
● The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and
installation environment. In most cases, three to five people are required.
4.3.3 Installation Clearances

This section describes the installation clearances for an IMB05.

4.3.3.1 Installation Clearances for a Wall-mounted IMB05

This section describes the recommended and minimum installation clearances for
a wall-mounted IMB05.

Installation Clearances for an IMB05 with Its Right Side Mounted on a Wall

The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB05 with its right
side mounted on a wall.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1191
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-388 Installation clearances for an IMB05 with its right side mounted on a
wall


(a) Recommended installation (b) Minimum installation clearances
clearances


Installation Clearances for an IMB05 with Its Left Side Mounted on a Wall
The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB05 with its left
side mounted on a wall.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1192
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-389 Installation clearances for an IMB05 with its left side mounted on a
wall


(a) Recommended installation (b) Minimum installation clearances
clearances


Installation Clearances for an IMB05 with Its Rear Mounted on a Wall
The following figure shows the installation clearances for an IMB05 with its rear
mounted on a wall.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1193
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-390 Installation clearances for an IMB05 with its rear mounted on a wall


(a) Recommended installation (b) Minimum installation clearances
clearances




NO TICE

When installing multiple IMB05s with their rear sides mounted on a wall, reserve
a proper spacing between adjacent IMB05s, as shown in the following figure.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1194
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


4.3.4 Installing an IMB05
This section describes the process of installing an IMB05.

4.3.4.1 Installing an IMB05 with Its Left or Right Side Against a Wall
This section describes the process of installing an IMB05 with its left or right side
against a wall.

Context
When the IMB05 is installed with its left or right side against the wall, the
recommended diameter for the holes in the mounting ears is 14 mm (0.55 in.),
the spacing between the holes in the two upper mounting ears is 292 mm (11.5
in.), and the spacing between the holes in the upper and lower mounting ears on
one side is 611 mm (24.06 in.).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1195
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-391 Spacing between the holes in two mounting ears


NO TE

● When installing an IMB05 onto a wall, ensure that the wall can bear 1.25 kN (281.25
lbf) outward force vertical to it.
● This section describes how to install an IMB05 with its right side against a wall. The
procedures are the same for installing an IMB05 with its left side against a wall.

Procedure

Step 1 Install the IMB05 mounting ears, as shown in the following figure.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1196
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-392 Installing the mounting ears


(1) Insulation washer (2) Installation positions of screws

Step 2 Place a marking-off template against the wall, use a level to ensure that the
marking-off template is placed horizontally, and then use a marker to mark
anchor points, as shown in the following figure.

NO TE

Use the holes marked A as anchor points. The recommended distance between the
marking-off template and the ground is kept between 1000 mm (39.37 in.) to 1200 mm
(47.24 in.).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1197
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-393 Marking the anchor points


(1) Level (2) Drilling positions

Step 3 Drill holes at the anchor points, and insert expansion anchor bolts, as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 4-394 Drilling a hole at an anchor point and installing an expansion
anchor bolt


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1198
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

(1) M10x80 (2) Nut (3) Spring (4) Flat (5) Expansion
bolt washer washer tube


1. Use a hammer drill with a Φ12 bit to drill holes vertically at the marked
anchor points. Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 55 mm (2.17
in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).


NO TICE

Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the
dust before drilling holes.

1. Use a vacuum cleaner to wipe away any dust in and around the holes and
measure the spacing between holes. If any of the holes is beyond the
acceptable range, mark a new anchor point and drill a new hole.
2. Tighten the expansion anchor bolt slightly, and place each expansion anchor
bolt vertically into each hole.
3. Use a rubber mallet to pound each expansion anchor bolt until the
corresponding expansion tube completely enters the hole.
4. Tighten and then loosen each expansion anchor bolt, and remove the M10
nuts, spring washers, and flat washers of the two lower holes in sequence.


NO TICE

After dismantling an expansion anchor bolt, ensure that the top of the expansion
tube is on the same level as the wall. Otherwise, the device cannot be installed on
the wall evenly and securely.

Step 4 Install the IMB05 onto the two upper bolts, and partially tighten the two upper
M10 nuts. After tightening the two lower nuts, tighten the upper nuts to 30 N·m
(265.52 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

NO TE

After tightening the two lower nuts, tighten the upper nuts to ensure that the subrack is
vertical to the horizontal plane.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1199
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-395 Partially tightening the upper nuts


(1) IMB05 mounting ears

Step 5 Align the holes in the lower mounting ears of the IMB05 with the installation
holes. Use a torque wrench to tighten the two lower M10 nuts and then the two
upper M10 nuts to 30 N·m (265.52 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1200
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-396 Tightening the nuts


(1) Nut (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer


----End

4.3.4.2 Installing an IMB05 with Its Rear Against a Wall
This section describes the process of installing an IMB05 with its rear against a
wall.

Context
When the IMB05 is installed with its rear against the wall, the recommended
diameter for the holes in the mounting ears is 14 mm (0.55 in.), the spacing
between the holes in the two upper mounting ears is 128 mm (5.04 in.), and the
spacing between the holes in the upper and lower mounting ears on one side is
611 mm (24.06 in.).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1201
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-397 Spacing between the holes in two mounting ears


NO TE

When installing an IMB05 onto a wall, ensure that the wall can bear 1.25 kN (281.25 lbf)
outward force vertical to it.

Procedure

Step 1 Install the IMB05 mounting ears, as shown in the following figure.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1202
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-398 Installing the mounting ears


(1) Insulation washer (2) Installation positions of screws

Step 2 Use a level to measure whether the two holes are at the same horizontal line,
place a marking-off template against the wall, and then use a marker to mark
anchor points, as shown in the following figure.

NO TE

Use the holes marked B as anchor points. The recommended distance between the
marking-off template and the ground is kept between 1000 mm to 1200 mm (39.37 in. to
47.24 in.).


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1203
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-399 Marking the anchor points


(1) Level (2) Drilling positions

Step 3 Drill holes at the anchor points, and insert expansion anchor bolts, as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 4-400 Drilling a hole at an anchor point and installing an expansion
anchor bolt


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1204
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

(1) M10x80 (2) Nut (3) Spring (4) Flat (5) Expansion
bolt washer washer tube


1. Use a hammer drill with a Φ12 bit to drill holes vertically at the marked
anchor points. Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 55 mm (2.17
in.) to 60 mm (2.36 in.).


NO TICE

Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the
dust before drilling holes.

1. Use a vacuum cleaner to wipe away any dust in and around the holes and
measure the spacing between holes. If any of the holes is beyond the
acceptable range, mark a new anchor point and drill a new hole.
2. Tighten the expansion anchor bolt slightly, and place each expansion anchor
bolt vertically into each hole.
3. Use a rubber mallet to pound each expansion anchor bolt until the
corresponding expansion tube completely enters the hole.
4. Tighten and then loosen each expansion anchor bolt, and remove the M10
nuts, spring washers, and flat washers of the two lower holes in sequence.


NO TICE

After dismantling an expansion anchor bolt, ensure that the top of the expansion
tube is on the same level as the wall. Otherwise, the device cannot be installed on
the wall evenly and securely.

Step 4 Install the IMB05 onto the two upper bolts, and partially tighten the two upper
M10 nuts. After tightening the two lower nuts, tighten the upper nuts to 30 N·m
(265.52 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

NO TE

After tightening the two lower nuts, tighten the upper nuts to ensure that the subrack is
vertical to the horizontal plane.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1205
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-401 Partially tightening the upper nuts


(1) IMB05 mounting ears

Step 5 Align the holes in the lower mounting ears of the IMB05 with the installation
holes. Use a torque wrench to tighten the two lower M10 nuts and then the two
upper M10 nuts to 30 N·m (265.52 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1206
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-402 Tightening the nuts


(1) Nut (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer


----End
4.3.5 Installing Components in an IMB05
The cable making and installation marks on the left and right sides of the IMB05
do not apply to the devices described in this document. As such, ignore them
during the installation.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1207
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement


4.3.5.1 Installing a Main Device
This section describes how to install a main device in the IMB05.

Procedure
The IMB05 supports installation of a 2 U or 3 U high device. This document uses a
3 U high device as an example.
1. Remove the auxiliary material package bound inside the IMB05, as it is not
required during the installation.
2. Remove the second guide rail from the IMB05 by loosening the M3
countersunk screws anticlockwise on the guide rail. Both the upper and lower
guide rails need to be removed. Figure 4-403 shows how to remove the lower
guide rail. For a 2 U high device, you do not need to remove the guide rails.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1208
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-403 Removing a guide rail


3. Take floating nuts out of the auxiliary material package of the main device,
and install them on both the top and bottom of the IMB05. Figure 4-404
shows how to install them on the bottom of the IMB05.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1209
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-404 Installing floating nuts


4. Slide the device into the IMB05 along the left guide rail and tighten the
screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.) using a screwdriver, as shown in Figure 4-405.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1210
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-405 Installing the device


CA UTION

When installing the main device, ensure that the fan module is at the top.
Otherwise, heat dissipation of the device will be affected.

4.3.5.2 Installing the ETP4860-2KW-FE Power Box
For details about how to assembly the power modules of the ETP4860, see
"Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-2KW-FE)" in Hardware Installation and
Maintenance.
1. Slide the power box along the guide rails into the corresponding slot on the
right of the IMB05. Tighten the screws on the panel to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.).
Figure 4-406 shows the details.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1211
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-406 Installing the power box


NO TE

When installing the power box, ensure that the input terminal side is at the bottom.

4.3.6 Installing Cables
This section describes external cables and cables for mandatory components.

4.3.6.1 Cable Connections
This section describes the cable connections of the IMB05. Figure 4-407 shows the
details.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1212
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

● Before installing cables, use a marker to mark the two ends so that the two ends of one
cable can easily match each other.
● You must prepare cables according to actual cable routes during the installation.
● Attach engineering labels to both ends of each cable after the cable is installed.
● During equipment installation, bundle power cables if they are too long.
● If cables are routed at the bottom of the IMB05, ensure that the cables do not block the
air vents of the main device. Otherwise, heat dissipation of the main device may be
affected.
● Do not install cable management frames for the main device under the IMB05.
Otherwise, cable routing may be affected.
● The PGND cable of a 3 U high device is connected to the ground point at the bottom of
the IMB05, and that of a 2 U device is connected to the ground point at the top of the
IMB05.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1213
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-407 Cable connections


(1) PGND cable for the (2) PGND cable for the (3) Power cable of the
IMB05 main device main device

(4) AC input power cable (5) Optical fiber (6) Network cable
of the ETP4860

(7) Monitoring signal - -
cable




Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1214
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● For details about the cable connections between the ETP4860 and the main
device, see "Installing Power Boxes (ETP4860-2KW-FE)" in Hardware
Installation and Maintenance of the corresponding product.
● For details about how to prepare power terminals for main devices, see
Hardware Installation and Maintenance of the corresponding product and
navigate to Appendix > On-site Cable Assembly and Installation >
Installing Cable Accessories > Installing Power Adapters.
● For details about how to prepare OT terminals for PGND cable installation,
see Hardware Installation and Maintenance of the corresponding product and
navigate to Appendix > On-site Cable Assembly and Installation >
Assembling Power Cables > Assembling the OT Terminal and Power
Cable.

4.3.6.2 Removing the Protective Plates at the Bottom of an IMB05
This section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the protective
plates at the bottom of an IMB05.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the protective plates at the bottom of the IMB05, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 4-408 Removing the protective plates


Step 2 Optional: After all cables are installed, if there is still space in the cable holes, cut
the protective plates to an appropriate shape to seal the cable holes.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1215
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-409 Cutting the protective plates to an appropriate shape


----End
4.3.7 Post-Installation Check

After device installation, perform a hardware installation check.

Table 1-2 lists the hardware installation items to be checked.

Table 4-98 Hardware installation checklist

No. Item

1 The position for each piece of equipment conforms to the engineering
design and meets the space requirement. Sufficient space is reserved
for equipment maintenance.

2 The holes for the frame are in proper contact with the holes for the
expansion bolt, and the frame and the wall surface are in proper
horizontal contact.

3 When an IMB05 is installed on a wall, the optical fibers out of the
cabinet need to be routed with a bending radius of no less than 140
mm (5.51 in.).

4 During equipment installation, all signal cables need to be routed in
underfloor mode and then be led out of the chassis. If the cables are
routed in overhead mode, water vapor is condensed to water, which
flows to the cabinet along the cables and then corrodes the boards. As
a result, the boards are short-circuited.

5 When routing the power and PGND cables on the bottom of the
IMB05 network cabinet, ensure that the holes for heat dissipation are
not covered.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1216
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Item

6 After routing the cables for the equipment, bundle all the cables at the
outlet of the cabinet, avoiding stress generated on the internal cable
connectors when the external cables are pulled.

7 Lead fibers out of the cabinet outlet using winding pipes and bundle
the winding pipes instead of the fibers using cable ties.

8 The distance between the bundled fiber and the device panel is
between 40 mm and 70 mm.

9 There are no connectors or joints on the power cable or PGND cable.

10 All the power cables and PGND cables are not short-circuited or
reversely connected. In addition, no damaged or broken parts exist.

11 The working grounding and protection grounding of the base station
and the surge protection grounding of the building share one group of
grounding conductors.

12 The connector of the signal cable is intact, and no damaged or broken
parts exist on the cable.

13 The lugs at both ends of the power cable or the PGND cable are
securely soldered or crimped.

14 The bare wire and OT terminal at the wiring terminal are tightly
wrapped with the insulation tape or heat shrink tubing.

15 After all cables are routed, cut parts of the protection plate to seal
cable holes if there is spare space in the cable holes.

16 The surface of the overall equipment is clean and tidy. The exterior
paint is intact.

17 The door and lock of the cabinet are proper.

18 All labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.



4.3.8 Power-on Check

After installation, perform a power-on check. For details about the check method,
see "Power-on Check" in Hardware Installation and Maintenance.
4.3.9 Installing the Cover Plate of an IMB05

This section describes procedures for installing the cover plate of an IMB05.

Procedure

Step 1 Fit the tabs on the cover plate into the slots in the IMB05, as shown in the
following figure.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1217
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-410 Installing a cover plate


Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M3x8 bolt at the bottom of the cover
plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-411 Securing a cover plate


----End

4.4 A66E Cabinet Installation Guide

4.4.1 Introduction to the A66E Cabinet

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1218
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Naming Conventions
Figure 4-412 shows the naming conventions of the A66E cabinet.

Figure 4-412 Cabinet name


Table 4-99 Cabinet naming conventions
Field Description

1 ALPEN, indicating the cabinet appearance series

2 Cabinet width: 600 mm

3 Cabinet depth: 650 mm (including the convex door)

4 Enforce, indicating an enhanced performance model (Base, indicating a
basic performance model)


Appearance
Figure 4-413 shows the A66E cabinet appearance.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1219
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-413 Cabinet appearance


Physical Structure
Figure 4-414 shows components of the A66E cabinet.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1220
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-414 Cabinet components


1. Front door 2. Top cover 3. Rear door 4. Side panel

5. Mounting rail 6. Rack - -


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1221
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Functions and Features
The cabinet is made of class-A high-strength carbon cold rolled steel and
galvanized sheet, which complies with the Restriction of the use of certain
Hazardous Substances (RoHS). The fire endurance of interior materials complies
with Underwriter Laboratories (UL) standards. The distance between front and
rear mounting rails is adjustable in 25 mm increments. Its assembled architecture
facilitates capacity expansion.
The cabinet has the following features and functions:
● Overhead and underfloor cabling
● Sufficient space to place and connect components
● Ability in protecting internal components from contamination
● Ability in preventing damage to internal components

Heat Dissipation
The front and rear doors of the cabinet are of mesh construction. Air enters the
chassis from the front door and base and is exhausted through the rear door.
Figure4 shows the airflow.

Figure 4-415 Airflow in the cabinet


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1222
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Technical Specifications

Table 4-100 Technical specifications of the A66E cabinet
Item Details

Part number 02116093

Dimensions without 2200 mm x 600 mm x 650 mm
packaging (H x W x
D)

Dimensions with 2320 mm x 720 mm x 890 mm
packaging (H x W x
D)

Weight (empty, 94 kg
without packaging)

Weight (assembly 166 kg
cabinet, with
packaging)

Standards IEC60297
compliance

Distance between 375mm
mounting rails

Available space 47U

Installation scenario Indoor installation

Installation mode Installation on a concrete floor or ESD floor

Static load bearing 200 kg
capacity


4.4.2 Cabinet Accessories

4.4.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand

Appearance
The cabinet stand is pictured in Figure 4-416.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1223
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-416 Cabinet stand


Functions
The stand elevates and supports the cabinet.

Technical Specifications
Table 4-101 lists technical specifications of the cabinet stand.

Table 4-101 Technical specifications of the cabinet stand
Stand Type Applicable ESD Floor Wi Applicable Chassis
Height (mm) dth Depth (mm)
(m
m)

Stand I 200–270 600 1000, 1100, and 1200

Stand II 270–410

Stand III 410–700



NO TE

The ESD floor height is the distance between the upper surface of the ESD floor and the
surface of the concrete floor.
4.4.3 A66E Cabinet Installation

4.4.3.1 Installing the Cabinet on the Concrete Floor


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1224
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.4.3.1.1 Removing the Ground Cables and Cabinet Doors

NO TE

Before removing the ground cables and cabinet doors, remove the marking-off template
and concrete mounting kits.
1. Removing the ground cables from the front door and rear door. One end of
the ground cable is connected with the cabinet door.
2. Pull down the hook pin at the upper part of the door panel.
3. Remove the front door.
4. Follow the same steps to remove the rear door.

Figure 4-417 Removing the ground cable and door


NO TE

For the coming use, put away the front and rear doors of the cabinet and bolts.

4.4.3.1.2 Determining the Installation Position of the Cabinets

1. Positioning the cabinet.
a. Attach the plumb line to the cable rack that is vertical to the front of the
cabinet. Use the marker to mark the point of the plumb on the ground.
b. Follow the same procedure to mark the second point, and draw the
baseline by using the powder marker.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1225
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-418 Positioning the cabinet


NO TE

The method for positioning the cabinet described in this document is only for
reference. Follow the engineering drawing to position the cabinet in the actual
installation.
2. Determining installation holes for the cabinet.

Figure 4-419 Determining installation holes for the cabinet


NO TE

The spacing between the rear door of the front access cabinet and the wall or any
other obstacles should be no less than 100 mm.
3. Confirming the position of the drill holes.
a. Lay out the templates side by side and ensure that there is 600 mm
between the center lines of two adjacent templates.
b. Use a marker to mark installation holes on the concrete floor.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1226
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-420 Confirming the position of the drill holes


NO TE

Position the template so that the semicircular gap indicates the front of the
cabinet.
After marking the reference lines, check the hole positions with a ruler.

4.4.3.1.3 Installing Expansion Bolts

1. Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise until the guide rib is fixed on the guide
trough.
2. Put the expansion bolt vertically into the hole. Use a claw hammer to strike
the expansion tube into the hole completely.
3. Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise until the nut is firmly inserted into the
expansion tube.
4. Turn the expansion bolt counterclock-wise and remove the expansion bolt,
spring washer, and flat washer in turn.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1227
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-421 Installing expansion bolts


4.4.3.1.4 Installing the Cabinet

1. Placing the cabinet.
a. Place the cabinet on the specified position, and align the installation
holes of the cabinet with the holes on the floor.
b. Fix the spring washer, flat washer and insulation tube on the expansion
bolt. Insert them into the holes and tighten the four expansion bolts a
bit, but do not fasten them.
c. Lift one side of the cabinet and insert the insulation plate under the
cabinet. Insert another insulation plate under the other side of the
cabinet. Ensure that the gaps properly lock the expansion bolts.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1228
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-422 Placing the cabinet


4.4.3.1.5 Leveling the cabinet and testing the insulation

1. Leveling and fixing the cabinet.
a. Remove the four adjusting bolts attached on the bottom enclosure frame,
install them on the adjusting nuts.
b. Check whether the cabinet is horizontal or vertical by using a spirit level
and a plumb line respectively.
c. If the cabinet is not horizontal, adjust the adjusting bolts by using a
socket wrench.
d. When the cabinet is horizontal, fasten the four expansion bolts to 45
N·m.

Figure 4-423 Leveling and fixing the cabinet


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1229
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

The adjustment range of adjusting anchor is from 0 mm to 10 mm.
2. Testing the insulation of the cabinet.
a. Set the multimeter to read mega ohms.
b. Measure the resistance between the expansion bolt and the ground bolt
of the rack, the measured resistance is more than five mega ohms.

Figure 4-424 Testing the insulation of the cabinet


NO TE

If the measured resistance is less than five mega ohms, check whether any
insulation part is damaged or not installed. Measure the resistance again.
Otherwise, remove all components, install and fasten the cabinet again.

4.4.3.1.6 Attaching the cabinets

1. Remove the connection plates on the lintels of the front and rear doors and
install them again as shown in the figure.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1230
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-425 Installing the connection plates


2. Use the spirit level and the plumb line to verify that the bottom line of the
cabinet is horizontal and the front line of the column is vertical. If the cabinet
is not horizontal, adjust the adjusting anchor by using a socket wrench.

Figure 4-426 Leveling the cabinet


NO TE

Both the gap between cabinets and the vertical deviation should be less than 3 mm.

4.4.3.1.7 Installing Cabinet Doors

NO TE

Install the cabinet door after the inside components and cables. To install the components
inside the cabinets and cables, see the Installation Guide.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1231
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

1. Installing the cabinet doors.
a. Align the door with the front face of the column.
b. Place the door on the lower lintel and close the door till the lower pin
automatically inserts into the hole in the lower lintel.
c. Press the spring pin with your finger and push the upper part of the door
till the spring pin properly inserts in the installation hole at the top of the
lintel.
d. Check the spring pin and lower pins and ensure that the door is properly
installed.
e. To install the rear door, see the front door installation.

Figure 4-427 Installing the cabinet doors


2. Install the ground cables at the front doors and rear doors as shown in the
figure.

Figure 4-428 Installing the ground cables


4.4.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on the ESD Floor


4.4.3.2.1 Removing the Ground Cables and Cabinet Doors


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1232
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

Before removing the ground cables and cabinet doors, remove the marking-off template
and concrete mounting kits.
1. Remove the ground cables from the front door and rear door. One end of the
ground cable is connected with the cabinet door.
2. Pull down the hook pin at the upper part of the door panel.
3. Remove the front door.
4. Follow the same steps to remove the rear door.

Figure 4-429 Removing the ground cables and doors


NO TE

For the coming use, put away the front and rear doors of the cabinet and bolts.

4.4.3.2.2 Determining the Installation Position of the Supports

1. Positioning the cabinet.

Figure 4-430 Positioning the cabinet


NO TE

The spacing between the rear door of the front access cabinet and the wall or any
other obstacles should be no less than 100 mm.
2. Determining installation holes for the cabinet.
a. Lay out the templates side by side and ensure that there is 600 mm
between the center lines of two adjacent templates.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1233
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

b. Use a marker to mark installation holes on the concrete floor.

Figure 4-431 Determining installation holes for the cabinet


NO TE

Position the template so that the semicircular gap indicates the front of the
cabinet.
After marking the reference lines, check the hole positions with a ruler.

4.4.3.2.3 Installing Expansion Bolts

1. Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise until the guide rib is fixed on the guide
trough.
2. Put the expansion bolt vertically into the hole. Use a claw hammer to strike
the expansion tube into the hole completely.
3. Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise until the nut is firmly inserted into the
expansion tube.
4. Turn the expansion bolt counterclockwise and remove the expansion bolt,
spring washer, and flat washer in tum.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1234
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-432 Installing expansion bolts


4.4.3.2.4 Installing Supports

1. Adjusting the height of supports.

NO TE

The floor height refers to the distance between the upper surface of the ESD floor and
the concrete floor surface.
a. Pre-tighten the six M8x20 assembly screws.
b. Ensure that the height scale on the support indicates the height of the
ESD floor.
c. Use a torque wrench to screw the height-locking bolts in the middle and
then those on both sides to 45 N·m.

Figure 4-433 Adjusting the height of supports.


2. Installing guide rails.
a. Place the guide rails on the support. Align the installation holes of the
guide rail with the holes of the support.
b. Assemble the support with the guide rail by using M12x30 bolts, spring
washers, and flat washers.
c. Adjust the support location and ensure that the diagonal lines of the two
guide rails are equal in length. The deviation should be less than 2 mm.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1235
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

d. Use a combination wrench to screw all bolts.

Figure 4-434 Installing guide rails


3. Leveling and fixing the supports.

NO TE

Fix each rack by using four expansion bolts on the lateral holes. Reserve the medial
holes for spare use.
a. Align the installation holes of the support with the holes on the floor and
install the four expansion bolts.
b. Adjust the support location and check the level of the support by using a
spirit level.
c. If the support is not horizontal, put pads under the support.
d. Screw the four expansion bolts to 45 N·m with a troque spanner.

Figure 4-435 Leveling and fixing the supports


4. Installing the supports in a row.
a. Check the level of the support by using a spirit level. Ensure that the front
sides of all supports are in a line and that the spacing between adjacent
supports is 120 mm.
b. Check if the support is horizontal by using the spirit level.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1236
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

c. If the support is not horizontal, put pads under the support.

Figure 4-436 Installing the supports in a row


4.4.3.2.5 Installing the Cabinet

1. Placing the cabinet.
a. Place the cabinet on the guide rails, and align the installation holes of
the cabinet with the holes of the guide rails.
b. Fit the spring washer, flat washer and insulation tube on the four M12x35
bolts. Insert them into the installation holes and tighten the bolts a bit,
but do not fasten them.
c. Lift one side of the cabinet and insert the insulation plate under the
cabinet. Insert another insulation plate under the other side of the
cabinet. Ensure that the gaps properly lock the expansion bolts.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1237
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-437 Placing the cabinet


2. Leveling and fixing the cabinet.
a. Remove the four adjusting bolts attached on the bottom enclosure frame,
install them on the adjusting nuts.
b. Check whether the cabinet is horizontal or vertical by using a spirit level
and a plumb line respectively.
c. If the cabinet is not horizontal,use a socket wrench to screw the adjusting
bolts at the bottom.
d. Lift one side of the cabinet and insert when the cabinet is horizontal,
screw the four M12x35 bolts to 45 N·m with a torque wrench.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1238
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-438 Leveling and fixing the cabinet


4.4.3.2.6 Testing the Insulation and Installing the Front Pallet

1. Testing the insulation of the cabinet.
a. Set the multimeter to read mega ohms.
b. Measure the resistance between the M12x35 bolt and the ground bolt of
the rack, the measured resistance is more than five mega ohms.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1239
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-439 Testing the insulation of the cabinet


2. Installing the floor support bracket.
Fix the floor support bracket on the support by using the M12x30 assembly
bolts.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1240
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-440 Installing the floor support bracket


4.4.3.2.7 Attaching the Cabinets and Restoring the ESD Floor

1. Installing the connection plates.
a. Remove the connection plates on the lintels of the front and rear doors
and install them again as shown in the figure.

Figure 4-441 Installing the connection plates


b. Use the spirit level and the plumb line to verify that the bottom line of
the cabinet is horizontal and the front line of the column is vertical. If the

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1241
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

cabinet is not horizontal, adjust the adjusting anchor by using a socket
wrench.

Figure 4-442 Leveling the cabinet


NO TE

Both the gap between cabinets and the vertical deviation should be no less than
3 mm.
2. Restoring the ESD floor.

Figure 4-443 Restoring the ESD floor


NO TE

The ESD floor has been removed before you determine the installation position of the
supports. Cut the ESD floor according to the size of the cabinet.
For underfloor cabling, place the cables before you restore the ESD floor.

4.4.3.2.8 Installing Cabinet Doors

1. Installing the cabinet doors.

NO TE

Install the cabinet door after the inside components and cables. To install the
components inside the cabinets and cables, see the Installation Guide.
a. Align the door with the front face of the column.
b. Place the door on the lower lintel and close the door till the lower pin
automatically inserts into the hole in the lower lintel.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1242
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

c. Press the spring pin with your finger and push the upper part of the door
till the spring pin properly inserts in the installation hole at the top of the
lintel.
d. Check the spring pin and lower pins and ensure that the door is properly
installed.
e. Follow the same steps to install the rear door.

Figure 4-444 Installing the cabinet doors


2. Installing the ground cables at the front doors and rear doors as shown in the
figure.

Figure 4-445 Installing the ground cables


4.5 A63E Cabinet Installation Guide

4.5.1 Introduction to the A63E Cabinet

Naming Conventions

Figure 4-446 shows how an A63E cabinet is named.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1243
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-446 Cabinet name


Table 4-102 Naming conventions
Field Description

1 ALPEN series

2 Cabinet width: 600 mm

3 Cabinet depth: 300 mm (excluding the convex door)

4 Enhanced performance model


Appearance
Figure 4-447 shows the A63E cabinet appearance.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1244
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-447 Cabinet appearance


Physical Structure
Figure 4-448 shows components of the A63E cabinet.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1245
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-448 Cabinet components


1. Front cabinet door 2. Top cover 3. Rear cabinet door

4. Side door 5. Rack -


Functions
The cabinet is made of high-intensity class A carbon cold-rolled steel plates and
galvanized sheets, complying with the restriction of the use of certain hazardous
substances (RoHS) directive. In addition, the fireproof performance of internal

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1246
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

materials complies with the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standard. The main
functions of the cabinet are as follows:
● Supports overhead/underground cabling.
● Provides a space for placing internal components in a centralized and
connected manner.
● Protects components against contamination.
● Prevents damage to components.

Heat Dissipation
The front and rear doors of the cabinet are of mesh construction. Air enters the
chassis from the front door and base and is exhausted through the rear door, as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-449 Airflow in the cabinet




Technical Specifications

Table 4-103 A63E canbinet technical specifications

Item Specification

Part Number 02115986

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1247
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Specification

Dimensions without 2200 mm x 600 mm x 300 mm (86.61 in. x 23.62 in. x
packaging (H x W x 11.81 in.)
D)[mm(in.)]

Dimensions with 2320 mm x 720 mm x 590 mm (91.34 in. x 28.35 in. x
packaging (H x W x 23.23 in.)
D)[mm(in.)]

Weight without 53 kg(116.87 lb)
packaging[kg(lb)]

Weight with 110 kg(242.55 lb)
packaging[kg(lb)]

Standard ETSI
compliance

Distance between 515 mm
mounting bar holes

Available space 42 U

Installation scenario indoor

Installation mode Installed on an ESD floor or a concrete floor


4.5.2 Cabinet Accessories

4.5.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand

Appearance
The cabinet stand is pictured in Figure 4-450.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1248
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-450 Cabinet stand




Functions
The stand elevates and supports the cabinet.

Technical Specifications
Table 4-104 lists technical specifications of the cabinet stand.

Table 4-104 Technical specifications of the cabinet stand
Stand Type Applicable ESD Floor Wi Applicable Chassis
Height (mm) dth Depth (mm)
(m
m)

Stand I 200–270 600 1000, 1100, and 1200

Stand II 270–410

Stand III 410–700



NO TE

The ESD floor height is the distance between the upper surface of the ESD floor and the
surface of the concrete floor.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1249
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.5.3 Cabinet Installation

By default, four pairs of guide rails are installed for a cabinet. They occupy cabinet
space, which may affect chassis installation. Before installing a chassis, determine
whether to uninstall the guide rails as needed.

4.5.3.1 Installing the Cabinet on the Cement Floor

4.5.3.1.1 Installation Tools

Figure 4-451 lists the tools used for installing a cabinet.

Figure 4-451 Installation tools


4.5.3.1.2 Pre-installation Check

Precautions

Take the following precautions before the installation:
● Be careful not to damage components and cables in the cabinet during
transportation.
● If the cabinet surface is scratched, paint the scratched area with the same
painting as the other part to protect the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1250
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Conduct a comprehensive inspection on the cabinet before the installation. If
you find the cabinet distorted or its surfaces damaged, contact technical
support personnel immediately.
● Follow the installation instructions provided in this document and make
adjustments according to actual situations in your installation site.

Procedure
1. Unpack and inspect the cabinet and accessories. The accessories include the
expansion bolts used to secure the cabinet to the floor.
2. Inspect the space inside and around the cabinet.
– Enough space must be reserved at the lower part of the cabinet for
installing expansion bolts.
– There must be enough space around the cabinet installation area for
operation and ventilation.

4.5.3.1.3 Determining the Installation Position of the Cabinet

Positioning the cabinet
1. Attach the vertical analyzer to the cabling rack that is vertical to the front of
the cabinet. Use the marker pen to mark the point of the plumb on the
ground, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-452.
2. Follow the same procedure to mark the second point, and draw the baseline
by using the powder marker, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-452.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1251
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-452 Positioning the cabinet


NO TE

The method for positioning the cabinet described in this document is only for
reference. Follow the engineering drawing to position the cabinet in the actual
installation.

Determining installation holes for the cabinet
Figure 4-453 shows the installation holes for the cabinet.

Figure 4-453 Installation holes for the cabinet


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1252
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Confirming the position of the drill holes
1. Lay out the templates side by side and ensure that there is 600 mm between
the center lines of two adjacent templates, as shown in callout 1 of Figure
4-454.
2. Use a marker pen to mark installation holes on the cement floor, as shown in
callout 2 of Figure 4-454.

Figure 4-454 Confirming the position of the drill holes


CA UTION

● Position the template so that the semicircular gap indicates the front of
the cabinet.
● After marking the reference lines, check the hole positions with a ruler.
● Without the templates determine positions of the cabinets based on the
construction engineering drawings and the installation holes.

4.5.3.1.4 Installing Expansion Bolts
1. Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise until the guide rib is fixed on the guide
trough, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-455.
2. Put the expansion bolt vertically into the hole. Use a claw hammer to strike
the expansion tube into the hole completely, as shown in callout 2 of Figure
4-455.
3. Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise until the nut is firmly inserted into the
expansion tube, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-455.
4. Turn the expansion bolt counterclockwise and remove the expansion bolt,
spring washer, and flat washer in turn, as shown in callout 4 of Figure 4-455.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1253
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-455 Installing expansion bolts


4.5.3.1.5 Installation Preparations

NO TE

Before removing cabinet doors, remove the marking-off template and concrete mounting
kits.

Removing the Front Door
1. Remove the ground cable (as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-456) at the front
door, leaving one end of the ground cable attached to the rack.
2. Pull down the spring pin at the upper part of the door, as shown in callout 2
of Figure 4-456.
3. Remove the front door, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-456.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1254
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-456 Removing the front door


CA UTION

Remove and place the cabinet doors on the floor and keep them unlocked,
otherwise,the snap because of the weight of the doors.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1255
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Placing the Cabinet
1. Place the cabinet on the specified position and align the installation holes of
the cabinet with the holes on the floor, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-457.
2. Put two insulation plates under each cabinet. Align the holes of the insulation
plate with the holes on the floor, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-457.
3. Place the spring washers, flat washers, and insulating tubes onto four
expansion bolts. Then insert the expansion tubes and partially tighten the
expansion nuts, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-457.

Figure 4-457 Placing the cabinet


4.5.3.1.6 Leveling the Cabinet and Testing the Insulation

Leveling and Fastening the Cabinet
1. Remove the four adjusting bolts attached on the bottom enclosure frame,
install them on the adjusting nuts, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-458.
2. Check whether the cabinet is horizontal or vertical by using a spirit level and
a vertical analyzer respectively, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-458.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1256
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

3. If the cabinet is not horizontal, adjust the adjusting bolts by using a socket
wrench, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-458.
4. When the cabinet is horizontal, fasten the four expansion bolts to 45 N·m, as
shown in callout 4 of Figure 4-458.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1257
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-458 Leveling and fastening the cabinet


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1258
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

The adjustment range of adjusting anchor is from 0 mm to 10 mm.
The total length of the socket and the connecting bar should be less than 90 mm.

Testing the Insulation of the Cabinet
1. Set the multimeter to read mega ohms, as shown in callout 1 of Figure
4-459.
2. Measure the resistance between the M12×40 expansion bolt and the
grounding bolt of the rack, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-459.

Figure 4-459 Testing the insulation of the cabinet


CA UTION

If the measured resistance is less than five mega ohms, remove all
components, and check whether any insulation part is damaged or not
installed. Ensure that all the insulation parts are properly installed. Fix the
cabinet and measure the resistance again.

4.5.3.1.7 Attaching the Cabinets
1. Remove the connection plates from the right upside of the cabinet top and
install them again, as shown in the callout 1 of Figure 4-460.
2. Remove the connection plates from the left of the cabinet top and install
them again, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-460.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1259
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

3. Use the spirit level and the vertical analyzer to check and ensure that the
bottom line of the cabinet is horizontal and the front line of the column is
vertical. If the cabinet is not horizontal, adjust the adjusting anchor by using a
socket wrench, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-460.

Figure 4-460 Attaching the cabinets


NO TE

Both the gap between cabinets and the vertical deviation should be less than 3 mm.

4.5.3.1.8 Installing Cabinet Doors

Installing the front doors
1. Align the door with the front face of the column, as shown in callout 1 of
Figure 4-461.
2. Place the door on the lower lintel and close the door till the lower pin
automatically inserts into the hole in the lower lintel, as shown in callout 2 of
Figure 4-461.
3. Press the spring pin with your finger and push the upper part of the door till
the spring pin properly inserts in the installation hole at the top of the lintel.
4. Check the spring pin and lower pins and ensure that the door is properly
installed.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1260
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-461 Installing the front doors


Installing the ground cables
Install the ground cable at the front door, as shown in Figure 4-462.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1261
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-462 Installing the ground cables


4.5.3.2 Installing the Cabinet on the ESD Floor

4.5.3.2.1 Installation Tools
Figure 4-463 lists the tools used for installing a cabinet.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1262
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-463 Installation tools


4.5.3.2.2 Pre-installation Check

Precautions
Take the following precautions before the installation:
● Be careful not to damage components and cables in the cabinet during
transportation.
● If the cabinet surface is scratched, paint the scratched area with the same
painting as the other part to protect the cabinet.
● Conduct a comprehensive inspection on the cabinet before the installation. If
you find the cabinet distorted or its surfaces damaged, contact technical
support personnel immediately.
● Follow the installation instructions provided in this document and make
adjustments according to actual situations in your installation site.

Procedure
1. Unpack and inspect the cabinet and accessories. The accessories include the
expansion bolts used to secure the cabinet to the floor.
2. Inspect the space inside and around the cabinet.
– Enough space must be reserved at the lower part of the cabinet for
installing expansion bolts.
– There must be enough space around the cabinet installation area for
operation and ventilation.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1263
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.5.3.2.3 Determining the Installation Position of the Supports

Installation holes for the support
Figure 4-464 shows the installation holes for the support.

Figure 4-464 Installation holes for the support


Confirming the position of the drill holes
1. Lay out the templates side by side and ensure that there is 600 mm between
the center lines of two adjacent templates.
2. Use a marker pen to mark installation holes on the cement floor.

Figure 4-465 Confirming the position of the drill holes


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1264
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NO TE

● Position the template so that the semicircular gap indicates the front of the
cabinet.
● After marking the reference lines, check the hole positions with a ruler.
● Without the templates determine positions of the cabinets based on the
construction engineering drawings and the installation holes.

4.5.3.2.4 Installing Expansion Bolts

1. Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise until the guide rib is fixed on the guide
trough, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-466.
2. Put the expansion bolt vertically into the hole. Use a claw hammer to strike
the expansion tube into the hole completely, as shown in callout 2 of Figure
4-466.
3. Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise until the nut is firmly inserted into the
expansion tube, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-466.
4. Turn the expansion bolt counterclockwise and remove the expansion bolt,
spring washer, and flat washer in turn, as shown in callout 4 of Figure 4-466.

Figure 4-466 Installing expansion bolts


4.5.3.2.5 Installing Supports

Adjusting the height of supports
1. Use a ruler to measure the distance between the concrete floor and the upper
surface of the ESD floor, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-467.
2. Adjust the height of the support based on the measurement result, as shown
in callout 2 of Figure 4-467.
3. Partially tighten the height locking bolts on both sides, as shown in callout 3
of Figure 4-467.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1265
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-467 Adjusting the height of supports


Assembling the support
1. Assemble the support by using eight M8×20 screw assemblies and ensure that
the protruding side of the guide rail faces outwards. Then tighten all screw
assemblies using a torque socket to a torque of 13N·m.
As shown in callout 1 of Figure Assembling the support.
2. Use a level to check the levelness of the support, as shown in callout 2 of
Figure Assembling the support.
3. If the support is not horizontal, loosen the bolt and slightly adjust the support
till it is level, as shown in callout 3 of Figure Assembling the support.
4. Use a torque socket to secure all the bolts that are used to fix the height to
45N·m, as shown in callout 4 of Figure Assembling the support.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1266
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-468 Assembling the support


Leveling and fixing the supports
1. Align the four mounting holes of the support with the four expansion bolt
holes on the floor and secure four expansion bolts, as shown in callout 1 of
Figure 4-469.
2. Adjust the position of the support and use a level to measure the levelness of
the support, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-469.
3. If the support is not level, place shims under the support, as shown in callout
3 of Figure 4-469.
4. Use a torque socket to fasten the four expansion bolt to 45N·m, as shown in
callout 4 of Figure 4-469.
5. Assemble the combining parts to support by using two M8×20 screw
assemblies tighten to a torque of 13N·m, as shown in callout 5 of Figure
4-469.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1267
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-469 Leveling and fixing the supports


Installing the supports in a row
1. Install support combining parts and ensure that the centers of adjacent
combining parts are 600 mm away from each other, as shown in callout 1 of
Figure 4-470.
2. Ensure that all supports are in the same line, as shown in callout 2 of Figure
4-470.
3. Check the support levelness by using a level, as shown in callout 3 of Figure
4-470.
4. If the support is not level, place spacers under the support, as shown in
callout 4 of Figure 4-470.
5. Tighten all expansion bolts using a torque socket to a torque of 45N·m, as
shown in callout 5 of Figure 4-470.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1268
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-470 Installing the supports in a row


4.5.3.2.6 Installing Preparations

NO TE

Before removing cabinet doors, remove the marking-off template and concrete mounting
kits.

Removing the front door
1. Remove the ground cable (as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-471) at the front
door, leaving one end of the ground cable attached to the rack.
2. Pull down the spring pin at the upper part of the door, as shown in callout 2
of Figure 4-471.
3. Remove the front door, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-471.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1269
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-471 Removing the front door


Placing the cabinet
1. Place the cabinet on the specified position and align the installation holes of
the cabinet with the holes on the floor, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-472.
2. Put two insulation plates under each cabinet. Align the holes of the insulation
plate with the holes on the floor, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-472.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1270
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

3. Fit the spring washer, flat washer, and insulation tube on the four expansion
bolts. Insert them into the holes and tighten the bolts a bie, but do not fasten
them, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-472.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1271
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-472 Placing the cabinet


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1272
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.5.3.2.7 Leveling the Cabinet and Testing the Insulation

Leveling and fastening the cabinet
1. Remove the four adjusting bolts attached on the bottom enclosure frame,
install them on the adjusting nuts, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-473.
2. Check whether the cabinet is horizontal or vertical by using a spirit level and
a vertical analyzer respectively, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-473.
3. If the cabinet is not horizontal, adjust the adjusting bolts by using a socket
wrench, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-473.
4. When the cabinet is horizontal, fasten the four expansion bolts to 45 N·m, as
shown in callout 4 of Figure 4-473.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1273
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-473 Leveling the cabinet


NO TE

The adjustment range of adjusting bolts is from 0 mm to 10 mm.
The total length of the socket and the connecting bar should be less than 90 mm.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1274
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Testing the insulation of the cabinet
1. Set the multimeter to read mega ohms, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-474
2. Measure the resistance between the expansion bolt and the grounding bolt of
the rack, as shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-474.

Figure 4-474 Testing the insulation of the cabinet


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1275
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CA UTION

If the measured resistance is less than five mega ohms, remove all
components, and check whether any insulation part is damaged or not
installed. Ensure that all the insulation parts are properly installed. Fix the
cabinet and measure the resistance again.

4.5.3.2.8 Attaching the Cabinets
1. Remove the connection plates from the right upside of the cabinet top and
install them again, as shown in callout 1 of Figure 4-475.
2. Remove the connection plates from the lintel and install them again, as
shown in callout 2 of Figure 4-475.
3. Use the spirit level and the vertical analyzer respectively to check and ensure
that the bottom line of the cabinet is horizontal and the front line of the
column is vertical. If the cabinet is not horizontal, adjust the adjusting anchor
by using a socket wrench, as shown in callout 3 of Figure 4-475.

Figure 4-475 Attaching the cabinets


NO TE

Both the gap between cabinets and the vertical deviation should be less than 3 mm.

4.5.3.2.9 Restoring the ESD Floor

Installing Pallets for the ESD Floor
Fix two front pallets on the support by using the M12×25 bolts, as shown in
Figure Installing pallets for the ESD floor.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1276
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-476 Installing pallets for the ESD floor


NO TE

● When cabinets are installed in back-to-back mode, you do not need to install the pallets
at the rear of the cabinets.
● The upper surface of the pallet needs to be parallel with the lower surface of the ESD
floor.


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1277
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Restoring the ESD Floor

Figure 4-477 Restoring the ESD floor


NO TE

● The ESD floor has been removed before you determine the installation position of the
supports.
● For underfloor cabling, place the cables before you restore the ESD floor.

4.5.3.2.10 Installing Cabinet Doors

Installing the Front Doors
1. Align the door with the front face of the column, as shown in callout 1 of
Figure 4-478.
2. Place the door on the lower lintel and close the door till the lower pin
automatically inserts into the hole in the lower lintel, as shown in callout 2 of
Figure 4-478.
3. Press the spring pin with your finger and push the upper part of the door till
the spring pin properly inserts in the installation hole at the top of the lintel.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1278
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4. Check the spring pin and lower pins and ensure that the door is properly
installed.

Figure 4-478 Installing the front doors


Installing the ground cables
Install the ground cable at the front door, as shown in Figure 4-479.

Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1279
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 M6, M1D, M1C and M1A
Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-479 Installing the ground cables


Issue 04 (2025-04-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1280